JP2018191819A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed . Furthermore, there is a notification that the gaming state that facilitates the lottery after the execution of the privilege game is set .

JP2012-217766A

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means. 1 display means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First dynamic display period determining means for determining, second determining means capable of executing the second determination, and second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determining means. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a second dynamic display means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the dynamic display period determination means and the first display means, the first privilege game is executed and the second display means is displayed. A privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is displayed, and the second judgment is performed more than the first judgment. A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that facilitates execution and a second game state that facilitates execution of the first determination rather than the second determination, and the game state setting means for the first When the game state is set, the notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set is determined based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. And a notification timing determining means .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a first motion for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Display period determination means, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and second display thereof. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on means, and second dynamic display period determination for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. Means and the first display means displays the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result, the first privilege game is executed, and the second determination specific to the second display means A privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a result is displayed, and the second judgment is more easily executed than the first judgment. A game state setting means capable of setting one game state and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily executed than the second determination, and the first game state is set by the game state setting means. And a notification timing determining means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state is set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. , With .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of the end of a big hit game in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents during a probability change in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is non-fluctuation after the variation start of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol is a small hit during RUSH in the form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the variation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stops changing during the hit change of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is RUSH in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the state where the result of the variable display of the 1st special symbol was big hit C, or big hit D inside. (A) is the figure which showed the card forgetting caution screen in 1st Embodiment, (b)-(d) is the timing chart which showed the timing which displays the card forgetting caution screen in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd random number table typically. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of a big hit classification selection table, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the contents of a small hit classification selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving/probability change table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the latent confirmation table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of a stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of an additional production selection table. It is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation restart process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figures 1 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart showing various counter update processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a rush rush command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the jackpot C in the probability variation state in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability variation state in the second embodiment is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is changing when the winning symbol of the first special symbol in the second embodiment is stopped, and (b) is the second embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stopped while the hit symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot type selection 2 table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 2 table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the detachment type selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving/probability change 2 table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fixed period setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fixed time performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol motion stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fixed period setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the design decision related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability variation state is set in the third embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the jackpot end in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 1st fluctuation after the jackpot. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 3rd variation after the big hit in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the 4th variation after the big hit. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd variation after the big hit when the 3rd variation after the big hit is a big hit in 3rd Embodiment, and (b) is between 1st variation after the big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the second variation after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the small hit random number 3 table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the big hit classification selection 3 table typically, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the small hit type selection 3 table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation A table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation C table, and (c) is a probability variation D table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 3 tables for latent accuracy. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation production selection table typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation|variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end time process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting process for probability changes performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability changing state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow when the time is shortened during the probability changing state. It is the timing chart shown. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of RUSH rush due to reaching the number of shortening times in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a RUSH during the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content notified. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning the falling lottery in the latent state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a special figure in the latent state in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a display screen when a big hit is won in 2. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in Super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the counter etc. which are provided in RAM203 of the main controller 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the falling lottery table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the latent probability mode selection table typically, (c) is the falling It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the notification selection table typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the latent accuracy mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall production setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall notification process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of a small winning variable winning device. It is an operation view of the variable winning device for small hits as viewed from the back side. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the probability change state in 5th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of shortening the time during the probability change state in the fifth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of a small hit in a 5th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents during a small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) shows a falling gate during a small hit game. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when not passing. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of small hit end, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents in a latent state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 5 table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the operation scenario storage area typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sphere passage related process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of a big hit state flag, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the contents of a small hit state flag typically. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows change condition discriminating processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors article opening/closing process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending execution process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit termination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded the channel unit in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a top view which showed typically a sphere flow in the case where the electric accessory in 7th Embodiment is a closed state (embedded state), (b) is an electric accessory closed state (embedded state). FIG. 3 is a perspective view schematically showing a sphere flow in the case of (1). (A) is the top view which showed typically the sphere flow in the case where the electric accessory in 7th Embodiment is an open state (projection state), (b) is an electric auditors object open state (projection state). FIG. 3 is a perspective view schematically showing a sphere flow in the case of (1). (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents at the time of the 2nd symbol hitting in a time saving state in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is a 2nd entrance in a time saving state in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when a sphere enters. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is out of the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a sphere is flowing down a delay passage during fluctuation of the special figure 2 in FIG. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball is flowing down a normal passage during a change in the special figure 2 in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of passing V during the small hit game in the form. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display content when V has not passed during a small hitting game in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a time saving state A is set. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment, (b) shows the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c) [Fig. 3] is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the 1st hit type selection table, (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table typically, (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 7 table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern 7 table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st time saving fluctuation pattern table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd time saving fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening scenario 7 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transfer of the game state of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of passing small hit V in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the delay passage state flag. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors article opening/closing process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting start processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 7th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the time saving effect related processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the end time processing per universal figure performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ball passing monitoring process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 13A is a plan view schematically showing a case where an opening/closing door 3650f included in a second attacker 3650 according to the eighth embodiment is in an open state, and FIG. 9B is a second attacker 3650 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a plan view schematically showing a case where an open/close door 3650f included in is in a closed state. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the ball to the 2nd attacker. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 8th Embodiment, It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a ball during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of entering into the 2nd entrance. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of an ending screen of a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the special figure 2 game screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when a special figure 2 small hit is won in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a big hit H in special figure 2 in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the contents of a display when it is elected. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents during special figure 2 game during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the final special figure variation end during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of transfer of the game state of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of the 1st random number 8 table in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st per type selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the operation scenario 8 table in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed the content of each scenario classification in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 2nd random number 8 table in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 8 tables for normal and latent accuracy in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the 8 table for time saving and probability variation in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp controller in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp controller in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading process performed by MPU in the main controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the normal design fluctuation processing 8 which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 8th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number related process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of reduction performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control process 8 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving termination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process 9 performed by MPU in the main controller in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 10th embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the stop screen of the jackpot pattern in 10th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the display content in the symbol determination period in the jackpot C in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd random number 10 table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot type selection 10 table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a specific winning action pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific entrance processing which is performed by MPU in the main controller in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 10th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect contents in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the high probability second hitting random number 11 table 202ja in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a low probability second hitting random number table 202ja in the modified example of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the universal figure production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of a 7th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when special figure 2 small hit is won in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) in the latent state in the eleventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning out of special figure 2 defeat. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the jackpot content suggestion production in 11th Embodiment, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the production result of the jackpot content suggestion production in 11th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the suggestion mode selection table in 11th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the suggestion production selection table in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows suggestive effect setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 11 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal production execution management process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 87, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (game ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illuminated portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, that is, a cash machine, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The mouth 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the outlet 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot visually see various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A, 37A, which includes a plurality of LEDs that are light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 is provided on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Be seen. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B), whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not the player has entered the second entrance 640. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first entrance 64b1 and a lower first entrance 64b2 are provided as a trigger for drawing the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are shown, the term of the first ball entrance 64 will be simply used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state, or the lighting state whether or not it is changing. By showing, by the lighting state, whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or a deviating symbol, or a small hit symbol, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the lighting state The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds that have been hit and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the player has entered a ball in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots to be determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 2R certainty variation jackpots, 15R hour short jackpots, and 2R hour shorter jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a probability variation state that is a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot of 15 rounds and a high probability state of ordinary symbols (setting). Yes, the "2R certainty variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots. In addition, "15R short-time jackpot" is a low-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and a short-time state that is a high probability state of a normal symbol, for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) It is a jackpot to be set, and the "2R hour-short jackpot" is a jackpot in which the hour-shortening state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after the maximum round number of two rounds of jackpots. ..

Further, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. The "high probability state of the ordinary symbol" is a state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened.

In addition, the game state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of the normal symbol" is set, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, but also the lower first entrance 64b2. As the time for which the electric accessory 64a associated with is released, a long time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent probability state, normal state) in which the "normal symbol low probability state" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the opened state (opened state), the ball is moved to the lower first ball inlet 64b2 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 64a is closed (closed state). It becomes easy to win the prize. Therefore, during the probability change state or the time saving state, it becomes easier for the ball to win the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

Note that, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first lower entrance 64b2 is not changed, or once in addition to changing the opening time. A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened due to a hit, compared with that in the normal state. Further, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory at the time when the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened and once per hit At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first ball inlet 64b2 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per hit is not changed, Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the entry (starting prize) of the ball into either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. While synchronizing with the variable display, a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol), and a ball to the through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays a regular symbol (second symbol) with passage as a trigger.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12 ), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the first symbol display device is displayed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the dynamic of the third symbol. By configuring the display mode to notify the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by changing the blinking display mode in which the light is turned on and off in units of 0.1 seconds), the movement of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. By dynamically setting the dynamic display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode capable of suggesting to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (No. It is possible to display an effect mode using three symbols) on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as a regular symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if the result is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is attached. It is configured to be in an operating state (operating to an open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter in the high-probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent probability state) of the normal symbol as the game state. Is set. Thereby, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the probability changing state and the time saving state, it is possible to set a game state in which the ball is likely to win the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probability variation state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode to be displayed in, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment that makes the player guess the current game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same as the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode is set. Therefore, when the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily ascertaining what the current game state is based on the operating state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

It should be noted that, in the probability changing state or the time saving state, by increasing the hit probability, by increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric auditors object 64a per hit, other methods such as lowering during the probability changing state or the time saving state. When it is in a state where the ball easily enters the 1 ball entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter than the normal state during the probability variation state or the time saving state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the spheres flowing down the game board can pass through among the spheres fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of a normal symbol), a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, and a high probability state of a normal symbol), a time saving state (special Low probability state of the symbol, and high probability state of the normal symbol) and latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol, and normal state of the normal symbol) four game states are provided. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent probability state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol that tends to be a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. By prescribing it so that it is shorter than in the case of being played, the lottery advantageous to the player can be most efficiently executed.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, so in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable in a part of the miss The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds×1 time, 0.2 seconds×6 times, or 0.06 seconds×8 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, there are many opportunities to enter the ball into the first specific winning port 65a and obtain the prize ball. It is more advantageous than the lottery. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, the result of the lottery for which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as "small hit".

In the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is configured to be opened even in the case of a small hit, in the latent state where the variation time of the second special symbol is short, the prize ball Can continue to increase. Therefore, a game can be played in the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, so that novel game play can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called, simultaneous). The variable method is adopted). As a result, even when the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, when one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or a small hit stop symbol, the other fluctuation display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped and displayed with a stop pattern that is off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variable display is confirmed and displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit and the small hit are started in duplicate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the spheres fired toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the game area into a left side area and a right side area by the variable display device unit 80 arranged in the center of the game area. ..

In the present embodiment, the fired ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (the state where the player is not rotating). A sphere is fired with a firing strength of the order of magnitude. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows backward through the firing flow path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backward and flows down passes through the start position of the launch flow path (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) is flowed down, and is refluxed to the upper plate 17. With such a configuration, even if a foul ball occurs when the player operates the operation handle 51 in order to shoot the ball with a desired firing strength, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the trouble.

Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotating), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that allows it to flow down the above-mentioned left side region. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operation handle 51), the sphere is fired with a firing intensity that allows it to flow down the right side region described above.

That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the region in which the ball flows down can be changed based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the first embodiment, when the game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left side area. Rather than a game performed by adjusting (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side region (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed. Is configured as follows. With this configuration, the player may maintain the state where the operation handle 51 is rotated to the upper limit (rotated by 120 degrees) while the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability state) as a game state, a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state), a probability variation state (Special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state), latent probability state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) is configured to be set. Also, the jackpot gaming state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the small jackpot gaming state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, so that It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform the left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left side area of the game board 13. Using the display screen of the provided third symbol display device 81, the player is informed of the game method, and when the latent probability state is set, a right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left area of the game board 13. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player how to play the game. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is configured to guide the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game state before winning the hit.

As a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, the game method suitable for the current game state is configured to be constantly displayed, or only after the game method is switched. The game method may be displayed. Further, of the left-handed game and the right-handed game, when the game method (the left-handed game in the present embodiment) that is easily set for a long period is set as the normal game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed. It may be configured such that the game method is always displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guide display is not displayed when the left-handed game is performed.

When there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player as in the present embodiment, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not to display one display mode. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the game method to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying a specific display mode, the player may be informed of the game method, or the player may be informed by using a voice or a lamp.

In the left side area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged. An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided below the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball that has flowed down the left side area can enter. A lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided with an electric accessory 64a is provided below the upper first ball inlet 64b1. This electric accessory 64a, when the ball is won in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first ball inlet 64b2. It is configured to variably move from a closed state (first state) in which the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) in which the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the fluctuation of special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed) When the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the ball is not played), the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is executed. That is, the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is a trigger for executing the lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which a new lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a variation in special figure 1 has already been executed, or a big jackpot game or a small jackpot game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2, a storage means is provided for storing the right of the ball to enter a predetermined number (four) as an upper limit. ing.

Therefore, while the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is being executed, the player can continue to play the game, and thus the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the storage unit and the first special symbol for storing the right that the ball enters.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the balls that have been launched (8 balls per 100 balls) enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a structure such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so as to be spherical. When the electric accessory 64a is closed, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first entrance 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is open, the lower first entrance 64b2 The sphere flow path is formed so that the spheres entering 64b2 are about 25%. That is, it is difficult for the balls to enter in the order of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electrical accessory 64a open state), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electrical accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be.

As described above, the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are configured to give the player the benefit of paying out the prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery for the first special symbol. Each time one ball is entered, four prize balls are paid out to the player. In addition, in the present embodiment, the same number (4) of prize balls is provided regardless of whether a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or a lower first entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entry slot 640 is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the entry of a ball, and a plurality of balls are provided so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right side area enter. A ball passage is formed by the nail. Here, the balls that have not entered the second ball entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side region.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is long as the time (variation time) from when the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed until the lottery result is displayed. A variation time of time (10 minutes) is set, and a short variation time (1 second) is set when the latent state is set.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, rather than entering the ball into the first entrance 64 to execute the left-handed game and the lottery of the first special symbol, the right-handed game Performing the second special symbol lottery is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 to execute the lottery, but since the variable time of a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is improved. It gets very bad. Therefore, the player will perform a left-handed game in the normal state and execute the lottery for the first special symbol.

Also, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, and the ball shot by the right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball is inserted into the second ball inlet 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Furthermore, when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the game state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which is a trigger for the lottery of the ordinary symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side area, the lower first entrance 64b2 where the ball is easier to enter than in the normal state. The player is allowed to play a left-handed game in order to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the state in which the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the variable time of (1 second) is set, it becomes an appropriate game to perform the right hitting game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win the small hit (winning probability about 1/2). When a small hit is won, the first variable winning device 65 is opened as a small hit game for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and 10 balls are paid for each ball entered in the first variable winning device 65. The prize balls are individually provided.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, by continuously executing the right-handed game to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol aiming to win the small hit, and the small hit game, Can be performed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the bottom of the game area. This second variable winning device 650, when the jackpot is won by lottery of the special symbol, the swinging door 650f operates toward the front side, and the opening operation is performed so that the ball can be won in the second specific winning port 650a. It is what is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the left side area by a left-handed game and a ball that has flowed down the right side area by a right-handed game can be evenly entered. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the game method for the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a ball enters the above-described first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 ) Is turned on, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) makes a big hit lottery due to the turning on of the first entrance opening switch, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Be done.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which results from the turning on of the second entrance switch. In the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12), a big hit lottery is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize hole in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, and the second ball entrance 640 becomes one ball when the ball enters. It is one of the winning holes paid out as a prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The same number (both four) and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 (1), but the ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out in this case may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls in the upper first entrance 64b1 is set to 4 and the number of prize balls in the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which the balls are difficult to enter is set. In the case of being in the upper first ball entrance 64b1, the privilege for the ball to enter is increased, and in the case where a specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set, the ball easily enters the ball. The player may not be allowed to excessively win the prize balls even if the balls frequently enter the first entrance port 64b2, or the upper first entrance port 64b1 has four prize balls and the lower first The number of prize balls of the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to five, and when a specific game state (probably changed state, time saving state) is set, a great privilege may be given to the player.

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, 5 Individual).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state) so that a ball is difficult to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (lottery of the ordinary symbol) performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state), and the ball is in a state of easily entering the lower first ball inlet 64b2.

As described above, during the probability change state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, the variable display of the second symbol is also displayed. In, the symbol "○" is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) increases. Further, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is longer than that during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2 more easily than in the normal state.

As described above, the lower first ball inlet 64b2, that is, the ball inlet associated with the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which the ball easily enters in accordance with the set game state, It is possible to set a state in which the ball is difficult to enter (second state). That is, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantage game state that is disadvantageous to the player (disadvantageous than the first state). Becomes

Here, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (lottery for the second special symbol) , And the probability of being a big jackpot is the same, and if a low probability state of a special symbol is set, a lottery that will be a jackpot with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) is executed. If a high probability state of a special symbol is set, a lottery that is a big hit with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to hit than a low probability state is executed. However, the type of jackpot that is selected (set) when it becomes a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment gives the player a way to shoot a ball (game method) according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine, "left hit (left hit game)" and "right hit". Strike (right-handed game)" can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls flowing down through the game area that have not been won (balls) in any of the winning openings (ball openings) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a are shown through the outlet 66. Not guided to the ball discharge path. The outlet 66 is arranged below the lower first inlet 64b2. In addition, in the first embodiment, the game area has one outlet 66, but other configurations may be used, and two or more outlets 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of outlets 66 in this manner, it is necessary to form a ball passage for finally concentrating the balls fired in the game area at one location (the location where the outlet 66 is provided). Since it disappears, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various devices that form the game area. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an outlet for exclusive use of a sphere that flows down in the left side region and an outlet for exclusive use of a sphere that flows down in the right side region. Further, in the case of providing a plurality of outlets, it is preferable to provide a notifying means for notifying the player that the inlet is the outlet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given to the player even though the ball has entered the entrance (actually the exit) provided in the game area, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third design (decorative design dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first design) is composed of nine types of main designs with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number "1" is attached to a rear design imitating an elephant, and a number "2" is attached to a rear design imitating a lion. In this way, by making the third symbol the display mode in which the rear symbol and the numbers are associated with each other, the display mode of the rear symbol is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbol ( Color, outline, size, etc.) allows the type of the third symbol to be roughly grasped, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol is surely identified by identifying the number attached to the rear symbol. Can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. With this configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol, for example, by setting to be changed regularly according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the set gaming state, as a third symbol It is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the numbers) that is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment that makes the prediction.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display ends. The jackpot is configured to occur later. On the other hand, in the case where the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit as a lottery result of the special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). Will be stopped and displayed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed is made different according to the lottery result of the special symbol so that the player can easily understand the lottery result, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit and when it is a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 of the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, L3 of upper, middle and lower are displayed. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the symbol columns L1 to L3 are cyclically scrolled in the left and right direction (usually from right to left direction) to be variably displayed. Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as valid lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line to the right and a diagonal line to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is aligned on the activated lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a holding ball, after a stop display for 1 second (fixed display), a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the holding ball. Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second (confirmed display), the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped (confirmed), a demonstration effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. ..

It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times, and the reserved number of balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. The number of holding symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of holding balls whose variable display is currently held. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not held and stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 4A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and a dynamic display of the third symbol (variable display) is performed in the main display area Dm. 4 (a) is executed in all the game states, though the effect (variation effect) including is executed and the notice effect, the character and the number of reserved balls are displayed in the sub display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area indicated by, for example, when the player pays attention to the effect for suggesting whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds It is also possible to perform a powerful effect by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the pending symbols and the game guidance for explaining the game contents in the future are emphasized in the sub display area Ds and executed, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced to The display area of the display area Ds may be enlarged to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm or an area for executing a notice effect may be formed in accordance with a set game state or an effect mode being executed, or a sub effect. An area for executing the variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4B, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three main symbols and a part of the sub symbols are displayed three by three. These show the lottery result of the first special symbol in the normal state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper central portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, variable display of three third symbols in a simple mode configured by only the numbers of "1" to "9" is executed. Even in the small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. The third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler mode compared to the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is basically in the normal state or the probability change state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed and the second special symbol lottery has almost no chance to be executed.

Therefore, the game result is displayed more clearly by adopting a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is displayed in a larger display area. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds) is referred to as the main variation, and in each gaming state. The variation display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called a sub-variation.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a state where the probability variation state is set, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a long period (up to 10 minutes) of The variation display (dynamic display) is executed, and at the timing when the variation display is started, the game state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variable display that is a big hit to the end of the variable display and the start of the big hit game), the lottery for the second special symbol is performed. It is configured to execute a game aiming for a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is the main variation, and the variable display of the first special symbol is the sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserve symbols as the bird's face is displayed as the number of reserve balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the holding balls corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. In addition, in the small area Ds1, the notice design is sometimes performed such that the reserved symbol sometimes performs a special action or another character appears.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times are reserved. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, it may be configured such that the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be held. Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart that schematically shows the contents of the variation display effect executed corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation situation of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. ), and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

And in the state where the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of ordinary symbols Is shifted to a low probability state, and the gaming state is configured to shift from the probability changing state to the latent probability state. While this latent probability state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be short, so that a lot of second special symbol lottery can be executed. It is a possible period (Special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the game state, the small hit The small hit game that is executed when the player wins is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous for the player who can obtain many prize balls (special state 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variation advantageous period) is during the variation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the probability variation state. Since it is (special map 1 jackpot fluctuation), when the special map 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) are continuously set, various benefits can be continuously given to the player. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, one special symbol (special figure 2) wins the small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is suspended (variation display period). The measurement is suspended), and when the small hit game is finished, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is restarted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and thus regardless of the number of small winning games executed during the special figure 2 variation advantageous period. Instead, it is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 variation advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special diagram 1), the other special symbol that is changing (special diagram 2) is displayed as a stop display mode. It is configured to force stop. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hit game is executed during the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is changed according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out of sync. Stop display in the display mode shown, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (lottery result that can give the second privilege different from the first privilege to the player), fluctuation of the other special symbol Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of alignment, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With such a configuration, the lottery result of the other special symbol (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) can be changed based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, and the player's A variety of game play can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol fluctuation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of the lottery result which gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result which gives the privilege. Even if it does, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result will be out of order, and it is possible to suppress excessive bonuses from being given to the player. In case of, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol being given during the small winning game, the variable display Only the measurement of the period can be suspended.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are changing at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous bonus, and the most advantageous bonus given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation that the player is not allowed to do so, and it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, the short period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), It is configured so that a small hit game can be frequently executed. Then, the condition that the latent probability state is set as the game state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the condition that the latent probability state ends is the first special symbol The case where the big hit game is executed is displayed in a stop manner in which the big hit is displayed. Therefore, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the contents of the jackpot game are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. Round number display mode to show the number, acquisition amount display mode to show the number of balls acquired, type to suggest the type of jackpot game in progress (round number, game state set after the jackpot game) Suggestion display mode, the number of jackpots won in a period in which the normal state is not set as the game state (probably changed state, latent probability state, time saving state) is continuously set (so-called number of consecutive chan ) Etc. are displayed, the jackpot game display mode is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), if the jackpot type this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets the probability variation state as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, As shown in 6(a), an effect mode (a chance zone mode) aiming to set a latent probability state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display contents of the jackpot game end screen (ending screen) will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the jackpot game end screen (ending screen). As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the big hit game, a comment of “chance zone entry!!” indicating that the probability variation state is set after the end of the big hit game is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability variation state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (is not displayed) during the period when the normal state is set, and the player plays the period when the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The game state is advantageous to (the game state more advantageous than the normal state).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the player can easily understand the game. Can be provided.

Further, a comment “Aim for RUSH!!” for the purpose of setting the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Furthermore, in the guide display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left hit" is displayed as a guide display mode for allowing the player to play a left hit game. This allows the player to easily understand that the left side game is aimed at the left side area when the probability variation state is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the jackpot game, both the ball launched by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side area) and the ball launched by the right-handed game. , Which are arranged at possible winning positions (downstream of the game area (see FIG. 2)), and are displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game (“left hit”, “right hit”), that is, The game method to be guided during the big hit game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the big hit game is executed.

Specifically, if you determine the gaming state when you win the jackpot, if it is determined that the left-handed game is the gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state), as a big hit guidance display If "left hit" is displayed and it is determined that the game is in the right hitting game state (latent state), "right hitting" is displayed as a big hit guide display. Thereby, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the player from having to change the game method.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, the special symbol 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (displaying the ending screen). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-fluctuation display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed.

In the present embodiment, the non-variable display mode described above is displayed when the special symbol is not variably displayed even after the power is turned on. By displaying this non-variable display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the above-described non-variable display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating a deviation. Alternatively, when it is determined that the elapsed time since the previous variable display was executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The mode may be changed and displayed in the initial display mode and the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In the state in which the probability variation state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5(b)), the game state in which it is easy to execute the lottery for the first special symbol by the left-handed game. In other words, the probability variation state is a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and the ball is easily inserted into the lower first ball inlet 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability changing state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the display screen during the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current game state is the probability change state is displayed in the sub display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). It

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) laterally (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left hitting" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. At this point in time, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6(a) (because the ball is not inserted into the second entrance 640 by the right-handed game) The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although a detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of motion display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probability changing state, and the lottery result (winning/absence determination result) of the first special symbol in the probability changing state is stored. Accordingly, the motion display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of allowing the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot during the probability changing state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6(b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol is won in the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed when the variation display in which the big hit is won is started in the probability variation state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state transitions from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variation display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the probability variation state is started. Is configured as follows.

Therefore, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (latent probability state) for the player, and thus the variation of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect design 813 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the game state has transitioned is the stop display. To be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has transitioned from the probability changing state to the latent probability state because the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode stopped and displayed is a display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as an aspect.

The present embodiment is configured so that a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently executing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period when the latent probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period when the latent state is set, "right hit" for showing the player right hit game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment "RUSH rush!! Right hit right" is displayed to indicate that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol that is won in the jackpot. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has shifted according to the lottery result of the effect symbol.

Then, during the latent probability state that the right-handed game is continuously executed (while the big hit of the first special symbol is changing), if the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 7(b). As described above, an effect mode for displaying that the small hit has been won is displayed. Here, the display contents when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the display screen during the latent state.

According to FIG. 7(b), in the state where the latent probability state is set (during RUSH), when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. The variable display mode for suggesting that is being changed (the big hit is being changed) is displayed, and the display mode “341” indicating that the small hit is won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. ..

Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode during RUSH is opened, and “V” for indicating a small hit is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. This allows the player to win the small hit in the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and inform the player that the small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 that is rotated when a small win is won is provided in the right area, and a game can be played by the same game method (right hitting) as in the latent probability state. Is configured as follows. With such a configuration, even if the small hitting game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only has to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent state In the state in which is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2) can be performed efficiently.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent probability state is set (based on the setting of the latent probability state), the player is informed of the period during which the latent probability state is set (FIG. 7(a)). ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol is also the second symbol. Both special symbols may change.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing Until the special symbol stops changing, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed regardless of the RUSH state. I was afraid.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the variation situation of the second special symbol (whether or not there is variation, The remaining fluctuation period) is discriminated, and the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the discrimination result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the second special symbol ( The effect contents when the special figure 2) changes will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the probability variation A "super chance zone" with a higher degree of expectation of setting the RUSH state is displayed rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state.

Here, the display content of the display screen in the “super chance zone” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram in the case where a variation that is won in a jackpot with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the probability variation state. That is, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the gaming state, but the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode showing a state where it has not ended.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the "super chance zone is in progress" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a mode in which the character 811 is moving faster than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

Then, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "fluctuation display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a latent state is set. The “variable display mode” that is changing from a time point earlier than that is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8(a) is displayed until the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation executed across the timing of shifting the game state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state ends. When the change in the special figure 2 ends (see FIG. 5D), a “RUSH” rush screen is displayed to inform the player that the player has rushed into “RUSH” (see FIG. 8B).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that enters the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen entering the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the player has entered “RUSH”. Then, "right hit" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this point, the special display 1 display area Dm1 is displayed in a variable display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (large hitting change), and the special drawing 2 display area Dm2 shows a deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery for the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handed game is frequently performed is performed. Is executed. In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one of the special symbols has been won as a jackpot (including during a jackpot change), the jackpot can be won by a lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured not to exist. Therefore, in the lottery of the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a miss. Then, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to win the small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, a small win is won with a probability of 1/2, and the game of winning a prize ball by the small hit game continues until the big hit variation of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if the lottery for the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery for the second special symbol, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. Rush games can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5(f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type selected this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9(a) and (b)). Here, the display screen at the end of the rush game (at the time of stoppage of the special jackpot jackpot fluctuation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9A and 9B.

FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the display content when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16A)) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. [Fig. 16] is a diagram schematically showing the display content when a jackpot (jackpot D (see Fig. 16(a))) that is disadvantageous to the player is won.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a)) has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment of “Congratulations” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this case, in the guidance display area Dm3, the character "Right hit", which is a game method similar to that in the latent state, is displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9B, at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol of "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, from the treasure box 812, the effect design 813 (“End?”) indicating that the player is awarded a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed, and the comment “Please return to the left” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. To be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the guide display area Dm3 displays the characters "left hit" which is the same game method as in the normal state.

In addition, in FIG. 9B, the display screen in the case where the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is shown, but when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A) is won, that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game is executed, but when the jackpot which the game state set after the jackpot finishes is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, the same display screen is displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, it is restored. As an effect, it is configured to execute an effect that causes a right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting caution screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (value medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins a large number of prize balls in a game, he or she forgets that the card is inserted in the card unit and sometimes forgets to take out the card at the end of the game. There was something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting attention screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot that is easy to win a prize ball as a jackpot game and a jackpot that is hard to win a prize ball. Furthermore, it is possible to set a gaming state in which a jackpot game can be frequently executed in a short period. Therefore, the timing for displaying the card forgetting attention screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10A, the display content of the card forgetting alert screen will be described. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the display contents of the card forgetting alert screen. In this way, the operation of removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please be careful not to remove the card" is displayed. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10B to 10D, the display timing of the card forgetting caution screen will be described. FIG. 10(b) shows that the first big hit is "big hit A (see FIG. 16(a))", that is, the big hit that can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one big hit game. FIG. 10C is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display). In FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D, the first big hit is “big hit A (see FIG. 16A)”. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting caution display) when the player wins the jackpot which can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the first big hit (the big hit won when the normal state is set as the game state) is the big hit A, a sufficient number of prize balls is included in the big hit. Since it is given, the card display is executed in the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d), when the first big hit is the big hit C, it is not possible to give a sufficient number of prize balls to the big hit, and the player is Since there is a possibility of continuing to rent a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C).

In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first big hit until the normal state is set again is the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is The card display is executed under the condition that the card display execution condition is that a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) has been reached.

In other words, when the small hit game occurs continuously after the big hit C ends and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small hit game. (See FIG. 10(c)) When the jackpot C is repeatedly executed, when the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10D).

<Regarding the transition of the game state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for the four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of transitioning to the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the frequency of the special symbol lottery tends to be higher in the case of playing the game with the left hit than in the game of the right hit, so the left hit is more advantageous for the player. This is because when left-handed hitting, it is easier to enter the upper first entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, since the small hit is not drawn, the ball is endless unless it becomes a big hit. It is in a disadvantageous state where it continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit is achieved. There are four types of jackpots A to D as jackpot types that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot in the first special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpots A and C are determined at a total of 65%, and after the jackpot, the center of FIG. The state changes to the probability change state ST2 shown in. Further, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot in the first special symbol is a jackpot in the normal state ST1, when the jackpot ends, the state shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is the jackpot in the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot is over (the normal state is looped. To).

In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handing, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. As a result, a part of the ball left-handed has entered the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the lottery for the second special symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (jackets E to G) as jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F determined by a total of 65% of the cases, transition to the probability variation state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot G is determined by a percentage of 35%, the normal state as the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set again (looping the normal state).

In this way, in the normal state, when a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol, there is a possibility of shifting to a time saving state which is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D), In the normal state, if the big prize is drawn by the second special symbol lottery, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right strike in the normal state, so that it is possible to suppress the irregular game. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, because it is configured to set a variation pattern having a long (10 minutes) variation time, when the gaming efficiency is left-handed game Since it is significantly reduced compared to, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method in which the right drawing is performed in the normal state to execute the lottery of the second special symbol.

Next, a method of transitioning to the gaming state when staying in the probability changing state will be described. As described above, in the probability change state, as in the normal state, the left symbol is more advantageous to the player because the special symbol lottery frequency is higher in the left symbol than in the right symbol. Becomes In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, which is advantageous as compared with the normal state, but disadvantageous as compared with the latent state. If the probability variation state ST2 is set, the transition to the latent probability state SP1 is triggered by the fact that the big hit of the first special symbol is won (the special figure 1 big hit variation starts).

In the probability changing state, while aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handing as in the normal state, aim at the lower first entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first entrance 64b1 to play the game. Will be done. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability variation state, the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the first special symbol lottery than the normal state.

In the probability variation state configured in this way, normally, the left-handed game is performed and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, but the ball enters the second entrance 640 and the second special symbol is entered. There is also the possibility of a big win by lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F are determined at a total of 65% when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the probability variation state ST2 is set again after the jackpot is finished, and it is determined at a percentage of 35%. When the big hit G is achieved, the time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit ends.

That is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability changing state, it is possible to shift to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, while the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the possibility of shifting to the latent probability state becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing a right-handed strike in the probability variation state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a method of transitioning to the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so by performing a game by hitting the right, it is possible to efficiently perform the lottery of the second special symbol. .. Therefore, right-handedness is more advantageous to the player than left-handedness.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability variation state is set (first transition condition), and when the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and if the first transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is in the previous stage when the jackpot game is started, that is, during the jackpot variation of the special symbol. If the second transition condition is set, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is over.

With this configuration, the timing at which the gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play various games. Sex can be provided.

Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the latent state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent probability state in advance (at the time of setting the latent probability state) in accordance with the period in which the latent state is set.

In addition, if the jackpot C is won by lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so to the player It is possible to provide a surprising gameplay.

Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 stores, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. As a shaft, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the right side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands to these via an input/output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a ball, the ball launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and operates the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball to be off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device (not shown). To execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device, etc., in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. used.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery, and the selection of the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 are used. Moreover, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type counter C5 is used to select the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and a counter for entering a ball for the second ball entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. Therefore, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or when the special symbol can be drawn by lottery for the special symbol such as when the jackpot game of the special symbol is not possible, when each ball enters the first entrance 64, each counter value is changed. It is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, and when the sphere enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Then, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic. Various settings for displaying) and control processing are executed. In addition, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used for various settings and control processing for displaying the second special symbol as it is.

On the other hand, during the period during which the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first entrance 64. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls of the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. To be done. Further, when the number of holdings for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (4 in this embodiment). Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, during the period during which the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol, the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the second entrance 640. In this case, only the prize balls (two prize balls in the present embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring the respective counter values and the like.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four with respect to the first ball inlet 64, but is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, three), There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the entry (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) to the second entry port 640 is not held, but it is possible to hold the storage like the first entry port 64. You may comprise.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, the value of the random number which is the small hit of the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), in the case of a low probability state of a special symbol as a game state (normal state, time saving state), in the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is "7, 8", and if it is "7, 8", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Further, in the case of a high probability state of a special symbol as a game state (probability change state, latent probability state), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired It is determined whether or not it is in the range of "0-5", and if it is in the range of "0-5", it is determined that it is a big hit. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the total of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, two values are defined as the value for determining the big hit, and thus the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability at time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit is set in a lottery for special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, the random number value for the small win is not defined. That is, the first special symbol lottery does not result in a small win. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is within the range of "212 to 432" regardless of the game state, and the range of "212 to 432" If it is within the range, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, the execution area of the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, or the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b, if the random number to be a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, the execution area of the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, or the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b, if the random number to be a jackpot of the special symbol, the The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1 symbol display device 37 is the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first hit random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “7, 8” is the first hit as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol is 4, and the random number value “0 to 5” is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, since the total number of random number values is 480 and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values for the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the lottery for the second special symbol, and the random number values “212 to 432” are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values to be a small hit is 221, so the probability of being a small prize to a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). Becomes Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)), the small hit type (small hit A ~C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting fluctuation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the game state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each win/no determination result for each. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally wins the symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches with the value of the random number defined as the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second random number table 202c, in the low probability state of the normal symbol as a game state (during the normal state, during the latent state), there are 11 random number values for the normal symbol, and the range is "0-10. It has become. Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number values to be won is 11, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “11/233”.

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (probably changed state, during the time saving state), there are 232 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number values to be won is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “232/233”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is configured so that a difference of about 20 times is provided between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol are also high for the ordinary symbol for the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. The probability state is more advantageous (the ball can easily enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. After that, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened for "1 second x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. After that, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened for "1 second x 2 times". In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

The universal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 in sequence and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Ordinary symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 when the ball passes, based on the value of this general symbol fluctuation type counter CS2, the general pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (see FIG. 20) ) Is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Details of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c already described, the big hit type selection table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, and the variation pattern selection. At least a table 202f and a universal figure variation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , Is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16A, with respect to the first special symbol (special diagram 1), "big hit A" is associated with the range of the value "0-24" of the first hit type counter C2. It is regulated by This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit A” is 25, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit A” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

When "big hit A" is selected, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. It is set (the value of 10000 is set in the hour/hour counter 203f). That is, after the “big hit A” ends, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is configured so that it is easier to give an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability variation state. The game state is advantageous to.

"Big hit B" is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49". This “big hit B” is the same big hit game as the above “big hit A” is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the big hit that opens the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650). The game is set. After the "big hit B" ends, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the gaming state at the time of winning.

When the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, a value of “0” is set in the hour/hour counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the hour/short state or the probability variation state, the hour/hour counter 203f is displayed. A value of "100" is set. That is, when the "big hit B" is won while the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas when the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state , After the big hit, the time saving state (100 times) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit B" is 25, so if the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

"Big hit B" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds like "Big hit A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of special symbols is not set after the big hit ends. , Is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the "big hit C" is won and the case where the "small hit" is won.

With such a configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is opened is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the big hit variation period of the first special symbol, the player is configured so that the small hit game can be frequently executed in the latent probability state (RUSH state). One attacker will be released while expecting that the winning game is a small hitting game. That is, by providing a game period in which the player does not desire the situation in which the jackpot game that the player most desires is executed, it is possible to provide a novel game property.

After the "big hit C" is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the gaming state at the time of winning. When the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, a value of "10000" is set in the hour/hour counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the hour/short state or the probability variation state, the hour/hour counter 203f is set. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win "big jackpot C" while the normal state is set, you can win the "big jackpot C" while you are in the probable change state or in the time saving state, while the probability variation state is set after the jackpot. In this case, the latent state is set after the jackpot is over.

In this way, in the gaming state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpots of the same type are configured, the gaming state set after the jackpot is different, so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot. It is possible not only to pay attention to the set game state, but also to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the game state, it is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, and the probability change state is set as the condition for setting the latent state. There are two first setting conditions that the big hit fluctuation of the special symbol starts in the state where is set, and a second setting condition that wins the big hit C in the state where the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. doing. That is, the expectation (probability) of the latent probability state is set to be different according to the game state when the big hit is won. With this configuration, it is possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation that the player will set a game state that is advantageous to the player according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 40, so "big hit C" is determined when it is a big hit in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 40% (40/100). The "big hit C" is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the "big hit A" and "big hit B" described above, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, it is the only jackpot type that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the gaming state set after the jackpot is set, so it is set after the jackpot In terms of gaming, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the “big hit D” ends, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, and the time saving counter 203f is set to the value “0”. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" is the same big hit game content as the "big hit C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game. ing.

Since the normal state is set as described above after the “big hit D” is ended, the fluctuation display (big hit fluctuation) won for the “big hit D” is displayed in the state where the probability variation state is set. When it is executed, after the small hit game is frequently performed during the big hit change, the big hit game is executed, and then the normal state is set.

In other words, in the latent probability state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the normal state is set after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set. Is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit D" is 10, so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit is made in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit D” is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Becomes Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is opened only during the jackpot game is opened is executed, In the other two jackpot types (“jackpot C” and “jackpot D”), the jackpot game in which the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the jackpot game is opened is executed.

That is, in the first embodiment, as a jackpot of a special symbol, a main jackpot game (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”), which is aimed at causing a player to win a prize ball, and a gaming state can be changed. And a secondary jackpot game (“big jackpot C”) for the purpose of making it difficult to know whether or not the player has won the jackpot (it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot game is a jackpot game) "Big hit D") and are configured to be executable.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a large amount of prize balls during the big hit game because the player has a game property that allows the player to win prize balls not by the big hit game but by the small hit game. Also, depending on the type of jackpot, even if the jackpot game that can only get a small amount of prize balls is executed, the jackpot game aiming to change the gaming state while suppressing the discomfort to the player Can be set.

On the other hand, as a type of big hit by lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 4". This "big hit E" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit E" is 5, so "big hit E" is determined when a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

When "big hit E" is selected, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. It is set (the value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit E" ends, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit E" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. In addition, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is configured so that it is easier to give an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability variation state. The game state is advantageous to.

In the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. The number of rounds for this "big hit F" is two, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit F” is 60, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the second special symbol, the “big hit F” is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

When "big hit F" is selected, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. It is set (the value of 10000 is set in the hour/hour counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit F" ends, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

The “big jackpot F” is one of the jackpot types with the smallest number of rounds, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. In addition, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a gaming state in which an advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is configured so that it is easier to give an advantageous privilege to the player than the probability variation state. The game state is advantageous to.

"Big hit G" is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "65 to 99". This "big hit G" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit G" is 35, so "big hit G" is determined when it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 35% (35/100).

Then, when "big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF) regardless of the gaming state when the big hit is won, and the number of times of 0 times saved is reduced. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

Since "big hit G" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the gaming state set after the jackpot is the normal state, it is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2). And, the point that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is 65% (65/100) is the same, but the proportion that 15 rounds are set as a jackpot game (50% for special figure 1) , Toku-zu 2 is 5%), the rate at which the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is selected as the opening target (Toku-zu 1 is 50%, Toku-zu 2 is 5%), the gaming state when the jackpot is won Is a time saving state, a probability change state (that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol), the rate at which the value of 10000 is set in the hour saving counter 203f after the jackpot is finished (25% for Toku-zu 1 and 65% for Toku-zu) Are configured to be different.

In this way, by varying the jackpot game content and the game state after the jackpot is finished according to the type of the special symbol that is won for the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, The interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to be different according to the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only some of the above-described contents may be configured to be different. Good, other than the contents described above, for example, the number of rounds of jackpot games can be set differently by setting the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1. Alternatively, the probability change flag 203g may be set to be turned on at different rates.

Also, on the condition that the ball has passed a specific area (for example, an area where the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is over. In the gaming machine configured as described above, the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 2 may be configured to have different probabilities of a ball passing through a specific area. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each gaming state set after the jackpot may be configured to be different according to the jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be changed according to the type of jackpot that is won (or the type of special symbol that is won for jackpot).

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hit when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, corresponding small hit types are defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16B, "small hit A" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "0 to 93". This "small hit A" is a small hit type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to the open state only for 1.5 seconds x 1 time during the small hit game.

Among the 100 possible random number values of the small hit type counter C5, since there are 94 random number values that are "small hit A", when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hit A" Is 94% (94/100).

Also, "small hit B" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "94 to 98". This “small hit B” is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds×6 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 possible random number values of the small hit type counter C5, since there are five random number values that are "small hits B", when the small hits are made in the lottery of the second special symbol, "small hits B" Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

Further, the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hit C”. This “small hit C” is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds×8 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be obtained by the small hit type counter C5, since there is only one random number value that is a "small hit C", if a small prize is drawn in the special symbol lottery, it becomes a "small hit C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, as described above, the random number value that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of fluctuation display is defined from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, a time saving/probability changing table for determining a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state, and a probability changing state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent probability table 202f3 for determining a variation pattern in the latent probability state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Note that, in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 is a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (validity determination result). The counter value of the counter value CS1) is specified.

Specifically, as a variation pattern that is determined when a big win is achieved in the first special symbol lottery, the reach of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with it. Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51-100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101-150", and super reach is reached with the range of "151-198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is missed in the lottery and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) Accordingly, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, it is long in the range of “0 to 70” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation pattern of deviation (12 seconds) is associated, and the deviation of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 150”. Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the outlying super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the outlying super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Has been.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2 or 3, the variation pattern of short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. As the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 130” and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “131 to 170”. ing. Also, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the out-of-range super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “171 to 185”, and the out-of-range super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “185 to 198”. Has been.

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Will also be executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of retained balls is small (0 or 1), the variation pattern having a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of retained balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for accumulating the reserved balls and make it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is large, it becomes difficult to store the holding due to a short fluctuation time, and therefore the balls are further moved to the first entrance 64 when the number of holding balls reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces). Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the loss.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, the outlying long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when a right-handed stroke is made in the normal state, and a variation time of 600 seconds is set each time when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the gaming efficiency becomes much worse than when a left-handed stroke is made. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player hits the ball right at normal times.

Next, the details of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. This time reduction/probability variation table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state of a normal symbol (that is, a time reduction state or a probability variation state) is set as a game state.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), this time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is for determining the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each special symbol type and for each special symbol stop type (result determination result). A random number value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the time saving/probability change table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, and is configured so that a different variation pattern is not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, because the game is aimed at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol, There is a possibility that a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19(a) performs a left-handed game, and a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which a game in which a ball is entered into the lower first ball inlet 64b2 is performed It is a referenced data table. During this time saving state, the probability changing state, since the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened, it becomes a game state in which the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, in the case where the game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, the fluctuation occurs when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small like the normal table 202f1 described above. If you add a configuration that makes it easy to select a variation pattern that takes a long time, break the game and execute the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol decreases. The variation time becomes longer, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state and the probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored (time saving state, probability variation state), that is, a variation pattern table that is referred to in a high probability state of a normal symbol (time reduction, Probability change table 202f2), so that the variation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (so that the variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small) ) Make up. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time saving state and the probability changing state.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot variation is started. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the probability variation state is set, a lottery for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is performed, and when the result of the lottery (winning/absence determination result) is a big hit, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is set. If the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes a latent state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is executed, and when the winning special variation ends, the special figure 1 Special combination 1 is stopped and displayed with a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously drawn by lottery and variable display, the latent state is set (the special variation of special symbol 1). While (is executed), it is possible to make the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display period (variation time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol. It is configured to win the small hit. By configuring in this way, while the latent state is set (while the special special variation of special map 1 is being executed), the lottery for the second special symbol is frequently performed, so that the player Can get a lot of prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 seconds depending on the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as the lottery result of the special symbol, not only the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (the result of the determination), but also the player can pay attention to the variation pattern (variation time) selected, The interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the outlying long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, in the time saving state, the right hitting in the probability changing state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set every time, so the gaming efficiency is extremely higher than that of the left hitting. Getting worse. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method of right-handing in a time-saving state or a probability variation state.

Next, details of the latent confirmation table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. The latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the latent probability table 202f3 is a random pattern for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (result determination result). A numerical value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured so that different variation patterns are not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similarly to the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above.

This latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is being performed during the probable variation state, the time saving state, and the probable variation state. At the time of winning the jackpot which is a jackpot type of "jackpot C", when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) that are executed after the jackpot game is over. Referenced.

This latent probability table 202f3 is selected when the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is selected with respect to the contents defined in the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). Differs in that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is changed, and that the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is changed, Otherwise it is the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 39" and the normal variation (60 Second) is associated, the supermarket variation (180 seconds) is associated with the range of “40 to 119”, and the special variation (600 seconds) is associated with the range of “120 to 198”.

On the other hand, if it is missed in the lottery for the first special symbol, and this latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved number counter 203d) ), and the deviation middle fluctuation (30 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the short-short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the out-of-range short variation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, a lot of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed during the latent state.

Next, details of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the general pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern of the normal symbol when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the universal figure variation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the universal figure variation type counter CS2 and the variation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state when the lottery for ordinary symbols is executed. And are specified in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the game state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, in the case of a low probability state of a normal symbol, the entire range of values that the general figure variation type counter CS2 can take ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the universal figure variation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state, a probability variation state, that is, in the case of a high probability state of a normal symbol, the variation time of 3 seconds varies within the range of 0 to 198 for the value of the universal figure variation type counter CS2. The patterns are associated.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol may have variations, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in the latent probability state, the variation time is 1 second or 3 seconds 2 Any one of the types may be set, and the variation time is not limited to two types, and more variation times may be selectable. The more variation the variation time has, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the variation time. Therefore, the player can be more surely allowed to right-stroke right in the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired universal symbol variation type counter CS2, but other than that, it is based on the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol. A configuration for changing the variation time, a configuration for changing the variation time based on the number of times of special symbol lottery, or a configuration for setting the variation time for a normal symbol by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, from the transition of the game state to the latent state until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and thereafter (for example, , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, the variation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and configured to be executed. , During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to let the player play the game while having a sense of expectation so that more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, short fluctuation time) is executed. it can.

Also, while the game state shifts to the latent state, while the special symbol lottery for the even number of times is being executed, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, otherwise (the odd number of times), You may comprise so that 3 seconds may be set as the variation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by configuring to change the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so it is more reliable during the latent state. You can make right-hand hits continuously. In this case, in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer (becomes longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol It is preferable that the smaller the number of lottery items stored in suspension, the longer the variation time of the normal symbols.

In addition, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of holding balls of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time of the normal symbol, the longer the variation time may be easily selected. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls for ordinary symbols is hard to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted for the number of retained balls for ordinary symbols to be easily accumulated It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 is a first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, a normal symbol holding sphere. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 variation time counter 203m, special figure 2 variation Time counter 203n, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, general figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, It also has at least the other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), each of these The area stores the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1, respectively.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area ~ Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is an execution area. Is shifted (moved) to, and based on the respective values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the determination value (counter value) for executing the lottery of special symbols is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is, like the first special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, one execution area (ordinary symbol holding sphere execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) And have. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the reserved special area is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which winning data is packed in a holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37, which is performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S304 of FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

Voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is changed, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, of the variable display held in the main control device 110 The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp controller 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. Even if the number of balls has deviated from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) has an initial value set to zero, and the ball passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of holding balls of the variable display. Each time, the maximum value 4 is incremented by 1 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1903 of FIG. 49: (See No).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the value corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won is set to the time saving counter 203f after the jackpot. Then, the time saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S308 of FIG. 36). When performing a lottery for normal symbols, if the value of this time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined to be the time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the normal symbol is true or false is determined by referring to the table for high probability time. .. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is determined, and whether or not the symbol is normal is determined by referring to the low probability table.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when set to ON, indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, if the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, as the game state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, One of the normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

This probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the jackpot type that is won is a jackpot that sets the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot is over (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54) (FIG. 54). 54 S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special figure high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the special symbol (special figure high probability state) after the special symbol is set The probability variation flag 203g may be set to OFF when the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, in order to set a timing for setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, a storage unit that stores in advance the number of times of variation of the special figure as the special figure high accuracy end condition and a state after the special figure high accuracy state is set. Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end determination for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high accuracy end condition) stored in the storage means Means may be provided.

Furthermore, a plurality of special figure high-probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high-probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times the first special symbol changes in the special figure high-probability state, and fluctuations of the second special symbol Various special drawing 2 high-probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result for winning a small prize). It may be configured such that the special figure high probability end condition is facilitated and the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF when any of the special figure high probability end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the first entrance 64 is equal to the big hit judgment value at the start of fluctuation. Is a flag set to (see S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 of FIG. 38).

When the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends with this special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h turned on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). .. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit occurs on the other while the big hit on the one hand is executed.

Special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is ON when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entrance 640 is the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. The flag is set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). This special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit (S1506 of FIG. 45).

When the variation time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends when the special map 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol by the symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). .. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that the big hit or the small hit occurs on the other while the big hit on the one hand is executed.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “00H” is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probable variation flag 203g is on), the probable state is shown in the winning state storage area 203j. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “02H” is stored as the indicated information.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the big hit, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big hit (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 640 is equal to the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). The small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the small hit flag 203k is turned on and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is subtracted. The process of stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol during the small hit of the second special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit. it can.

Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, respectively, the 1st special design, and the counter in order to count the fluctuation time of the 2nd special design, 1st special design, and 2nd special When the variation pattern of the symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol is ended by the timing result of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n.

The big hit medium flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit is in progress. When the big hitting flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a big hit. The big hit medium flag 203o is set to ON when the big hit start is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it is not a small hit. The small hitting flag 203p is set to ON when the small hit start is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the small hit ends (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win the small hit only for the second special symbol, and when the small hit is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON), It is configured to suspend the variable display of the 1 special symbol. In other words, among the plural types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is selected by lottery, and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON. In the state, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the small hit game. In addition, during the small hitting game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and starting the big hitting game.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with a big hit stop symbol until the big hit is started. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, even if there is a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by the symbol (see S802 of FIG. 38), and avoids the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol. When it does, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (fluctuation for 3 seconds), and by being set to ON, the normal symbol (second symbol) It shows that a short change of (pattern) was executed. This universal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t, it is determined that the timing for setting the variable time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1811: Yes in FIG. 48). ) When the variation time of 3 seconds (short variation) is set to ON (S1814 of FIG. 48), it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 of FIG. 48: Yes), when it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) this time is a win (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48), reference is made (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, when it is determined that the universal figure shortage variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), if it is determined that the time saving state is in progress (time saving) (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). The general symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820 in FIG. 48) after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 48).

In this way, the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and the electric accessory 64a opening operation setting after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed The game state is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the game state and the game state are in a plurality of game states (normal state). Due to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol executed across the (and the time saving state), it is possible to surely prevent the electric accessory 64a from being opened long, and a privilege advantageous to the player (long of the electric accessory 64a). It is possible to prevent the player from being provided with "open" excessively.

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (won) the first specific winning opening 65a in the small hitting game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit value of 10, it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In addition, in each round of jackpot, even when the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, when the round period set in the round is reached, the round is ended. The prize winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a win is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small win round valid period. The value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed description is omitted, the winning counter 203u described above is not limited to the small hitting game, but also when counting the number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hitting game. It is also used for.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game content of the small hit game is set such that the period for opening the first specific winning port 65a is 1.5 seconds, and the condition for ending the round established by the winning number is 10 doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses until 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, because the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the production across the small hit game (the period from the start of fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of fluctuation of other special symbols via the small hit game) The effect period of a series of effects) can be determined in advance. Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, When the state set to ON is set to OFF, the update (subtraction) of the stopped variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 of FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation process (figure 32)) (S202 of FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to Toku-zu 1 in the same manner as during the change is executed (S203 of FIG. 32). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state in which the variable display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 37) (S701 of FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 of FIG. 37).

In addition, in the present embodiment, since it is configured such that only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit, the special symbol in which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the fact that the small hit is won is the first special symbol. Although it is only a symbol, if it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, based on that one of the special symbols is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed ), the process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol at the disengagement, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol stopped in a combination indicating a small hit Based on that, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game ends).

That is, according to the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes. With such a configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot), and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags and counters. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) To determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19(a), when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation time is 60 seconds per normal variation, variation The main controller 110 outputs a variation pattern command corresponding to either a super variation for a time of 180 seconds or a special variation for a variation time of 600 seconds, and the audio lamp controller 113 receives the variation pattern command (variation time). (The information indicating) is set.

Here, as the variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first 60 seconds performs the first-stage effect mode (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy), and the second effect in the period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A staged production mode (for example, production of defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a variable production of performing production mode of a third stage (production of defeating a third enemy) in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds is set. As a change effect corresponding to a change (180 seconds), a first-stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and a second-stage effect mode in a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, a change effect for executing the effect of being defeated by the second enemy) is set, and as the change effect corresponding to the normal fluctuation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds is a first-stage effect mode (for example, for the first enemy). The variable effect for executing the effect (defeated) is set.

In this way, the variation mode set this time for the player is set by setting the production mode so as to divide the variation production executed corresponding to the stage of the variation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to entertain the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type it is, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the case of executing the above-described variable effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to understand the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing when the effect mode can move to the next stage It may be configured to display an effect mode in which the remaining time until is displayed as a countdown. This allows the player to know in advance at least the period in which the variable effect is continuously executed (the period in which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

In addition, a plurality of types of enemies appearing during the variable effect are provided, and the degree of expectation that the variable effect shifts to the next stage (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected), depending on the type of the enemy that appears. , It is preferable to be able to suggest the contents of the big hit game executed after the end of this variable display, and the game state set after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is a winning super fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is determined. If the variation pattern is a winning special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a type other than the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give the advantageous privilege to the player, The effect can be further enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent probability state is set as the game state, and the period in which the small hit game can be frequently executed by the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the rush period) is set. It is a data table referred to when selecting a stop display mode (see FIG. 7A and FIG. 8B) of the effect design for notifying the person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured so that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the lottery for the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds, the gaming state set after the jackpot game), and the length of the rush period. It is regulated that the stop display mode of the effect design is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the "big hit A" which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period is set). When the information stored in the area for storing the information shown) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 60 seconds or less, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". The stop display mode “111” is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”. ..

In addition, when the “big hit A” is won, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. In the case of within ~300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode of "333" in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is In the case of "301 seconds to", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h value of "0 to 39", and "40 to 79". The stop display mode “777” is defined in the range “”, and the stop display mode “VVV” is defined in the range “80 to 99”.

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the jackpot “Bat”, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored. When the information stored in the area) is “0 to 60 seconds”, that is, when the rush period is 60 seconds or less, the obtained display counter 223h has a value of “0 to 39” in the stop display mode. “222” is defined, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

In addition, when the “big hit B” is won, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. When it is within ~300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "666" in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h value of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. The stop display mode “333” is defined in the range “”, and the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range “80 to 99”.

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "big jackpot C" or the most unfavorable jackpot type "big jackpot D" is won, and the remaining When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the obtained effect counter 223h The stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the range of “80 to 99” is defined. The stop display mode “444” is defined.

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) that has won the “big hit C” and the “big hit D” is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, If the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and in the range of "40 to 79", The stop display mode “111” is defined, and the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99” and stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the displayed information is "301 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of "0 to 39". , "40-99", the stop display mode "777" is defined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the length of the rush period, and after the rush period ends, depending on the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The contents of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) are configured to be suggested to the player. With this, by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol, the player can predict the game content in the future.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the effect design is specified to have a predetermined law, and specifically, the stop display mode of the effect design is “even number pattern”, “odd number pattern”, It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of "777" and "VVV" (longer rush period, better jackpot type). In this way, by giving a predetermined law to the stop display mode of the effect design, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, since the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined and configured to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol, for example, the stop display mode “111” of the effect symbol is most advantageous to the player. Only when the jackpot type “jackpot A” is set, it is specified that the rush period is selected even within 60 seconds. Therefore, when “111” is displayed, the player is On the other hand, for the novel game property that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, for the game property that normally requires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game characteristic in which a game result (a short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period indicate that the one most advantageous to the player is selected. On the other hand, you can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, the timing of selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (the timing of stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), whether the second special symbol is varying or not. When it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, when the lottery for the second special symbol can be performed immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is changed. It is configured to stop and display the effect design based on the start.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set (when the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), if it is determined that the second special symbol is varying, That is, unless the variable display of the second special symbol that is currently being executed ends, if the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state where the latent probability state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed The effect design is configured to be stopped and displayed based on the timing when the process ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the state where the latent state is set immediately after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed and the rush period is started, so that the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to perform a game in the latent state without giving.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), the second special symbol is changed. When it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is finished is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured not to execute (the effect indicating that the rush period has started). As a result, even if the effect symbol is stopped and displayed and the rush period has started (the rush game has started), if the small hit game is executed, the rush period will end. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fact that the rush period (rush game) has been started is configured to be displayed as an effect symbol similar to the third symbol, so that it is as if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is possible to make it seem as if the rush game was executed based on the symbols being stopped and displayed. Further, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect design is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress a great sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing to stop and display the effect symbol, the timing when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started, or the second special that is being executed at the timing when the latent state is set The timing at which the variable display of the symbols is stopped is used, but the effect symbols may be configured to be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, for example, stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. By analyzing the prize information command indicating the prize information and determining in advance that the jackpot variation will be executed in the next variation, immediately before the jackpot variation is executed (the third symbol in the variation before the jackpot variation) The effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent probability state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot change is executed and the rush game is started, the second winning is entered from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right hitting game) is performed, it is preferable that the lottery for the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit variation starts. As a result, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the stop display of the effect design, before the latent probability state is set (before the big hit variation starts), that is, during the probability variation state It is possible to prevent a situation in which the special symbol lottery is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol which is temporarily stopped by winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The data table is referred to, and is configured so that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after restart. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined so that the player predicts the remaining variation time (the remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional production mode corresponding to the selected additional production type. Configured to get.

Specifically, when the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99." The additional effect type “none” is defined in the range “”, and the additional effect A is defined in the range “100 to 198”. Further, when the remaining fluctuation time (period information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of, and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". When the remaining change time (the period information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". In addition, the additional effect type “additional effect B” is defined, and the “additional effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

Here, when the “additional effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to the tattered display mode. The player can predict that the rush period will be short by grasping the display mode of the tatter. Further, when the "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed, and when the "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 is set in the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is set. Further, when “none” is selected, an effect of not displaying the treasure box 812 during the remaining rush period is set.

Note that, in the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23(b)) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining variation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without additional consideration, with a small probability, for example, "additional effect C" is set in the period B, and "additional effect A" or "none" is set in the period C. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the composite game information in which the rush period and the jackpot type are combined is played in the stop display mode of the effect design which is displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the latent state. The player is provided with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by an additional effect during the rush period. As a result, the player comprehensively determines the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, thereby making it possible to predict more detailed game contents.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 variation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, short remaining time area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification completed flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush displayed flag 223t, prize ball number counter 223u, power supply At least the disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning for the first ball entrance 64, a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, which are acquired according to the starting prize, From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1, various information (whether winning, big hit type in case of big hit, change pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and various predicted information is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information notified by the prize information command (whether winning, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) is extracted as prize information, and the prize information is obtained. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is held in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variation effect of the first special symbol that is up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, the holding ball number is a special symbol. Is managed for each type.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command. , And stores it in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserve sphere counter 223c is used to display the reserve sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also holds the first special symbol holding after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sphere number counter 223c, a display reserved sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding of the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the sphere number pattern is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223c is changed in value in synchronization with the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, and special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, respectively when the fluctuation pattern command of the 1st special design and the fluctuation pattern command of the 2nd special design which are transmitted from main control equipment 110 are received It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f, and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. Are turned on (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. To be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 every time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Will be updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Every time a status command output from the main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). .. More specifically, the state setting area 223j is assigned with a 2-bit storage area, and, in order from the upper bits, whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol, or whether or not it is a high probability state of a normal symbol. A value indicating that is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of normal symbols), if "10B", latent It means a certain state (high probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol). On the other hand, if "00H", it means that it is in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a low probability state of a normal symbol).

By updating the state setting area 223j according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining short time count area 223k is a storage area for storing the number of remaining high probability states of ordinary symbols. The remaining short time count area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining short time count command output every time the value of the short time counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining short time count area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time saving counter 203f of the main control device 110, so that the remaining time saving count grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to It is possible to match the actual number of times saved by main controller 110.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate corresponding fluctuation times when respective fluctuation displays are set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed, 1 is subtracted from each value (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special figure 1 temporary stop command to the reception of the special figure 1 restart command from the main control device 110 is the case where various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed. Also, it is configured so that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not subtracted by 1.

Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 of FIG. 67) executed when the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 60) determines that the temporary stop related command is received, Reference is made (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining variation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing the remaining period of the rush period, that is, information indicating the remaining time of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol. In the remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The remaining period information stored when setting the additional effect when restarting the variable display of the symbols is referred to.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notifying), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. Is set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. It is set to ON when the following conditions are met.

The rush display completion flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game is started in the state where the latent probability state is set, and is a rush rush screen (FIG. 7) showing that the rush game is started. It is set to ON when (a) and FIG. 8(b) are displayed.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and the prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous for the player is continuously set. It is configured to accumulate numbers. Specifically, in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command is received (S4505: Yes of FIG. 63), the value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 of FIG. 63).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to obtain a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, and accordingly, in accordance with the value of the prize ball number counter 223u, After the winning game is finished, or after the big hitting game in which a small number of rounds is set, the card forgetting caution display can be executed.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is ON (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y is set to ON and then kept constant. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only part of the information has disappeared) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages consecutively, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids the access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data while setting the data in one bank while using the other bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 word (1 word=2 bytes) instructions) is stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 74B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the entry slot 64b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in Fig. 25(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in Fig. 25(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. 25B and 25C, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25B and 25C are displayed. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is changed to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 26B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. .. Further, FIG. 27 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 26, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the positions a and a′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scroll-displayed by such a connection.

When the change of the rear surface type is determined based on the rear surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 , The corresponding back image is first set between position a and position a′ as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further the display is performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 27, with the passage of time, in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky spreading over the mountain changes with time.

When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 27A is returned to and the back images of FIGS. 27A to 27C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage. Therefore, the image data of the rear surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “River stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27A, and the image data corresponding to the back images between FIGS. 27A and 27B except FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a RAM having a very large capacity must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ (or the range of FIG. 27A to FIG. 27B). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27A and 27B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235c. However, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while doing. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27A to 27C so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. This allows the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A to be normally used while the images in FIGS. 27A to 27B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

It should be noted that, on the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first ball entrance 64, or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, even though the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol, which is composed of an attached symbol imitating the above, is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data stored in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If any of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is going to a special game state and the large opening that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is about to start. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is a main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This rear surface type is one of the rear surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage selected from the player (any one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

When it is specified by the back surface type to display any of the back surfaces A to E, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, what range of the back side type and the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing in the transfer data table.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is used after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75B) are displayed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instructions for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 75(b In S6303), the pointer updating process (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 30), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...) For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy that information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. )), the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time (see S7207 of FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has been developed in advance from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the back image is not changed. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when the back image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81A). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the back image changing process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, it is possible to display the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back surface image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In the back image discrimination flag 233x, when the back image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a). ) S7002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is displayed. When another display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, the display data table is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77A, S6705 in FIG. 78A, S6805 in FIG. 78B). , S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the confirmation display flag other than the confirmation display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 of FIG. 77(a), S6705 of FIG. 78(a), S6805 of FIG. 78(b), FIG. 79 S6905). With the confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether the present is in the confirmed display effect.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When it reaches 479, 99, 232, 99), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting prize) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are normally performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and when it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not one of the special maps is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit, and the subtraction of the other special map variation time being changed is interrupted. In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. However, (S203), that is, for the special figure in which the subtraction of the variable time is suspended, the process of continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and the present process is ended. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S204), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209 for executing the variation process related to Toku-zu 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is to execute the process in the variation of special figure 1, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) ends, next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processing of S209 to S213, the same processing as S204 to S207 executed for Toku-zu 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 fluctuation. When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is to execute the process in the variation of special figure 2 and will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S212, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d (N1) is set. 1 is subtracted (S303), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set, and a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S304). ..

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is output in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 ends, next, the data of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

When the process of S305 ends, then the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on, it is a process for executing a jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot, based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S306 ends, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (S307) is a judgment result of the first special symbol, and a fluctuation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, then a game state update process is executed (S308). This game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probability variation flag 203g, which indicates the state of the pachinko machine 10, and the value of the time saving counter 203f. Is a process for updating. When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this processing is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S204 of FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the period in which the variation display (big hit variation) that is won in the jackpot in one of the special symbols is being executed, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery It is configured not to make a determination.

In other words, one special symbol lottery, in a state where it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the change time), the other special symbol lottery, the jackpot is won, multiple times in a short period of time. It is configured so that it is prevented that the jackpot is won and the privilege is excessively given.

In this way, similar to the normal special symbol lottery, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the configuration is such that the deviation symbol is set. You can quickly respond to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value that is the jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is used. It is determined whether or not the defined random number value for jackpot matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). When it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). (S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the hit type counter acquired, set the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S409), the value according to the current gaming state the winning state storage area The data is stored in 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing is ended.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 of FIG. 33) in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 of FIG. 34) It is possible to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state in the game state update process (S308) executed later than. As a result, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the low probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing when the jackpot variation is started. Therefore, the probability variation state can be shifted to the latent probability state by winning the big hit of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set.

Also. By performing the process of setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the variation of the special symbol Any of the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of times has reached a predetermined number can be executed using the game state update process (S308). Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203h is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out (S406: No), a deviation symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 of FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, ie, the It is determined whether or not the jackpot of one special symbol is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is turned on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is used to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the hit type counter C2 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of alignment (that is, the special diagram 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) according to the game state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

After finishing the process of S506, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), and then the variation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the process of S505. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in step S1 is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the game state update process (S308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this game state update processing (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for updating the state of the probability variation flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the game state, and the value of the hour/hour counter 203f, only the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is updated at the start of variation of the special symbol. In the game state update process (see FIG. 36) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is configured to be executed.

Then, although details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g which is set to ON is set to OFF when the jackpot variation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). Is configured as follows.

That is, of the two condition elements (state of the probability variation flag 203g, value of the time saving counter 203f) that is referred to when setting the game state, one condition element is updated at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and other condition elements By making it possible to update when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the game state set by combining two condition elements. In addition, since it is possible to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) only from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol, it is advantageous to the player only during a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set the game state.

When the gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is larger than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and the remaining short time count command indicating the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is set. Yes (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (S604: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), the probability variation state (that is, the latent probability state) in which the time saving game is not given is indicated, and thus the latent probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), it is the normal state, and therefore the state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and the present processing To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this processing is directly terminated.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the big hit). However, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In this case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to shift to the low probability state.

When using such a configuration, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is set as the special state variation start time game state update process, and at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends separately. By providing the special state fluctuation stop time game state update process to update the value of the probability variation counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the processing for determining whether or not the timing is different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, regarding the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special diagram 1 is suspended, and the process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small hit. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the main controller 110 executes a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) of the next time (after 2 ms when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON) is executed, it is a big hit in the process of S201. Since it is determined that the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, the big hit game (or the small hit game) ends, and it is determined that it is not in the big hit (or in the small hit) in the process of S201, and the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. With this configuration, the state where the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the big hit (or the small hit) game is It is configured so that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been completed and the subtraction of the fluctuation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure 1 variation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop is set. The stop flag 203v is set to off (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the processing of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processing of S702 and S703 is skipped and S704 is executed. Process shifts to.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), first, for the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on (S802), 2 A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a symbol (S804).

When the process of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S807 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S808.

In the process of S808, the special figure 1 decision command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is decided to be stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is ended.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Moreover, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol which is being variably displayed is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol in the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. After the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to obtain a natural effect as compared with the case where the player is forced to stop the vehicle when the vehicle comes off. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S806 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34), , For example, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game, set the jackpot scenario in the process of S706 You may do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In this second special symbol variation start process (S210), the process for starting the variation of special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of the variation is merely changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the elements is omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S209), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this processing is ended. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is turned on when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol ends and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. For this reason, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on in the process of S901, the present process is terminated without executing the processes of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not there is acquired data based on the data acquired in the process of S903 (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Execute (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the processing of S905 ends, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the data acquired in the processing of S903, the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing for selecting the variation pattern is executed (S906). .. Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S906 ends, the above-mentioned gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (S905).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The differences will be mainly described.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on each acquired counter value and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b, and the others are the same as the first special symbol jackpot judgment process (see FIG. 34). Control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot. (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to be a big hit is executed, and this processing is ended. In each of these S1007 to S1010, the same processing as each processing of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed. To be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a jackpot. When it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process for setting the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the deviation of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this process is ended. Details of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. When it is determined that it is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of alignment (S1101: No), the off symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and thereafter, This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 of FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Then, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 of FIG. 40), whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set is determined. (S1202). Here, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is something which is set to ON with the processing of S1007 in the above-mentioned 2nd special design big hit decision processing (figure 40 reference).

In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current game state is read. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S1001 in the above-described second special symbol big hit determination process (see FIG. 40), a big hit from the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) The type is determined (S1204).

When the process of S1204 ends, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Yes (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) is executed, and the processing of S1208 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Then, the variation start of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n ( (S1210), this processing ends.

Next, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207 of FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current game state is read (S1304), and from the read variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 Is selected (S1305). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the selected small hitting fluctuation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1301: No), a variation pattern selection table (figure corresponding to the current game state) 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and a deviation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S1309), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (see S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special diagram 2 is suspended, and the process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is updated (S1402), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213). This second special symbol variation stop process (S213) is to execute the process when stopping the variation of special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON. If it is determined (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating stop of special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the process of S1503 is completed, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203g, and time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the big hitting flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed to be stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-described S1509 and S1510 are executed. The process is executed and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508) which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

When the process of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). After that, the small hit flag 203k is turned off (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is turned on (S1606).

When the processing of S1606 ends, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol which is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped by the small hit symbol (S1608), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1601, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is deviated from the second special symbol and stopped changing (S1610), and this processing is ended.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate at the same time. Can be displayed. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can efficiently play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player loses the lottery game that was in the midst of variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not and play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 of FIG. 47) determines whether or not a game ball has entered (first winning) the first ball inlet (first starting port) 64, and if the player has won (wins), it is suspended. It is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first entrance 64). In addition, each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a A process of predicting the result of the judgment or the variation pattern to be selected is executed in advance. The start winning process (S105) will be described below.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance 64, which is the first starting port (starting prize) (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of the first ball input switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). This is determined whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (S1704). A reserve ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserve number is set (S1705). Various counter values, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Are stored (stored) in the corresponding storage areas of the number of reserved balls (S1706).

Next, based on each of the stored counter values, the judgment result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, the winning determination information result including the predicted result of the predicted first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting opening (first entrance opening) 64 and is newly stored as a hold, the result of determination of win/fail is based on the stored information. Is discriminated before the fluctuation starts and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the hold sphere is changed (for example, the color of the hold sphere is changed to a different color from the normal color) based on the result of the hit determination stored in the hold state, or before the change starts. It is possible to display an announcement pattern or the like and execute an effect that suggests a win/fail judgment result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower first entrance 64b2 Is a process for controlling the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 of FIG. 48), first, it is now determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1801). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is being performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included while being done. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1801: Yes), a new ordinary symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hitting (S1801: No), next, whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing) If it is determined (S1802) and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol, variation of the normal symbol If there is no particular condition, that is, if it is determined that it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding of variable display in the normal symbol) The number of times M) is acquired (S1803).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1804), and when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1805), The data stored in the symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

In the process of S1806, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the normal symbol holding first area → execution area, the normal symbol holding second area → the normal symbol holding first area, the normal symbol holding third area → the normal symbol holding second area, the normal symbol holding fourth area → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal pattern hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined as the normal symbol hit, and the normal symbol is When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "232", Usually it is determined that the design is off.

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S1808 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S1809), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S1809: Yes), the winning The display mode is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the processing of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the processing of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the processing of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbol (time saving When it is determined to be (state) (S1811: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the universal symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving state) (the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) (S1811: No), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this processing ends.

In addition, the general symbol short change flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the game state at the timing when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, and the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. This is displayed and is referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it is possible to change the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a according to which game state the variation (lottery) start timing of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing of starting (execution) the variation (lottery) of the normal symbols is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. , For example, in the game state storage means that can always store the currently set game state, when it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the game state when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the ordinary symbols are drawn. By doing so, it may be possible to determine the game state at the time when the lottery for the normal symbols is performed. In other words, it is sufficient that the storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and the storage means capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1816). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S1813, when it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1816, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. The period in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period in which one location in the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. (Confirmed display) is configured. This allows the player to easily recognize that the second symbol is stopped and displayed.

By the process of S1817, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device Ends, and in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

When the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S1818). When it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal pattern (S1818: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether the universal figure short change flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

In the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the universal figure shortage fluctuation flag 203t is not set to ON (is set to OFF), that is, the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol is started. When it is determined that it is in the normal state (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the opening count is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the universal figure shortage variation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the regular symbol lottery (variation) this time is started is the time saving state. In the case of (S1816: Yes), the universal figure short change flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether or not the current game state is the short-time state (time-shortening) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the game state at the timing of starting the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol is the normal state, and the current game state ( Since the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set. It is set to one time (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing of starting the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol, and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric auditors product 64a) Since both of the timings for setting (1) are in a time saving state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory). The long opening operation of 64a is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing of the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed, and the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric auditors product 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol, Is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both are in the time saving state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to strictly set the condition for setting the opening operation that is advantageous to the player, so that, for example, a normal symbol lottery in a state where the normal state is set as the game state ( (Variation) is executed and the winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal symbol is set, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is nothing. Also, in the same way, the winning symbol is won in the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the ordinary state is set as the gaming state until the variation of the ordinary symbol stops. Even in such a case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being long opened in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is easily executed. The time period can be limited during the shortened state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set is determined, and the game state is set at each timing. Although the above-described configuration is used as a configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on the above, other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the regular symbol lottery (variation) is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are normal (S1824 in FIG. 48). The opening operation set in step 1) is set (the short opening is set), and the long opening (the opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) may be set in other states. By configuring in this way, the advantage (long opening) is provided to the player even for the normal symbol variation executed in the period before and after the time saving state, which is the game state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the game state, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes very short as “10 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the case where the normal state is set, and further Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64b2 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Become. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, and therefore, during the big hit game, the normal state is set. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed, the time saving state is continuously set unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the small amount executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, in the small hitting game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the electric accessory 64a is long opened, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening) 64b2) is a specific period during which the ball can easily enter.

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning a prize device 65. , It is preferable that the balls enter the two winning openings (specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening 64b2) during the small hitting game, whereby the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small hitting game Can be increased, and a more advantageous privilege can be given to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first lower entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing of S1823, the opening/closing of the electric accessory is opened when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S1824 or S1822 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball passes. When there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. Yes (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the game ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

When the process of S1904 ends, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is set to the empty holding area (holding first area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203). It is stored in the first area of the area to the reserved fourth area (S1905), and this processing ends. In the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. ..

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the universal figure, the player can play the game without missing a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a preliminary determination result of the universal figure, not only the effect based on the hit determination result of the universal figure, but also the electric accessory 64a is opened when it is determined that the universal figure is a hit. It is good to perform a performance that suggests the timing to By doing this, in the normal game state, the game is aimed at the left side game area of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the ball entrance accompanied by the electric auditors 64a) is the game board 13 Even if it is arranged on the right side of, the game can be switched to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hitting) before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation, which is a normal game state. However, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball will enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2101). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored (S2105). S2105: No), there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally. Therefore, also in this case, the process proceeds to S2110.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S2110. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the startup process, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

Also, the initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S2108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability variation flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 ends, the interrupt is permitted (S2116), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, roughly, a counter updating process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) Is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, the electric accessory opening/closing process is executed (S2206). In the electric accessory opening/closing process (S2206), the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. Then, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "O" or "x") by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and at the second symbol display device. The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already passed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201 and the above-described processes after S2201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2210: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 and 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but displayed variable. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S2209, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S2213 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S2214). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S2209 is at the timing of the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S2201). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2201 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control processing (S2204) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first specific winning a prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303). .. More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the jackpot scenario opening. It is determined whether the value corresponds to.

In the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is the timing of opening the big hit scenario (start of big hit) (S2303: Yes), the big hit opening command is set (S2304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the processing of S2305, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed ( (S2306), the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is then determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, or When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open is set to be closed in the process of S2308. This process ends. In addition, the determination process of S2305 to S2307 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending production (S2309), and the ending production is performed. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the big hit ending command is set (S2310), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the audio lamp control in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2311). Here, the end timing of the big hit refers to the case where the ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2311, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2312), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot end processing (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the big hit (S2311: No), this processing is finished as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end processing (S2312) which is one of the jackpot control processing (S2204 of FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot end processing (S2312).

In the jackpot ending process (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is the probability big hit (a big hit type in which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the big hit this time is the probability variation big hit (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the big hit of this time is not the probability-change big hit (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the big hit.

Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning and the jackpot type read out by the processing of S2401 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B" If "" is set, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to "100" in order to continue the high-probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

When the process of S2404 is completed, the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF, and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two condition elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished. The contents of (probability change flag 203g, time saving counter 203f) are set. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a small hit control process (S2205) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the content of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S1604 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 46) is executed to determine whether the small hit scenario is set. In the processing of S2501, if the small hit scenario is not set (S2501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small hit scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for small hits is set (S2504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

In the process of S2505, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and the present process is ended. The details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is, it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2508, and this processing is executed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for starting the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hit is set (S2510), and the present process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the audio lamp control in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit refers to the case where the ending effect execution period has elapsed.

In the processing of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit mid flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and the present processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is ended. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 of FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting operation setting process (S2506).

In the small hitting operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hitting to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning a prize process (S2513) which is one process in the small hit control process (S2506 of FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to an open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203u is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) ( S2705: No), and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the payout counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 attached to the specific winning opening 65a) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-on processing of S4117 (see FIG. 59) is caused by the instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), it executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S4117 is in the process of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S4117 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 of FIG. 59). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S4008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed and then S4008 is executed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 that is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the clear processing of S4009 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004 when the processing of S4004 goes through the processing of S4004 to the processing of S4008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the processing of S4101 was executed last time (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102-S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S4102 to S4110 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S4105 without the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the lamp edit process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After this, the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, various counter update processing is executed (S4111), and the processing proceeds to S4112. Details of the various counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4112) is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 59) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). When it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is ended. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: No), whether or not a state command is received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S4203). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this status command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the status command output from the main controller 110, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 (normal status, probability variation status, latent probability). The process of setting (state) to the state setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206) and is received. The special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the fluctuation pattern type (S4207), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format in which it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. In the case of notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set). Used).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4205: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209), and the special feature is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command shown in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format in which it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. In the case of notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol). Used).

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is not received (S4208: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the first Extracting the variable number of reserved symbols of the special symbol), in accordance with the extracted counter value, update the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 ( (S4212), this process is complete|finished. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special feature 2) on hold, the value of the first special symbol (special feature 1) reserved ball counter 223c is set in the process of S4212. Only the process of updating is executed.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), every time there is a start prize, the process of S4212 is executed. The value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, but is started. If the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol holding counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, the first special symbol holding ball number of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

In addition, in the processing of S4211, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the process of S4213, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the received prize information command information (whether or not the special symbol is drawn, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is associated with the prize information. The storage area 223b is set (S4214), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit related command is received (S4216: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S4216), and the present process is ended. Details of the hit related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the special symbol lottery, a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. Processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4215 that the hit related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the remaining short time count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4217). In the processing of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining short time count command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining count update processing (S4218) is executed. The details of the remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining short time count command output from the main controller 110. The process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the processing of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining short time count command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and the present process ends. Details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure change time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, the process of setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is not received (S4219: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4221), and the present process is ended. In the processing of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether the status command is received (see S4203 of FIG. 60) is performed. , Which is arranged before the process (see S4205 and S4208 of FIG. 60) for determining whether or not the variation pattern command of each special symbol is received.

With such a configuration, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, in the first special symbol variation start process of the main control device 110 (see S208 of FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 of FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is played. Even when the state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set and the latent probability state is set during the variation of the jackpot, it is determined that the latent state is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set the variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to the variation pattern command that causes the jackpot variation in the determined state.

Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed before the determination processing of the state command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot variation described above is changed from the probability variation. Only the information indicating that the jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variation display indicating that the latent probability state has been set at the same time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. Since the variation display indicating that the latent state has been set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be performed is delayed, and thus the player feels uncomfortable. I'll give you a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main controller 110 side, the process of varying the game state after the jackpot win/failure determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). While the (gaming status update processing (S308 in FIG. 33)) is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 side first executes the processing (S4204 in FIG. 60) for determining the current gaming status, and thereafter. The variable display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to surely prevent the variable display corresponding to the game state before that from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, so that it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4202). The stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described.

In the stop type command reception processing (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302), and the book The process ends.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. Each is stored so that it can be identified as a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start changing at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the respective stop types, and execute appropriate change display. You can

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the state command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4204). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Details of the status command process (S4204) will be described below.

In this state command process (S4204), the process of setting the current game state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main controller 110 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the latent state. The process for setting the effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state has been set, and the game state has shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting attention screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, when the received command is the state command indicating the shift to the latent probability state (S4403: Yes), the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the process of 4402, when it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the process of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4403: No), the process moves to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal status (S4406). When it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processes of S4407 to S4410 are skipped, the process of S4411 described later is executed, and this process is ended. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification completion flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q, and the card notification flag are set. The rush display flag 223t is set to OFF for 223s (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, when it is determined that the card notification completion flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed, and The process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit related process (S4216) which is one of the processes in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4216). In this hit-related process, as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game executed when the jackpot or the jackpot is won. This is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small win is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, the process for displaying the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the hit-related processing (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is the jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot-related processing is executed (S4502), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, the processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main controller Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4216) has received a jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4602), and this processing is ended. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the big hit start command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the display-number-of-rounds command is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the capacity of the command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the configuration for transmitting the information indicating that a new round has started from the main control device 110 as the round update command, the audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number storage counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number storage counter, the voice lamp control device 113 side outputs the current round. The number may be calculated and the display round number command may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including the card notification is set (S4608). That is, the processing for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the card-notified flag 223q is not set to ON (that is, OFF) (S4607: No), the jackpot type of this time is jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (S4609). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. Yes (S4611). That is, the process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), the above-described processing of S4610 to S4611 is executed, and The process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4612, when it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the above-described processing of S4608 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the jackpot-related processing (S4502 of FIG. 64), as various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, game information regarding the jackpot game being executed (opening, In addition to the processing of setting the display content of the ending, the number of rounds), the processing for determining whether or not to display the card forgetting attention screen (see FIG. 10A) is configured to be executed.

This card forgetting alert screen is a card (borrow a ball to the player when the player wins a predetermined amount (eg, 250 shots) of prize balls in a game (big hit game, small hit game) This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time). In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card when the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the normal state to winning the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuation advantageous period) reaches a predetermined amount It is configured to display the forgetfulness alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state, a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot A, which can easily obtain prize balls exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots)). When the jackpot B) is won, the card notification that displays the card forgetting caution screen is displayed at the end of the jackpot game, and when the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) are won, the card notification is executed. It is configured not to.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player forgets the card and displays a caution screen for a player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls, and the player can continue to play games while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent the player who plays the game from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, the small hitting game is often configured to be easily playable (latent probability state). Therefore, by repeating the small hitting game, the player can A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of award balls (number of award balls paid out during an advantageous period) accumulated by the player during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), it is executed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen on the ending screen of the big hit game or the small hit game. This allows the player to display the card forgetting caution screen at an appropriate timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting caution screen is configured to be notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, the card forgetting attention screen is frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. The method of displaying the card forgetting caution screen is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and for example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous duration is provided, and the elapsed time after the previous card forgetting caution screen is displayed. When the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting caution screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forget attention screen is displayed once (because the display condition for displaying the card forget attention screen has already been satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) It is preferable to display the card forgetting alert screen when the variation pattern of which the variation time is 5 seconds or more is selected.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the player's fixed concept that the card forgetting caution screen is displayed after the jackpot game is over. Further, as a method of achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting attention screen by using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the received command is not the jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the jackpot related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is the small hitting related command (S4503: Yes), the small hitting related processing (S4504) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a small hit related process (S4504) which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process (S4504). In the small hitting related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the small hitting game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processes corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 are executed.

In the small hitting related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hitting related command received in the hitting related process (S4216) has received the small hitting start command (S4701). When the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hitting start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). .. When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include the card notification is set (S4706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4705, when it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and the display ending command including the card notification is set ( (S4709), the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4707, the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the above-described processing of S4706 is executed, and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the small hit game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgetting attention screen in one game, after winning the jackpot in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous duration) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250), a small hit It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen even after the game ends. This allows the player to display the card forgetting caution screen at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hitting related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command is received (S4505). When it is determined that the received command is not the prize ball command (S4505: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). When it is determined that the value of the award ball number counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification possible flag is set to ON (S4509), and the award ball number for display command is set (S4510). , This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, the added prize ball number counter 223u is less than 250. If determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined by the state command processing (see S4204 of FIG. 62) that the normal state is set, and the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared. The number of award balls corresponding to the award ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period) is accumulated by the award ball counter 223u. Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing), a card forgetting caution screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u.

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game) Can display a card forgetting caution screen when a small hit game is won or a big hit C is won again during an advantageous continuation period.

Next, the remaining number update process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update processing (S4218). This remaining number update processing (S4218) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the main control device 110 outputs the remaining short time count command. On the basis of the reception of, the processing for updating the contents set in the remaining short time count area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining short time count command is received from main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short time count command has not been received (S4801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the remaining short time count command has been received (S4801: YES), the display short time count command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure variation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the third figure display device when the special figure 1 variation restart command is received The process of setting the effect (additional effect) executed in 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that it is not received (S4901: No), the fluctuation restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining change time of the currently set change pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual fluctuation time is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and is longer than 15 seconds. If it is determined to be small (S4906), and if it is determined to be 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), a period B indicating that the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is a normal remaining variation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeds 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the remaining fluctuation time is long in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) that is executed when the special figure fluctuation restarts is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and it corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be set, an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining change time can be executed without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure change.

In the present embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is different depending on the variation time (remaining variation period) executed when the special figure variation is restarted. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to choose the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to choose the period C. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the period A to the period C may be sorted in order for each division. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional variation and the remaining variation time that are executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o. It can provide the enjoyment of predicting variable time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is a process for setting an additional effect that is executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No), this processing ends. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S5002). ), the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining change time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, the additional display effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) ends. The swing effect in which the third symbol is displayed in a swinging manner is executed in the period until it is performed, and when the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the additional effect corresponding to the restarted special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, a production period determination unit that determines a normal production period in which the normal production is executed is provided, and when the production period determination unit determines that the normal production period has ended, the additional production is configured to be executed. Good. With such a configuration, the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, so that a more suitable effect display can be provided to the player. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swinging effect of swingingly displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating unit for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating unit discriminates that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 of FIG. 69) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and the process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process for setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S5105 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent probability state (S5103). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent probability state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. To do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104). In this variation display setting for special figure 1 (S5104), when the current game state is a latent state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, for the display of the first special symbol A process of setting the latent probability variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read in the process of S5201 is set to the sub special figure 1 The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5204), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the processes of S5204 and S5205 described above are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent latent variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the variable pattern command for display having a 2-byte structure is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol. Is configured to indicate that

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 59) ( It transmits to the display control apparatus 114 by S4102). In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

With the setting of the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set variation pattern command for display is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

Here, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109).

In the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5301), and the read variation is read. A value corresponding to time is set in the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent probability state (S5303). When it is determined that the latent state is established (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display completion flag 223t is ON (S5304). When it is determined that the rush display completion flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5306, when it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5307), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON. Yes (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent latent variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or in the processing of S5304, it is determined that the rush display completion flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processes of S5305 to S5308 described above are skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set, that is, during the jackpot variation period, the latent state is a latent state. When setting the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuations, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing. Is configured to set a rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, the screen (see FIG. 7A) is displayed to notify the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 fluctuation is executed. doing.

On the other hand, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that becomes a latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special symbol When it is determined that 2 is changing, a screen indicating that the latent state is in progress (see FIG. 6(b)) is displayed without setting the display rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. It is configured to display.

As a result, when the right-hit game is performed at the time when the screen (see FIG. 7(a)) for setting the display rush rush command and notifying the player that the rush has been rushed is displayed, immediately It is possible to execute a lottery for the second special symbol in the latent probability state, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, when setting the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that becomes a latent state during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is changing, and the special symbol 2 When it is determined that the variation is changing, the variation in Toku-zu 2 being changed may be forcibly ended and a new variation in Toku-zu 2 may be executed.

Note that the setting timing of the display rush rush command when the game state shifts to the latent state during the change of the special figure 2 is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and the player can be provided with a game that is comfortable to the player. It is sufficient if it has a configuration that enables For example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation that is changing at the timing when the latent state is set is ended, the display rush rush command may be set, or the fluctuation at the timing when the latent state is set. It may be configured to determine the remaining time until the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the middle is determined, and to set the display rush rush command when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game until the ball shot by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be set appropriately according to the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It transmits to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), if the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 is set based on the stop type. Further, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the display special map 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 is set based on the stop type. .. It should be noted that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even if the determination result is out. To be done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processing (S4111). This various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the values of various counter values provided in the RAM 223 are stored. This is the process of executing the update.

In the various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the processing of S5401, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the processing of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is executed. Process shifts to. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n are read (S5405), and the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is read from the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223n. Is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of the other various counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5403: No), the above S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 is executed and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program ends, and the boot process ends.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed following the process of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Also, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. In addition, as an initial value of each flag, “OFF” or “0” is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)). A command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. When it is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed for a long time after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. A command determination process (S6302) is executed in order to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting processing is executed, next, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction for setting the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305). 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S6307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/outside reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, complete disconnection) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: YES), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the above table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of the big hits A to G, the small hits A to C, out of reach, and out completely) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409) and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display round command is displayed. If there is a use round number command (S6410: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush rush command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display is performed. If there is a command rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the rush rush command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush rush command processing. The rush rush command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rush rush command processing, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. And sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6932).

Next, based on the rush rush display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the rush rush command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush rush command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), an additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command processing. The additional effect command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the additional display effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , Display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, time data indicating the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display effect command for display (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6418), If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back surface image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is set to ON, and other The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is selected from the back image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract any one back surface image change command and turn on the back surface image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S7102), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in step S7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422) and the process returns to S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), and the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, regarding other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the processing for clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task process (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite. , Various display parameters such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the final display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect is not yet produced, and it is the time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The data is set (S7210), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so that a fixed time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect. After that, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set to the.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The process of setting the display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the processing proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but on (S7709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is specified from the back image discrimination flag 233x, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the processing of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the fanfare production can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is specified so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of sprites that should be arranged on the rearmost side to sprites that should be arranged on the front side in an image for one frame, and the details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 75B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be simultaneously executable in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variable display of 1 is executed, other variable display may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the variable display may be performed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest starting prize. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol, and high probability of the normal symbol) State), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, and normal state of normal symbol) Provide four game states There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

In other words, when the latent probability state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol that tends to be a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. By prescribing it so that it is shorter than in the case of being played, the lottery advantageous to the player can be most efficiently executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property in which he expects the latent state to be set.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, by making the first specific winning opening 65a open even when it is a small hit, the latent probability that the variation time of the second special symbol is short In the state, prize balls can be continuously increased. Therefore, a game can be played in the expectation that it will be in a latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, so that novel game play can be provided.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called, simultaneous). The variable method is adopted). As a result, even when the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, when one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or a small hit stop symbol, the other fluctuation display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it will be stopped and displayed with a stop pattern that is off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variable display is confirmed and displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit and the small hit are started in duplicate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability change state (high-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol) is set, when variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. , The high-probability state of the normal symbol is transitioned to the low-probability state, and the game state is configured to transition from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. While this latent probability state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be short, so that a lot of second special symbol lottery can be executed. It is a possible period (Special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In the present embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the game state, the small hit The small hit game that is executed when the player wins is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous for the player who can obtain many prize balls (special state 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variation advantageous period) is during the variation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the probability variation state. Since it is (special map 1 jackpot fluctuation), when the special map 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) are continuously set, various benefits can be continuously given to the player. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, one special symbol (special figure 2) wins the small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is suspended (variation display period). The measurement is suspended), and when the small hit game is finished, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is restarted. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, and thus regardless of the number of small winning games executed during the special figure 2 variation advantageous period. Instead, it is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 variation advantageous period.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols (special diagram 1), the other special symbol that is changing (special diagram 2) is displayed as a stop display mode. It is configured to force stop. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hit game is executed during the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is changed according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out of sync. Stop display in the display mode shown, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (lottery result that can give the second privilege different from the first privilege to the player), fluctuation of the other special symbol Is stopped until the grant of the second privilege is completed (until the small hit game is completed), and is restarted after the grant of the second privilege is completed. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of alignment, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With such a configuration, the lottery result of the other special symbol (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) can be changed based on the lottery result of the one special symbol, and the player's A variety of game play can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol fluctuation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of the lottery result which gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result which gives the privilege. Even if it does, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result will be out of order, and it is possible to suppress excessive bonuses from being given to the player. In case of, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed, in order to prevent the privilege based on the lottery of the other special symbol being given during the small winning game, the variable display Only the measurement of the period can be suspended.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are changing at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous bonus, and the most advantageous bonus given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation that the player is not allowed to do so, and it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, the short period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), It is configured so that a small hit game can be frequently executed. Then, the condition that the latent probability state is set as the game state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the condition that the latent probability state ends is the first special symbol The case where the big hit game is executed is displayed in a stop manner in which the big hit is displayed. Therefore, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period will be set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the latent state In the state in which is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2) can be performed efficiently.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent probability state is set (based on the setting of the latent probability state), the player is informed of the period during which the latent probability state is set (FIG. 7(a)). ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol is also the second symbol. Both special symbols may change.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing Until the special symbol stops changing, the lottery for the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent state, and there is a problem that the small hit game is not executed regardless of the RUSH state. I was afraid.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the variation situation of the second special symbol (whether or not there is variation, The remaining fluctuation period) is discriminated, and the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the discrimination result.

Specifically, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is notified when it is determined that the new second special symbol can be changed. I am configuring. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the new small variation of the second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed, despite the fact that the RUSH state has been notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied, the period from the state in which the new second special symbol can be changed to the feasible state until the latent state ends is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without the small hit game being executed, although the RUSH state has been notified.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, the gaming state is changed by shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. Configured to set the latent state, if you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, without shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts , It is configured to continue the probability change state even during the change of the jackpot. With such a configuration, different game characteristics can be provided according to the type of special symbol.

Incidentally, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, even when the jackpot is won by lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It may be configured to set a latent state as a game state by shifting to, and only when a particular jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types, at the time when the jackpot variation starts normally It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, measure the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, shift the high probability state of ordinary symbols to a low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Therefore, the latent state may be set as the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, the latent state is set in the period until the jackpot variation ends at the time when the jackpot variation starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, based on the fact that it is predicted that the jackpot is won in the starting winning process (see FIG. 47), the jackpot variation corresponding to the predicted winning information ends. It may be configured to set the latent state until a period (a plurality of fluctuation periods).

In the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol varies during the latent probability state setting, a constant variation pattern table Although it is configured to use (see FIG. 19(b)), the invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the second special symbol changes after the latent state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it has been done and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), refer to the data table in which the average fluctuation time is about 2 seconds, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol. When the number of times has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to the data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 1 second. Thus, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the big variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small hit games can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the big hit variation in the probability changing state, but in addition to this, the special symbol lottery result is a specific deviation or a small hit. In this case, the latent state may be set during the variable display, or the special symbol lottery result may be out of the specified range or the number of small wins may reach a predetermined number during the certainty state. In this case, the latent state may be set.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the first embodiment described above, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) In addition, the gaming state in which the big hit is changing is defined as the latent probability state, and when the latent probability state is set, the small hit game is easily executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the game state is changed during the symbol fixing period (period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the special symbol lottery result. It is configured to let. In other words, in the state where the probability variation state is set, if you win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol showing the jackpot) When the display is stopped), the latent state is set as the game state.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a different symbol settlement period is set based on the special symbol lottery result. With this configuration, it is possible to change the length of the period in which the latent probability state, which is advantageous to the player, is set according to the length of the set symbol determination period. Further, as in the first embodiment described above, compared to the configuration of setting the latent state corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol (the period during which the special symbol is changed), the symbol determination period of the special symbol (special Since the configuration for setting the latent state corresponding to (the period during which the symbol is stopped) is used, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the latent state is set can be simplified. The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, once the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot is won. However, in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot Even if not winning, if the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability change state is set reaches a predetermined number (50 times)) is satisfied, the probability change state is ended It is different in that it is configured into. With such a configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically allow the player to play a game for shifting to the latent probability state during the period in which the probability variation state is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of a game flow when a specific jackpot (big hit C) is won by a lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game is started from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88(c)). The latent state is set in the period until it is executed (the symbol fixing period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, as in the above-described first embodiment, a game for performing the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed. Also, if you win the small hit of the special figure 2 during the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1, while the small hit game is being executed, it is configured to interrupt the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery result is missed or a small hit, a different symbol determination period is set according to the lottery result. Thereby, the player desires that a long period is set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result of the special map 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set (the lottery result of winning the jackpot), In the state where the latent probability state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol determination period in order to execute the lottery of special figure 2 more.

In other words, in the second embodiment in which the symbol determination period is changed according to the lottery result, in the case where a long symbol determination period is desired and a short symbol determination period is desired, depending on the game state and the type of special symbol. And can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol settlement periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol settlement period in advance due to the variable display contents of the special symbol, and which symbol settlement period is set for the special symbol lottery this time. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the configuration described above, for the variation effect (effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) executed corresponding to one variation time (variation pattern) Since it is configured to set a plurality of types of symbol determination period, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after performing the special symbol lottery, the next special symbol can be lottered It is possible to unify the variation effects even when the time until is set complicatedly.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, a state in which the probability variation state is set, that is, when the remaining time reduction number is 47 times, showing the flow of the game when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won Therefore, the latent probability state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the jackpot of Special Figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability variation state ends (the value of the probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability variation state is set) Is configured so that the latent probability state is set from the timing when the big hit variation starts.

With such a configuration, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, the advantageous periods having different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot in special figure 1. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while wishing to win the jackpot at a timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability variation state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special figure 1 game and the awarded points after the probability variation state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the gaming state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state in which the probability variation state is set, and the number of times of lottery (number of times of special figure fluctuation). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability variation state is continuously set until the number of times of special symbol lottery (the number of fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning the jackpot. If you win the jackpot between the number of special symbol lottery (number of fluctuations) 1 to 49 times, you can change the probability of the jackpot, and the special symbol showing the jackpot will be stopped. The latent state is set during the fixed period. As a result, the player is provided with the latent probability state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and the jackpot game after the latent probability state has ended as a privilege.

Next, when the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times of change) is a big win in the 50th time, the latent probability state is set during the change of the big hit and during the symbol fixing period. As a result, the player is awarded a bonus probability state game (RUSH game) from jackpot variation to the end of the symbol determination period, and a jackpot game after the latent probability state has ended. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the condition for transition to the latent probability state (big win) is satisfied when the specific condition (specific lottery number (50th)) is satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the advantageous privilege is given to the player more than when the condition for shifting to the latent state is satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied.

Then, when the number of times of special symbol lottery exceeds 50 times, the predetermined number of probability changes is reached, and the normal state is set as the game state. If you win the jackpot during this normal state, during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and during the symbol determination period, the normal state continues, the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery number (the number of fluctuations) is out of the range from the 1st to the 49th time since the probability variation state was set, during the variation of the special symbol, and the probability variation state during the symbol determination period. Continuing, if it is off at the 50th time, during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and because the latent probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, the latent state from the special symbol change to the end of the symbol confirmation period A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the second embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol in the probability variation state, and the symbol determination period, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, other than the jackpot (out , Small hit), it is configured so that a long time can be easily selected. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation time is “60 seconds to 180 seconds”. The variable time is selected, and the symbol confirmation period of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the jackpot (for example, out), that It is configured such that the variation time of "5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the variation time and the symbol determination period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination period.

By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery result, and the latent probability state game (RUSH game) depending on the number of times the lottery is 330 seconds at the maximum (when the jackpot is won at the 50th special figure variation frequency), the minimum It is possible to provide to the player with a width of 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won at the 1st to 49th changes in the special figure). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how long the latent state this time will last.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, if the special symbol lottery number (variation number) since the probability variation state is set is the 50th time, during the change of the special symbol, and , Since the latent state is set during the symbol confirmation period, even if you do not win the jackpot during the probability variation state, the latent state game (RUSH game) to the player Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent state game (RUSH game) than the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the big hit is won. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot experience the latent state game (RUSH game) even though the game has been played for a long time, and the situation in which he/she gets tired of the game occurs.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the probability state is set based on winning the jackpot during the probability variation state, the latent state is set longer than when the probability state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is in the latent probability state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting that the big hit game is executed.

Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in some cases where the latent state is set without winning the jackpot, it is equivalent to when the latent state is set based on winning the jackpot. Or, the variation time and the symbol fixed period corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol other than the big hit (out, small hit) are set so that the latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a situation in which it is advantageous not to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is easy to set a long latent probability state when a big jackpot is won during the probability variation state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability is won without winning the jackpot during the probability variation state. A long latent state may be set when the state is set. In this case, for example, the number of probability changes (number of times of special symbol lottery (variation number) in which the probability change state is continuously set) is 50, and the probability change state, that is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/20 It is preferable that the long latent probability state is set when the result of the lottery for special symbols is missed for 50 consecutive times (about 7%).

Next, of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, since the latent probability state is set during the symbol fixing period, the special figure 1 for the effect contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the second embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display), so the latent probability state is set. The display of the effect mode (super chance zone display) showing the state where the variation of the second special symbol is executed over the timing, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during the period in which the second design for display is stopped (confirmed). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has been won in the jackpot is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol during the probability changing state. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 90(a), since the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed, the player has the special symbol 1 display area. By understanding the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, it is possible to relate to the future game flow. It is possible to play the game in a state where the information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game is finished) is acquired in advance.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent probability state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the falling lottery (special symbol) is performed when the special symbol lottery is performed in the latent probability state. The lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to understand whether or not the current latent probability state is an advantageous latent probability state advantageous for the player. You can play games with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area is reduced, or other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitter attached to the game board 13 or other than the third symbol display device 81 is provided. A liquid crystal display device or the like) may be used for display. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the latent probability state to have been set. Therefore, the jackpot game is executed after the latent probability state game (RUSH game) ends. It is possible to perform the game while predicting whether or not the falling lottery is being executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game).

Further, in the present embodiment, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, until the fixed display period (symbol fixed period) elapses, the display mode of the third symbol is changed. Although it is configured to be completely stopped without changing, it is not limited to this as long as it informs the player that the special symbol is currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period), for example, The variable display of the third symbol is stopped during the fixed display period, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be discriminated by the player. You may comprise so that a design may be rocked.

In addition, the player is currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period), or because the right of the special symbol lottery to be newly executed has not yet been acquired, a new lottery for the special symbol (change) ) May be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify whether or not the state is not executed. For example, "fixed display" or "standby" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. It is also possible to display the command of "" or to change the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol between "fixed display" and "standby". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a new lottery will not be started during the confirmed display period, despite the fact that the storage is held.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), the display contents at the time of entry of the latent probability state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90(b), in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so the latent probability state game (RUSH game) An effect mode showing that the player enters the game is executed during a period in which the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 are changed in the second embodiment. It is different in that it is done. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is replaced with the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and the jackpot type selection table 202e is replaced with the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ab. Is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided, and further, a deviation type selection table 202ad is provided, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time saving counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa) set after the jackpot. The difference is that the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa defines the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time saving counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are defined for each jackpot type.

Specifically, when the big hit type (big hit A1 to big hit A3) in which the same big hit operation content as the big hit A of the big hit type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed (when the big hit is won). The value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f when the gaming state is "normal state" or the latent probability state, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state or the probability variation state. Therefore, the value of “50” is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) "0 to 19," the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23," and the jackpot A3 is defined in "24." In other words, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackets A1 to A3) is executed at 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20/ 25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player is won, a short symbol fixing period is provided as a period (symbol fixing period) for displaying the lottery result stopped by the player. If selected, the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, for the special symbol lottery, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the jackpot is won, but also to the length of the symbol fixing period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration in which the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol fixed period may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol determination periods with respect to a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a game property which is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned big hits A1 to A3, big hits B1 to B3, big hits C1 to C3, and big hits D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

Specifically, when the big hit type (big hit B1 to big hit B3) in which the same big hit operation content as the big hit B of the big hit type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed (when the big hit is won). The value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f when the game state is "normal state" or the latent probability state, and the value of "100" is set to the time saving state or the probability variation state. Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is specified to be set to a value of "0".

Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot B1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot B3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) “25 to 29”, the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of “20 to 23”, and the jackpot A3 is defined in “24”. That is, in A2 of the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackets A1 to A3) is executed at 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and 80% of them ( 20/25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the above-described first embodiment for each small hit type (small. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) is further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Specifically, as the small hit type for which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 falls within the range of "0 to 9". , "Small hits A1" with a symbol determination time of "0.2 seconds", in the range of "10-89", "Small hits A2" with a symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds", "90 to 93" In the range of “”, “small hit A3” having a symbol fixed time of “1.5 seconds” is defined.

Then, as the small hit type for which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit B of the above-described first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "94 to 95", and the symbol is determined. "Small hits B1" when the time is "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", "Small hits B2" when the symbol determination time is "0.5 seconds" is a value of "98" A "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Further, as a small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the first embodiment described above is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "99" and the symbol fixed time is "1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

Next, the contents of the disconnection type selection table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. This deviation type selection table 202ad is referred to for selecting the deviation type when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation, and is different in correspondence with the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired. A fixed time is specified.

In the present embodiment, because the special symbol lottery results cannot be duplicated, the special symbol lottery results are the same as the small hit and the missed result (the value of the small hit type counter C5. ), the type is selected. As a result, the number of counters included in main controller 110 can be reduced. The configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration, and different counters may be used depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a small hit or a miss.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the disconnection type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93(b), the symbol type (off-type) whose symbol determination time is 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds is a small hit corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is defined in correspondence with the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, as the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to set the lottery result of the big hit, the small hit, and the miss, and further, it is possible to set a different symbol fixing time for each lottery result. Is configured. Thereby, even when the special symbol lottery results are the same, different symbol fixing times can be set.

Here, for example, the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and when the latent probability state is set during the symbol fixing period, the longer the symbol fixing time is selected (for example, 150 seconds) Since the period in which the latent state is set can be lengthened, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is wrong, the longer the symbol determination time is selected, the smaller the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery) becomes, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the case where the latent state is set in the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) In the latent state game (RUSH game) to execute the lottery, if the lottery result of the special drawing 2 is a small hit, or if it is out, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and the predetermined latent state Since the number of special figure 2 lottery that can be executed during the period (the symbol fixing period of special figure 1) decreases, it is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, the advantage degree of the set symbol determination period can be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player can be provided with novel game playability.

In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set, and is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of times of special symbol lottery, it is configured to vary the degree of advantage provided to the player, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the special symbol lottery Only when the symbol-fixing period of the special symbol indicating that the prize has been won is longer than the predetermined period, the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying a preferable image, or the music played during the jackpot game. The selecting operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol fixing period.

Next, the contents of the time saving/probability change second table 202ac2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability change second table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time saving/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 is different from the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)) of the above-described first embodiment in the variation pattern corresponding to FIG. They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving/probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the stop display period (symbol fixing period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) during the probability variation state. Since it is configured, the variable display period of Toku-zu 1 during the probability change state is shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, the probability variation counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment described above, and the special figure 1 symbol in-determination flag 203ab, the special figure 2 The difference is that a symbol finalizing flag 203ac, a special figure 1 finalizing time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 finalizing time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of times of special symbol lottery executed in a high probability state of a special symbol (latent probability state, probability variation state), and a period for which the special symbol lottery is executed with high probability. Is for indicating.

The probability variation counter 203aa has a value defined in correspondence with the jackpot type selected at the timing of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON in the jackpot ending process (see S2312 of FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). Similarly, it is also referred to when performing the lottery for the second special symbol (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) has passed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol that has been won for the jackpot has passed. ..

The special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop display of special figure 1 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol determination period). This special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 of FIG. 100) (see S2802 of FIG. 100), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (FIG. 99). (Refer to S257). When it is determined that the symbol fixing period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to OFF.

The special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop display of special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol determination period). This special map 2 symbol determination flag 203ac, the special symbol target flag 203ab during the above-mentioned special symbol 1 symbol determination, the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol) The only difference is the change to 2), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special figure 1 decision time counter 203ad, special figure 2 decision time counter 203ae is the counter for measuring the symbol decision period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) When the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the symbol determination period of this time is set in the corresponding counter. The value of the counter is decremented and the values of the special-figure 1 fixed-time counter 203ad and the special-figure 2 fixed-time counter 203ae are set to 0 in the fixed-time process (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed. In this case, a process of ending the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is executed.

In the second embodiment, different symbol settlement periods are set according to the type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent probability state is set as the game state during the symbol fixing period.

Next, the information stored in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa, the special figure 2 decision counter 223ab, and the remaining decision time information storage area. The difference is that 223ac and a flag under determination 223ad are added.

The special figure 1 decision counter 223aa is a counter for measuring a period (symbol decision period) in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol decision period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main controller 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 is set.

The value set in the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol fixing period of the special symbol (first special symbol), so this special symbol By managing the value of the 1-determination counter 223aa, it becomes possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent state is continuously set.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 (during the latent state game), if the small hit of the second special symbol is won, the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa during the small hit game. It is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol determination period of special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the symbol determination period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, a small hitting game counter for measuring the period during which the small hitting game is executed is provided, and the small hitting game counter is used to continuously set the small hitting game in the latent probability state. May be configured to calculate the cumulative period of time, or a suspension counter for measuring a period during which the flag for suspending the subtraction process of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set, and the suspension thereof is performed. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period during the small hitting game during the latent state that is continuously set using the medium counter.

In this way, by notifying the player of the result of the latent state game (RUSH game) of this time by calculating the cumulative interruption information in which the period in which the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1 is interrupted is accumulated. You can Furthermore, as a detailed game result of the latent probability state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of winning small prizes, and the above-mentioned interruption accumulation Based on the information and, based on the information, a game result indicating whether or not there are more benefits than the design value (or more than past history), and whether or not the number of winning balls is greater than the number of small wins won. The player may be informed of the game result shown or the game result indicating whether or not the interruption cumulative information is long with respect to the number of small hits won. Alternatively, the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, or the cumulative interruption information may be notified.

Special figure 2 decision counter 223ab is the counter for measuring the period (symbol decision period) in which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol decision period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from main controller 110 When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-described special figure 1 decision counter 223aa except that the measurement target is the symbol decision period of special figure 2 instead of the symbol decision period of special figure 1, and the detailed description thereof is given. The description is omitted.

Remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac, the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time of interrupting the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (Special symbol 1) (temporary stop of special symbol 1) It is a data area for storing the remaining fixed time information shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol settlement period is set based on the remaining settlement time information stored in the remaining settlement time information storage area 223ac. As a result, by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hit game ends and the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period is restarted, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends.

When it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received in the command determination processing 2 (see S4162 of FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4219 of FIG. 106: Yes). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 of FIG. 108). Then, read when setting the effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol settlement period in the restart process (see S4952 of FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108). It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and referred to when determining the additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified by the establishment of various notification conditions in this way, the remaining period of the symbol fixing period, that is, the latent state game, The information indicating the remaining period that can be executed can be acquired by grasping the effect modes of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol fixed period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided range is given to the player. Although it is configured to inform the player, the player can roughly understand the remaining period of the latent state game and provide the player with a fun of predicting a specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to notify the player of a specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmation flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmation period) is in progress, and is set to ON when the special symbol stop display period (symbol confirmation period) is in progress. It This in-fixing flag 223ad is configured such that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are set to ON even if any special symbol is in the symbol fixing period. There is.

The determination flag 223ad is executed in the command determination processing 2 (see S4152 of FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 when it is determined that a symbol determination related command is received (S4254 of FIG. 106: Yes). The related process (see S4255 in FIG. 110) is turned on (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108), when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (see S4951 of FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol fixing period. Is referred to in order to determine whether or not (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command is received in the restart processing (S4952 of FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related processing 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108) (S5001: Yes of FIG. 109). , The reference state is referred to in order to determine whether or not the changing state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol fixing period (see S5051 of FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special view 2) (when the small hit game is executed), or at the time when the small hit game is finished. It is determined whether the variation state of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in the variable display period or the symbol determination period, and based on the determination result, the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped (variable display period, It is configured to set a process when suspending subtraction of the symbol determination period) and an effect mode when restarting the special figure 1 (variable display period, restart of subtraction of the symbol determination period).

With such a configuration, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is appropriately processed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small hit is won in the lottery. can do.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is a special symbol variation process 2 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) First special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 102), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process Second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 103) instead of (see FIG. 45), special figure 2 disengagement stop processing 2 (see FIG. 105) instead of special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 46) The difference is that the first special symbol determination period setting process (see FIG. 100) and the second special symbol determination period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the content of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are largely different from those in the above-described first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment described above, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one special symbol (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol that was won for the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. The jackpot game was executed immediately after the variable display period was ended. As a result, the player can continuously execute two different privilege games (a game that frequently causes a small hit in the latent state and a big hit game), and the player can frequently perform a large number of games in a short period of time. It was possible to give the privilege of.

Furthermore, since the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good, it is generally set to the latter half of the two bonus games in which the big hit game, which has a greater privilege to be given to the player than the small hit game, is set. , Was able to eagerly obtain the privilege in the game (big hit game) executed in the second half.

In addition, since the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot variation, a period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed can be set in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and the privilege is excessively given to the player.

Further, the period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed is changed according to the variation pattern selected when the jackpot is won. In other words, one lottery of the special symbol is configured to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game and the length of the game period of the latent probability state game (RUSH game), so the latent state game ( It was possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 110 as compared with the case of executing the processing using the dedicated selection table in order to preset the length of the game period of the (RUSH game).

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of (RUSH game) game periods, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) in advance, and there is a possibility that the data area for storing the fluctuation patterns may be pressed.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol confirmation period) is also a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is configured as described above, and is configured to change the length of the symbol fixing period according to the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With such a configuration, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by combining (combining) the variation time of the special symbol and the symbol fixing period, so the latent state A plurality of patterns can be set for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the latent probability state game (RUSH game), it is configured so that a different symbol fixing period is set according to the lottery result, so it is set. By the symbol determination period, it is possible to make the number of lottery of special figure 2 executed during a predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of special figure 1) different.

In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol which will set the game period of the latent probability state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol finalization period be set, and the latent state game (RUSH game) In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during, it becomes a game property that a shorter symbol fixed period is desired to be set, and the novelty that a different lottery result that is different depending on the special symbol type targeted for the lottery is desired. A certain playability can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state (subtraction process of the time saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of variation of the special symbol, and a high probability state of the special symbol. Is configured to execute the process for shifting to the low probability state (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) at the end of the symbol determination period of the special symbol, and in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, and special in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. When the number of variations of the symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (50), the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state.

In other words, in the state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, when the number of times of variation of special symbols (number of times of lottery) reaches 50 times, the variation (50th variation) ) The timing of the game state transitions to the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) at the timing when the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (the symbol determination period ends) At the time), the game state is configured to be able to shift to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol).

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (50th variation period (including the symbol fixing period)). , It is possible to make the player easily experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). Special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154), in addition to the special symbol variation process (S154) in the above-described first embodiment, the point of adding the process of S251 and S252, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) The difference is that the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) are replaced by the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263).

In the special symbol variation process 2 (S154), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the special figure 1 symbol finalizing flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). If it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and S209 of Move to processing.

If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S206 described above (S206: No), or if the processes of S208 and S257 are executed, It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol in-determination flag 203ac is set to ON. Yes (S252).

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is not set to on (S252; No), that is, by the processing of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special figure 2). When it is determined that the symbol is not being displayed even during the variation display, the second special symbol variation start process is executed to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the book The process ends. In addition, since the processing content of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that, the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 instead of the process of S402. The difference is that the process (S451) for determining whether or not to execute is executed.

In other words, in the above-described first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the special symbol jackpot is won. Although the probability variation flag 203g for indicating that it is a high probability state was used, in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot win (first end condition) In addition, there is a second ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of times of variation (lottery number) of the special symbol in the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of lottery) until the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the lottery of the special symbol being executed. Is configured to be.

It should be noted that the configuration other than the present embodiment may be any configuration as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the above-described second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be configured to use, or a variation count counter that constantly measures the variation count (lottery count) of the special symbol regardless of the game state is provided, and the setting situation of the probability variation flag 203g, It may be configured to determine the number of times the special symbol fluctuates during the probability variation state based on the number of changes of the variation counter.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of times of variation of the special symbol, that is, the number of times of variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are combined. Although the end condition (second end condition) for ending the probability variation state is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. Figure 1 fluctuation number counter and special figure 2 fluctuation number counter that measures only the fluctuation number (lottery number) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), for the fluctuation number (lottery number) of each special symbol It may be configured such that each end condition (end condition for ending the probability variation state) is set.

Further, in the second embodiment, as a termination condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol (for example, the probability variation state), in addition to the first termination condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of times the special symbol varies Although the second ending condition based on (the number of times of lottery) is provided, other ending conditions may be provided, and, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot (for example, a small hit). A third ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times reached reaches a predetermined number may be provided. Furthermore, the third ending condition is a lottery result of the first special symbol and a lottery result of the second special symbol. It may be set for each.

In addition, a time counter is provided to measure the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth termination condition that is satisfied when the time counter counts a predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth ending condition that may be established based on the lottery result and the number of times of lottery of the normal symbols executed in the state that is performed may be provided.

In addition, when any of the plurality of ending conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. Good, for example, just before starting the lottery for special symbols, immediately after the lottery for special symbols is performed, the timing to start the variation of the special symbols, a predetermined time after the variation of the special symbols is started (for example, 5 seconds) timing, timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and a stop display period of the special symbol (the symbol is fixed) The transition may be made at any timing of the end timing of (period).

Thus, by providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol and the timing for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol when the end condition is satisfied, it is special for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand when the high probability state of the symbol continues, at which timing (when the special symbol starts changing, when changing stops, at the end of the symbol fixing period), so it is difficult for the player to get nervous. You can play a game while giving a feeling.

Other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, a first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), in contrast to the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment, a process (S851 to S858) executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol. , S860) is added, and the contents of the reset processing when the first special symbol (special figure 1) won for the jackpot are stopped and displayed are different. Since other processes are the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the condition under which the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process of setting a period (symbol fixing period) for which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol setting being set The process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol fixed period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, in the process of determining whether or not it is the timing to end the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes of FIG. 97), and the processing of S251, that is, the present is the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the process of determining whether or not it is in the stop display, when it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is in the stop display (special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON) (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes) is executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the processing of S206 of FIG. 97, When executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) by determining that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is 0, the special figure 1 symbol finalizing flag 203ab is not set to ON Therefore, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S851: No), and the first special symbol fixing period setting process is executed ( S852).

In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol determination period) during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol fixed period setting process which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol fixed period setting process (S852), the fixed time (symbol fixed period) is set, the process of setting a command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol of this time (special symbol) When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, the process for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is executed.

In the second embodiment, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, if the special symbol jackpot is won (first time saving end condition), the ordinary symbol In the state where the high probability state is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol changes (lottery number) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) (second time saving end condition), and two time saving ends If there is a condition and the above-mentioned first time saving end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped (the start timing of the symbol settlement period), When the 2 o'clock end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery for the special symbol is executed). ..

In this way, a plurality of conditions (time saving end condition) that trigger the transition of the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low probability state is changed according to the satisfied time saving end condition. By configuring, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the gaming state (time saving state, probability variation state), the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at which timing for the player who is playing the game Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the game state (normal state or latent state) will be entered, it is possible to constantly pay attention to the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

In the second embodiment, it is configured to shift the state of the normal symbol with the above-mentioned content, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the special symbol has started, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, The special symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has passed, or the special symbol stop display period (symbol fixing period) is configured to shift at any timing May be.

In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the determination time (symbol determination time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time corresponding to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, out-of-range type selection table ad) used in the lottery for special symbols Since the (symbol fixing period) is defined, a value indicating the fixing time (symbol fixing period) corresponding to the type to be stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 fixing time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a big hit and the big hit type selected using the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is a big hit A3, it is determined. Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol fixing period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 fixing time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for setting the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) this time is a jackpot. In this case, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Thereby, only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol jackpot is won (first time saving end condition) and the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol changes (lottery number) is a predetermined number of times ( For example, when 50 times) is reached (second time saving end condition) and when two time saving end conditions of are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time saving end condition is satisfied. Since it is configured to preferentially execute the process of determining whether or not the second time saving end condition is satisfied than the process to be performed, when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is set, the special symbol jackpot is won. Even in this case, the process of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the processing of S2803 or S2804, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 in the processing of S2805 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), the status command indicating the latent probability status is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2808. After the processing of S2806 or S2807 is executed, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851 (S851: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S853. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S251 of FIG. 97: Yes), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 When (see S257 of FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 decision time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is during the symbol decision period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and this process ends. During this fixed time process (S860), the process for updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period is executed, or the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period that has been temporarily stopped based on the fact that the small hit game is executed is updated. The processing for restarting the processing is executed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the determination time (symbol determination period) The special map 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to OFF (S854). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: Yes), the process of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, a process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), and the subtraction is performed. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa later becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. If you do, because the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed, during the variable display period of the target special symbol, and during the symbol determination period, the high of the special symbol It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, by the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, even if the above-described probability variation ending condition is satisfied, during the variable display period of the first special symbol, during the symbol determination period, a high probability state of the special symbol The variation of the second special symbol (lottery) can be executed in the state where is set.

The contents of the state command set in the process of S857 described above will be specifically described. When the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is greater than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state is set, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is a time saving state. The status command is set. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), if the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0, the gaming state is a latent state. Is set and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, the state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), the residual probability variation number command is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, the information indicating the residual probability variation number. The state command and the residual probability variation number command set in the process of S857 are output to the audio lamp controller 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). This allows the voice lamp control device 113 side to properly determine the current game situation.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. Transition to the state, the second time saving end conditions (conditions that are satisfied according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of times of lottery)) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol. When the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of lottery)) is satisfied while the state is changed to the probability state In the special symbol stop display period (symbol fixing period) at the end timing, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state.

With this configuration, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set as the gaming state can be made different according to the time saving end condition to be established. , It is possible to expect not only a big hit as a result of the special symbol lottery, but also a longer period of time in which an advantageous game state is set.

Next, the special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the big hit medium flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment ( S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process during the fixed time (S860).

In the processing during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period when the small hit game is being executed, in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is configured not to be executed. In other words, in the processing of S2901 of the processing during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, after the small hit game ends, the special symbol Only when the variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. 203v is set to off (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game is finished, so the small hit game is executed. The processing of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the update processing of the symbol determination period which has been temporarily stopped by doing this.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 is executed. Process shifts to.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), in contrast to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 of FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, in place of the process of S1002, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that a process (S1051) for determining whether the value is greater than 0 is executed. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the contents of the process executed in S1051 described above are the same as the contents executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) described above, detailed description thereof will be given. The description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, regarding the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) which is one process in the special symbol variation process (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), in addition to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 of FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, the point of adding the process of S1551 to S1563, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509 and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. Other processes are the same as the second special symbol variation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

This second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), like the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), the symbol determination period has elapsed after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. The process up to is performed, and is different in that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). In addition, among the various processes executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), only the control target for the various processes of the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) The detailed description is omitted for the processing that only changes the symbol types.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). When it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one process in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 of FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fixed period setting process (S1552). This second special symbol fixed period setting process (S1552), the first special symbol target symbol type for the process executed in the first special symbol fixed period setting process (see S852 of FIG. 100) described above. Change from the 2nd special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the 2nd special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the 1st symbol display device 37 is the 2nd special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the detailed description of this process will be omitted by referring to the contents of the above-described first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100).

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is, When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), and this processing ends.

The process of S1563 is to update the display of the second special symbol which is already stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in order to show that the special symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device 37, the symbol is lit and displayed (including a display that blinks at high speed so that the player recognizes that it is lit). Since it is configured as described above, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In the case of using the configuration in which the special symbol is simply turned on during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104) In the process of S3009, the second special symbol is configured to output an instruction to stop changing (stop display), and also output information indicating a period (symbol fixing period) to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (symbol fixing) During the period), the second special symbol may be preset to be lit and displayed. With such a configuration, in the processing executed in a short cycle, it is not necessary to execute the processing for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time, so the processing load of the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555), and when it is decided that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa. It is determined whether the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, in the processing of S1555, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 in the processing of S1556. (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1558.

In the process of S1558, a state command according to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S1558), then a special figure 2 fixed period end command is set (S1559), and then the above-described first embodiment. The same processing of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). ) Is executed, and this processing ends.

After the processing of S1505 is finished, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (which is one process in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 deviation stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment described above in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 59). (See FIG. 106), except that the various counter update process 2 (see FIG. 111) is executed in place of the various counter update process (see FIG. 71), and the other processes are the same. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control contents executed by the main controller 110 from the first embodiment and the various kinds of additions from the second embodiment are received. A process to update the counter value has been added.

First, with reference to FIG. 106, the command determination processing 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) is different from the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S4215, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), it is next determined whether or not the remaining number related command is received (S4251). ).

Here, as the remaining number related command, the remaining short time count command (set by the process of S603 of FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set Command) and a high probability state of the special symbol, the residual probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 of FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the residual variation number of the special symbol) that is continuously set. When it is determined that the remaining count related command has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining count update processing 2 (S4252) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update processing 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) is different from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that a command for displaying the number of residual probability changes is added to the process for transmitting to the display control device 114.

In the remaining number update processing 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining short time count command is received from the main control device 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining short time count command has been received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining short time count command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining short time count command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851: YES), the display residual probability variation number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4251, when it is determined that the remaining number related command is not received (S4251: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop related command is received (S4219). Here, in the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 46). And the variable display of the first special symbol that is temporarily stopped, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) set when restarting the stop display is included. If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and the present process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, a temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment, will be described. .. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), in the variable display of the first special symbol, or when the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol A process for executing a variation display mode or an effect mode corresponding to the stop display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S4951). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the restart processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the processing of S4951, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4951: Yes), that is, the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) along with the execution of the small hit game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, it is then determined whether the finalizing flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the in-fixing flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953: Yes), since the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed (during the symbol fixing period), the set symbol fixing time is set. The remaining time of (the symbol fixed time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the value of the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol decision time of the first special symbol is read to calculate the remaining time of the set symbol decision time. Next, it is determined whether the symbol remaining time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), the period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4955, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. It is determined whether or not (S4957). In the processing of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is confirmed that the remaining remaining time information storage area 223ac is the normal remaining remaining time. The period B shown is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the processing of S4957 that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is long. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4953, when it is determined that the flag 223ad being confirmed is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is in the variable display period of the first special symbol, The temporary stop related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4220 of FIG. 67) is executed to perform the process (see S4903 to S4908) for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol, and the process of S4952. Move to. The process for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952) which is one process in the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the content of the restart processing (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed during the stop display (during the symbol determination period). Since it is configured, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily interrupting the subtraction of the symbol fixing period) Is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hit game is finished, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol fixing period is restarted). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol, or the situation of the first special symbol when restarting the stop display is determined, and based on the determination result, the effect mode after restart is set. It is configured to do.

In the restart processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 restart command is received (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the committing flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the in-fixing flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, when the special figure 1 restart command is received, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the remaining decision is made. Based on the read of the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052) and the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa ( S5053), the additional display effect command for display corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the processing of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-fixing flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5056), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5051, when it is determined that the flag 223ad during confirmation is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is during the variable display of the first special symbol. If there is, the same processing of S5002 to S5005 as the fluctuation restart processing (S4902 of FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is not received (S4219: No), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation related command is received (S4254). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation related process (S4255) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and the present process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol determination related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol determination related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 determination command is received from the main control device 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, in the processing of S5071, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processing of S5072 and S5073 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for display corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is set to the special figure. The 2 confirmation counter 223ab is set (S5076), the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5077), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S5074, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the processing of S5075 and S5076 is skipped, the processing of S5077 is executed, and this processing ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processing 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is decremented by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is set. Then, the value of the sub special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is read (S5455). Next, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 finalization counter 223aa read in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , This process ends.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. In the second embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to fluctuate at the same time as in the first embodiment described above (so-called). , Simultaneous variation type), by executing the lottery (variation) of special figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the game state, it is possible to execute a large number of small hit games (RUSH games). Was configured.

Furthermore, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (a condition under which the RUSH game can be executed), in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first probability variation end that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 The condition and the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (50 times) are provided, and when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied, a big hit is won. When the special symbol indicating that the special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped and displayed (the symbol confirmation period) becomes the latent probability state, and the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the special symbol is variably displayed. The period (variable display period) and the symbol determination period are configured to be in a latent state.

In addition, the length of the symbol settlement period is configured to differ depending on the special symbol lottery result, and when the jackpot is won, the symbol settlement period is set longer than when the jackpot is not won. Was configured as.

In addition, if one of the special symbols (special map 1) is a big hit in the lottery, an invalid lottery that does not win the big prize in the other symbol (special map 2) is executed. In this invalid lottery, the value relating to the condition for changing the game state is not updated. Specifically, during the period when you win the jackpot in the lottery of special map 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol that wins the jackpot, and during the symbol fixing period), the lottery of special map 2 is executed Even if it does, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this manner, in the state where the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1, the period when the jackpot game for the jackpot winning is executed (variable display Until the period, the symbol settlement period) ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, so the special figure 2 can be relieved. Was able to carry out fluctuations.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the types of the probability variation ending conditions are increased more than in the second embodiment, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is longer than that in the second embodiment. doing. Specifically, as the probability variation end condition, the probability variation end condition (third probability variation end condition) is established when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 while the probability variation state is set, and the third When the probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the time when the small hit game is started.

Furthermore, the period when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the value of the time saving counter 203f) are the same (for example, "4. )), the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, if you do not win the jackpot, the game state transitions from the probability change state to the normal state Is configured.

That is, in the third embodiment, while the probability change state (high probability state for both the special symbol and the normal symbol) is set, the small symbol is won in the lottery of the special map 1, and the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game until the low probability state of the special symbol is set can be set to the latent probability state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the period during which the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning the small hit in the lottery of the special diagram 1. .. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the big hit is won in the final fluctuation in which the probability variation state ends, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final variation of the probability variation state is reached without winning the small hit, it is possible to set the latent state for a long time, so the player is expected to play until the end. It can be done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of privilege granted based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probability changing state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game content of the special figure 1 game after the probability variation state is set and the granted privilege. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state is set in a predetermined period after the jackpot is over (4 variations of the special symbol), and the number of variations during the probability variation state (after the jackpot) The content of the privilege given to the player is made different according to the number of fluctuations in the special map) and the lottery result of the special map.

Specifically, in the first and second special map 1 changes (special map 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, when the lottery result (lottery result of special map 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game that can win the prize ball, as a period during which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed, the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is a jackpot (symbol fixing period ) Is set. If the lottery result (lottery result of special map 1) is a small hit, the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of special map 1 as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is specified that the period until the number of special symbol fluctuations after the big hit reaches four times (the symbol fixing period) is set.

In other words, when you win the small hit in the first special drawing 1 lottery after the end of the big hit, the timing when the small hit game is started (the timing when the first special symbol fluctuation is stopped and the small hit game is executed ), the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set in the period from the end of the big hit until the end of the fourth special figure fluctuation. Therefore, as the period in which the latent probability state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period is set to "super long". In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special map 1) is missed in the first and second special map 1 fluctuations (special map 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no benefit is given to the player. Is never given.

In the third special map 1 variation (special map 1 lottery) after the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability variation state is set. I am configuring. Here, in the case of winning the small hit, in addition to during the small hit game, the period until the end of the fourth special figure fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, so after the above-described probability changing state is set. The period in which the latent probability state is set becomes shorter than that in the case where the small hit is won in the first and second special map 1 fluctuations (special map 1 lottery).

In addition, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set in the probability change state increases, a fluctuation having a long fluctuation time when the jackpot is won. The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the first to fourth special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability variation state is set, the period in which the latent probability state is set can be made longer easily. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special map change (special map lottery) after the probability variation state is set, that is, in the final variation of the special map in the probability variation state, the special map variation is started regardless of the result of the special map lottery. To the end (until the symbol determination period elapses) is set as the latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long variation time when the jackpot is won in the special figure final variation in the probability variation state (the fourth variation of the special figure after the probability variation state is set). Therefore, the length of the period in which the latent state is set is “long”.

Then, if the jackpot is not won due to the final change of the special figure in the probability changing state, the normal state is set after the symbol fixing period, and the special figure lottery for the fifth time and thereafter is executed.

<Regarding the effect display content in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set varies depending on the transition condition (probability change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probability variation state, a suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting to the player the possibility that the latent state is set and the timing when the latent state is set is executed. I am configuring.

Therefore, the display contents of the suggestive effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the display content of the jackpot game end screen (ending screen) in which the probability variation state is set will be described. FIG. 113A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113(a), in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in the main display area Dm, the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as those in the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 showing the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 showing the number of reserved balls of special figure 2. , Are formed.

FIG. 113(a) shows an end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the bonus map 1 jackpot, and shows that the lottery result of the bonus map 1 is a jackpot in the bonus map 1 display area Dm1. The stop display mode “777” of the third symbol is displayed, and “-” indicating that the special figure 2 change is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guide display area Dm3, the characters "left hit" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was played in the left hit game.

In the third embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, the game content (right hit or left hit) displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the big hit game is the same as the game content when the big hit is won. Is configured to be. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113(a) is a jackpot won during the left-handed game.

Further, in the center of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in the probability changing state set after the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestive effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, bingo is used as a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player whether the latent probability state is set or whether the jackpot is won during the period in which the probability variation state is set. The game is configured to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113(a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for 9 squares (3 vertical×3 horizontal) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of Toku-zu 1 executed in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the player is informed based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of the numbers described in the bingo card 820. An effect that suggests the game result (the lottery result of Toku-zu 1) is executed.

Next, the display content (effect content) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described with reference to FIGS. When the bingo game is started (when the change in Toku-zu 1 during the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113(b) is executed. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content displayed when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed after the jackpot is over.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. .. Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and the fact that the special figure 1 has been subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. Showing.

Further, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the current (special figure 1 variation (first time)) lottery result, and the lower right area. Displays a remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number “last 3” of the bingo game. Here, for example, an effect example in the case where the special figure 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability changing state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the variation of the special figure 1 variation (third time) when the special figure 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variation state is a big hit. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content during the change of the special figure 1 change (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started in the final change of the positive change state (special figure 1 change (fourth time)). It is configured so that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) for executing the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed by the right hitting game during the latent probability state.

Therefore, immediately after the final variation of the probability variation state is executed (after the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 variation (third time) has elapsed), the latent probability state is set so that the player can immediately perform a right-handed game. The effect result (bingo 2 row alignment display) for notifying that the setting is made is made before the special map 1 change (fourth time) when the latent state is set (during special map 1 change (third time)). It is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to set the latent probability state in a state where the player fully understands that the latent state is set.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, it is short when the jackpot or the small hit is not won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 in the final fluctuation of the probability variation state (when it is out). A variation pattern of variation time (1 second) is selected, and an effect result (bingo two-row aligned display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. .. As a result, it is possible to execute the failure effect of the bingo game without notifying the player that the latent state is actually set for a short time. Further, when the latent state for a short time is set, the fact that the player is to perform the right-handed game is not displayed in the guide display area Dm3, so that the annoyance of the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 114(a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114(a), the variation display of the special map 1 variation (third time) is displayed, and the lottery result "1" of the special map 1 variation (first time) and the special map 2 variation (second time) is displayed. “8” is displayed as the past history 823 on the left side of the main display area Dm, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. Then, in the bingo card 820, the cells corresponding to “1”, “8”, and “5” displayed in the current bingo game are changed to “cross marks”, and two lines of lines are formed and displayed. ..

Further, “double bingo” is displayed as the status display mode 821 indicating the current status, and a comment of “super lucky” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player of success in the bingo game during the fluctuation before the special map 1 fluctuation (fourth time) in which the jackpot is actually won, the player is presented with an effect. It is possible to provide a period in which the user can be satisfied with success and to notify in advance that the right-handed game needs to be performed from the next change.

In the present embodiment, as a comment for notifying that the right-handed game is to be performed from the next change (a comment for notifying that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent probability state is satisfied)) The sub display area Ds displays "It's about to be a right-handed game", but the player is informed in advance of the timing at which the latent probability state is set, that is, the right-handed game. It is only necessary to calculate, for example, a remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 change (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining change display period of the special figure 1 change (third time) and the symbol fixing period). It is also possible to provide a calculating means and notify the player of information based on the calculation result of the calculating means (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the fluctuation (3rd time) of Toku-zu 1).

In the third embodiment, when the probability variation state is set as the game state and a ball is entered into the second entrance 640 (when the starting condition of Toku-zu 2 is satisfied), A variation pattern of a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, the probability variation state is set for the period in which the latent probability state can be set. It becomes extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the variation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, so the right-handed game in the probability changing state can be a disadvantageous game that is disadvantageous to the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of intentionally performing an irregular game different from the display content during the probability variation state where “left hit” is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball is inserted into the second ball inlet 640 in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state (when the starting condition of Toku-zu 2 is satisfied). ), a variation pattern of a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. However, the variation pattern is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 variation during the probability variation state is set. The time may be configured to be a fluctuation time extremely longer than the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 (for example, 120 seconds).

With this configuration, for example, when the right-handed game is performed in a state in which the probability variation state is set ignoring the progress content of the suggestive effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the special map 2 fluctuation for a long time (for example, 120 seconds) is executed, even if the latent state is set thereafter (for example, the fluctuation of the special map 1 fluctuation (the fourth time) that is won the jackpot). Even if the display is started), because the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed, the latent probability state game (the game that executes the special figure 2 fluctuation while the latent probability state is set) is newly added. You can make it difficult to execute.

Then, in the present embodiment, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set based on the variation period of the special symbol (special symbol 1) and the symbol fixing period, so the latent state The longer the period from the setting of (the start of the predetermined special map 1 fluctuation) to the end of the running special map 2 fluctuation is, the longer the period during which the special map 2 fluctuation in the latent probability state can be executed (latent probability State game period) will be shortened. Further, in the state where the probability variation state is set, in order to reliably prevent the special figure 2 variation from being executed, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the latent probability state was set. When the right hitting game is started from the same, the latent state game period is shortened as well. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right hitting game, the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the player. The display content on the screen can be watched.

When the right hitting game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent state state game) shown in FIG. 114(b) is the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure fluctuation is a big hit after the end of the big hit (after setting the probability variation state). In this embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is set, a latent probability state game (RUSH game) is performed in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by a right-handed game. That is, during the latent probability state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

On the display screen shown in FIG. 114(b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "right hit" is provided in the guide display area Dm3, and the special figure 1 variation (4) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The display mode indicating that the special time 2) is changing, and the display mode indicating that the special time 2 change is being executed are displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the special mode 1 hold number display area Dm4 is displayed. "0" indicating that there is no reserved number in the special figure 1 is displayed, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number in the special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved sphere number display area Dm5.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from left to right while opening the treasure box 812 discovered on the way (the same effect as in the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub-display area Ds, the character "RUSH in progress" indicating that the latent probability game (RUSH game) is being displayed is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the latent state game (RUSH game) is currently in progress in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the above-described FIGS. 113 to 114, as the probability variation end condition for ending the probability variation state, if the second probability variation termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special symbol is satisfied, that is, the final variation of the probability variation state (4 An example of the display screen when the latent state is set in the second special map change) has been described. In the third embodiment, the probability variation end condition for terminating the probability variation state (transition of the probability variation state to the latent probability state) (condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the big win), 2nd probability variation end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), third probability change end condition (established based on the small win It is configured to shift the game state from the probability variation state to the latent probability state when any of the termination conditions is satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the above-described second probability variation end condition is satisfied. Explain the contents. FIG. 115A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents executed during the third special map change after the big hit (after the probability change state is set) and when the third special map change is a big hit. It is a figure.

In the present third embodiment, if the first probability variation end condition (winning for the special symbol jackpot) is satisfied, after the special symbol for indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, The latent state is configured to be set during the period until the stop display ends (the symbol fixing period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variation display period of the special figure 1 (during the special figure change), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has a special feature in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115(a). A display mode indicating that the display in FIG. 1 is being changed is displayed, and “left hit” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, “4” is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that one line has been established.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the first probability variation ending condition described above is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the symbol fixing period of the special symbol, it becomes a target. It is configured such that different numbers can be displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game a plurality of times during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the player is notified stepwise of information for indicating the final result of the bingo game this time. It is configured to do.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115(a), the special figure 1 is in a variable display, and shows a state in which one line of lines is established. For example, the type of the jackpot that was won this time is a long symbol confirmation. When the period (for example, 300 seconds) is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C), a different number as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game is displayed during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and finally, the effect that the result of the bingo game is "two lines are established" is executed.

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) can be changed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbols. As a result, the contents of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the end of the current special figure fluctuation can be grasped as the special symbol fluctuation display period elapses. The effect contents displayed on the display screen of the three-symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

If the type of jackpot that is won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a short symbol determination period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, "3") may be displayed and the result of the bingo game may be "one line is established".

With such a configuration, while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823), the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to correlate with the contents of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents and the result of the bingo game, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, the number of lottery results 821 displayed in the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, and the result of the bingo game is obtained. Although an effect that excites the player is shown as to whether or not (the number of established lines) is increased, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give a more advantageous privilege to the player when a lot of numbers are displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(b), the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability variation ending condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115( b) schematically shows an example of display contents executed during the second special map change after the big hit (after the probability variation state is set) and the second special map change is the small hit. It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the established probability variation ending condition. Specifically, if the first probability variation ending condition is satisfied, from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started until the stop display is completed (until the jackpot game is started) (target symbol) The symbol confirmation period) is set as a latent state and the second probability variation end condition is satisfied, from the time when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started until the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is ended. The period (variable display period of the target symbol and symbol determination period) is set as the latent state. That is, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 variation, regardless of which of the first probability variation ending condition and the second probability variation ending condition described above is satisfied.

On the other hand, when the third probability variation end condition is met, when the small hit is won in any of the multiple (4) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability variation state is set In, the latent state is set in the period from the start of the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit to the end of the stop display of the special symbol that is the final fluctuation of the probability variation state .. That is, if you win the small hit in the special drawing lottery (first special drawing lottery) executed immediately after the probability change state is set, the special symbol showing the result of the first special lottery (small hit) will stop After being displayed, the special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol fixing period) of the 2nd to 4th period is passed until the stop display of the special symbol showing the result of the 4th special diagram lottery is completed (multiple During the special map fluctuation period), the latent state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), when the third probability variation ending condition is satisfied, “ALL” that all numbers are targeted is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are established. The bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that the small hit is won is displayed in the special map 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) has started. Strike is displayed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present third embodiment, regarding whether or not the first probability variation ending condition or the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied, a special figure variation (special figure lottery) in which each probability variation ending condition is satisfied. ) Is configured to determine whether or not the condition is satisfied (preliminary determination) before being executed, whereas the third probability variation ending condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

With this configuration, the progress content of the suggestive effect (bingo game) that is displayed over a plurality of changes in the special symbol executed in the period in which the probability variation state is set is changed to the first probability variation end. Since it can be set in accordance with the condition or whether or not the second probability variation end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, and when the third end condition is satisfied. 115B, the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115B is executed, so that an unexpected effect can be provided.

In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine in advance whether or not the first probability variation ending condition and the second probability variation ending condition are satisfied, and not to determine in advance whether or not the third probability variation ending condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only the second probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol may be pre-determined.

Further, as the above-described pre-determination, when the jackpot is over (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the pre-determination is performed on the special map 1 that is held and stored, and the big hit is won in the special storage 1 that is held and stored. It is configured to determine whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

With such a configuration, a suggestive effect (bingo) that does not give a sense of incompatibility with respect to the number of special figure fluctuations that are executed until the jackpot is won and the amount of privilege given to the player by winning the jackpot (bingo Game) can be executed. In addition, by allowing the player to understand the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting future game results in advance.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 are changed in the third embodiment. It is different in that it is done. The other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the first random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202bb is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, and the large hit type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced. The big hit type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is replaced with the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided. This is different from the second embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, as compared to the first random number table 202a of the above-described second embodiment (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15A). The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be, and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117(a), in the case of a low probability state of a special symbol as a game state (normal state, time saving state), the first special symbol or the first special symbol obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is "0-9", and if it is "0-9", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the case of a high probability state of a special symbol as a game state (probability change state, latent probability state), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired It is determined whether it is in the range of "0 to 99", and if it is in the range of "0 to 99", it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the random number counter of 480 in total, the value of 10 in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined as the value for determining the big hit, and therefore the special symbol The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit random number table 202b (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15B) of the above-described second embodiment. The difference is that the lottery was changed to win the small prize. Here, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents defined in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "10-14", If any of "10 to 14", it is determined to be a small hit.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), since the same content as the small hitting random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) is defined, detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, in the third embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, normally It is configured to execute the process of shifting the high-probability state of the symbol to the low-probability state, that is, the process of shifting the gaming state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting the game state to the latent state during the probability changing state, so that the player who is executing the game in the probability changing state is motivated to play the game. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117(a))) , The odds of winning the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b))) is configured to be higher. As a result, during the probability change state Since the latent probability state will be set based on the small hit prize with a higher probability than if the latent probability state is set based on winning, the player who is executing the game in the probability changing state On the other hand, both a latent state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but a game aiming for a jackpot winning that is difficult to win, and a latent state game (RUSH game) only executed It is possible to play both a small win and a game that aims to win.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special symbol 1 is configured to be higher than the big hit probability of the special symbol 1 in the high-probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state, for example, even if the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is set to a low probability of 1/480. good. With this configuration, in the state where the probability variation state is set, if the small hit is won before the big hit is won, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) in which the big hit game is not executed is executed. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the above-described second embodiment in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters set after the jackpot is finished (time saving counter 203f, probability variation counter). 203aa, the fixed time counters 203ad, 203ae) are changed, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is a jackpot operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The contents of the jackpot operation that differ only in the number of rounds to be executed are specified, and for each jackpot type, a time saving counter 203f, a probability variation counter 203aa, a special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 fixed time. The value of the counter 203ae is defined.

Specifically, for the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, the big hit operation content in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, It is specified that the probability variation counter 203aa is set to a value of "4" and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set to a value indicating "5 seconds".

The jackpot B in which the symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "50 to 96". The jackpot operation contents in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation counter 203aa are " The value of "4" is set so that the value indicating "100 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C in which the symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "96 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation counter 203aa are " The value "4" is set so that the value indicating "300 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

Further, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "0 to 64". The big game operation contents in which the round game for opening the first attacker (the first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f is the probability variation counter 203aa. Is set to a value of “4”, and a value indicating “0.5 seconds” is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot E in which the symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation counter 203aa are " The value of "4" is set so that the value indicating "1 second" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the above-described second embodiment so that the jackpot can be easily won and the bonus given to the player in the jackpot game ( Prize ball) is configured to be less. With such a configuration, depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period during which the latent state is continuously set, the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player. Since it is possible to greatly vary the number, it is possible to provide the player with novel game playability.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won in contrast to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the provision is added. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b).

FIG. 118(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the above-described first embodiment in relation to the symbol type “special figure 1 Is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) in that the small hit type D is added as a small hit type corresponding to ". 16(b)). Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd, when winning the small hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1), regardless of the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired, the first attacker (first variable winning A small hit game is defined in which an opening operation for opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once. That is, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball in the small hit game is executed.

That is, in the third embodiment, the small hit prize of the special map 1 is set as an opportunity to set the latent probability state as the game state, not for the purpose of giving a bonus (prize ball) to the player by the small hit game. It is an object. As a result, when the small hit in the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect (see FIG. 115(b)) for notifying that fact is executed. Even if you do, because the small hit game has already ended (because the time required for the ball shot by the right hitting game to reach the right area is longer than the small hit game period), the latent state is smooth A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

In addition, when the small hit of special figure 1 is elected in the normal state, it is possible to execute the small hit game without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set to be as short as 0.02 seconds. Therefore, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the winning is achieved. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (at the time when the special symbol indicating the small hit prize is stopped and displayed), the first variable winning device 65 for the ball during the small hit game Since it is difficult to win the prize, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, an effect or a guide that emphasizes that the small hit is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 In the display area Dm3, the display of "right hitting" for guiding the right hitting game is not executed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a troublesome game operation. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to provide a notification means for notifying that the small hit of the special figure 1 has been won, and when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit win in the normal state is being played, the right hit display May be configured to be executed.

The fluctuation pattern selection 3 table 202be is different from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above in that it is referred to when the probability variation state is set, instead of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2, and the probability variation 3 table 202be1. Is different from the above in that a latent probability 3 table 203be2 is provided in place of the latent probability table 202f3 referred to when the latent probability state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119(a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the probability variation state is set. If it is set, the probability change 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latent probability state is set, the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is referenced.

Note that, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the value of the time saving counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are the same after the jackpot has ended, so the probability variation counter is the same. Since the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the game state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes a value greater than 0 is not set, the fluctuation referred to when the time saving state is set It does not have a pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability change 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119(b). FIG. 119(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118(a), the third embodiment is configured such that when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state is always set for the special symbol 4 variations. And, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern with reference to different variation pattern tables according to the number of special symbol variations (number of special symbol variations) after the jackpot end and the lottery result of the special symbols ( The variable time) is selected.

With such a configuration, the latent state is determined in accordance with the timing (the number of changes in the special diagram) when the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (the big hit or the small win in special figure 1) is satisfied. It is possible to make different the period (special figure fluctuation time) for which is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the special symbol lottery result but also to the number of changes in the special symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the special symbol 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit is "1 to 2 times" , The "probability variation A table 202bea (probability variation A)" is referred to, in the case of "3 times", the "probability variation B table 202beb (probability variation B)" is referenced, and in the case of "4 times", the "probability variation C table" The table 202 bec (probability variation C)” is defined to be referred to. In addition, if the lottery result is "Small hit, miss", and if the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to "Probability A table 202bea (Probability A)" In the case of “4 times”, the “probability variation C table 202bec (probability variation C)” is referred to.

Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the special symbol 2, the "probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)" is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot. Stipulated in.

Next, the contents defined in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202bea to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119(c) to 120. .. FIG. 119(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120(a) is a schematic view showing the contents defined in the probability variation B table 202beb. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation C table 202bec, and FIG. 120(c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

As shown in FIG. 119(c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is hit in the first special symbol (special symbol 1). ~99" is associated with the jackpot variation 1 (1 second), "100-197" is associated with the jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and the value "198" is associated with the jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). ) Is associated. In addition, when the small hit or out of the special drawing 1 is won, the small hit change 1 (1 second) or the off change 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Has been.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special symbol 1). ~99" is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), "100-149" is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and "150-198" is associated with jackpot variation 3( (300 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 120(b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). "1" is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), "1" value is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with "2 to 198". It is associated. Further, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the small hit change 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the win is missed, the fluctuation type counter The deviation variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2). When the big hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated and the small hit is won, the small hit variation 4 (0.5 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. , The deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set when the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is executed is selected in the state where the latent probability state is set. Is configured.

Here, in the third embodiment, the latent probability state is set when the small variation is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the state where the probability variation state is set. In order to select the variation pattern with reference to the work 3 table 202be2, it is necessary to win the small hit in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 during the probability variation state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to different tables according to the number of special symbol variations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of fluctuations since the probability variation state is set) that is the lottery result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb added to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in points. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), and by being set to ON, the special drawing 1 lottery It means that you won the small hit. This special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON for a period from when the small hit is won by the lottery of special figure 1 until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), and is set to ON. , Shows that the small hitting game based on the small hitting prize of special figure 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the small hit game based on the small hit prize of special figure 1 is started, the high probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state. It is configured to execute the process of shifting to.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is determined when the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), it is set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the timing for starting the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), the reference (S2551 of FIG. 129).

Next, in the processing of S2551 of FIG. 129, when it is determined that the setting is turned on (S2551 of FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the small hit game of this time is won as a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1. If it is determined that it is a small hit executed based on this, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 of FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511 of FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123(a). FIG. 123(a) shows the voice lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of ROM222 of 113 typically. As shown in FIG. 123(a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the above-described second embodiment (first embodiment) in place of the additional effect selection table 222c and the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. Is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. The probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final aspect of the suggested effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113(b) to 115(a), and wins the jackpot. The final mode is defined based on the number of changes (the number of changes in the special figure after the end of the big hit) and the type of big hit that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning variations is “2”, that is, when the jackpot is won again at the second special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, the jackpot type to be won is “bonus A”, “bonus B” If it is ", the effect mode that one row (line) is established in the bingo is set, and if it is "big hit C", the effect mode that three rows (line) is established in the bingo is set.

And, when the number of jackpot winning variations is "3", that is, when the jackpot is won at the third special symbol variation after the jackpot is over, if the jackpot type to be won is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" , It is defined that the effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if "big hit C", the effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Finally, if the number of jackpot winning variations is "4", that is, if you win the jackpot at the fourth special symbol variation (the final variation of the special figure in which the probability variation state is set) after the jackpot ends, the jackpot type to be won If is a "big hit A", an effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in the bingo is set, and if "big hit B", an effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in a bingo is set and "big hit C" In that case, it is specified that a production mode in which all columns (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol change after the jackpot is over, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, the bingo card is displayed. The screen (see FIG. 113) on which 820 is displayed is configured to display a special display screen that guides that the latent probability state is set after the jackpot is over.

On this special display screen, an image celebrating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right hit" for guiding the right hit game is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to perform a game (right hitting game) suitable for the game state (latent probability state) after the jackpot game is completed, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set is made full. It is possible to utilize the lottery game of the second special symbol (special diagram 2).

In the third embodiment, on the display screen at the end of the big hit, the special display screen when the big hit is won by the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit is configured to be displayed. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is during the big hit game, the timing when the big hit game is started, or the timing when a predetermined round game in the big hit game is executed. In this case, in the case of winning the jackpot in the normal state, by the time the round game of the jackpot game is started, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b corresponds to the special symbol variation to be executed next. The pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the winning information (the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the end of the big jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won, and the pre-discriminating means by the pre-discriminating means As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, “right hit” is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 in order to perform the jackpot game in the right hitting game, and the right hitting game is performed. It is configured to execute the effect mode for making it happen in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 displays "left". It may be configured to display "strike".

With such a configuration, when the jackpot is won in the normal state (the game state in which the left-handed game is played), the jackpot game is displayed according to the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 that guides the game method during the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the game content after the end. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the structure of the game board 13 similar to that of the first embodiment is used, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the left-handed game is played. It is configured so that the ratio of balls winning in the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where a right-handed game is played. Therefore, even if the configuration in which the playing method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. Does not provide a good situation.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that is executed when it is determined that the ending command is received in the jackpot related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605: Yes in FIG. 132). In, in the jackpot game by determining whether there is winning information to win the jackpot in the winning information (winning information of special figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 of FIG. 133) Although the winning information newly generated in the above is also configured to be discriminated and more winning information can be discriminated, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (the winning information of special figure 1) The timing other than the present embodiment may be set as the timing for determining whether or not there is the winning information for winning the jackpot. For example, the timing when the jackpot game is started or a specific number of rounds (eg, two rounds). The timing at which the determination is executed may be the timing at which the judgment is reached or the timing at which the specific round game (the first round game) is finished.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) shows the audio lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of RAM223 of 113 typically. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with a residual probability change number area 223ba, a pre-reading permissible flag 223bb, and a residual change number counter 223bc in addition to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in points. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the number of variations for which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information stored in the winning information storing area 223b in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). .. Then, in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is greater than 0, that is, during the probability changing state. When it is possible to newly receive the winning information corresponding to the executable special symbol variation (S5504 of FIG. 131; Yes), the pre-reading process as the special symbol variation executed during the probability changing state (the winning information is the winning information. The process of determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 of FIG. 131), and then the set value is subtracted by 1 (S5507 of FIG. 131).

In this way, by using the remaining probability variation number area 223ba, as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state, it is determined whether or not new winning information can be set, and thus the probability variation state is set. It is possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation executed in the probability variation state. Therefore, since the probability variation effect executed during the probability variation state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, it is possible to enhance the effect.

The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won as a jackpot of the special symbol, and when set to ON, the jackpot information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is a jackpot. It indicates that there is winning information indicating that the player has been won.

The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is determined in the jackpot end processing (see S4651 of FIG. 133) that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won. If it does (S5605 of FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 of FIG. 133). In addition, it is determined that the prize information received this time in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 of FIG. 131) corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability changing state (S5504: Yes of FIG. 131), Even when it is determined that the winning information includes the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the variable display setting process for probability variation (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No in FIG. 135), and is set to ON (S5702: No). The process is executed so that a different presentation mode can be set in (S5702: Yes) of FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end process (see S4651 of FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605 of FIG. 133: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, in the variation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134), when it is determined that the variation display in the probability variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151 in FIG. 135). In (), in the case where it is determined that the special symbol for which the variation display is set this time is the previous variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to win the jackpot (the next time is the jackpot variation) (S5703 of FIG. 135: Yes). ), the production mode using the probability variation production selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. 1 special symbol big hit determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127), small hit control The difference is that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that, in the above-described second embodiment, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, and therefore, a detailed description thereof will be omitted with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the portions where the same processing as in the second embodiment described above is executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376), the first special in the second embodiment described above. Different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is not a jackpot is different. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) is performed, and in the process of S406, the current variation is a jackpot. When it is determined that it is not (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation process (S471) is executed, and this process is ended. This special figure 1 deviation process (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special figure 1 is other than the big hit, and it is determined whether or not the small win is won, and the determination is made. The processing corresponding to the result is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) which is one process in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation process (S471). This special figure 1 deviation change processing (S471), is something which executes the processing in order to indicate the small hitting design and the deviation design in the 1st design indicator 37, the 2nd special design (special drawing 2) The processing contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011 of FIG. 41) to be executed are different in that the special symbol to be targeted is changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1.

In the special figure 1 deviation process (S471), first, it is determined whether the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is the small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (is out) (S3101: No), the off symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this processing is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277). If the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 of FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S871) which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S871), when the lottery result of special figure 1 is a small hit, processing for starting the small hit game is executed.

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), in order to forcibly stop and display the changing special figure 2 fluctuation by the lottery result indicating the deviation, The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, the special figure 2 variation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is turned off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. The setting is made (S3207), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to ON (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out) (S3201: No), the book is left as it is. The process ends.

By configuring in this way, if you win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1), you can forcibly stop changing the special map 2 during the change, so the small hit game It is possible to facilitate execution of a new fluctuation of special figure 2 during the latent state set at the timing of starting. In the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special map 1 is won, a process of forcibly stopping the change of the special figure 2 being executed in a display mode showing that the lottery result is out of alignment is used. Without being limited to this, for example, in order to prevent the variation time of the special figure 2 variation being executed during the period when the small hit game is being performed, the measurement of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation is interrupted. You may do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, this is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is the timing of the small hit start (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If it is, the opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is ended.

The third embodiment is configured so that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can win the small hit, among which, the small hit of special figure 1 Only when the winning is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0.

In other words, as a condition to end the high probability state of the normal symbol (state where the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is greater than 0), the small hit prize of special figure 1 (start of the small hit game based on the small hit prize of special figure 1) Is set. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to end the high-probability state of the normal symbol under a condition other than the case of executing the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the probability change state (high-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, at any timing (any special symbol lottery), the latent state becomes a game state advantageous to the player ( Since it is possible to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), the player can be always motivated to play a game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the shorter the period from setting the probability variation state to winning the small hit in the lottery of the special map 1, the more the number of lots of special symbols that can be executed in the latent probability state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the high-probability state of the normal symbol is configured not to end. As a result, even if the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the special figure 2 is set in the state in which the probability variation state is set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2551, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hitting medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), this processing is ended as it is.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery for the special symbol, the sure change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) after the jackpot game is over. Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol variations), and various transition conditions (latency state transition state) to shift the high probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low probability state during the probability variation state By establishing the above, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent probability state transition condition, during the probability variation state, the first latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won, and a predetermined period in which the probability variation state is set (special symbol variation 4 2nd latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when the final fluctuation of (time) is executed, and when a small hit is won in the lottery of a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1)) in the probability variable state And a third latent probability transition condition that holds. As described above, by configuring the latent state under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with playability that is not tired.

Further, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured such that the periods in which the latent probability state is set after establishment are different, and when the first latent probability transition condition is established, a big hit is shown. The latent state is set during the symbol determination period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and if the second latent probability transition condition is satisfied, during the variation period of the target special symbol fluctuation, and during the symbol determination period If the certainty state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the certainty variation state is started from the timing when the target small hit game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol corresponding to the final fluctuation of.

By configuring in this way, in performing the game for setting the latent probability state during the probability variation state, the game is not only aimed at the latent probability state but also when the latent state is set. Since the person can be watched, the game can be more motivated.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the result of the special symbol lottery. Further, the variable display period (fluctuation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the special symbol lottery result that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, that is, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, depending on the lottery result, the symbol fixing period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds. It is configured to be set in the range of. With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed), the symbol fixing period set thereafter Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of, the game can be played while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probability variation state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent probability transition condition. Is configured so that the length of the period is significantly different, for example, in the final fluctuation in the probability variation state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the length of the period set as the latent probability state, The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the latent state is equal to or less than (including the same). With this configuration, when the final variation of the probability variation state is out of order, the latent state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 variation is executed during the latent state and the small variation is performed. It is possible to set a disadvantage latent probability state that is disadvantageous to the player who cannot (difficultly) win the winning game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned disadvantage latent certainty state is set, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, do not execute the effect mode informing that the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) will be executed. Therefore, it is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, if the special symbol lottery result is out of the final variation of the probability variation state, it is configured to set the disadvantage latent probability state, for example, the special symbol lottery result In a part of the case where is out, if a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or if the special symbol lottery result is out As the variation pattern (variation time) selected for (3), 300 seconds which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit may be settable.

By configuring in this way, even if you do not win the big hit or the small hit in the probability variation state, you can set the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player, so have expectations until the end of the probability variation state. You can play while playing. Also, by making the symbol determination period and the variation pattern that are set the same as the period (time) that can be set when the jackpot is won, it is hoped that the jackpot game will be executed after the latent state ends. be able to.

In the above example, when the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol fixed period to the same length as when the jackpot is won, the special symbol lottery result It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery result of this time from being determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation during the latent probability state game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured such that the latent probability state is easily set longer as the number of special symbol variations in the probability variation state increases. As a result, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability variation state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed in the probability variation state decreases, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set, so during the probability variation state. It is possible to make you want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (would you like to establish the first latent probability transition condition), or you can make you want to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability change state, improving the fun of the game Can be made. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the final variation of the probability variation state, that is, when the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are both satisfied in one special symbol variation (lottery) Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot variation starts, the latent state can be provided for a longer period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the later the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition is delayed, the easier it is to set the latent state for a long period of time. It may be configured such that the longest latent probability state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third time). The latent state may be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment described above in place of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 105). 3 (see FIG. 130), the jackpot related process (see FIG. 64) instead of the jackpot related process 3 (see FIG. 132), and the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) instead of the variable display setting process 3 (see FIG. 134) Is different from the above, the winning information related process (see FIG. 131), the jackpot end process (see FIG. 133), and the probability change variation display process (see FIG. 135) are added, and the other processes are the same. Executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 130, the command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) differs from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the winning information related process (S4271) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

In the winning information-related process (S4271), first, the information indicating the game state stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether or not the read game state (that is, the current game state) is in the process of probability change (S5502). When it is determined that the read game state is in the probability variation (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is read (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the value of the read residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information received this time includes winning information (S5505). When it is determined that the winning information includes the winning information (S5505: Yes), the prefetching winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storing area 223b (S5508), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the probability change (S5502: No), or in the processing of S5504, it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), the display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-described processing of S5508 is executed, and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process 3 (S4552). The jackpot-related processing 3 (S4552) executes the jackpot end processing (S4651) after executing the above-described processing of S4608 or S4611 with respect to the jackpot-related processing (S4502) in the first embodiment described above. Differences in points. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a jackpot end process (S4651), which is one of the jackpot-related processes 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4651).

In the jackpot end process (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the processing of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n=4) (S5603). Next, in the processing of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether the read information has hit information (S5605). When it is determined that the read information has the hit information (S5605: Yes), whether or not the winning information corresponding to the next change (that is, the first change executed after the jackpot game ends) includes the hit information. Is determined (S5606). In the processing of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is informed that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit ends. The special effect mode for setting is set (S5607), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next variation does not include the winning information (S5605: No), the prefetching winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information varies. The number of times of special figure change until it is set is set in the remaining change number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this processing is ended.

Further, in the processing of S5605, when it is determined that there is no hit information in the read state (S5605: No), the number of probability variation setting (n=4) is set in the residual variation counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-described S5611 is performed. The process is executed and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variable display setting process 3 (S4173) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above when it is determined in the process of S5103 that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103). : No), and the variation display setting process for probability variation (S5151) is different. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, regarding the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation use variable display setting process (S5151). In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is a probability variation state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol Is set and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether the variation this time is a small hit (S5701). When it is determined that the variation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode that makes all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114(b) is set (S5709), and S5710 is performed. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the processing of S5701, when it is determined that the current variation is not a small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the pre-reading hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the residual variation counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the residual variation is 2 ( S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next variation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, an effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of changes (S5705). Next, the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the residual probability variation number area 223ba and the residual variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, in the processing of S5702, when it is determined that the prefetch hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S5703 that the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is not 2. (S5703: No), the effect mode in which bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is decremented by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the effect mode set in any one of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to change at the same time (so-called, simultaneous change type) and latent as a game state. A lot of small hit games (RUSH games) are executed by the lottery (variation) of special figure 2 being executed during the period when the state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) is set It was configured to be possible.

Then, the latent probability state once set, the first latent probability end condition that is established based on the big hit game is started, or the number of times the special symbol has changed since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set It is configured to end when any of the second latent probability end conditions that are satisfied based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured as described above, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability game state (as the first advantageous game that is advantageous to the player) ( Since the RUSH game will be executed until immediately before the jackpot game which is the second advantageous game is started, it is possible to cause the player to successively execute a plurality of different advantageous games. Was able to give satisfaction.

However, in each of the embodiments described above, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, and then latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) Although it is configured such that a plurality of kinds of probability change end conditions to be changed to the above can be set, only two kinds of the above-described latent probability end conditions for ending the latent probability state are used, and therefore, the latent condition for the player is hidden. There was a problem that the period during which the certainty state continues was easily predicted.

Against such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to a low-probability state (falling down). (Hereinafter, referred to as a falling lottery) is configured to be executed, and a low probability state of the special symbol is set when the falling lottery is won.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player easily predicts the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, and it is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. The latent state game (RUSH game) can be played while expecting it to continue for a long time.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, during a period (special figure variation display period) in which a variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that a jackpot is won in one special symbol is being executed, the other is displayed. Even if the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is invalidated.

As a result, when the latent probability state is set by the satisfaction of the first probability variation ending condition (the probability variation ending condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), the latent probability state game (RUSH) executed during the latent probability state is set. In the (game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set by the satisfaction of the second probability variation ending condition (the probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of times of change of the special symbol), the falling lottery is executed during the latent probability state. Therefore, since the latent probability state may end early based on winning the falling lottery, the period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latent probability. The normal latent state game can be shortened more easily than the state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probability variation state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing four types of game state transition methods set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game state transition method in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment described above, the content of the game state transition in the case of winning the falling lottery is added, and each transition. The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied are changed, and that the transition ratio to be shifted at the time of jackpot winning is changed, and the other points are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol is configured to execute the falling lottery for shifting to the low-probability state. If the player wins, it shifts to the time saving state, and if he wins the falling lottery during the latent state, it shifts to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set. In the state, the condition to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (for example, short-time digestion) is more than the condition to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (falling lottery winning) It must be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing of establishment of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so that the player can watch the game content, The interest of can be improved. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the fourth embodiment, in the probability variation state and the time saving state, the game method executed is the same (left-handed game), and the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also configured to be similar. Therefore, even if the winning condition of the falling lottery is won before the transition condition of the normal symbol (the condition of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state) is satisfied, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent state is set in the fourth embodiment and the flow of the game during the latent state will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the probability variation state (when the first probability variation ending condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137(b) is 9 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow when the number of time saving is 0 during the probability variation state (when the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137(a), in the fourth embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is a low probability state in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change state or latent probability state) is set. If the lottery for the transition to (falling lottery) is performed every time the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, and if the jackpot is won during the probability variation state (the first probability variation end condition) When the latent probability state is set), the falling lottery is set as an ineffective period during which the falling lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability variation ending condition, the falling lottery is effective during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) as shown in FIG. 137(b). Since it is executed, the latent probability state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the falling lottery is won before the change of the special map 1 ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first probability variation ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a latent probability state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than when the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied.

<Regarding effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect contents executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect contents executed during the probability changing state, the player is suggested (notified) about the opportunity to set the latent probability state. The effect is different from the effect for suggesting (notifying) that the player has won the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Here, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 140, description will be given of effect contents added in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents for suggesting that the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the second probability variation ending condition (reaching the number of shortening times). FIG. 138(b) schematically shows the effect contents for suggesting that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the first probability variation ending condition (big hit). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 138(a) and FIG. 138(b), in the present embodiment, the player is the opportunity to set the latent state by the display mode of the effect design 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display form of "444" is displayed as the effect design 813, the second probability variation end condition (reduction of the number of shortened times) is notified, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability variation ending condition (big win) has been established.

In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the effect design 813 displayed as the effect result in the probability changing state is configured to notify the player of the opportunity to set the latent probability state. Other configurations may be used, and for example, a plurality of display modes may be provided in which the selection ratio is changed according to the type of the probability variation ending condition that has been established as the display mode of the effect symbol 813 to be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of predicting which probability variation ending condition is satisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139(a), the display contents when the falling lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when the falling lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed every time the special figure lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute the falling lottery during the period from the start of the big hit lottery, that is, before the big hit lottery.

Therefore, when winning the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is displayed while the special symbol (special drawing 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is being variably displayed. Is notified that the game has ended, and it is suppressed that a new special map 2 variation is executed after the falling lottery is won (after the game state is changed from the latent state to the normal state). In addition, by variably displaying the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 from "right-handed" to "left-handed" while the special symbol (special feature 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is variably displayed, After the falling lottery is won (after the game state is changed from the latent state to the normal state), it is suppressed that a new special figure 2 variation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139(b), description will be made of effect contents executed when a jackpot is won during the latent probability state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139(b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the effect contents executed when a big hit is won during the latent probability state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, description will be made on the contents of the effect during the advantageous latent certain state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player in the latent state game (RUSH game). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of the first probability variation ending condition, the falling lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. The treasure box 812 to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that the lottery invalid period is set, and that it is in the advantageous latent probability state game (super RUSH game). The number of displays is increased, and a comment of “during super RUSH” is displayed in the sub display area Ds, which indicates that the game is in the advantageous latent probability state game.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a falling lottery counter C6 used when determining the lottery result of the falling lottery is added.

The falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”, and is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and Some of the counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in the counter buffer (falling lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is the determination value that is defined in advance in the falling lottery table 202cb, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts (falls down) to the low probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the above-described first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca is provided in place of the jackpot type selection table 202d, and a fall lottery. The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, the operation content (operation scenario) for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) without fail when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. The point of setting is different from the above-described first embodiment. Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds is executed, and the first embodiment described above. Are different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the special symbol big hit or the small hit has been won, the operation content executed during the small hit game The jackpot game in which the same operation content as the (operation scenario) (concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to distinguish) is defined, and a latent state is set, which is a game state in which the player has an advantage. While it was difficult to understand the timing and the timing to end, the fourth embodiment makes it possible for the player to easily determine whether the big hit or the small hit has been won (the big hit game The operation contents and the operation contents of the small hitting game are made different from each other so that the player can easily discriminate them.

In this way, by making it easy for the player to determine whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed, the number of small hit games executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be easily made. Can be grasped.

Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. The falling lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the judgment value of the falling lottery counter C6 described above is stored. The value of the falling lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. When it coincides with the judgment value of, it is set so as to shift (to fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol.

More specifically, four determination values “43, 107, 195, 222” are defined as the determination values determined to fall in the high probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”. Among the 240 possible values of the falling lottery counter C6, there are four judgment values that are judged to be falling, so in the probability change state of the special symbol, the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of the special symbol) Is 1/60 (4/240).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15(a)), and the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. The probability is set to 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning the falling lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state in which the latent probability state is set, it is configured to easily win the small hit, the fall, and the big hit in this order.

It should be noted that the winning ratios of the big hit, the small hit, and the falling in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the ease of winning may be different. For example, it is set so that the falling probability (probability of winning the falling lottery) is lower than the big hit probability, and in the latent condition, it is configured to repeatedly enjoy the big hit game and the small hit game until the fall is won. May be set, so that the small hit probability and the falling probability are almost the same (for example, small hit probability 1/3, falling probability 1/4), the special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. Each time the game is played, the game may be made to excite the player. Moreover, even if the falling probability is set high (for example, 1/2), and the special symbol lottery can be executed in the state in which the latent probability state is set, only when the player does not fall in the first falling lottery good.

In addition, in the falling lottery table 202cb in the present embodiment, only the judgment value for judging whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the high probability state is defined, and the judgment value for the low probability state of the special symbol is specified. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol when it is already in the low probability state of the special symbol.

In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery table 202cb is compared with the regularly falling falling lottery counter C6 to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall it down). ) Or not. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) to normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) can be randomized. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the latent probability state ends during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) that is performed during the period when the latent probability state is set.

In the present embodiment, whether or not to shift (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol has been drawn (determined), but the lottery (determination) to move to another state. ) May be. For example, whether or not to shift from a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state of a normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special diagram lottery) executed for each variation of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to randomize how long the high probability state of normal symbols continues, so the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is a latent state (high probability state of special symbols) , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting to the normal symbol low probability state). Therefore, during the period when the probability variation state is set, it is possible to always play the game while expecting that the latent probability state is set. In addition, for example, whether or not to shift from a low probability state of a special symbol to a high probability state of a special symbol may be configured to be able to be drawn by lottery.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and various kinds when set to ON. This indicates that the update of the parameter is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

When the state update restriction flag 203ca is determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) (S406 in FIG. 147). : Yes), or in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 of FIG. 150), when it is determined that the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S1006 of FIG. 150: Yes) ) Is set to ON (S487 of FIG. 147, S1077 of FIG. 150).

Further, when the game state update processing 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) is referred to (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that the game server is set to ON (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes), the time saving counter 203f The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (time saving number) corresponding to the condition for shifting the game state is skipped. Then, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S287 of FIG. 148), when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801: Yes of FIG. 148), set to off (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned off. It is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

In other words, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in any of the plurality of special symbols (Toku-zu 1, Toku-zu 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol won in the jackpot. While the variable display is being executed, the game state is not shifted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145(a) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of 113. As shown in FIG. 145(a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that a latent mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The latent probability mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting a production mode (latent probability mode) of an effect (latent accuracy effect) for notifying the player that the latent probability state has been set. .. In the latent probability mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of rendering modes (corresponding to a setting trigger of the latent probability state (a big hit winning trigger, a reduction in the number of shortened times (shortened time)) and a mode setting rendering counter 223ca described later ( The effect mode) is defined, and the opportunity for setting the latent probability state can be suggested to the player by the effect mode of the selected latent probability effect.

Next, detailed contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current latent state is the big hit latent state, the obtained value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca. Is defined as "invincible mode" in the range of "0-49", "normal mode B" is defined as the range of "50-89", and "normal mode A" is defined as the range of "90-99". ing.

Then, when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 is the current time probability missing state, the acquired value for the mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". “Normal mode A” is defined in the range, “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

The falling notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the winning of the falling lottery has been won, and the time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state) continues. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining short time count area 223k indicating the remaining time set by the above and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 when the probability variation state is set as the game state and when the time saving state is set. The various display modes described above are configured to be the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, because the falling lottery is executed, in the state in which the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, it is possible to save time at random timing. The state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set.

And, in the state where the probability variation state is set, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, which is advantageous to the player. Confidence state game (RUSH game) is executed, while in the state that the time saving state is set, if the high probability state of the normal symbol transitions to the low probability state, the game state from the time saving state to normal Transition to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146(c). FIG. 146(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146(c), this fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the remaining short time count (information in the remaining short time count area 223k) at the time when the fall is won and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. Thus, the notification mode is defined.

Specifically, when the falling winning number is 0 when the remaining short time count is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining short time count area 223k indicates 0 remaining short time count), that is, a high probability of a normal symbol When the fall lottery is won due to the fluctuation of ending the state, “confirmation notice” is defined regardless of the value of the obtained fall notice effect counter 223cf. Then, when the timing of winning the fall is 1 to 49 in the remaining number of shortened working hours, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is half or more, the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf is displayed. The value "0-49" or "90-99" defines "indication notification" and the range "50-89" defines "confirmation notification". Then, when the remaining time reduction number is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains for more than half, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". The "indication notification" is defined in the range of, and the "determination notification" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the player can easily recognize that the winning of the falling lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has fallen. A notification mode for displaying a message (for example, a display of "sorry") or for notifying that the falling lottery has been won is set by the sound or the light emission color of the decorative member.

In addition, when "indication notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, "pinch" display) is set to notify the player that the fall lottery may have been won. .. Although detailed description is omitted, the “indication notification” is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the falling lottery is not won. With such a configuration, the "indication" is executed both when the player has actually won the falling lottery and when he has not actually won the falling lottery.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the aspect of the notification (indication) effect of whether or not the falling lottery is won is set as the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. It is configured to be set based on (period), and the longer the remaining short time period is, the more difficult it is to set “confirmation notification”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player recognizes that he/she has won the falling lottery in a state where the remaining short time period is long, and the player's motivation during the remaining short time period is lowered.

In addition, the setting frequency of the "indication notification" that is set when you have not won the fall lottery may be configured to be variable based on the length of the remaining short time period. It is preferable to configure so that the “indication notification” can be set easily even when the lottery has not been won. As a result, the possibility of actually winning the fall lottery when the "indication notification" is executed can be changed based on the length of the remaining short term, so that the "indication notification" is executed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by allowing the player to play the game during the short remaining time while predicting whether the falling lottery is won or not while distinguishing the frequency (number of times) and the remaining short time. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 145(b) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM223 of MPU221 of 113. As shown in FIG. 145(b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above in that the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a time saving informed flag 223ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting a latent probability mode using the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the value is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent probability mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the latent probability mode currently set, and the latent probability mode determined in the latent probability mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 of FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) is referred to (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). When the information (latent probability mode information) stored (set) in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is determined by the state command process 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153), the gaming state shifts to the normal state. Is cleared (see S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won in the latent probability state, and a small hit start command is issued in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) in the latent probability state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small wins won in the latent probability state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, based on the value of the small hit number counter 223cc, the small hit number display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the small hit is made during the period when the latent probability state is set. When the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time of the latent state is displayed.

The falling flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the falling lottery has been won during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the falling lottery has been won.

The time saving informed flag 223ce is won in the falling lottery during the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and to the time saving state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) Is a flag for indicating that the fall notification effect for notifying the player that the transition has been made (the effect executed when the final notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) has been executed, When set to ON, the fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting a fall lottery notification mode using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the value is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in place of the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148), game state update process (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the above-described first embodiment, transition from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery for determining whether or not to make a fall) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, so this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off, that is, the probability variation is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the processing of S482, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the falling lottery table 202m. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches any determination value (random number value) defined in the falling lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the falling) (S484). ), if it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the processing of S484, when it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random number values) defined in the falling lottery table 202m (the value corresponds to the falling) ( (S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, a transition (fall) from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, the falling command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has changed from the probability changing state to the special symbol low probability state (falling down) is set (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the data of the current execution area is a big hit (S406: Yes), the status update restriction flag 203ca is executed after the processing of S407 to S411 is executed. Is set to ON (S487), and this processing ends.

By executing the special symbol variation start process 4 (S386), the lottery whether to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and the lottery whether the jackpot of the special symbol is easily executed. be able to. In the present embodiment, as the order of processing in the probability change state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed first, and then the jackpot of the special symbol. Although it is configured to execute the lottery of whether or not, the processing order is not limited to this. The jackpot lottery may be performed first, and then the falling lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S287). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S287), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above, after performing the processing of S801 to S805, the state update restriction flag 203ca The difference is that a process (S871) of setting to OFF is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the game state update processing 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update processing 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is different from the game state update process (S308) in the above-described first embodiment in that a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is turned on is added. Be different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update processing 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). When it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S651, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process proceeds to S601.

After executing the processing of S601 to S604, in the processing of S605, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, whether the probability variation is in progress) (S605). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). When it is determined that the toku-zu 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on (S652: Yes), a state command indicating the jackpot latent probability state is set (S653), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S652, when it is determined that the special map 1 big hit flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a state command indicating the time saving missing probability state is set (S654), and this process is ended. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the above-described first embodiment, from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery for determining whether or not to make a fall) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, with respect to the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), the process of changing the target of the symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is changed. Since it is only executed, its detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S293), for the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) in the above-described first embodiment, after executing S1501, S1503 to S1506, the state update restriction flag 203ca The difference is that a process (S1571) of setting to OFF is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment described above in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). (Refer to FIG. 152), except that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), the other processes are the same. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 152, the command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182) is different from the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above when it is determined in the process of S4203 that a status command is received from the main control device 110 (S4203: No), and the difference is that the state command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command process (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281), which is one process in the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines whether or not the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4112) in the above-described first embodiment, and whether or not a command regarding falling is received. The difference is that processing is added. Other processes are the same as the state command process (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the state command process 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating the transition to the latent state (S4403: Yes), the latent mode setting process (S4451) is executed. Details of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not the state command indicating the shift to the latent state (S4403: No), the main control device 110 issues the fall command. It is determined whether it has been received (S4452). When it is determined that the falling command is received (S4452: Yes), the falling effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the falling effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the processing of S4452, when it is determined that the falling command is not received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the processing of S4453 is skipped and the processing of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processes of S4406 to S4411, the latent probability mode storage area 223cb, the small hit number counter 223cc, the falling flag 223cd, and the time saving informed flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, a latent probability mode setting process (S4451) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. .. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent probability mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the status command received from the main control device 110 this time is read (S5801). Next, based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent probability mode is determined using the latent probability mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146(b)) (S5802). Next, in the processing of S5802, a latent display mode command for display corresponding to the determined latent confirmation mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent confirmation mode is set in the latent confirmation mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S5805), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the falling production setting process (S4453) which is one of the processes in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling effect setting process (S4453).

In the falling effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a latent probability state (S5901). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent probability state (S5901: Yes), the latent state notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110. The value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S5901: No), next, the remaining short time count is 99 or more, that is, the remaining short time count area 223k. It is determined whether or not the value stored in is greater than or equal to 99 (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time saving is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), a time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S5905), and the time saving notified flag 223ce is set to ON (S5908). .. On the other hand, in the processing of S5904, when it is determined that the remaining number of remaining time reductions is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processing of S5905 and S5906 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process 4 (S4574). The small hit related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small hit related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying the remaining time information is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the small hitting related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is judged that the small hitting start command is received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is judged whether or not the current game state is the latent state. Yes (S4751). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent probability state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit number counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S4754). A display time information command indicating remaining time information is set (S4755), a display small hitting start command is then set (S4702), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the latent state is not in progress (S4751: No), or if it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 in the process of S4753 ( The processing of S4753: No) and S4702 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process (S4104) according to the first embodiment described above, instead of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104). 4 (S5171), in that instead of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) is executed, and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the latent probability state (S5103). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent state (S5103: Yes), the special display 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172). When it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106 described above. Next, the processing executed in S5171 to S5173 for the special figure 1 is changed to the special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the fall notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving notice flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time saving notified flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), the latent latent fluctuation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S8009), and this processing To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information in the remaining time saving area 223k is read (S8002). Next, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the remaining time count read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223ca (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the confirmed notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the confirmation notification mode is set (S8004: Yes), the time saving completed flag 223ce is set to OFF (S8005), and the falling flag 223cd is set to OFF (S8006). Next, the time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8004, when it is determined that the determined notification mode is not the finalized notification mode (S8004: No), the fall notification mode for display corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( (S8008), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (one of the processes in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the fourth embodiment. S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special display 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) executes the processes of S5201 to S5205 with respect to the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104) in the above-described first embodiment, and then proceeds to S5206. Instead, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read (S5251), and based on the extracted variation pattern and the latent probability mode, the latent latent variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is displayed. The difference is that the process of setting (S5252) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. S5175) will be described. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175). The special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175) executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 with respect to the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109) in the above-described first embodiment, and then proceeds to S5206. Instead, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read (S5351), and based on the extracted variation pattern and latent accuracy mode, the latent latent variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is displayed. The difference is that the process of setting (S5352) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration for performing the falling lottery in which the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state based on the lottery result in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, at which timing, the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) It can be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to.

Also, if you win the falling lottery during the probability change state and shift to the time saving state, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is a game state that is advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to shift (difficult to shift than the probability variation state), once the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set Even before, you can play the game while being thrilled not to win the falling lottery.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is performed when the probability variation state is set and when the time saving state is set, so that the present It is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, immediately after the probability variation state is set (for example, the first special symbol variation), if the falling lottery is won, the player is notified that the probability variation state has been set. However, since it is configured to execute the production mode (time saving notification production) that makes it look as if the time saving state has been set from the beginning (after the jackpot is over), the latent state may be set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the probability change state higher than the game state ends in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the falling lottery during the probability change state (indication notification) and an effect that informs the player that the falling lottery has been won (confirmation notification) ) And are executable and based on the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol that can be continuously set in the probability variation state, the selection ratios of the suggestion notification and the confirmation notification are made different. Specifically, the larger the number of remaining fluctuations in the probability-changed state, the more difficult it is to execute the confirmation notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the probability-changed state has transitioned to the time-saving state with a large number of remaining fluctuations remaining, and thus reducing the player's willingness to play. Further, the effect of giving the suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the falling lottery is not won.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a variation pattern of special symbols that can be selected only during the probability variation state (variation time), or a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected only during a time saving state (variation time). It may be provided and configured to allow the player to predict the current game state according to the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed. In this case, the contents of the variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation state and the variation pattern dedicated to the time saving state are not significantly different, and for example, the variation time may be provided with an error of about 1 second. As a result, the player can be informed of the current game state due to an error in the variable display time that is slightly uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to strongly pay attention to the variable display of the special symbol to be executed. Further, in this case, the error 1 second, for example, may be used in the period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol The player can be informed of the current game state by a slight discomfort that is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, during the period when the jackpot variation is being executed in one special symbol, the lottery result of the falling lottery associated with the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated. .. As a result, for example, during the period in which the latent probability state is set, the second special probability is established without being won in the falling lottery due to the fact that the first latent probability transition condition, which is established based on the jackpot win of the special map 1, is established. It is possible to continue to receive lottery for symbols (special figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent state that is more advantageous (easier to continue for a long time) than the latent state set by the establishment of other latent probability transition conditions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed, the falling lottery is also executed. That is, it is configured to execute the falling lottery when the execution condition of the special symbol variation (lottery) is satisfied, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a specific entrance (for example, the first entry The ball has entered the ball opening 64, the second entrance 640, the general winning opening 63), that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, that the execution condition of the normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) has been established, The special symbol, or the normal symbol stop display timing, or the elapsed timing of the symbol determination period may be the trigger for the execution of the falling lottery, or when the execution condition of the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is satisfied, the falling lottery It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute the falling lottery based on the determination result. This can make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the falling lottery will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily perceiving the timing of winning the falling lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is executed, the presence or absence of falling is determined with the same probability every time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in the falling lottery (winning). A high probability state that is easy) and a low probability state that is hard to fall (difficult to win) may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high-probability variation state and a low-probability variation state are provided as the probability variation states set after the jackpot, and in the high-probability variation state, the low probability state of the falling lottery is set and the low-probability variation In the state, the high probability state of the falling lottery may be set. In addition, the state of the falling lottery (high-probability state, low-probability state) may be configured to be variable based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery) executed after the probability variation state is set. A predetermined number of fluctuations after the state is set (for example, 10 times) is set so that a high probability state of the falling lottery that is easy to win in the falling lottery is set, and then a low probability state of the falling lottery is set. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the probability change state is likely to fall and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with playability that is sharp. Further, in the present embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, it is configured to execute the process of transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, but in addition to this, for example, of the normal symbol You may perform the process which changes a high probability state to a low probability state. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state, but, for example, from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the medium-probability state (the jackpot probability is high. It may be configured to shift to a state lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and may not shift to the medium probability state unless the falling lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the falling lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (to make it fall) is configured to be executed. By configuring in this way, depending on the lottery result of the falling lottery, it is possible to change the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, so that the high probability state of the special symbol is long-term for the player. The game could be played while expecting to continue.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, the player determines whether or not the falling lottery is executed with his or her intention. It was not possible to make a selection, and there was a risk of a decline in game motivation. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a prize winning device (variable winning for small hits) in which a ball can be won during a small hit game executed when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small hit) Device) 2650 is provided, and in the area (flow path) through which the winning ball for the small hitting variable winning apparatus 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state when it is detected that the ball has passed. A fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) for transferring the above is provided.

By configuring in this manner, like the above-described embodiments, the latent probability state that the small hit game is frequently executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol) In (state), it is possible to select whether or not the high-probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player shoots during the small hit game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern, the proportion of the balls winning the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game passing through the falling gate 2650e3 is different.

With this configuration, the contents of the small hit game to be executed are predicted so that the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall, and in order to perform the game aiming to obtain the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. The player can be allowed to select a game while doing so.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent probability state where one special symbol is set during the period of executing the big hit variation, the small hit is won in the other special symbol variation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) advantageous latent probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is easier to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. The unfavorable latent probability state can be set.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161-164, the structure of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2) described above, and the first variable winning device 65 is replaced. The point that the small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided, and that the winning device that is opened during the small winning game (small winning variable winning device 2650) is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640. Are different.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the right side area of the game board 13, a small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided. This small winning variable winning device 2650, a plurality of flow paths through which the winning ball flows down (flow path for falling the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol is the low probability state) The flow path that does not cause the ball to fall down to) is configured to flow down the flow path in which the winning balls are different depending on the timing when the balls are won in the small winning variable winning device 2650.

The internal structure of the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the small winning variable winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the variable winning device 2650 for small hits is combined with the opening forming member 2650b which is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b, and the small hit. Base member 2650c for screwing the variable winning a prize device 2650 to the game board 13, and the LED is turned on from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs for causing the LED board 2650d are arranged, a back cover body 2650e for sandwiching the LED board 2650d with the base member 2650c, and a small hit winning opening (small hit) formed on the opening forming member 2650b. An opening/closing unit 2650f having an opening/closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the winning opening 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, a back cover body 2650e and the flow path. A switching member 2650h that projects into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game sphere, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, and is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g. Back cover body 2650j, a flow path solenoid 2650k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i, and the flow path solenoid 2650k is covered from the back surface side with screws on the back cover body 2650j. It is configured with a fixing cover body 2650m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the small hit variable winning device 2650. FIG. 163(c) is a top view of the small hitting variable winning device 2650, and FIG. 163(b) is a cross-sectional view of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 163(b), the small hit variable winning device 2650 has a small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small winning hole (small winning hole) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163(b). Thus, a bottom surface that is inclined to the lower left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection opening 2650a1 configured by a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the opening of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a can enter the ball by the opening/closing door 2650f1 configured by the shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The open state and the closed state where it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter) can be changed. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball can be rolled on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a by being retracted inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the open/close door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the second winning ball It is configured so as to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent state), the ball can enter the second entrance 640 while the right-handed game is being performed. It becomes possible, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort to change the game method to the left-handed game during the latent state where the small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the small hitting variable winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the small hitting prize hole (smaller. The winning can be made in the winning prize hole 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be surely won in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163(a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 163(b). As shown in FIG. 163(a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c so that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration in which the spheres guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 2650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2 described later will be described.

FIG. 164(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is actuated so that the balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 that guides the sphere, and the switching member 2650h is provided in the flow path cover body 2650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated from the rear side of the flow path cover body 2650g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), the sphere guided from the detection port 2650a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 2650h2 arranged obliquely leftward and to the special discharge channel 2650e2. .. The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the falling route in which the inflowing balls pass through the falling gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and the second normal gate (second 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a second normal route, and a fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 capable of detecting the passage of a ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is detected and then discharged as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a small hit game, that is, the ball passes through the fall route, a special symbol. The high-probability state of is transitioned (falls) to the low-probability state. That is, the falling gate (falling switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h is a passage (special discharge passage 2650e2) that can pass through the falling gate (fall switch) 2650e3 or a fall as a passage for a ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a small hit. This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow is switched so that the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164(a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF during the normal game play, and the ball winning the small winning variable winning device 2650 has the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, even if the small hitting game is not being executed, if the open/close door 2650f1 of the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 is opened and the ball is won, it is detected that the illegally winning ball falls. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF is set as a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the flow path configuration is disadvantageous to the player (in the small winning variable winning device 2650). By adopting a flow path configuration in which a winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and a penalty can be imposed on a game in which an illegal game is played.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is ended by the downflow route in which the ball that has won the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 flows down during the small hitting game. People's interests can be improved. In addition, when passing through the entrance (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 from the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650. The minimum required time is 1 second.

Further, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a sphere is provided at an end of the normal discharge channel 2650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the winning balls have been discharged into the small-hit variable winning device 2650 by the total number of detected balls of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls winning the small winning variable winning device 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. 2650e3) compares the number of balls detected (the number of balls discharged from the small winning variable winning device 2650) to determine whether or not the balls remain in the small winning variable winning device 2650. can do.

The end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when there is a predetermined number (10) of winnings in the small winning variable winning device 2650), or the opening scenario of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is At the timing when the small hit ending period executed after the (when finished) is established), if all the game balls entered in the small hit variable winning device 2650 have not been discharged, the small hit variable It may be configured to determine an abnormality inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the big hit game and the normal game are not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game from proceeding in a state where an abnormality occurs in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and causing a secondary abnormality.

In this way, the ball winning the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, a prize ball (book In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for each one-ball winning, and the detected balls (passing the ball winning switch 2650c1) are used to pass the falling switch 2650e3. By configuring whether or not it can be distributed, it can be determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hitting game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state separately from the small hit variable winning device 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, a game flow in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the probability changing state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the latent likelihood is increased during the jackpot variation. The state is set (see FIG. 165(a)). Then, during the period when the latent probability state is set (while the special map 1 jackpot is changing), by performing a right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2), the small hit game is The latent state game (RUSH game) that is frequently executed is configured to be executed.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, one of the special symbols (for example, the special symbol 1) during the jackpot variation period (after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result. The period up to) is configured so that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special diagram 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special diagram 1), the jackpot is won by the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special diagram 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the period in which the latent state is set from becoming short. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is reliably performed during the latent probability state setting period (for example, the jackpot variation time of Toku-zu 1) that is preset when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot variation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (from winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery , The period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the small prize winning variable winning device 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol goes to the low probability state. It is configured to be a period during which the transition does not occur (falling invalid period).

Therefore, if the latent state is set during fluctuation of the special map 1 that has been won for the jackpot, the special symbol 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. The latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed without having to worry about it. In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) for notifying the player.

By configuring this invincible effect (see FIG. 169) to be executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the falling ineffective period is set in the currently set latent probability state, and thus the player is informed. Therefore, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be played at ease. Further, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall ineffective period is set, the case where the invincible effect described above is not executed occurs. By configuring in this manner, in the latent probability state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set, so the ball is small during the small hit game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is won, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation elapses (see FIG. 165(b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, when the small hit game is being executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big hit change has passed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand because the big hit game is started during the execution of the small hit game.

The same gaming state (normal state) as during the big hit game is set for the interruption period from the change time of the special figure 1 big hit change shown in FIG. 165 until the big hit game is started. In the fifth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big hit change has passed, the start of the big hit game is suspended (postponed) until the small hit game is finished. ) Is configured, but it may be controlled so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time, for example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed. If there is, it may be configured to forcibly end the small hitting game being executed.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, also in the present embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won by one special symbol (special drawing 2), and a small hit game is executed. During the period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special figure 1) is interrupted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) that is set based on the jackpot win of the special map 1 is set as the fall invalid period, so a special symbol for the player. It is possible to entertain the latent probability state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the high probability state of being ended. Further, the small hit game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the preset time saving number is consumed in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of a game when all of the shortened times are exhausted during the probability changing state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, the value of the counter (time saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the time saving state is because the time saving number is subtracted at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. When it becomes 0, the latent probability state is set from the variation in Toku-zu 1 that is executed (see FIG. 166(a)). Note that, as shown in FIG. 166, the latent probability state set by exhausting a predetermined number of shortening times is configured such that the falling lottery during the latent probability state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hitting game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol is ended by the ball that is won by the variable winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650). There is a certain potential disadvantage.

<Regarding effect contents executed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, the aspect of the effect executed during the probability variation state in order to suggest whether the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set, the effects described in each of the above-described embodiments Since it is the same as the aspect, detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167(a), the effect contents displayed when the small hit is won in the state where the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167(a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a display mode showing that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variably displayed is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Indicates a display mode (“341”) indicating that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has been won as a small hit. In the guidance display area Dm3, "right hit" for guiding the game method in the latent probability state is displayed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the character 811 has won the small hit, and the character "GET" is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "a small hit game starts" indicating that the small hit game is started is displayed.

When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167(b) is displayed. FIG. 167(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the small hit game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167(b), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, the same display mode as in FIG. 167(a) described above, that is, the display showing that the special figure 1 is variably displayed. Although the mode is displayed, actually, during the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is suspended. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167(b), the state where the special figure 1 is properly displayed in a variable state (the state in which the variation time is subtracted) and the variable display of the special figure 1 are suspended. The display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 may be different between the state in which the change time is not subtracted and the state in which the change time is not subtracted.

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect mode in which the character 811 sprints from the left direction to the right direction and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, an effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the display pattern of the effect pattern 813 appearing in the treasure box 812 causes the small prize of this time. The result of the winning game is configured to be notified to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168(a) and FIG. 168(b), the display content for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168(a) shows the contents of the display when the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball as a result of winning the ball in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. FIG. 168(b) is a schematic view showing an example, and FIG. 168(b) is a display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect the ball as a result of winning the ball in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

In FIG. 168(a), the effect symbol 813 indicating "cross mark" is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the character 811 indicates that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to the low probability state during the small hit game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment is displayed that guides that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game. In other words, during the latent probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) where the RUSH game is performed, by shifting the high probability state of special design to the low probability state, the game state is latent Since the state shifts to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a comment for the left-handed game to be executed is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

On the other hand, FIG. 168(b) shows a display pattern 813 indicating “V” from the treasure box 812, which is a display mode for informing the player that the RUSH game will be continuously executed (that is, the left side). The character 811 is displayed in a display form of sprinting from right to right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily understand the progress of the latent state game (RUSH game) only by understanding the effect contents executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the type of the small hit game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game), the ball winning the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is the probability change switch 2650e3. The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small hit shown in FIG. 167(a), the player is allowed to select whether or not to let the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 win a ball in this small hit game. It is configured to display a comment (for example, “RUSH ends if you are unlucky due to a small prize winning”, “Stop launching if you are anxious”), and a character that is displayed when a small winning is won. It is preferable to configure the display mode of 811 to be variable according to whether or not the small hit type that has been won this time is a small hit that is likely to end the latent probability state game (RUSH game).

With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to let the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 win the ball during the small hitting game. Further, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 variation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent state is limited, so the player Against this, it is possible to let the player play the game while thinking about whether to win a privilege (prize ball) during the small hit game or avoid the end of the latent state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. Sex can be provided.

Further, the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown in FIG. 167(b) may be configured to notify the player of the type of the small hit game being executed. Good, for example, as the small hit type that is being executed is a small hit type that is more likely to end the latent state game (RUSH game), it is better to configure the old tattered treasure box 812 to be displayed. It is preferable to display the comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Furthermore, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content that suggests the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) that has been won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It may be configured to notify the player of the contents (high reliability).

With such a configuration, for the player who has selected whether or not to win a ball in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 in this small winning game based on the display screen displayed when the small hit is won. Since a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree can be shown, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct.

In this case, in particular, for the player who has selected not to win the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650, it is emphasized that even if the player wins the ball, the RUSH game is difficult to finish. It should be configured so that it can be notified. Specifically, the small hit type determination means for determining the type of the small hit game this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period after the small hit game is started. And a means for determining (or means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after winning the small hit), and the result of the determination by the small hit type determining means is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to finish. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not been won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period after the small hitting game is started, it is better to shoot the ball for the present small hitting game. It is advisable to provide a display means for displaying a flairing comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball", "Weakling") indicating that the game has been acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the loss due to not winning the ball in the small-winning variable winning device 2650. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game is finished by winning the ball in the small-winning variable winning device 2650, the fact that the selection this time is unsuccessful with the game result is executed even if the play by the production is not performed. Although the player can be aware, since the player who has selected not to win the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the selection result of this time is advantageous, the selection result is displayed by the display means. By displaying the evaluation of, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the current selection is successful.

Further, a display mode for informing the player who has selected not to win the ball to the small winning combination variable winning device 2650, that the present small hit type is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing, correct answer", "I feel good") may be displayed, even if the small hit type this time is the small hit type that the RUSH game is likely to end, this time In the small hit game, a flairing comment (for example, "I should have fired the ball", "Yowamushi") may be displayed indicating that the privilege was obtained by firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display content of the effect for notifying that it is the latent state (advantageous latent state) in which the fall ineffective period is set will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent probability state is the advantageous latent probability state in which the fall invalidation period is set, the same latent probability mode setting process as in the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent probability mode in S4451), a production mode indicating that the latent probability state currently set for the player is an advantageous latent probability state (“invincible mode”) Is displayed.

When the player enters the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is surrounded). Then, “lucky point×0” is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 for the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). The numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation where the invincible mode has worked to the player.

Although not shown in the drawing of FIG. 169, the small hit number display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described fourth embodiment may be displayed, or the small hit number display 825. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, a non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player did not win a ball in the small prize variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games executed by the player and the number of small hit games played by the player Since the number of small hit games that have not been executed can be easily grasped, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a small hit type selection 5 table 202da is provided in place of the small hit type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won in the small hit, and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171(a), the value of the small hit type counter C5. In the range of “0 to 14”, “small hit A” is associated and defined. This "small hit A" is a small hit type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds elapses during the small hit game. Note that after the open state for 1.5 seconds elapses, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. Since this ending period is the same for all small hit types, in FIG. 171(a) Omit it.

Further, "small hit B" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "15 to 59". This "small hit B" is after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has passed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Although the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the setting of the second opening, the ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and therefore omitted in FIG. 171(a).

In the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "60 to 79", "small hit C" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit C" is after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has passed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Although the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the setting of the second opening, the ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and therefore omitted in FIG. 171(a).

In the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "80 to 99", "small hit D" is defined in association. This "small hit D" is after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has passed during the small hit game. , Is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. Although the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the setting of the second opening, the ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and therefore omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which an operation scenario of the passage solenoid 2650h during a small hit game is stored in advance, and the passage solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the small hit type to be executed. One operating scenario is set to execute.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171(b). FIG. 171(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171(b), in the operation scenario storage area 202db, the operation scenario set in accordance with the start timing of the small hit game is defined.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h be set to OFF until 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the small hit start timing, and from 1.4 seconds after the small hit start to the small hit end. It is regulated to set the flow path solenoid 2650h to ON for the period. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a loop counter in which the value is incremented by 1 every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the ball winning the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2, the selected small hit type, and the flow path solenoid. It is configured to variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Further, the balls flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 are branched into a ball passing through the falling gate 2650e3 and a ball not passing through (the second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650. Is configured.

Specifically, in the small hit game in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is a period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to off (1 from the small hit start. .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and the small win game that is most advantageous to the player for which the open period is set long is executed.

In the small hit game in which “small hit B” to “small hit D” are set as the small hit types, the first opening period is a timing at which the winning ball can pass the falling route. Further, the “small hit C” and “small hit D” have short opening periods of 0.1 seconds (shorter than “small hit B”). Since the first opening period is 0.5 seconds long (because it is longer than "small hit B"), the small hit game allows the ball to easily pass through the falling route.

In addition, "small hit C" is the shortest period for which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened by one opening operation is 0.6 seconds, which is the most disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for a ball fired by a right-handed game to enter the small hit variable winning device 2650 and reach a distribution channel distributed by a channel solenoid 2650h. It is so configured that the symbol fixing period of the special symbol at the time of winning the small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, immediately after the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small hit is stopped (see FIG. 167(a)), by stopping the right-handed game, the small hit game is started. At this point in time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball shot before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hitting variable winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a small hit prize counter 203da, a fall pass counter 203db, and a pass flag 203dc are added. doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit prize counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and in the small hit entrance passage process (see S171 in FIG. 174), the balls pass. When it is determined that the timing at which the sensor (sphere detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period for the small hit winning opening 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is incremented by 1 and after the addition. The prize number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (in FIG. 176). S2571).

Although detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state is maintained on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit prize counter 203da. The number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 is accumulated during the set period. As a result, the number of balls won in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, whether or not the player has the game characteristic of selecting whether or not the ball is to be won in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game, Depending on the selection contents of the person, the cumulative value of the number of balls won in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 may be significantly different even if the number of small winning games is the same. Therefore, it is possible to provide a detailed game result by displaying the number of balls won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650, not the number of times the small hitting game is executed.

It should be noted that both the number of balls won in the variable winning device 2650 for small hits and the number of times the small hit game is executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the prize is awarded during one small hit game. It may be configured to display the average value of the number of balls, or display the number of winnings as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

The falling pass counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the falling gate passing process (see S172 of FIG. 175). In that case (S3402 of FIG. 175: Yes), 1 is added to the value (S3403 of FIG. 175), and the passage number command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 of FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: Yes in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls passing through the falling route is always counted. .. As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the latent probability mode, the high probability state of the special symbol will pass through the route (falling route) where the high probability state of the special symbol will shift to the low probability state when there is no advantageous latent probability state. The player can be notified of the number of balls played (see cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The passage flag 203dc indicates that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball when the fact that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball is effectively processed (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to off). The flag is for indicating that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere by being set to ON.

This passage flag 203dc is determined in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) when the sphere passes through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No) is set to on. When the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 of FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for causing the high-probability state of the special symbol to fall during one small hit game is executed a plurality of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment described above in the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db. And are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The prize number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and in the ball passing related process (see S4582 of FIG. 179), the main controller 110. When it is determined that the prize number command is received from (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by 1, and the display prize is displayed in order to display the information corresponding to the value after the addition on the third symbol display device 81. A number command is set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, the winning number counter 223da, once the latent state is set, the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small hit games executed until the latent state ends. It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

The passage number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3, and determines that the passage number command has been received from the main control device 110 in the ball passage-related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). If so (S8107 of FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 when the current latent probability state is the advantageous latent probability state (see S8110 of FIG. 179).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 175. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is similar to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55). 176), the small hit entrance passage process (see FIG. 174), and the falling gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are different. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit entrance passage process (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). When it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not turned on (S3301: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small winning opening is open (S3302). When it is determined that the small hit winning opening is being opened (S3302: Yes), a small hit entrance passage command is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. 1 is added to the value of the small hit prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a prize number command is set based on the value of the small hit prize counter 203da after the addition (S3305), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that it is not during the opening period of the small hit winning opening (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the passage solenoid is turned off (S3307). , This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the falling gate passage processing (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling gate passage processing (S172).

In the falling gate passage processing (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401). When it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is turned on (S3401: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not turned on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is a passage at the falling gate (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the falling gate (S3402: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a passage in the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is calculated based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after addition. A command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). When it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not it is during the falling gate passage valid period (S3406). If it is determined that the falling gate passage is valid (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S3407), and the passage flag 203dc is set to ON (S3408). Next, the fall command is set (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that the falling gate passage is not valid (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). The small hit control process 5 (S2271) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above when it is determined that the small hit end timing is reached in the process of S2511 (S2511: No). The difference is that the values of the small hit prize counter 203da and the fall pass counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the pass flag 203dc is set to OFF (S2572). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment described above, instead of the state command process (see FIG. 62). 5 (see FIG. 177), the point that the hit related process 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of the hit related process (see FIG. 63), and the ball passing related process (see FIG. 179) is different, and the other processes are the same. Is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 177, the state command process 5 (S 4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the status command process 5 (S4291). The state command process 5 (S4291) executes the process of S4411 with respect to the state command process 4 (S4281) in the above-described fourth embodiment, and then replaces the process of S4454 with the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db. The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing is added. The other processing is the same as the status command processing 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit related process 5 (S 4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 5 (S 4292 ). The hit related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit related process (S4216) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that a process related to passing a ball is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the hit related process 5 (S4292), when it is determined in the process of S4505 that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether or not the ball passing related command has been received. (S4581). When it is determined that the ball passing related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passing related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a ball passing related process (S4582) which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4922) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passing related process (S4582).

In the ball passing related process (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a prize number command has been received from the main control device 110 this time (S8101). When it is determined that the prize number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the prize number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is read. It is executed (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent probability mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). When it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8104: No), a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this processing is ended. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent probability mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8106.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, when it is determined that the winning number command is not received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command is received (S8107). If it is determined that the passing number command is received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the processing of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the probability of short-time omission (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is not the value indicating the time-saving miss probability (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, when it is determined that the read value is not the value indicating the time-shortage latent probability (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8111.

Next, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent probability mode read in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8112: No), a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display passage number command is set (S8114), and the process is finished. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8112, when it is determined that the read latent probability mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation contents (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed are configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. The proportion of balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game passing through the falling gate 2650e3 is different depending on the opening operation pattern that is executed.

With this configuration, the contents of the small hit game to be executed are predicted so that the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall, and in order to perform the game aiming to obtain the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. The player can be allowed to select a game while doing so.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent probability state where one special symbol is set during the period of executing the big hit variation, the small hit is won in the other special symbol variation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state.

As a result, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) advantageous latent probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is easier to fall than the advantageous latent probability state. The unfavorable latent probability state can be set.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the hour/hour counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of hour/hour reductions) is the timing to start the variation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 of FIG. 33)). ), so that the variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) can be executed at the same time, a predetermined number of times Although it is configured to execute a time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set), for example, when setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 100 (when setting the time saving number 100 times) ), there is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol fluctuation to the start of the 101st special symbol fluctuation becomes a non-time saving state (a low probability state of a normal symbol).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol, it is a period in which the lottery (variation) advantageous to the player can be executed, The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period until the number of times the special symbol change exceeds a predetermined time saving time is executed However, there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable when the non-time saving state is set.

However, if the process of updating the value of the hour/hour counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of hour/hour reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends (timing at which the symbol fixing period ends), A variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and a variation of the second special symbol (lottery) can be executed at the same time in a gaming machine. A special symbol variation (lottery) with a preset number of time reductions is set to a time saving state. There was a problem that it was executed in the state of being.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the time saving end condition for the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100 time saving) executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes 0 (1st time saving end condition) is set, the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) is also set for the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and the two time saving end conditions are set. Of these, the time saving state may be ended based on the time saving ending condition that is established first.

Specifically, in the case where a predetermined period (for example, 100 time reductions) is set as the period in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol variation corresponding to the final variation of the time reduction state (for example, 100th time reduction) ends. The first time saving end condition that is satisfied by this, and the second time saving end condition that is satisfied when the condition for starting a special symbol change (for example, 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after the lapse of a predetermined period is satisfied And, when the 1st time saving end condition is established first, that is, before the 101st special symbol fluctuation is started, the 100th special symbol fluctuation period (or the symbol fixing period) has ended In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that time.

On the other hand, prior to the satisfaction of the first time saving end condition, when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol fixing period) ends (special (During symbol change), if the start condition of the 101st special symbol change is satisfied, it may be configured to end the time saving state before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, while preventing the special symbol variation (lottery) from being executed a predetermined number of times or more, the maximum period is set. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, as a normal symbol lottery (fluctuation), a state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, there is a probability variation counter 203aa for measuring a period in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a time saving counter 203f for measuring a period in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. The value of each counter is decremented and interrupted. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, a time saving counter is used instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) measurement). A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or the opposite process may be executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. In the above-described second embodiment, a so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, It has been configured to change the game state during the symbol fixing period (period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) displaying the special symbol lottery result. In other words, in the state where the probability variation state is set, if you win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol showing the jackpot) It is configured to shift the game state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state at the timing when is displayed.

By configuring in this way, during the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 (the period from the first symbol showing the big hit is stopped and displayed until the big hit game is executed), the second special symbol in the latent state (Special figure 2) The game can be executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, in order to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game and the special symbol lottery game are simultaneously performed and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game, a jackpot game is performed. While is being executed (from the opening period of the jackpot game is set, until the ending period of the jackpot game is finished), the change of the special symbol (lottery) is configured not to be executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not executed during the big hit game, so that the player can concentrate on the big hit game. However, because the special symbol lottery (variation) is not performed in all periods during the jackpot game, the period for executing the special symbol lottery is limited, and the game efficiency (the number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) is reduced. There was a problem of doing.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, during the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), special symbol fluctuations on the side not winning the jackpot It is configured to run. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot that is won is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period It is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the big hit game, a round game in which a ball can be entered by the big hit game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which the ball is easily entered) A period other than the game (for example, opening period, interval period, ending period) is configured to be able to execute the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the big hit game can be watched during the round game in the big hit game, and the special symbol fluctuation can be watched during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured so that the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment (other than the jackpot), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won to the jackpot that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different odds of winning a small hit. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can have different degrees of advantage.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that an open scenario table 202ea is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which the contents of the game during the big hit game or the small hit game (hereinafter, hit game) are stored, and the scenario of the hit game to be executed depends on the hit type. Remembered Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from the start of the winning game to the start of the first round game, the length of the round game period, and the variable winning that is opened in the round game. The type of device, the number of times the round game is executed, the length between round games (interval period), and the ending period length set after all round games are stored are stored.

In addition, the information (hit game content) read in order to execute the winning game corresponding to the winning big hit or the small hit may be determined in advance, and using the open scenario table 202ea as in the present embodiment. Information may be stored, or the method used in each of the above-described embodiments may be adopted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of main controller 110 RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above in that the big hit state flag 203ea, the small hit state flag 203eb, the special figure variation possible flag 203ec, and the big hit interruption flag 203ed. The difference is that a special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

The jackpot state flag 203ea is for showing the state of the jackpot game, the type of the special symbol that was won the jackpot, and the current jackpot gaming situation (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, the ending period) This is a flag that is referred to when determining which is "medium". Here, the contents of the big hit state flag 203ea will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot state flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the jackpot state flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the special symbol that was won this time is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (Fig. 182 (a ) Is described as “01”), and during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits become “0010” (described as “02” in FIG. 182(a)), and during the inter-round game (interval), the lower order Four bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 182(a)), and during the ending period (ED). The lower 4 bits are “0100” (described as “04” in FIG. 182(a)).

Then, the special symbol that was won this time is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0101" (in FIG. 182(a), " 05”), and during the round game (round), the lower 4 bits become “0110” (described as “06” in FIG. 182(a)), and during the inter-round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are It becomes “0111” (described as “07” in FIG. 182(a)), and the lower 4 bits become “1000” (described as “08” in FIG. 182(a)) during the ending period (ED).

When the big hit game is not executed (when the big hit medium flag 203o is set to OFF), the lower 4 bits are "0000" as an initial state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is configured such that its value is updated according to the jackpot scenario that is updated in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 of FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and the winning state The jackpot state flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of the special symbol that is won for the jackpot and the contents (jackpot gaming state) that the jackpot scenario after the update shows.

As described above, since the value of the big hit state flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the big hit scenario, for example, a unit that stores the update content of the big hit state flag 203ea and the stored content thereof. A means for determining (past history) may be provided, and a configuration for determining whether there is an abnormality in the jackpot game based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot state flag 203ea may be used. Specifically, for example, from the values that can be set when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Toku-zu 1 (the values of “01” to “04” shown in FIG. 182(a)), the jackpot is drawn by the lottery of Toku-zu. When it is determined that the value has been updated to a value that can be set when the player wins (the value of “05” to “08” shown in FIG. 182(a)), it is determined that the jackpot game is in an abnormal state, It may be configured to notify the abnormality. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine that the player has played an illegal game during the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the value of the big hit state flag 203ea is variable according to the execution content of the big hit control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but the current big hit game situation can be determined. It may be configured, for example, a means for determining whether or not the present is a big hit, a means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), May be provided, and the value of the big hit state flag 203ea may be set based on the determination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. A means for doing so may be provided, and the present jackpot gaming situation may be determined based on the determination result of that means.

Then, when the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is updated, a state command indicating that fact is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command for indicating that the value set in the jackpot state flag 203ea has been updated, thereby determining the current jackpot gaming situation, and various presentation modes according to the jackpot gaming situation. Is set.

In the sixth embodiment, as the jackpot game situation, it is configured to determine the special symbol type that was won for the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may not be determined. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of types for classifying the jackpot gaming situation.

The small hit state flag 203eb is for indicating the state of a small hit game, and which is the current small hit game situation (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, and during the ending period). This is a flag that is referred to when determining. Here, the content of the small hit state flag 203eb will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182(b), the small hit state flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits.

Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of the small hitting game, the lower 2 bits become “01” (described as “01” in FIG. 182(b)), and the lower 2 bits during the round game (round). Is "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182(b)), and during the ending period (ED). The lower 2 bits are “11” (described as “03” in FIG. 182(b)). When the small hitting game is not executed (when the small hitting medium flag 203p is set to OFF), the lower 2 bits are "00" (described as "00" in FIG. 182(b)). ..

In the present embodiment, since the round game is executed only once as a small hit game, the value for indicating the interval period is deleted from the above-described big hit state flag 203ea, and Since it is configured so that the small prize is not won in the lottery of the 1 special symbol, the value for discriminating the type of the special symbol won for the small prize is also deleted. The value of the small hit state flag 203eb is configured to be set in accordance with the update content of the small hit scenario that is updated in the small hit control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193). When the value of 203eb is updated, a state command for indicating the value of the updated small hit state flag 203eb is set and output to the voice lamp control device 113.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the current small hit game situation is grasped by receiving the state command including the information for indicating the value of the small hit state flag 203eb, and the effect mode according to the present situation is provided. Set.

The special figure variation possible flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is a state in which a new special symbol variation can be newly executed, and is turned on when a new special symbol variation can be executed. It is set.

The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario. This big hit interruption flag 203ed, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the opening period of the big hit game is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit game is executed.

In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is configured to be executed in a part of the jackpot game (a state where the round game is not executed), and by the special symbol lottery When the small hit is won, the small hit game is executed. The big hit interruption flag 203ed is set to ON during this small hit game, and the big hit scenario is configured not to be updated.

With such a configuration, even if the small hit is won during the opening period of the big hit game, the small hit game can be surely executed without starting the big hit round game. In addition, even if you win the small hit in a predetermined period such as the opening period of the big hit, because the opening period of the big hit is not subtracted (update of the big hit scenario), many small hit games are executed. You can motivate you to play games.

In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed during the big hit game, the update of the big hit scenario is interrupted to surely execute the small hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without, for example, without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, the jackpot game is forcibly ended based on the timing when the jackpot round game is executed, or until the jackpot round game is finished, the jackpot game May be temporarily suspended.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, since the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON based on the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot scenario is updated during the change time of the special symbol that is won for the jackpot. To be done. This allows the player to play the game while expecting that a variation pattern in which the variation time is set as short as possible is set, in addition to winning the small hit during the big hit game. On the other hand, the contents of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be watched.

In this case, regardless of the result of the special symbol variation lottery executed this time at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, it is preferable to execute the variation time suggestion notification that indicates the set variation time. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not a short variation time has been set, so that the effect of production can be enhanced. Even if the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the next special symbol lottery can be immediately executed by setting the short variation time. That is, the variation time suggestion notification is a notification indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a win, without indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a win (a win/loss determination result).

In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, for example, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed may be set to ON based on the timing at which the special symbol variation won for the small hit is executed. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the big game round game is executed while the special symbol variation won for the small hit is being executed, and the player is provided with an incomprehensible game.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and means for determining the variation time of the special symbol are provided, and the special symbol lottery (variation) of this time is the opening period. When it is determined that the special symbol lottery is determined to end within, the production mode is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (result of success/failure determination), and when it is determined that the current special symbol lottery (fluctuation) does not end within the opening period, Alternatively, it may be configured to set an effect mode corresponding to a case where the lottery result (winning/absence determination result) of the special symbol lottery is out. By configuring in this way, even if the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is forcibly ended by executing the round game of the big jackpot is a small hit, the special symbol variation without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Can be stopped.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. The control process of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment is a special symbol fluctuation stop instead of the special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above. Process 6 (see FIG. 183), the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) instead of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 185), the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39) Instead of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 186), jackpot control process (see FIG. 53), jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 188), jackpot end process (see FIG. 54) instead of jackpot end Processing 6 (see FIG. 192), small hitting control processing (see FIG. 55) instead of small hitting control processing 6 (see FIG. 193), variation condition determination processing (see FIG. 184), round execution processing (see FIG. ). 189) and a small hit end process (see FIG. 194) are added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 183, the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), in addition to the special symbol variation stop process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 97), the point of adding the variation condition determination process (S291), the first special symbol variation start Instead of the process (see FIG. 33), the first special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 185), the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39), the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see FIG. 186) ) Is different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), first, the variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. Details of the changing condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure changeable flag 203ec is on (S292). When it is determined that the special figure changeable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process proceeds to S202. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure changeable flag 203ec is on (S292: No), the process proceeds to S204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variable condition determination process (S291) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable condition determination process (S291).

In the variation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation inhibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure variation possible flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit medium flag 203o is on (S3502). If it is determined that the big hitting flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the big hitting state flag 203ea is read (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether the read information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is a big hit opening period (S3504). When it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05", the special figure variation possible flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process proceeds to S3507. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, when it is determined that the read information is not “01” or “05” (S3504: No), the special figure changeable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3506), and the process of S3507 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit medium flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3507). If it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is not on (S3507: No), the information set in the small hitting state flag 203eb is read (S3508). Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the small hit state flag 203eb read in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is “01” (S3509: Yes), the special figure variation possible flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special figure variation possible flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3511), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 of FIG. 33) in the second embodiment in that the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea is read. .. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), first, the reading of the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is executed (S391). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is a big hit opening period (S392). When it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is not "00" or "05" (S392: No), this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) in the second embodiment, read the information of the jackpot state flag 203ea, the first special symbol jackpot A process for determining whether it is the opening period or the round period is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), first, the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read (S971). Next, it is determined whether or not the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the first special symbol jackpot or the round period (S972). When it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process proceeds to S901. On the other hand, when it is determined that the information set in the big hit state flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the process of S902 is executed, and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271).

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening setting (S3601). If it is determined that there is an open setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is turned on (S3602), the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S3601, if it is determined that there is no opening setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether there is a closing setting (S3603). If it is determined that there is a setting for closing (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to OFF (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that there is no closing setting (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is the closing scenario end timing (S3605). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: Yes), the processing of S3606 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the closing scenario (S3605: No), the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 6 (S2272).

In the jackpot control process 6 (S2272), first, when it is determined in the process of S2301 that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351). .. When it is determined that the big hit suspension flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit suspension flag 203ed is not on (S2351: No), the big hit scenario is updated (S2302).

Next, it is determined whether it is a big hit start timing (S2302). When it is determined that it is a big hit start timing (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the big hit state flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2305). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), the round execution process (S2353) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, a round execution process (S2353) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution processing (S2353).

In the round execution processing (S2353), first, it is determined whether or not the present timing is the start timing of the first round (S3701). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), the jackpot interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3703. Details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round in the process of S3701 (S3701: No), the value corresponding to the jackpot state flag 203ea is set (S3703), and the process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. Then (S3704), the present process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the jackpot interruption process (S3702) which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

In the big hit suspension process (S3702), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the big hit suspension flag 203ed is set to on (S3802), the big hit suspension command is set (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3805. .. On the other hand, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the small hitting medium flag 203p is not turned on, an opening command indicating the start of the small hit is set (S3804), and the process proceeds to S3805.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol is changing (S3805). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol (S3806), the special symbol variation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), and the book The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), the present process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). When it is determined that it is the round end timing (S2307: Yes), the closing of the specific winning opening is set (S2308), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of ending the operation of the special electric power (S2354). When it is determined that it is the timing of ending the operation of the special electric power (S2354: Yes), the ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and the present process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, an ending execution process (S2355) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the content of the ending execution process (S2355).

In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the big hit state flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 188, the description will be continued. In the process of S2354, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the special electric power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the operation end timing of the combination operation device (S2356). When it is determined that it is the operation end timing of the combination operation device (S2356: Yes), the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, when it is determined that it is not the operation end timing of the combination operating device (S2356: No), the present process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the jackpot end process 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the state command (S2406), the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to "00" in the jackpot end process (S2312 of FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that a process (S2451) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 6 (S2272). In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), a process of ending the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is added to the small hit control process (S2205 of FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above. The difference is that a small hit end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is a small hit start timing (S2503), an opening command is set (S2504), and the small hit state flag 203eb is dealt with. A value to be set is set (S2581), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, when it is determined that it is not the small hit start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit round start timing (S2505). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit round (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process (S2506) is executed, the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set (S2582), and this process To finish.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S2509, when it is determined that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), the ending command is set (S2510) and the value corresponding to the small hit state flag 203eb is set ( (S2583), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511), the small hit end processing (S2584) is executed, and this processing is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194, the small hitting end processing (S2584) which is one of the small hitting control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit end process (S2584).

In the small hit ending process (S2584), first, it is determined whether the big hit suspension flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the big hit suspension flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the big hit suspension flag 203ed is set to off (S2592), and the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is set to on (S2593). Next, the update value of the big hit scenario is decremented by 1 (S2594), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2595), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot suspension flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the processing of S2592 to S2594 is skipped, the processing of S2595 is executed, and the present processing is ended.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, during the period from when the jackpot game is executed until when the round game is started (opening period of the jackpot game), the special symbol variation on the side not winning the jackpot Is configured to run. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot that is won is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during the opening period It is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol.

That is, even during the big hit game, a round game in which a ball can be entered by the big hit game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state in which the ball is easily entered) A period other than the game (for example, opening period, interval period, ending period) is configured to be able to execute the special symbol lottery. With this configuration, the big hit game can be watched during the round game in the big hit game, and the special symbol fluctuation can be watched during the other period, so that the player can be provided with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, it is configured so that the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive jackpot game. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of alignment (other than the jackpot), a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be won to the jackpot that can be given to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different odds of winning a small hit. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol can have different degrees of advantage.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 233. In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game is executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a specific region 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small hit game, and the ball passes through the specific region 650V during the small hit game. It is configured so that a big hit (so-called two kinds) game is executed.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, the first flow in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area 650V as a path for flowing the ball toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 which is opened during the small hitting game. The passage ta (see FIG. 196) and the second passage tb (see FIG. 196) through which the sphere easily passes the specific area 650V are provided. As a result, the player pays attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hitting game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, and thus the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. Can also make the player interested. Furthermore, when the sphere flows down the second flow path tb where the sphere easily passes the specific area 650V, the easiness of winning the sphere to the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different depending on the gaming state that is set and the type of small hit. With such a configuration, when the small hit corresponding to the big hit to which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit game is won, a gaming state (advantageous time saving) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V and the big hit end It is possible to set a gaming state (disadvantageous time saving) that facilitates passage of a ball to the specific area 650V when a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won.

Then, in the present embodiment, by using the configuration of the advantageous time saving and the disadvantage time saving as described above, when the jackpot is won once (first win), at least including the first win, a total of three big jackpots are executed. It is configured such that the game state advantageous to the player continues. By thus setting the game state in which the jackpot game is guaranteed to be executed a plurality of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, but in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be won in a small hit in a lottery of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 3640 that triggers the lottery. Then, the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a has entered the second ball entrance 3640, and the electric accessory 3640a transitions to the closed state. At that time, the ball is flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a. The ball is distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (downstream side).

Further, in the second embodiment, the ball located on the downstream side of the ball channel on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second channel tb which is advantageous to the player, and is continued. When the sphere is fired, the sphere is configured to easily flow into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, during the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, in order to flow the ball into the second flow path tb, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of obtaining an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 195, a configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, the point that the flow path unit 660 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13, the point that the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the flow path unit 660, and the second variable In the prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650, a specific area 650V that can provide a big hit game based on the passage of a ball is provided, and the first variable prize winning device provided in the lower center of the game board 13. 650, the second ball entrance 640, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached are deleted. The other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view in which the vicinity of the flow path unit 660 is enlarged, and FIG. 197(a) is a plan view schematically showing the sphere flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state). Then, FIG. 197(b) is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state). Further, FIG. 198(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 198(b) shows the electric accessory 3640a. It is a perspective view which showed typically the ball flow in the open state (projection state).

It should be noted that, when the terms indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment are described, the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a means a flow path for allowing a ball to enter the second entrance 3640. It is a term used to indicate a closed state (a flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a), that is, a state where the electric accessory 3640a is embedded in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. In some cases, the term "restricted state" (a state in which entry of a ball into the second entry port 3640 is limited) is used.

Further, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a means a state in which a flow path (a flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) for causing a ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 is opened, that is, electric It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 3640a is projected from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, a term called a permissible state (a state in which a ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640). May be used.

As shown in FIG. 196, the passage unit 660 forms a first passage 660a forming a first passage ta and a second passage tb as a sphere passage through which the sphere flows down toward the V winning device 650. A second passage 660b, and further, a first inflow port 661 into which a sphere that has flowed down in a substantially central portion of the right side region flows in, and a sphere that flows in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a. The first guide path 661a (see FIG. 197(b)), the second inflow port 662 into which the sphere flowing down the left side of the right region flows, and the sphere flowing from the second inflow port 662 pass through the through gate 67. The third passage 660c that allows the ball to flow downward toward the lower area of the game board 13, the third inlet 663 into which the ball flowing down the right side of the right area flows, and the ball flowing from the third inlet 663. And an outlet 66 for discharging to the outside.

The sphere flowing down the right side region is a flow path unit while varying the flow path by a plurality of nails (for example, nails 660k (see FIG. 195) that are flow path changing members) arranged above the flow path unit 660. It is configured to reach 660, about 55% of the spheres flowing down the right side region flow into the first inlet 661, about 40% flow into the second inlet 662, and about 5% of the third. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. In addition, the distribution ratio described above indicates an average value when a right-handed game is performed, and for example, of the launch strengths for which the right-handed game is possible, the ball is continuously fired at the weakest firing strength. In this case, the proportion of spheres flowing into the second inlet 662 increases. In this way, by allowing the player to control the firing strength in the right-handed game, it is possible to change the inflow ratio to each inflow port provided in the flow path unit 660. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of varying the firing intensity so that an advantageous game is executed.

Further, the sphere that has flowed down the second inlet 662 is configured to be distributed into two flow paths formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the sphere distributed to the front flow path (about 90 %) flows down through the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (about 10%) distributed to the flow path on the back side (not shown) flow into the out port 66, and the pachinko machine 10 It is configured to be discharged to the outside. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, positions close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened when the result of the lottery for the normal symbols is a hit (formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state). Out ports 66 are provided (positions that are close to the upstream end and the downstream end of the sphere flow path) (the partition walls for partitioning the out ports 66 and the space are provided).

With this configuration, since the player can easily understand the movable range of the electric role object 3640a that is operated when a normal symbol hit game is executed, the electric role object 3640a during the win game It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation.

In the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the outlet 66 and the movable region of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a. , So that a gap of less than half a ball is formed. Accordingly, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall from being damaged by friction. Further, since the size of the gap is less than half of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from spilling downward from the gap.

Next, the ball flow of the right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing in from the first inflow port 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a, but when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (embedded state), on the electric accessory 3640a. Without flowing down, it flows down to the first passage 660a provided below the first guide path 661a (see FIG. 197(b)). The first passage 660a is a passage in which the first passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured such that the time required for the sphere to pass is about 0.5 seconds, and the ball is V-winned in a shorter time than the sphere flowing down the second flow path tb described later. The device 650 can be reached.

Further, most of the balls (about 90%) of the balls flowing into the second inflow port 662 pass through the through gate 67 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and are closer to the front side than the second passage 660b described later. It flows down a third passage 660c formed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the player's point of view when viewed from the front, and is discharged to the lower region of the game board 13. Further, a part (about 10%) of the sphere that has flown into the second inflow port 662 passes through a fourth passage (not shown) provided on the inner side of the third passage 660c and flows into the out port 66.

In this way, by forming a plurality of ball passages by utilizing the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to three-dimensionally form the flow path through which the balls flow down, and thus the game area of the game board 13 Thus, it is possible to provide more ball passages in a limited range, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize a ball flow that the player does not get tired of.

Similar to the second inflow port 662 described above, the ball that has entered the third inflow port passes through the out port 66 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 3640a. .. Here, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197(a), the structure of the upper surface (lower surface of the spherical flow) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured such that a downward slope is formed from the upper right direction to the lower left direction from the viewpoint of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is formed. It is configured that the sphere that has reached the position of (1) flows down by its own weight on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a from the upstream side (upper right side) toward the downstream side (lower left side).

Then, on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a, a delay member is provided for delaying the downflow speed of the ball flowing down on the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a first delay member 3641 and a second delay member 3642 are provided, and a ball flowing down on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is the first delay member 3641, While abutting on the second delay member 3642, the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 provided on the lower stream side of the electric accessory 3640a. In addition, in this embodiment, the installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

The installation member 3643 is directly attached to the flow path unit 660, not to the electric accessory 3640a. Therefore, the electric accessory 3640a is always arranged at a fixed position regardless of its operation. In this way, the delay member for delaying the flow-down speed of the sphere flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is provided in the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642 attached to the electric accessory 3640a, and the passage unit 660. When the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) (see FIG. 198(a)) by configuring with the attached installation member 3643, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a meanders. When the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (embedded state) (see FIG. 197(a)), the ball cannot flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. (Difficult) can be made to function as a flow-down suppressing means.

Here, the above-mentioned flow-down suppressing means will be specifically described. In the case where the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 197(a)), that is, when it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance. In FIG. 197(a), since the electric role object 3640a is embedded in the back side of the game board 13, the first delay member 3641 on the electric role object 3640a is on the game board 13 side. Will be located in. As a result, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 becomes narrower (a distance (about 5 mm) such that a ball cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643). Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3643 is also a distance (about 7 mm) that a ball cannot pass.

As a result, even if an act of improperly placing the ball on the electric accessory 3640a is performed while the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball enters the second entrance 3640. Can be suppressed. Further, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), it is not necessary to embed each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the game board 13, so that the electric accessory 3640a is embedded. The opening of the game board 13 to be provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to prevent the situation where dust and dirt enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game board 13.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely embedded in the game board 13, but a part (first delay member 3641, first delay member 3641, The second delay member 3642) is exposed so that the electric accessory 3640a is closed. Thereby, even when the electric accessory 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily understand where the electric accessory 3640a is arranged. Further, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, how the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state). It is possible to let the player know what to do.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. Since it is possible to let the player know in advance, it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 3640a from actually opening and missing the state where the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), as shown in FIG. 198, the ball flowing into the first inlet 661 and flowing down the first guide path 661a is on the electric accessory 3640a. To reach. Then, the electric accessory 3640a flows down toward the second entrance 3640 while meandering along the slope and the shape of each delay member.

Here, with reference to FIG. 198(a), the ball passage formed on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) will be described. A meandering sphere flow path is formed in which the sphere discharged from the first guide path 661a reaches the second entrance 3640. It takes about 2 seconds for the sphere to pass through the meandering sphere flow path, and passes through the flow path (flow path upstream section ZA) from the outlet of the first guide path 661a to the inner side of the first delay member 3641. Is about 0.8 seconds, and the time required to pass through the flow path (flow path downstream section ZB) from the inner side of the first delay member 3641 to the second entrance 3640 is about 1.2. It is configured to be seconds.

In the present embodiment, as the operation end condition of the electric accessory 3640a, the first universal power end condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time after the operation to the open state (protruding state) is 3 seconds, and the second The second universal electric power termination condition that is satisfied when one ball enters the ball entrance 3640 is set, and the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state when any of the universal electric power termination conditions is satisfied. It is configured to operate to (buried state).

The ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedded state) is the first passage 660a below the electric accessory 3640a. Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the movement distance (movement distance in the depth direction) when the electric accessory 3640a operates from the open state (projected state) to the closed state (embedded state) is at least one ball (11 mm) or more. In this embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is larger than one ball (11 mm) and smaller than two balls (22 mm), that is, 15 mm.

With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball located on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls are slid together. Since there is no continuous drop in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

The sphere staying in the flow passage upstream portion ZA (see FIG. 198(a)) of the meandering sphere flow passage stays in the first passage 660a and in the flow passage downstream portion ZB (see FIG. 198(a)). The ball is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In the present embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (embedding state) at a speed at which the ball falls directly below. Is configured.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and the electric accessory 3640a is in a state in which the ball is located between the second delay member 3642 and the second ball entrance 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (embedded state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 moving toward the second ball entrance 3640 side and enters the second ball entrance 3640. I am configuring. As described above, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second entrance. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of firing 100 balls per minute, and when 100 balls are fired per minute in a right-handed game, about 1 ball out of every 2 balls. A sphere flows into the first inflow port 661. That is, since the spheres that are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds flow into the first inflow port 661 at a ratio of one in every two spheres, the interval at which the spheres flow into the first inflow port 661 is about 1.2 on average. Seconds.

Then, as described above, since the flow path downstream portion ZB is configured to require 1.2 seconds for the ball to pass, when the above-mentioned second universal power termination condition is satisfied, that is, the second entrance In the case where the electric accessory 3640a moves to the closed state (embedded state) due to the ball entering 3640, if the ball is continuously fired to the right hitting area, the second entrance 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a moves to the closed state in a state where the sphere that has flowed into the first inflow port 661 next to the sphere that has entered the first flow path 661 is located in the flow path downstream portion ZB, It can be easily made to fall.

On the other hand, when the game is played intentionally at the timing of firing the ball, it is difficult to cause another ball to fall into the second passage 660b in a state where the ball is put into the second entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650, which is advantageous to the player, it is possible to prompt the player to continuously shoot the ball.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the game state, 3 seconds is set as the first normal power termination condition for the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but the game state is the normal state. In this case, the first universal communication end condition is set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required to flow down the flow path upstream portion of the meandering sphere flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a. However, even if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, there is no possibility that the ball will enter the second entrance 3640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous privilege from being given to the player who plays an inappropriate game such as performing a right-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down into the second passage 660b, the ball is allowed to flow down into the second passage 660b with the V winning device 650 opened by some method to reach the specific area 650V. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of passing a ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b, which is advantageous to the player, for the right-handed game during the normal state and the player who does not continuously perform the right-handed game during the time saving state. Although the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult to perform, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a. Further, there may be three or more passages for receiving balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a, or a plurality of receiving openings for balls that have fallen from the electric accessory 3640a may be provided, and each of the receiving openings may make the V winning device 650 inside. The probability of passing the specific area 650V may be different. Further, a plurality of passages through which balls falling from the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V are provided, and the time required for each passage to reach the specific area 650V (time required for winning the V winning device 650) You may comprise so that it may differ.

Returning to FIG. 195, the description will be continued. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the flow path unit 660. Like the above-described first embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is opened when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In addition, 90% of the balls launched in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (balls that flow into the first inlet 661 (50%) and balls that flow into the second inlet 662 (40%)) Since both are configured to win the first variable winning device 65, even if the flow path unit 660 is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be smoothly executed. You can Further, the sphere that has flown into the first inflow port 661 and the sphere that has flowed into the second inflow port 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable winning device 65. The 1-variable winning device 65 can be easily won.

<Regarding production contents in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 199 to FIG. 202, before describing the characteristic effects executed in the seventh embodiment, the game characteristics of the seventh embodiment will be briefly described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won by a lottery for a special symbol, or a small hit is won by a lottery for a special symbol, and a ball is passed to a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small hit game. In this case, the jackpot game is configured to be executed (so-called 1 type/2 type mixed type).

The first special symbol lottery does not win the small win, and the second special symbol lottery only wins the small prize. Then, the second ball entrance 3640, which is a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, is configured so that the ball can be entered only in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state. When the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot is over.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to be opened in the small hitting game, and the ball is passed to the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. It has a difficult first flow path (first passage 660a) and a second flow path (second passage 660b) that is easy to pass, and it is possible to change which flow path the ball flows down according to the game content. It is configured to be able to.

Further, the seventh embodiment has advantageous small hits in which a time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game set in a corresponding manner, and disadvantageous small hits in which the time saving state is not set. It is configured to change the fluctuation time set accordingly. In addition, an advantageous time saving state in which it is easy to enter a ball into the specific area 650V when a small win is won as a time saving state, and a disadvantage in which a ball is easily entered into the specific area 650V when a small hit is won It is configured to be able to set the time saving state.

In the present embodiment, the second flow path (second passage 660b) that allows the sphere to flow down toward the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of the variation of the second special symbol. It is configured to set a state in which the ball can be flowed down, and is configured to change the variation time of the special symbol set at the time of winning the small hit in the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantage time saving state. Then, in the state where the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path when winning the advantageous small hit wins the V winning device 650, and the second flow path occurs when winning the disadvantage small hit. It is configured such that the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small hit type is set so that the ball flowing down does not win the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the advantageous time saving state is set, since the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V even if the disadvantage is hit, the time saving state is set across the big hit game. be able to. That is, in the case of winning the jackpot (first hit) in which an advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot is over in the lottery of the first special symbol, at least the second big hit game (three times if the first hit is included) is executed. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199(a), an effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 199(a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect that is executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won in the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 199(a), while the time saving state is set, the word "right-handed" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 to allow the player to play the right-handed game. A symbol for indicating the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is displayed in the variable region Dm5.

The symbol displayed in this universal symbol variation area Dm5 is variably displayed corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). This is what is normally displayed in a stopped manner in a display mode for showing the result of this lottery in synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) stops. In FIG. 199(a), a display mode "display mode imitating two circles" indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win is shown. In the embodiment, if the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is out of order, the "display mode imitating two crosses" is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol variation area Dm5, and the ordinary symbol (second symbol) During the variable display of ), the "display mode in which the circle mark and the cross mark are variably displayed alternately is displayed" in the universal figure variation region Dm5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 199(a), in the case of winning in the ordinary drawing lottery, an effect in which the character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses the bridge 851 to the race venue 852 is executed. In this effect, the ball is made to flow down onto the electric accessory 3640a that has been moved to the closed state (protruding state) based on the winning in the universal drawing, and the ball is allowed to enter the second entrance 3640. It shows a game, the operating state of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed using the erected state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the second entrance 3640. The display content is set so that whether the character 811 arrives at the race venue 852 or not is expressed by whether or not the player makes a ball.

In this way, by performing an effect that is reminiscent of the actual playability using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to inform the player of the complicated playability in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 199(a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to fluctuate, and the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 and the special symbol 2 display area Dm2 are both displayed. A display mode indicating that the special symbol variation is not performed is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "preparing for race" is displayed, which suggests future production contents.

Here, the flow of the effect contents executed during the time saving state in the present embodiment will be briefly described. It is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 in the state where the time saving state is set. When the winning symbol is won in the ordinary symbol lottery (general symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 199(a), the ball is made to flow down onto the electric accessory 3640a that is in the open state (protruding state), and then into the second entrance 3640. The production corresponding to the game in which the ball is entered (the production directed to the race venue) is executed.

Then, when the ball enters the second entrance 3640 and the variation of the second special symbol is started, the character 811 arrives at the race venue and the race effect shown in FIG. 199(b) described later is executed. It The content of this race effect depends on the lottery result of the second special symbol that is being executed (the result of the judgment, the change time), and the inflow state of the ball into the second passage 660b that makes it easy for the ball to enter the specific area 650V. Is set.

After that, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small hit game, an effect in which the character 811 becomes the first finish as the race result is executed (see FIG. 201(b)). In this way, each game executed during the time saving state, that is, a game to be won per normal symbol, a game to enter a ball into the second entrance 3640, and a small win in the second special symbol lottery It is possible to notify the player of the game result to be played, the game result of the game for passing the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hit game, using a series of effects. Therefore, since the player can grasp the game result by seeing the effect (race effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. ..

Here, regarding the display screen during the race effect, returning to FIG. 199(b), the description will be continued. In the state where the display shown in FIG. 199(a) is executed, that is, during the time-saving state, the regular symbol (the second symbol) is won, and the electric accessory 3640a is variably operated in the open state (permissible state). When the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a in this state and enters the second entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199(b) is displayed.

On the race start screen, a display mode in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit executes a race with a rival 860 imitating a turtle is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 199(b) is a state in which the second special symbol variation is executed for the first time since the time saving state is set, and the special symbol 2 variation area Dm2 includes the second special symbol (special feature). The display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that (Fig. 2) is being variably displayed is displayed, and the characters "race entry remaining 9 times" are displayed in the remaining short time count notification area Dm6 as the remaining short time count. .. Then, in the sub display area Ds, the characters "1st place goal" are displayed in order to guide the effect result of the race effect corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

Next, during the time saving state, the lottery for the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed, and when the lottery result is out, the screen shown in FIG. 200(a) is displayed. In FIG. 200(a), the stop display mode of "3.4.6" indicating that the lottery result of the special drawing 2 is out is displayed in the special drawing 2 variation area Dm2, and the main display area Dm is displayed. , A display mode (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot finish the goal) is displayed to indicate that the race effect has ended. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Expect next time" are displayed to indicate that the current variation of Toku-zu 2 was not a game result advantageous to the player and that the time saving state will continue. ..

On the other hand, when the lottery of special figure 2 is successful, the screen shown in FIG. 200(b) or FIG. 201(a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the present embodiment, the ball passage is configured so that two flow paths for letting the ball flow down toward the V winning device 650 that is operated to open when the small hit is won. It is configured such that the time required to reach the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hitting game is different depending on which passage the ball passes through. Further, the passage through which the sphere passes is configured so that the ease with which the sphere passes to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is different.

Therefore, during the change of the special symbol in the case where the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is won in the lottery, the flow path in which the sphere is flowing down toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result is obtained. It is configured to change the effect mode based on the. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b that is advantageous to the player during the small hit change of the special figure 2, the effect mode shown in FIG. 200(b) is displayed, When the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small hit variation of FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b), it is shown in FIG. 201(a). A performance mode is displayed.

In FIG. 200(b), in order to show that the ball is in a state where it is easy to pass the specific area 650V in the small hitting game executed after the variation of the special map 2 being executed is stopped and displayed, the main display is shown as the race effect. An effect in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 is executed in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode (display mode with aura) different from the normal mode, and the player is informed that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be the first place in this race effect. In order to do so, the letters "speed UP" are displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "Large Chance" is displayed as a comment to indicate that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will be the first place in this race effect.

On the other hand, in FIG. 201(a), as a race effect, an effect mode in which the character 811 and the rival 860 are aiming for the goal while developing a dead heat is displayed. In this way, even if the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is the same small hit type, it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in the flow path through which the ball flows down. By changing the effect mode to be performed, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player, so that it is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player interested in the content of the series of productions (race productions).

When the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game, that is, when it is determined that the big hitting game will be executed after the small hitting game is finished, the effect mode shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed. To be done.

On the other hand, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game, the rival 860 scores a goal before the character 811 in the effect mode shown in FIG. The effect mode is displayed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, a first time saving state (time saving state A) that is advantageous to the player as a time saving state and a second time saving that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first time saving state. The state (time saving state B) is configured to be settable, and when the time saving state A (first time saving state) is set, the small hit of the small hit type corresponding to the big hit game to which the time saving state is given is given. The ball is configured to pass to the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the player wins.

That is, in the state in which the time saving state A is set, when the big hit game is executed based on the small hit prize, the time saving state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is surely set. doing.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the player that the time saving state A has been set, the effect mode shown in FIG. 202(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the time saving state A is set, an effect mode in which a seabed race in which the background showing the seabed is set is set is set. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "If the race is won, a luxury prize is confirmed!?" is displayed, which indicates that the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game. In this way, by suggesting that the time saving state A is set by changing the background when the race is executed, it is possible to set a presentation mode that is easy for the player to understand, and at the same time during the actual race. Since the effects can be shared, the amount of image data used for setting the effect mode can be reduced.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, as the background of the performance during the race, a plurality of background images can be set in addition to the normal background and the above-mentioned seabed background. It is possible to set a background imitating the, a background imitating the sea of trees, a background imitating the city, etc. The ratio of each background is set differently according to the currently set time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which of the time saving states is currently set based on the background type set as the background of the performance during the race.

Furthermore, a special measure that can be set only when the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) is provided with measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state A is continuously set. A background may be provided. As a result, it is possible to provide a sense of security that a time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set, and to provide a sense of superiority by notifying other players of the special game result. ..

In the above, the characteristic rendering mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described, but the above description is merely an example, and other rendering modes may be displayed. For example, in the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, the effect example in which the effect mode corresponding to the game result is set is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode that is easily set by the game result. It may be configured to be different.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the state where the effect mode of FIG. 199(b) is displayed, that is, in the state where the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 during the time saving state (starting fluctuation of special figure 2). The display mode of the rivals 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time, and for example, in the special small figure 2 lottery, an advantageous small hit (small hit A) that is advantageous to the player Display of rivals 860 depending on whether you win, a small win that is more disadvantageous to the player than a small win (small win C), or a non-win (small win) wins The types of characters set as modes may be different.

With such a configuration, at the time when the special map 2 fluctuation is started, the player can be provided with information that can predict the future game content, that is, the lottery result of the special map 2 lottery, and the winning jackpot type. Can be provided.

In addition, when the production mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the current special mode 2 change is displayed (set) at the time when the special mode 2 variation is started, the contents of the displayed performance mode are grasped. However, there arises a problem that the action of continuing the game is performed only when the result of the lottery is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, when the ball is entered into the second entrance 3640, the game is continuously performed. If the ball is not fired, it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during the small hitting game.

As a result, even if the production mode (display mode) that suggests the lottery result of the current special map 2 variation is displayed (set) at the time when the special figure 2 variation is started, after confirming the display mode, Since it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether or not to win the ball to the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem.

In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199(b) can be started from the timing when the change in Toku-zu 2 is started, the period in which the race is executed (the performance execution period during the race) can be lengthened. The staging effect can be enhanced. Specifically, because the variation period of the special symbol can be included in the performance execution period during the race, for example, it is longer to win the prize (big hit, small hit) by lottery of the special symbol than to be out By configuring the variable period to be easily set, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won the winning as the production execution period during the race becomes longer, and by increasing the production execution period. , It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (hit suggestion effect) that suggests that the winning is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, the determination result (preferred figure 2) is executed for a period from the start of the variation of the special map 2 to the end of the small hit game, and then the determination result is the predetermined determination result. Using a specific game (small hit game) executed when it is (small hit), the character 811 is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 199(b) to FIG. 202(a)) of racing. , A value (information) for indicating the remaining short time count (the number of remaining times excluding the special figure change currently being executed) displayed in the remaining short time count notification area Dm6 at the start of the race (see FIG. 199(b)) It is configured to continuously display until the end (FIG. 202(a)), that is, until the small hit game executed after the end of the special figure change (change in the special figure 2) ends.

In this way, even if the special figure change ends and the small hit game is executed, the display mode of the remaining short time count notification area Dm6 is configured not to be variable, so that the player can understand the effect during the race. It can be easily notified.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the race is performed using one special map change (lottery) and a period until the small hit game is finished when the small hit is won in the special map lottery. Since it is configured to execute the intermediate production, there is a problem that the in-race production execution period greatly differs based on the special drawing lottery result. In other words, if the special symbol lottery result is out of place, the small hit game is not executed, so the period during which the small hit game is executed cannot be included in the in-race performance execution period, and the in-race performance execution There was a problem that the period was shortened.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an element for branching the effect mode of the effect during the race, at least the lottery result of the special symbol and the game result of the small hit game are held, so unless the small hit is won, the effect during the race It is not possible to provide the player with the performance mode (for example, see FIG. 200(b) and FIG. 201(a)) set in the final stage of the game, and get tired of the game before the player enjoys various effects. There was a possibility that there would be a problem.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is missed, a longer variation time than when the lottery result of the special symbol is small hit, specifically, , The variation time set when the small hit is won, and the variation time similar to the time when the small hit game time is added (the same), the deviation variation pattern (variation pattern for gaze production) It is configured to be settable, and when this variation pattern for gaze production is set, as a production during the race, it is won as a small symbol with special symbol variation, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small symbol game. It may be configured to set an effect mode (see FIG. 202(a)) that indicates the fact. As a result, even if a small hit is not won in the special drawing lottery, it is possible for the player to experience the effect mode set in the final stage of the effect during the race.

In addition, if you win the big hit in the special drawing lottery, set the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation time set when you win the small hit, the first round of the big hit game and the small hit It is advisable to set the opening operation of the jackpot game so that the game and the opening operation mode are the same. As a result, even when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the production during the race can be executed, so that the player is provided with a production mode in which the production result of the production during the race is advantageous to the player. It can be done easily.

Further, in the present embodiment, the production during the race is configured to be executed using the period (special symbol variation period, small hit execution period) set based on one special symbol lottery, but Without being limited, it may be configured to execute the production during the race using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, for example, when the special symbol lottery results are continuously out of alignment, it is possible to execute the production during the race using the continuous special symbol variation period.

Therefore, even if the variation time set when the special symbol lottery result is out of sync is shorter than when the special symbol lottery result is a win, it is set at the end of the production during the race. A performance mode can be provided to the player. In addition, since one effect mode is set using a plurality of deviation fluctuations, the effect mode for indicating to the player that the special symbol lottery has been missed is associated with each special figure lottery. Compared with the case of setting, it is possible to reduce the number of times the effect for notifying the player that the special drawing lottery is missed is executed.

The effect contents when the time saving state is set have been described above, but in addition to that, for example, by the lottery of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game is over, the jackpot type in which the time saving state A is set is won. In this case, it may be configured to execute a special suggestion effect for notifying that effect, for example, in a special display mode of "VVV" instead of the display mode of the third symbol which is normally stopped and displayed. The three symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to promptly inform the player that the advantageous game state is set for the player, and thus the player can play the game with confidence for a long period of time.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment includes a first random number 7 table 202fa, a first type selection 7 table 202fb, a second random number 7 table 202fc, and a variation pattern 7 table 202fd. It has a small hit type selection 7 table 202fe and a release scenario 7 table 202ff. In addition, a configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name other than “7” added to enable identification of the use in the seventh embodiment)) ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. In addition, in this first random number 7 table 202fa, two types of special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol are provided, and it is a big hit. Although the number of random numbers to be the same is the same, only the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol is set to the value of the random number that is a small hit (see FIG. 204). In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be a small hit (setting only one), a lottery for the first special symbol and a lottery for the second special symbol, a bonus to the player (big hit or small hit) ) It is possible to have different expectations for granting.

Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. 204(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204(b) is the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. In the first random number 7 table 202fa, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit are set. It is a table.

Specifically, when performing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, “0 to 4” among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values are other than the jackpot (that is, It is defined as the judgment value of (off). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a big hit.

When performing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, “0 to 4” of the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as the jackpot determination value, and “5 to 504” is the jackpot determination value. Is defined as "," and "505-999" is defined as the other judgment value (that is, deviation). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit, and in any of "5 to 504". In some cases, it is determined as a small hit.

The first hit type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first hit type counter C2. With reference to the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb, the big hit type when the big hit is won is determined. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 205(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205(a), in the present embodiment, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired during the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the tokutetsu 2 are made different, or each of the plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since it is possible to vary the ratio to be provided, it is possible to provide the player with different game playability between the game using the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2). It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used during the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described. FIG. 205(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205(b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 9", the big hit type is "big hit A" and any of "10 to 49". If so, the jackpot type is "big jackpot B", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot jackpot".

The “big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds as a big hit game is 15 rounds (R) and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state (actual time saving number 10 times). Then, "time saving A" that is advantageous to the player is set as the time saving state that is set after the jackpot is over. Since this "big hit A" is set to a large number of rounds of big hit games, and the gaming state after the big hit is a more advantageous "time saving A" in the advantageous time saving state for the player, "big hit A" is , Is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 10 random number values for which "big hit A" is selected, it is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1). If it happens, the percentage of selecting "big hit A" is 10%.

In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery (special diagram 2 lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special diagram 1 lottery) is triggered. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 3640 that becomes, the number of times the lottery (variation number) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure) in the time saving state. 2) The number of times of lottery (the number of fluctuations), and the number of times (total number of times) summed up reaches 100 times, or the number of times of lottery (the number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches 10 times In this case, the time saving state ends.

With such a configuration, immediately after the time saving state is set, even if the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1), which is disadvantageous to the player, is executed, the lottery of special map 2 is performed a predetermined number of times ( Since it can be executed 10 times), the player can play the game with peace of mind. Thus, for example, in the case where the time saving state is configured to end when the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 during the time saving state reaches a prescribed number (10 times). In order to prevent the special figure 1 fluctuation (lottery) from being executed when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit, a game in which the special figure 1 is not reserved (a game that does not continuously shoot balls) (So-called stop hitting game) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The “big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds as a big hit game is 5 rounds (R) and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state (10 times saving time). Then, as the time saving state set after the jackpot is over, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set. This "big hit B" has a smaller number of rounds for the big hit game than the "big hit A" described above, but since the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. However, “time saving B”, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set rather than the time saving state “time saving A” set when the “big hit A” is won.

That is, the jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which a time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of the saving time state set after the jackpot are finished are larger than those in the above "jackpot A". Will be disadvantageous to the person. That is, "big hit B" is a kind of big hit that is more disadvantageous than "big hit A" described above. Among the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 40 random number values for which "big hit B" is selected, it is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1). If it happens, the percentage of selecting "big hit B" is 40%.

The “big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game (R), and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big hit, "big hit C" is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 50 random number values for which "big hit C" is selected, it is a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1). If it happens, the percentage of “big hit C” is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot game of 15 rounds (R) at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1) (jackpot) After the end, the time saving A) is selected, and at a rate of 40%, the jackpot game of five rounds (R) (the time saving B after the jackpot ends) is selected. In addition, a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is changed to a time saving state at a rate of 50% is selected.

In the present embodiment, as a jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and a time saving state that is advantageous after the jackpot ends (time saving A ) Is set "big hit A", the number of rounds (5 rounds (R)) executed during the big hit as a big hit type that is advantageous to the player next, and a type of time saving state set after the big hit ends, All are set as jackpot type "jackpot B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than "jackpot A", and jackpot type "jackpot C" which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the jackpot. Although it is configured to be possible, it may be configured to be able to set other jackpot types, for example, the number of rounds of jackpot games is the largest (15 rounds (R)), "hour saving B" is set as the hour saving type Although the jackpot type and the number of rounds of jackpot games are small (5 rounds (R)), the jackpot type in which "hour saving A" is set as the time saving type and the number of rounds of the jackpot game are the most (15 rounds (R)). )), the jackpot type for which the time saving state is not set may be settable.

In addition, as a concept of whether the jackpot type to be set is advantageous to the player, the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot are comprehensively determined as in the present embodiment. You may specify the concept of advantage or disadvantage, you may specify the concept of advantage or disadvantage only based on the number of rounds of jackpot games, or the advantage or disadvantage based only on the game state set after the jackpot. You may specify the concept.

Next, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used at the time of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 205(c). FIG. 205(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205(c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 89", the big hit type is "big hit D" and the random number value is "90 to 99". It is stipulated that the jackpot type is “jackpot E” in the case of any of the above.

The “big hit D” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds as a big hit game is 15 rounds (R), and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state (actual time saving number 10 times). Then, "time saving A" that is advantageous to the player is set as the time saving state that is set after the jackpot is over. That is, the "big hit D" is a big hit type having the same content as the "big hit A" described above, and is a big hit type that is most advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 90 random number values for which "big hit D" is selected, it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2). The percentage of “big hit D” selected is 90%.

The “big hit E” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a big hit game, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state (actual time saving number 10 times). Then, as the time saving state set after the jackpot is over, "time saving B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than "time saving A", is set. That is, this "big hit E" is a kind of big hit that is more disadvantageous than the "big hit D" described above. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 10 random number values for which "big hit E" is selected, it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2). If it happens, the percentage of “big hit E” is 10%.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and the time saving state is always set after the jackpot is over. ing. As a result, rather than winning the jackpot in the special map 1 lottery, winning the jackpot in the special map 2 lottery provides a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player. 2 The lottery with special symbols is more advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, there are five types of jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or less types may be provided, or six or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may have the same first hit type counter C2 value, but different jackpot types may be selected. With such a configuration, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol can be more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly motivated to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of big hit classification which is selected with the 1st special design and the 2nd special design, the selection ratio (distribution rate) of each big hit classification is made the same, the 1st hit classification counter C2 which corresponds to each big hit classification You may comprise so that only a range may differ. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second per random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the second per random number counter C4. With reference to the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, it is determined whether or not a winning is won.

In the present embodiment, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which a normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability of having a high probability of hitting a normal symbol than the low probability (normal) The period of the symbol is in the time saving state) and the number of values corresponding to the winning is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is possible to set a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the normal electric accessory 3640a that is executed when the normal symbol (second symbol) is won. As a result, it is possible to change the timing of opening the ordinary electric auditors object 3640a based on the hit of the ordinary symbol (second symbol), so that the timing at which the ordinary electric auditors object 3640a is opened (ball to the second entrance 3640) It is possible to suppress the game in which the ball is fired at a timing (at which the ball can be entered).

Here, the contents of the second per-random number 7 table 202fc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206(a), the second per-random number 7 table 202fc is configured so that “per ordinary drawing per A”, “per universal drawing B”, and “out” can be set as the second per type. And, the second winning type is defined based on the game state (normal probability high probability state of the symbol, or low probability state) and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state), the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0", "A per ordinary figure" is defined, and "1". In the above, "B per ordinary figure" is defined, and "out" is defined in the range of "2-99". Then, when the gaming state is a high probability state of normal symbols (time saving state), the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 79", "A per ordinary figure" is defined, and "80" is specified. In the range of "~98", "B" per normal figure is defined, and in "99", "out" is defined.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set as the game state, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is 2% (2/100) Therefore, when the winning is won, "A per ordinary figure" and "B per ordinary figure" are selected at a rate of 50%.

And, if the gaming state is a high probability state of normal symbols (time saving state), the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) is 99% (99/100), and the winning is won. In such a case, "A per ordinary figure" is selected at a rate of about 80% (80/99), and "B per ordinary figure" is selected at a rate of about 20% (20/99). doing.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured so that the probability of winning is higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol, and at the time of winning The hit "A" is configured to be easily selected. In this way, the game is performed while expecting that a more advantageous game state is set for the player by varying the hit probability and the hit type of the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the game state. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product 3640 at the time of winning the second symbol is configured to be different according to the gaming state and the winning type, and in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. Rather than winning the second symbol, winning the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the operation pattern that is advantageous to the player, that is, entering the ball in the second entrance 3640. The operation pattern is set so that the ball can be easily moved. As a result, it is set as a condition for giving a bonus that is advantageous to the player to win the hit in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206(a), the content of the operation pattern of the ordinary electric auditors object 3640 executed during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol will be described. The seventh embodiment is configured such that different operation patterns are set according to the winning type that is won, and when "universal figure per A" is set in the high probability state, the opening period is 0. When the operation pattern of 1 second (S), the opening period of 2 seconds (S), and the ending period of 3.5 seconds (S) is executed, and "B per normal figure" is set, the opening period is 0.1. An operation pattern having a second (S), an open period of 2.5 seconds (S), and an ending period of 3 seconds (S) is executed.

Then, whichever operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening operation of the ordinary electric auditors object 3640a (during the opening period setting), the closing condition is set. Then, the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is executed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the conditions that are satisfied when the predetermined opening period is reached and the predetermined number of second balls are used as the conditions for ending the open state of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a. Conditions that are satisfied when the player enters the mouth 3640 are set. As a result, when a lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is won, a large number of balls enter the second inlet 3640, and the privilege (prize ball) is excessively given to the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, regardless of which operation pattern is executed, the ending period is set to be a period (3 seconds) or more during which the ball flows down the second passage (delay passage) 660b. Therefore, even if you continue to win per universal figure, if you win the small hit by the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the previous universal hit, during the small hit game, the next It is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which a ball that has flowed down the second passage 660b wins the V winning device 650 based on the hitting figure.

In the present embodiment, by using the above-described configuration, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (general drawing lottery result). Although it is configured so that an appropriate game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the player wins the winning game in succession, the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. You may make it easy to do. In this case, for example, as the winning type of the second win (per common figure), the opening type (0.1 seconds), the opening period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set. If you can set (C per figure) and win again in the next universal figure fluctuation that won in C per ordinary figure, when it hits again in the second universal figure variation, it flows into the second passage 660b during the game corresponding to the next universal figure fluctuation. The ball may be configured to pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game which is won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on C per ordinary drawing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is surprising, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the case of adopting such playability, the production in the race (FIG. 200(b)) is executed corresponding to C per ordinary figure, and then the production is lost once in the race (FIG. 202(a)). (See )), and when the delay passage entry switch 660e1 detects that a ball has flown into the second passage 660b based on the next hit, the revival effect after losing the race is performed. It is good to configure like this. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect corresponding to a game that is surprising to the player.

Furthermore, a universal figure advance determination means capable of determining in advance the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as the advance determination result corresponding to the retained universal figure winning information, When it is determined that the universal figure winning information to win C per regular figure and the universal figure winning information to win per universal figure are continuously stored, it is possible to handle a plurality of consecutive universal symbol prizes. It may be configured to execute an effect (continuous effect). In this way, by executing the pre-reading process of the universal figure winning information, the effect can be set in a state in which the lottery result of the universal figure lottery (second symbol lottery) is determined in advance, and therefore the production effect is high. Can be performed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as a winning game executed when the player wins the universal figure, the electric accessory 3640a is opened for a period in which the ball can be inserted into the second entrance 3640. Although it is configured that only the winning game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, it is not possible to enter the ball into the second entrance 3640, but to allow the ball to flow into the second passage 660b. The electric accessory 3640a may be configured to be in an open state for a period (for example, 1 second) during which it is possible.

The fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed, and its type. Fluctuation patterns in which different fluctuation times are set are defined in correspondence with the result of the lottery and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. 208(a) is defined in the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 defined by the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. FIG. 208( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents described, and FIG. 208( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202 fd 3 defined by the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202 fd It is a figure.

Next, the contents of the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be described with reference to FIG. This first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set as the game status, and a second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 (time saving that will be described later). When the small hit (eg, small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, rather than the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the state B (time saving B) is set, in the V winning device 650 The variation time is defined such that the variation time that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific area 650V is set.

Here, the contents defined in the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be specifically described. If the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out, the obtained variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of, the variation pattern is defined as “ultra short deviation” (variation time 0.5 seconds), and when the lottery result is a big hit, it is determined as a variation pattern regardless of the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. "Ultra short" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is specified. That is, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in a state where it is easy to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, it is always 0.5 seconds. The change pattern is set.

When the type of the special symbol is the special diagram 2 and the lottery result is out of alignment, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is “ultra short deviation” (variation time 0.5 seconds). ) Is defined and the lottery results are small hit A and small hit B, the variation pattern is “long and small wins” (variation time is 3 seconds), and in the case of small hit C, the variation pattern is “short and small wins”. (Variation time 0.5 seconds)" is defined. If the lottery result is a big hit, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short big hit (change time 1 second)" is defined as the fluctuation pattern. When it is in the range of “150 to 198”, “middle and big hit (variation time 30 seconds)” is defined as the variation pattern.

With this configuration, when the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, when the time saving A is set as the game status, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is set. When the winning A or the small winning B is won, the ball is configured to easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. On the other hand, when the small hit C in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set, immediately after the ball enters the second entrance 3640 (the second special symbol lottery is executed. Immediately after) the small hit game will be executed, so the opening operation of the V winning device 650 will end before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. Can make it difficult for the player to pass the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the jackpot game executed based on the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C, the player is in the game state as a game state. It is configured so that a disadvantageous normal state is set, and after the jackpot game executed based on winning the other small hits (small hit A, small hit B), as a game state The time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, when the time saving A is set as the game state, the fluctuation pattern is set by referring to the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2, and the small hit that is advantageous to the player by the fluctuation pattern being set. When the type is won, the big hit game via the small hit game is easily executed, so it is easy to set an advantageous game state continuously even after the next big hit game, which allows the player to play the game with peace of mind. You can

Next, the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3. The second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 is a fluctuation pattern table referred to when the time saving B is set as the game state.

As shown in FIG. 208(b), this second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 is set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery with respect to the above first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2. The difference is that the fluctuation patterns (variation time) are changed, and the other elements are the same.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a small hit A, the variation pattern is "long/small win" (variation time of 3 seconds), and if the lottery result is a small hit B, the variation pattern is "short/small win" (variation time). 0.5 second) is defined, and in the case of small hit C, when the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 169”, the fluctuation pattern is “long and small hits” (fluctuation time 3 seconds). ) Is defined, and when it is in the range of “170 to 198”, “short and small hits” (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

That is, when the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to, that is, when the time saving B is set as the game state, the lottery for the second special symbol is easier to be executed than in the normal state, but the small hit. Since a variation pattern of 3 seconds of variation time is set when C is won, a gaming state in which the normal state is more easily set as the gaming state after the next big hit game is finished than in the state where the time saving A is set as described above. Become.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in the case where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol that the jackpot game is easier to be executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol is set. It is possible to set a time saving state that is easier to execute than that, and as a time saving state, a game state (time saving A) in which it is easy to set again a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the next big hit ends, and next big hit end The gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player later is configured so that it can be set more easily than the time saving A (time saving B).

With such a configuration, when the gaming state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set, the gaming state shifts to the normal state only by executing one jackpot game. Since this can be suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Even when the time saving B, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, is set, the probability that the time saving A is set after the jackpot game is finished is made higher than in the case where the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving A eagerly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 208(b), in the seventh embodiment, even if the small hit C is set as the normal state as the game state after the big hit game is finished, the ball is the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that it is possible to select a variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds) that does not easily pass through the specific area 650V in the inside of Can also interest players. In this case, for example, the player may be informed that the small hit C has been won, and then an effect of inciting whether or not the ball passes the specific area 650V may be executed. With such a configuration, the ball is not passed through the specific area 650V even though the player has been hit with an unfavorable small hit, and thus the unfavorable game state is set for the player. The player can be made aware that he/she was able to avoid the situation, and a sense of satisfaction can be provided.

Further, a means for measuring the number of times the small hits that are disadvantageous to the player are won (the number of times the small hit C is won) is provided, and the number of times that the execution of the big hit game based on the small hit C is avoided (small hit of the small hit C) The number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game may be displayed. As a result, it is possible for the player to specifically understand that the situation in which the player is in an unfavorable game state can be avoided, and whether the currently set game state is the time saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether the time is B.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b), the data table (variation pattern referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol according to the time saving state to be set. By making the tables different, there are a gaming state (time saving A) in which the ball easily passes the specific area 650V and a gaming state (time saving B) in which it is difficult to pass when the player wins a small hit that is advantageous to the player. It is configurable. In other words, when a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player is won, it is possible to set a game state in which the ball easily passes the specific area 650V (time saving B) and a game state in which it is difficult to pass the ball (time saving A) ing.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, depending on the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) that has been set, a gaming state in which the ball easily passes the specific area 650V when the small hit is won, and a game in which the ball does not easily pass The state and are configured to be settable. More specifically, when the time saving A is set as the game state, the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% at the time of the small hit winning (100% at the time of the small winning A win, and 100 at the small winning B win) %) is set such that the variation time that allows the sphere to pass through the specific area 650V is set.

On the other hand, when the time saving B is set as the gaming state, the second time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the second variation pattern table 202fd3 for time saving, about 28.5% at the time of the small hit winning (100% at the time of the small winning A winning, and the small winning C winning About 85% of the time), the fluctuation time that allows the sphere to pass through the specific area 650V is set.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set at the time of small hitting is configured to be different according to the type of the time saving state to be set, and is specified at the time of winning the small hit. The region 650V is configured so that the rate at which the fluctuation pattern that allows the sphere to pass is selected is different. Therefore, the probability of executing the jackpot game based on the small hit prize during the time saving state can be varied depending on the type of the time saving state that is set.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as the transition condition (time reduction end condition) for transitioning the time saving state to the normal state, it is set as the transition condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 10 times. Setting the time saving B as the type of state makes it easier to establish the transition condition because it is more difficult to execute the jackpot game when the small hit is won.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when the small hit is won, which is advantageous to the player, and the time is shortened when the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V when the small hit is won. Time saving A that is in a state, and time saving B that makes it easy for a ball to pass the specific area 650V when the small hit is won, which is disadvantageous to the player, and that it is difficult for the ball to pass the specific area 650V when the small hit is won. , Is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the small hit type is set to 1, and a variation pattern that allows the sphere to pass through the specific area 650V when the small hit is won is set. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be configured to be different according to the type of the time saving state that is set so that only the ratio is changed.

Further, depending on the type of time saving state to be set, the transition condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the time saving state to the normal state may be set differently, for example, the time saving state advantageous to the player. When (for example, time saving A) is set, a time saving condition that is easier to be satisfied than a time saving condition that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, time saving B) (for example, time saving ending condition that is satisfied with a small number of special symbol fluctuations) May be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, from greatly varying depending on the type of the time saving state that is set, which time saving state Even if is set, it is possible to motivate the player to play a jackpot game.

Further, since it is possible to change the expected game content during the time saving period depending on the type of the time saving state that is set, specifically, the time saving ending condition is easily established, and the specific area 650V when the small hit is won. If a short-time condition is set that makes it easy for a ball to pass through, expect to win a small hit during the short-time condition, and it is difficult for the time-saving end condition to be met. When a time-saving state is set that makes it difficult for the player to pass, it can be expected that the ball will pass through the specific area 650V in the small hit won during the time-saving state, so that the player gets tired of the game early. It can be suppressed.

The small hit type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and when the small hit is won, This is referred to when selecting a small hit type, and is configured so that a different small hit type is selected according to the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small hit A to small hit C are selected as small hit types of the second special symbol by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Is prescribed. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (10V when passing V, real short 10 times big hit)". When it is any of "20 to 89", the small hit type is "small hit B (10R when the vehicle passes V, 10 real-time short wins)" and when it is any of "90 to 99" The small hit type is “small hit C (10R when passing V, real time reduction, no big hit)”.

Then, when the big hit based on the winning of the "small hit A" is finished, "hour saving A" is set as the gaming state, and when the big hit based on the winning of the "small hit B" is finished, "hour saving B" is set as the playing state. When the big hit based on the winning of the "small hit C" is finished, the "normal state" is set as the game state.

Here, for each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, it is executed after the small hit game ends. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "small hit A", the 10R real short working time 10 times big hit is set, and after the small hit A, the big hit in which the variable winning a prize device 65 is set to 10 rounds (R) open state is executed, After that, as a time-saving state, 10 time-saving games (variation of special symbols 100 times in total, or a period until the variation of the second special symbol is executed 10 times) are configured.

Further, in the case of "small hit B", 10 rounds (R) real time reduction 10 times big hits are set, and after the small hit B is executed, the variable winning a prize device 65 is set to 10 rounds (R) open state. The jackpot is executed, and then 10 times as a time-saving game as a time-saving state (100 times in total when the variation of the special symbol is added, or the period until the variation of the second special symbol is performed 10 times) is set. Is configured. In the case of “small hit C”, 10R hour-short no big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big prize in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state is executed. After the big hit game, the time saving state is not set, but the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small hit type, the contents of the big hit game executed after the small hit game and the game state set after the big hit game can be made different.

Specifically, the "small hit A" has a large number of rounds executed in the big hit game (10R), and a time saving state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player after the big hit game is set is set. The jackpot B is set as the most advantageous small hit for the player, and the small hit B has many rounds executed in the big hit game (10R) and is set the same as the above small hit A, but the big hit game. The time saving state that is set later is set as a small hit, which is more disadvantageous than the small hit A, because "time saving B", which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, is set. The “small hit C” is set as the small hit that is most disadvantageous to the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of the small hit, the big hit game executed when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R). By grasping the number of round games (round number) executed as the big hit game during the big hit game executed by the small hit opportunity, the player can easily grasp the type of the small hit that has been won this time. Although this is suppressed, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to set a big hit game of a different round number for each small hit type. As a result, the degree of advantage with respect to each small hit type can be greatly varied, so that the player can be expected to play the game while expecting to win the most advantageous small hit type.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is 10 times (first ending condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in the state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 1 or more, and when the time saving state is set after the jackpot is over, the first special symbol after the jackpot is over (special diagram 1 Even if the change of) is executed, the time saving state does not end. Further, when the variation of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed, the second end condition described above can be satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. Therefore, any special symbol during the time saving state (second The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

Next, the winning type won during the time saving state (during a high probability state of ordinary symbols) and the ball flow to the second entrance 3640 will be described with reference to FIG. 196. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is changed to the projecting state (see FIG. 198) by winning the ordinary electric prize 3640a. When the ball flows down, the state where the ball easily enters the second entrance 3640 is constructed.

Then, when the closing condition for the ordinary electric auditors role 3640a is satisfied, the ordinary electric auditors role 3640a executes the closing operation, and the ball flowing down on the ordinary electric auditors role 3640a at that time is immediately below the ordinary electric officer 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb provided. Here, the sphere flowing down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow down period of 0.5 seconds, and the sphere flowing down the second flow path tb. Arrives at the V winning device 650 after a flow-down period of 3 seconds.

Next, a case where a ball enters the second entrance 3640 will be described as a closing condition for the ordinary electric accessory 3640a. When the ball enters the second entrance 3640, the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is executed, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. To be done. Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 208, in the present embodiment, an advantageous time saving (time saving A) that is advantageous to the player as a time saving state and a disadvantage time saving (time saving B that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time saving). ) And are settable, and different variation patterns are set according to the set time saving state.

The open scenario 7 table 202ff, the game contents (open scenario) of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the winning (big hit, small hit) is won in the special symbol lottery, the winning type In the data table defined in correspondence with, when the winning is won, the opening scenario corresponding to the set hit type is read, and the winning game is executed.

Here, the contents of the release scenario 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the release scenario 7 table 202ff. This opening scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) in which a ball can be entered in a bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. 65, operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation of the V winning device 650) according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) ) Different, you can set the advantage degree of the privilege game in multiple stages, so even after winning the big hit or the small hit, it is possible to entertain the player what kind of hit was won. it can.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) ), an opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (round number)), and interval period between rounds (round game) The period in which the prize winning device is set between is closed, and the end interval period (from the end of all round games until the end of the winning game (until the start of new special symbol fluctuation is allowed) Period)) and are specified respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponding to "big hit A, D, E" corresponds to "2 seconds" as the start interval period and "variable winning device 65" as the opening mode of the winning device for "15 rounds". As one round game, the opening operation mode of opening “29 seconds continuously” is defined as “1 second” as the inter-round interval period and “4 seconds” as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type jackpot A, D, E jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a lot of prize balls are paid out to the player. It is a jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot type is a jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is the most advantageous to the player because the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that will be granted.

Next, corresponding to jackpot types B and C, "2 seconds" as the start interval period, "variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device "5 rounds", as one round game As for the opening operation mode of opening for “29 seconds continuously”, “1 second” is defined as the inter-round interval period, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type jackpot B, C jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpot A, D, E is given to the player. It is a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the corresponding jackpot game is paid out.

Next, the winning type corresponds to the small hits A to C, the start interval period is "0.1 seconds", and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. If the ball passes (V passes) the specific area 650V during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball handling time after the opening operation is finished) The winning device 65" is opened to "2 to 11 rounds", and as one round game, the 1st round is "open continuously for 1.5 seconds" and the 2nd to 11th round is "open continuously for 29 seconds". The open operation mode is defined as an inter-round interval period of "5 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" other than that, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hit game, the big hit game for 10 rounds is executed thereafter.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game of opening the variable winning device 65 is executed from the first round, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the above-mentioned A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which an opening scenario similar to the hits A to C is set may be provided. With this configuration, when the big hit Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as the small hit in the first round. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the big hit or the small hit has been won in the design.

In this case, since the jackpot game is already being executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is opened in the first round of the jackpot Z. The round game after the second round will be executed. Therefore, when the big hit game in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is set, the effect shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Good to configure. This makes it possible for the player to think that the result of the game this time is that the big hit game is executed because the ball has passed the specific area 650V during the small hit game.

Moreover, since the effect shown in FIG. 201(b) can be executed when the specific area 650V is actually passed during the small hit game and when the big hit Z is won, the effect result in the in-race effect As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the effect result (see FIG. 201(b)) that is advantageous to the player is displayed. Therefore, the production during the race can be expected.

In addition, when the big hit type (for example, big hit Z) in which the same opening operation mode as the small hit game is won, and in the case where various small hits are won, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. In order to make it possible for the player to identify the lottery result by the display manner of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol so that the same effect aspect is executed as the variable display (fluctuation effect). In, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol may be synchronized. In the stop display timing or the period before and after the stop display timing, in order to make the display of the third symbol more difficult for the player to identify as compared with the period other than that, the display mode and the display area can be changed, and the stop display timing of the special symbol In, it is advisable to switch the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 from the third symbol to the effect ordinary symbol corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. As a result, it is possible to prevent the result of the lottery this time from being easily recognized in the stop display mode of the third symbol whether it is a small hit or a big hit.

Next, the content of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of main controller 110RAM203 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment has a first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, a time saving medium sum counter 203fa, a big hit start flag 203fb, It has a big hit medium flag 203o, a small hit start flag 203fc, a small hit medium flag 203p, a V passing big hit type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and another memory area 203z. .. It should be noted that a configuration (flag that is the same as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name other than “7” added to enable identification of the use in the seventh embodiment)) , Counter, area) are the same in their applications as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving medium total counter 203fa is a counter for adding up the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, and counting up to 100 times. At this time, the short-time medium addition counter 203fa is set to 0 which is an initial value when a big hit is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 when the big hit ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the variation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of the time saving medium sum counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether or not the ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value is subtracted to 0 (S10207 of FIG. 217). : Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S10208 of FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of times the variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reach 100 times (first ending condition), or the second special during the time saving state. It is configured such that the time saving state ends when any one of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the first end condition is satisfied among them. In order to discriminate between, the short-time and medium sum counter 203fa is used. It should be noted that the value of the hour/medium-time total counter 203fa is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining hour/hour count command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction intermediate addition counter 203fa is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the remaining short time count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the time/medium-time addition counter 203fa is changed, and the remaining fluctuation count until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of remaining fluctuations counted by the time reduction medium sum counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the error occurs, the deviation can be corrected by the next remaining short time count command.

Although the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining short time count based on the remaining short time count command, the remaining short time count command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned short time middle sum counter 203fa, that is, the first short-time state command. Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because when playing a normal game, the second end condition of the time saving state is established so that the time saving state is shifted to the normal state, and the first end condition is The second ending condition is satisfied in a state in which the number of remaining fluctuations until it is satisfied is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the situation in which the time saving state is ended is suppressed.

The big hit start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the big hit game start timing. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit stops, the big hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 of FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is the jackpot start timing, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). The jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to retain the state immediately before the power failure when a power failure or the like occurs.

The big hit medium flag 203o is a flag indicating that the big hit game is being performed. The determination result is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol which is a big hit is stopped (S10017 of FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type is finished), it is set to OFF (S10617 in FIG. 222). The big hit flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when an electric power failure or the like occurs, the flag immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up and held. Is configured to. The big hit medium flag 203o has the same function as the big hit medium flag 203o used in the above-described first embodiment.

The small hit start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. The determination result is a small hit and is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203fc is on, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S10703 of FIG. 223). This small hit start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when an electric power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the electric power failure or the like. Is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203p is a flag indicating that the small hit game is being performed. The determination result is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol which is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit is ended), it is set to OFF (see S10717 of FIG. 223). The small hitting flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear. When an electric power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. Is configured to be.

The V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd is used when a small hit game is being executed, and when a ball that has won the V winning device 650 passes the specific area 650V (a switch for detecting that the ball has passed the specific area 650V ( (Not shown) is a storage area in which data for determining the jackpot type set in (when detected) is stored. The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type being determined when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot stops (FIG. 218). See S10302). When the sphere flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and the sphere is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd. Is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd is cleared. The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear. When an electric power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

V flag 203fe, when the ball flows down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the detection switch, it becomes a big hit type corresponding to the type of the small hit game being executed. The corresponding flag is set to ON. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not this V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712: Yes in FIG. 223), it is turned on. The jackpot type to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the corresponding jackpot game start (opening scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption or the like when the power interruption or the like occurs. Is configured.

The time saving mid-second special counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. In this case, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is set to 0 which is an initial value when the big hit is won (see S10018 in FIG. 215) and is set to 10 when the big hit is finished (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether or not the ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value is subtracted to 0 (see FIG. 217). (S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S10208 of FIG. 217).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of times the variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reach 100 times (first ending condition), or the second special during the time saving state. It is configured such that the time saving state ends when any one of the conditions in which the number of variations of the symbol reaches 10 times (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. In order to discriminate, the time saving medium special feature counter 203ff is used. Note that the value of the special hour/second special counter 203ff is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining short time count command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining short time count based on the remaining short time count command. However, the remaining time short count command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned short time middle/special feature 2 counter 203ff, that is, The information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the 2 end conditions are satisfied is transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because when a normal game is being played, the time saving state is configured to shift to the normal state when the second end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, This is to display the number of remaining fluctuations until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81 to provide an easy-to-understand game.

The V passage flag 203fg is a flag used to determine a state in which the V flag 203fe is set to ON during a small hit game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. To be done. In this embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passage processing (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passed the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

Then, in the V passage process (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221), and when it is determined to be set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221: Yes). ) And V passage processing (see FIG. 221), the processing of S10501 to S10508 is skipped. As a result, when a plurality of balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small hit game (when a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball passing through the specific area 650V detects a plurality of balls) ), only the V passage process corresponding to the first detected sphere is executed. Therefore, the processing executed during the small hit game can be simplified, and the V passage command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passage management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210 and FIG. 211, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of the game state thereafter based on the special symbol lottery result, and FIG. 211 schematically shows the flow of operations of various devices executed during the small hit game. 3 is a timing chart specifically shown.

In the present seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game in which a ball is shot aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) is performed and a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, and a game board It is configured to be able to set a time saving state in which a right-handed game that shoots a ball aiming at the right side area of 13 is performed and the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed, and the number is more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of 2 special symbols is configured to make it easier to execute the jackpot game.

Furthermore, as the time saving state, either a time saving state A (time saving A) that is advantageous to the player or a time saving state B (time saving B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state A is set. ing. Here, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set (it is difficult to do) after the jackpot game ends. There is. With such a configuration, once the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not set as the game state unless the jackpot game is executed at least twice, so a time saving state advantageous for the player is provided. Can be built.

As shown in FIG. 210, in the state where the normal state is set, the game is executed by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the big hit is When the jackpot is a "jackpot A" (10% of the jackpot), the jackpot state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished (the jackpot A), and the jackpot is "B" (40% of the jackpot). In this case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and when the jackpot is C (50% of the jackpot), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished. It

Moreover, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and the big hit is won or the big hit game is executed based on the small hit, the normal state is set after the big hit game ends. I am configuring. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally executing the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the normal state.

In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special figure 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special figure 2 lottery, as described with reference to FIG. 205(c), when a big hit is won, a time saving state is always set after the jackpot game is over, so a time saving state A (time saving A) When the big hit is won, the normal state is not set after the big hit game ends.

Further, even when the small figure is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern defined in the first time saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 that is referred to during the time saving state A (time saving A) is set. When the small hit type “small hit C” in which the normal state is set after the big hit game is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. Therefore, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the jackpot game can be executed a plurality of times before the game state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the advantageous game state is immediately ended, even though the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

In addition, in the state where the time saving state A is set, when the time saving ending condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 10 times), the time saving state is ended and the normal state is set. Although it is configured, in the time saving state, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1/2, and a small hit game that allows the ball to pass to the specific area 650V is executed at 80% of that, so it continues. As long as a normal game in which a right-handed game is performed, the jackpot game can be executed before the time saving end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in the case of executing a game in which the right-handed game is not continued in order to pass the ball to the specific area 650V when the specific small hit type is won, the number of fluctuations in special figure 2 is set to 10 times. When it reaches, it can shift to the normal state. As a result, a penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

If you win the small hit A (20%) in the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, after the jackpot game based on the small hit winning is executed, the time saving state A (time saving A) again Is set, and when the small hit B (70%) is won, after the big hit game based on the small hit win is executed, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set. When the small hit C (10%) is won, a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as shown in FIG. 208(a), so the specific area 650V is set during the small hit game. The ball never passes.

Also, when the jackpot is won in the state where the time saving state B (time saving B) is set, the jackpot D (90%) and the jackpot E (10%) are performed as in the case of the time saving state A (time saving A) described above. Is set. Further, when the small hit is won, the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208(b)) is referred to, and the ball is configured to pass the specific area 650V in the small hit A or the small hit C. ing.

Therefore, if you win the small hit A (20%), after the big hit game based on the small hit win is executed, the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, and if you win the small hit C, After the big hit game based on the small hit prize is executed, the normal state is set. Similarly to the time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving ending condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state is ended and the normal state is set. I am configuring.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of operations of various devices during the small hitting game will be described. 211(a) to (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hitting game. As shown in FIGS. 211(a) to (f), when the special symbol variation display winning the small hit is executed by the control processing of the main control device 110, the display of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. The production during the race (see FIG. 199(b) to FIG. 202(a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) elapses after the small hit game is started, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds in accordance with a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

The ball flowing down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected during 4 seconds (V effective period t5) from 1 second after the small hit game is started. When the switch detects a ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game starts, the first round game starts and the specific winning opening. 65a is opened.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B can be set as the game state, and the case where the time saving state A is set and the time saving state B are set. The data table to be referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is set is configured to be different depending on the case.

When the time saving state A is set, when a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. The change pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed during the time saving state, the flow path (second flow) that can pass through the specific area 650V The variation time (0.5 seconds) set when the small hit C is won than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the road tb) and pass through the second flow path tb (3 seconds). ) And the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small hit game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 is configured to be shorter.

When the time saving state B is set, when a small hit (small hit C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball changes so that the ball can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hit game. The pattern is configured to be set. With such a configuration, even when the time saving state is set as the game state, if the data table referred to when setting the variation pattern is made different, the advantage degree to the player is significantly different. It can be done.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213, an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, an effect counter 223h, and a SW effective time. It has a storage area 223fd, a variation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay passage state flag 223ff, a long variation flag 223fg, a second ball entering flag 223fh, a normal figure hitting flag 223fi, and another memory area 223z. The configurations (flags, counters, areas) having the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-described embodiments have the same uses as those in the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The fluctuation start flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the information (fluctuation pattern command) indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to ON when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started. It is something. This fluctuation start flag 223fa is based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113, whether the special symbol fluctuation this time is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the second special symbol. It is configured so that it can be discriminated whether or not it is a variation of (Special figure 2).

Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 223fa receives the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 1 fluctuation and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the special figure 2 fluctuation are received. And the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa2 that is set to ON in the case of doing so.

Then, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S12001 in FIG. 226: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received fluctuation pattern command is set to ON. (Refer to S12002 in FIG. 226), the variable display is set to OFF in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the fluctuation start flags 223fa is set to ON, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is used in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the special symbol change this time is received from the main control device 110, and the main control device 110. Is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and is turned OFF when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). .. When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The game status storage area 223fe is an area for storing the game status corresponding to the status command when the status command regarding the game status is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in this game state storage area 223fe, the current game state can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In the present embodiment, since the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 erases data when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, it is stored in the game state storage area 223i when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The information indicating the current game state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, the state command is set in the startup process (see FIG. 51) of the main control device executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), so the game state storage area 223fe is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the game state set before the power is cut off is stored in. Therefore, in the state where the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 side can always identify the gaming state.

It should be noted that the status command output from the main control device 110 is determined in command determination processing 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) of the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not it has been received. The game state included in the state command is configured to be stored in the game state storage area 223fe. However, in FIG. 226, the processing content corresponds to another command (S12019 in FIG. 226). Refer to) and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

The delay passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of a sphere flowing down the second flow passage (delay flow passage) tb in the flow passage unit 660. Here, the contents of the delay passage state flag 223ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delay passage state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay passage state flag 223ff is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and the sphere flow state of the delay channel can be specified by the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the delay passage entry ball switch 660e1 for detecting a ball that has flown into the second passage (delay passage) 660b is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge for detecting a ball that has flowed out from the second passage (delay passage) 660b. When the switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, when the sphere does not pass through the second passage (delay passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits are “0001” (described as “00” in FIG. 213), When the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, when the ball is passing through the second passage (delay passage) 660b, the lower 4 bits are set. Becomes "0010" (indicated as "01" in FIG. 213), the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, the second passage (delay passage). ) When the sphere is discharged from the inside of 660b, the lower 4 bits are “0011” (described as “02” in FIG. 213).

Here, the delay passage entrance switch 660e1 and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 are both configured by a proximity sensor capable of detecting a sphere flowing down the second flow path tb formed in the second passage 660b. It is configured to be turned on when an object is detected continuously for a predetermined period. Then, it is configured to be turned off when the object is no longer detected for a predetermined period.

Here, when the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delay path status flag 223ff is “0001”, “0010”, and “0011” described above, when the ball normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660. Since it is a state that can be set to, it is determined to be a normal sphere flow-down state.

On the other hand, the delay passage ball input switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, the state where the ball flows into the second passage (delay passage) 660b and the ball is discharged. When the state and the state are detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become “0011” (described as “03” in FIG. 213) and the delay path entrance switch 660e1 becomes abnormal (described as “−” in FIG. 213). In the state in which the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, in the state in which the sensor that detects the ball downflow condition of the second passage (delay passage) 660b has failed, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (Fig. In 213, it is described as "04"), and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal downflow state.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

Of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, the respective processes of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 correspond to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same processes as the processes of S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 are executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), when the process of S103 is completed, it is a process for displaying next on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 The special symbol variation process 7 for setting the variation pattern of the three symbols is executed (S191), and then the process proceeds to S105. The details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

After performing the process of S105, the normal symbol variation process 7 that is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device is executed (S192), and then the process proceeds to S107. The details of the normal symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 219. After executing the process of S107, the V entrance passage process associated with the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). After that, the V passing process which is executed when the ball which has won the V winning device 650 passes the specific area 650V is executed (S194), and then the process proceeds to S110. The details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during the small hitting game, a process for executing the big hitting game after the small hitting game ends (2 As the per-species execution process), the V entrance passage process (S193 in FIG. 214), the point provided with the V passage process (S194 in FIG. 214), the process related to the variation of the first symbol (special symbol), and the second symbol ( This is different from the first embodiment described above in that the detailed content of the process relating to the fluctuation of the (normal pattern) is different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the special symbol variation process 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 7 (S191). This special symbol variation process 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b. It is a process for controlling display and variable display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 (see S191 of FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, there is also a place where the same content as the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 32) in the first embodiment is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are given to processes having the same contents for description. It should be noted that the modification contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can be naturally applied to the elements having the same processing contents.

In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S10001). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol big hit (including during the special symbol big hit game) is being displayed, and special. During the predetermined time after the big hit game of symbols is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S10001: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S10001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10002), and the display of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b. When it is determined that the aspect is not changing (S10002: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: Yes), the second entrance command is set (S10004), the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the stop. The values of the type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol holding sphere execution area (S10005). Next, the special symbol variation start processing 7 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is executed (S10011). The special symbol variation start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10003, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 3640 (S10003: No), the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d (N1) It is acquired (S10006). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10007). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203d is 0 (not larger than 0) (S10007: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1) ) Is decremented by 1 (S10008), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set reserved ball number command is configured to include information for indicating that it is a command for indicating the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the main control The reserved ball number command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 52) is output to the voice lamp control device 113. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol.

After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). Then, the process of S10011 is executed.

In addition, in the processing of S10002, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S10002: Yes), the change display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is being executed. It is determined whether or not the variable time has elapsed (S10012). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S10012: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10012, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S10013). .. The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by a special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) described later with reference to FIG. 216. When this special symbol variation start process 7 is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or out, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the first hit type counter The jackpot type (jackpot A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If the hit is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if the hit is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S10013 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 7 ), it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S10014). If the result of the lottery this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S10014: Yes), the opening scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S10015), and then the jackpot start is set (S10016). Next, the big hit start flag 203fb and the big hit medium flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), and the value of the hour/middle/middle total counter 203fa and the value of the hour/middle/middle special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018). Move to processing. In the processing of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10014, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S10014: No), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed to determine whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit. Yes (S10021). The details of this time saving process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG. 217.

In the processing of S10021, when it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is the small hit (S10021: Yes), the small hit start setting processing is executed (S10022). Then, the process of S10019 is executed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not the small hit (S10021: No), the small hit start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and the present process ends. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variation time of the special symbol elapses and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit, the time saving number updating process (S10020) is executed, and then the current lottery result is Although it is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the small hit start setting process (S10022) is executed, the time saving number updating process (S10020) is executed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the time saving number update process is executed, and when it is determined that the time saving number ends due to the special symbol variation process this time, if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is out, the execution timing of the time saving number update process (Symbol stop timing of special symbols) End the time saving state, if the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit, it may be configured to end the time saving state at the timing when the small hit game ends. .. Thereby, the time saving state can be set until just before the next special symbol variation starts. Further, even when the small hit is won in the final variation of the time saving state, the small hit game can be executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and the first special symbol holding sphere storage area Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, the special symbol big hit, "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol out" lottery (judgment judgment) together with the first symbol This is a process executed when setting the information necessary for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011), first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, which is stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, Also, each value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10102). Specifically, if it is a lottery for the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entrance 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204(b)) It is determined whether or not it is a big hit by comparing the random number values stored in, and if it is the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance into the second entrance 3640, the value of the first random number counter C1 And the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204(c)) are compared to determine the big hit or the small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S10103: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the first hit type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2. Of the five types of special symbols jackpots (jackets A to E), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 205(b) or (c)).

In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random number values may be used. With this configuration, a random number value determined to be off in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and a big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the big hit random number value is set to the same, but it is not limited thereto, it is determined as a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol The number of random number values to be set may be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

Then, the display mode at the time of a normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A to E) is set as the stop type.

After that, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process proceeds to S10113. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the type of the special symbol obtained, the lottery result and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the variation pattern table of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the current game. By comparing the values defined in the data table corresponding to the state, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined (see FIG. 207).

In the processing of S10113, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S10106 is set (S10113). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S10105 is set (S10114). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are stored in the external output process (S2201) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Accordingly, the variable lamp display device 113 side can set the variable display mode (effect mode) of the third symbol in association with the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the stop type. When the process of S10114 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7 (S191).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S10103: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S10107). When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S10107: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random number value defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and small hits (small hits of three types of special symbols (small Of the hits A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 206(b)).

In the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is configured so as not to win the small hit in the lottery, so when the small symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, Since the lottery of the special symbol of this time is confirmed to be the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of determining the type of the special symbol won for the small hit is not executed, but for example, the first special symbol, When it is configured to win the small hit in any of the second special symbols, after it is determined that the small hit is won, a process for determining the type of the special symbol corresponding to the current lottery is performed, and the determination It may be configured to execute a process of selecting a small hit type according to the result. With such a configuration, different small hit types can be set depending on whether the first special symbol is won as a small hit and when the second special symbol is won as a small hit. Can have a width. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to have different selection ratios for each small hit type without changing the small hit type that can be set when a small hit is won. good.

Next, the display mode at the time of small hit corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10109), and the small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variable time of the third symbol until the small symbol symbol stops on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The processing executed in S10110 is different from the above-described processing content of S10106 in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is changed to the big hit and the small hit is made, but the set variation is set. Subsequent processing executed for the pattern (for example, processing for outputting to the voice lamp control device 113) is the same, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small hit in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), the display mode at the time of disengagement corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). After that, the variation pattern at the time of disengagement is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the special symbol lottery result is configured to be determined in the order of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that “disengagement” is prioritized for determination. With such a configuration, the lottery result that is most likely to appear as the lottery result of the special symbol is “out”, and thus is effective for reducing the number of determinations that are repeatedly executed in various processes of the main controller 110. Becomes

Further, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set in the same process, but the variation The pattern command and the stop type command may be set at different timings. In addition, even when the settings are made within the same process, the stop type command is output after a predetermined period after the variation pattern command is output so that the output timings to the voice lamp control device 113 are not the same. You may do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time saving number updating process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time saving number updating process (S10020). This time saving number update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), the time saving number is updated, and the game state is set to the normal state. This is processing for.

In the time saving number updating process (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium sum counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). When it is determined that the value of the hour/short-time total counter 203fa is not greater than 0 (0) (S10201: No), that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the normal state, the hour/hour count is updated. Since there is no need, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium sum counter 203fa is greater than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state, the time saving number is updated (subtracted). The processing (S10202 to S10209) for executing the processing of is executed.

In the process of S10202, the value of the time saving medium sum counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether or not the special symbol change this time is the change of the second special symbol (special 2) (S10203). When it is determined that the variation this time is the second special symbol (special 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is decremented by 1 (S10204), and the process proceeds to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, when it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10205.

In the process of S10205, the remaining short time count command indicating the values of the hour/medium/time counters (time/medium/time total counter 203fa and hour/medium/time special 2 counter 203ff) changed by calculation is set (S10205). The remaining short time count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) of the first embodiment. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving/medium-sized special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving/medium-sized special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). In the process of S10207, when it is determined that the value of the time saving/medium addition counter 203fa is not 0 (S10206: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10206, when it is determined that the value of the hour/medium-and-time special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or in the process of S10207, it is determined that the value of the hour/time-medium-time total counter 203fa is 0. In the case (S10207: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10208), both the values of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff and the time saving medium adding counter 203fa are set to 0, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set, and when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the process of ending the time saving state (normal state Is set) is executed. Specifically, when the number of times of variation of the first special symbol during the time saving state and the number of times of variation of the second special symbol are added to the number of times of special symbol variation (total number of variations) reaches a predetermined number of times, that is, time saving The value (for example, 100) set in the time saving medium sum counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted each time the special symbol variation is executed, and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied when the value becomes 0 And, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times, that is, when the time saving state is set, the value set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (for example, 10) is 2 Special symbol (special 2) is subtracted each time the variation is executed, the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the value becomes 0, and the time saving state ends when any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied It is configured to do.

With such a configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol in which the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) It can be executed reliably. In the present embodiment, the above-described two time saving end conditions are included, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more time saving end conditions may be set. Further, in the jackpot winning of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for the time saving ending condition to be satisfied may be different according to the type of the jackpot that is won. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is ended when any one of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, three time saving ending conditions are set. The end condition may be set in advance and the time saving state may be ended when two of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By complicatedly setting the condition for ending the time saving state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state (the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) continues. It is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

Further, as described above, in the case of setting a plurality of time saving end conditions, as the effect of notifying the player of the period until the time saving state ends, the value corresponding to the time saving end condition that is most easily established is set. It suffices to execute an effect to be notified. In the present embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, since it is configured to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, the remaining time saving number notification executed during the time saving state Among the plurality of time saving end conditions, it is configured to notify the value until the time saving end condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied (FIG. 199(b ) Remaining short time notification area Dm6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, a small hit start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S10022). The small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and the small hit type (small hit A to C). ) Is a process for setting the start of the small hit game (game content (operation scenario) of the small hit game to be executed this time).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when the small hitting game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state where the ball can win (easy), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is won. By passing through the specific area 650V, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is over.

That is, the gaming state in which the small hit game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed in comparison with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state in which the possibility is high.

In the small hit start setting process (S10022), first, an opening scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set by referring to the open scenario 7 table 202ff based on the small hit type set by referring to the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe at the time of winning the small hit.

Then, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, the jackpot type at the time of V passage (jackpot D to E) is determined based on the jackpot type and the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fe. As described above with reference to FIG. 205(c), if the small hit type is the small hit A, it is determined that the V passing big hit type is “10 rounds, 10 short times, a big hit, a short time A”, and the small hit is made. If the type is a small hit B, it is determined to be “10 rounds, 10 short times, big wins, short B”, and if the small hit type is C, it is determined to be “10 rounds no short win, big hit” (FIG. 206). (See (c)).

Next, the small hit start is set based on the small hit type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit middle flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation process 7 (S192) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device, and is attached to the second entrance 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a.

In the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit type of the ordinary symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern of the ordinary electric auditors object 3640a (opening scenario according to the set hit type). ) Is configured to be different. As a result, when the normal symbol is won, the normal electric auditors product 3640a can be opened and closed in a plurality of operation patterns, so that the player can predict the timing at which the normal electric auditors product 3640a is operating. Can be difficult.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, a ball is more likely to enter the second entrance 3640 when the normal electric auditors object 3640a is operating (compared to a state where the normal electric auditors object 3640a is not operating). Sphere which is flowing down on the ordinary electric accessory 3640a at the timing when the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a ends, and the flow path (first flow path ta, It is configured to be discharged to the second flow path tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

Then, the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is configured to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 more easily during the small hitting game than the ball flowing down the first flow path ta. .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease with which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 3640 can be changed by changing the opening operation content of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a (second entrance). A first open state in which the ball easily enters the ball opening 3640 and a second open state in which the ball is less likely to enter the second ball opening 3640 than the easy-to-enter state are set) to the specific area 650V It is possible to change the ease of passage of the sphere (the first guidance state in which the sphere easily passes the specific area 650V, and the second guidance state in which the sphere does not easily pass the specific area 650V than the first guidance state). , Can be set).

That is, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of hit types can be set as the hit type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product 3640a (opening scenario according to the set hit type). ), the ease with which each condition is satisfied can be made different for each of a plurality of conditions for giving a privilege to the player. It is possible to make the player more interested in the operation content of (ordinary electric accessory 3640a).

It should be noted that a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used as the configuration that makes it easier to establish a plurality of game conditions in this way. For example, a variable unit in which a plurality of operation patterns are set is usually Instead of the electric accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, a variable winning device 65) in which an operation pattern is set when the jackpot is won may be used.

In this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S801). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the normal electric auditors object 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), then it is determined whether or not data (the value of the second random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area (S803).

In the processing of S803, data is not stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for starting the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not newly established (S803: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, when it is determined that the condition for newly starting the change of the normal symbol (second symbol) is satisfied (S803). : Yes), then, the value of the second per random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding sphere execution area is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second per random number 7 table 202fc, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 7 table 202fc. As described above, if the current gaming state is a high probability state of normal symbols (time saving state), if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is A per ordinary symbol. It is determined that there is, and if it is in the range of “80 to 98”, it is determined that it is B per ordinary drawing, and if it is a value of “99”, it is determined that it is out. If the current game state is a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state), if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that it is A per ordinary figure, If the value is "1", it is determined to be B per ordinary drawing, and if it is "2 to 99", it is determined to be out (see FIG. 206(a)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S805 determines whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol (A per ordinary figure or B per ordinary figure) (S806), and it is a hit of an ordinary symbol. When it is determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the processing of S807, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed so that the hit type can be identified as the stopped symbol (stopped display mode) of the second symbol. To set.

On the other hand, in the process of S806, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S806: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S808). In the processing of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit as the stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

When the processing of S807 or S808 ends, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol ( If it is (time saving state) (S809: Yes), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S809: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this processing is performed. finish.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a shorter variation time is set as the variation time of the second symbol than when the time saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). Is configured as follows. As a result, the number of times the second symbol is drawn per unit time can be increased in the time saving state than in the normal state, so that the time saving game can be efficiently executed.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is higher than that in the normal state, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is changed. By shortening the movement pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a and making it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 3640, the lottery for the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is executed more than in the normal state. Although it is configured to be easy, it is sufficient if the time saving state is configured to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) more than the normal state, for example, the time saving is longer than the normal state. The state is shorter than the normal symbol (2nd symbol), and it may be the same in other cases, and the time saving state has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol (2nd symbol) than the normal state, and other than that. May be the same, or the operation pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product 3640a may be set to be shorter in the time saving state than in the normal state so that the balls can easily enter the second entrance 3640, and otherwise the same.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed. Yes (S812). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S812, if the variation time has not elapsed (S812: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S812, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as a stop on the second symbol display device (lighting display). ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S813, when the stop display is set, next, when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed, the second symbol display The variable display in the device is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or S808.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time's normal symbol (this time's lottery result) is a hit of the normal symbol (S814). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal pattern (S814: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S815).

In the process of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol (S815: No), the opening period of the ordinary electric auditors object 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is 0.2. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol (S815: Yes), a universal figure per command is set (S851), and the hit type set this time and the current game state are set. The operation pattern of the corresponding ordinary electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818.

In the processing of S818, the opening/closing control start of the ordinary electric auditors role 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 3640a is set by the processing of S818, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52) is executed, The opening/closing control of the accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or S817 ends.

Next, the V entrance passage processing (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V entrance passage processing (S193). The V entrance passage process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S193) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214).

In the V entrance passage processing (S193), first, it is determined whether or not a ball passage sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has won the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This sphere passage sensor is a detection means that is turned on when a sphere passes. Specifically, it is configured by a proximity sensor arranged in proximity to the sphere flow path so that the period required for the sphere to flow down the detection area of the sphere passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). The proximity sensor is turned on (outputs an on signal) when the object is continuously detected for 30 milliseconds. Accordingly, for example, even if a state in which a sphere is detected at intervals of less than 30 milliseconds appears due to noise generated in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress a problem that the state is determined to be a state in which the sphere has passed. can do.

In the process of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not turned on (S10401: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S10401, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402).

In the process of S10402, when it is determined that the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and this process is ended. The V-entry passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted in the external output process (S2201) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for executing the effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small hitting game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the open period (S10402: No), it means that the ball has won the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is set. (S10404), and thereafter, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passage processing (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S194). This V passage process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

In the V passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203fg is turned on (S10501). In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203fg is turned on (S10501: Yes), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S10501, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S10502). That is, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, when it is determined that there is no V passage (S10502: No), the present process is terminated.

In the process of S10502, when it is determined that the V passage is present (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is valid (S10503). When it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S10503: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storing area 203fd is acquired (S10504), and the obtained V-passing jackpot is hit. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set to ON (S10505). Then, the V pass command is set (S10506).

Next, the V pass flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and then the time saving medium summing counter 203fa and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10503, when it is determined that the V-passage is not in effect (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and the process ends. If the ball passes the V winning switch 650e3 when the V is not valid, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won in the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting the error command in the process of S10505, the output of the error is executed and the fraudulent act can be found.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control processing 7 (S2282) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and corresponding winning prizes. It is a process for opening or closing the mouth (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S10601). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10601, if the special symbol jackpot is started (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S10603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10601, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S10601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S10604). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S10604, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S10604: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big jackpot (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). In the process of S10605, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff, the corresponding winning a prize (the specific winning a prize 65a of the first variable winning a prize device 65 or The V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S10607). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Become. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot is continuing for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is determined. It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls in total) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S10608, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning a prize (the specific winning a prize 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning a prize 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding prize is obtained. The mouth (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is timing (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after 15 rounds and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the pitching time, has elapsed. Is determined as.

In the processing of S10610, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S10610: Yes), the ending command is set (S10611), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S10610, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S10612). In the processing of S10612, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10612, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the jackpot C (S10613). In the process of S10613, when it is determined that the jackpot is not the big hit C (5R time/short/no big hit) (S10613: No), 100 is set to the time/medium/short total sum counter 203fa and 10 is set to the time/medium/second special counter 203ff (S10614) The process moves to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, when it is determined that the big hit C (5R hour short no big hit) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S10615.

In the process of S10615, the state command corresponding to the state after the big hit is set (S10615). Then, the big hit end is set (S10616), the big hit medium flag 203o is set to OFF (S10617), and then this processing is ended.

Next, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 7 (S2283). This small hit control process 7 (S2283) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, various types depending on the small hit. It is a process for executing an effect and opening or closing a corresponding winning opening (a specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or a V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 of FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), the opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to OFF (S10703), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10701, if the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S10704). During the small hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, while the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit game of the special symbol) is being made, It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the small hitting game of special symbols. In the process of S10704, if the special symbol is not in the small hit (S10704: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S10704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a small hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the process of S10705, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10705, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707). .. Specifically, the closing condition is met when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game is finished, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the V winning device 650. To determine.

In the process of S10707, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of the V winning device 650). The mouth 650a) is closed (S10708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S10709). In the processing of S10709, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S10709: Yes), the ending command is set (S10710), and the present processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Then, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S10709, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S10711). In the processing of S10711, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), this processing is ended.

In the process of S10711, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712), and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON. If it is determined to be true (S10712: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S10712: Yes), the opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the content of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), the jackpot start flag 203fb, and the jackpot. Medium flag 203o is set to ON (S10714), V flag 203fe is set to OFF (S10715), V passage flag 203fg is set to OFF (S10716), and small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S10717). , This process ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224, the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 224 is a flow chart showing the electric auditors product opening/closing process 7 (S2281). The electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). When it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: YES), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is opened. It is determined whether there is any (S10802). When it is determined that it is the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is opened (S10803), and the electric The accessory release command is set (S10804), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S10802, when it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10802: No), then the electric combination associated with the second entrance 3640 is performed. It is determined whether it is the closing timing of the object 3640a (S10805). When it is determined that it is the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is closed (S10806), and the electric The accessory closing command is set (S10807), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 is performed. It is determined whether it is the end timing of (S10809). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), a per-universal-drawing end command is set (S10810), and then this process ends. To do. Also, in the process of S10809, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a associated with the second entrance 3640 (S10809: No), the present process is ended.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 225 to FIG. 233, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the main processing in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. This main process is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for performing the same process as (see 59).

Of the main processing (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, the respective processing of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 is the same as the main processing (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as the processes of S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, after performing the process of S4111, the effect update process is performed (S4181). The effect update process (S4181) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect currently being executed (variable display that has already been set) during effect execution.

After performing the effect update process (S4181), the command determination process 7 is performed (S4182) to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110. Details of the command determination processing 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, the process proceeds to S4183. In the process of S4183, the variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After performing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passing monitoring process is performed (S4184). Details of the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233.

Further, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed from the start of the main process or the execution of the process of S4101 this time (S4101), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S4101: No) ), the processing proceeds to S4182 without performing S4102 to S4111, S4181.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the command determination processing 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 225) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. To do. In addition, in this process, when the winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination processing 7 (S4182), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area, analyzed, and changed by the main control device 110. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S12001). When the variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is received from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S12003) and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S12001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12004). When the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12007). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 ( The number of times of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol holding number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S12008). In addition, in the processing of S12008, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. After the processing of S12008 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol is selected, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 of the main control device 110 is set by the processing of S12008. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, the start winning prize At the time of detection or special symbol lottery, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, and it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. it can. When the process of S12008 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12007, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S12007: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12009). When it is determined that the prize information command is received (S12009: Yes), the prize information based on the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12009, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S12009: No), it is determined whether or not the hit related command is received (S12011), and the hit related command is received. When it is determined that it has been done (S12011: Yes), the hit related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process ends. This hit related processing 7 (S12012), as a result of the special symbol lottery, causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game executed when the jackpot or the jackpot is won. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed when a big hit or a small hit is won.

Here, the contents of the hit related process 7 (S12012) will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this hit-related processing (S12012) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S12101). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S12102), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the big hit start command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S12103). In the process of S12103, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S12103: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S12104), and this process is ended. In the seventh embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted as the number-of-rounds command from the main controller 110, the number-of-displays round command is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the capacity of the command data transmitted from the main control device 110, the information indicating the start of a new round is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the control device 113, a round number storage counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number storage counter, the voice lamp control device 113 side currently It may be configured to calculate the number of rounds and set the display round number command.

In the processing of S12103, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S12105). In the process of S12105, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S12105: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S12106), and this process ends.

In the process of S12105, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S12107).

When it is determined in the process of S12107 that the small hit start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process is executed (S12108), and the present process is ended. The details of this small hit start processing (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228.

Here, the contents of the small hit start process (S12108) will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small hit start process (S12108) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on. In the case (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). In the processing of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delayed out-of-place state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small hitting start command for display indicating a small hit with a high V expectation is set (S12204). After that, the process returns to the hit related process 7.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is not turned on in the process of S12201 (S12201: No), the process proceeds to S12205. Also, in the process of S12203, when it is determined that the value of the delayed outage status flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

In the process of S12205, a display small hitting start command indicating a normal small hit is set (S12205), and then the hit related process 7 is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 227, the description will be continued. In the processing of S12107, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S12107: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command is received (S12109). In the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hitting end command has been received (S12109: Yes), the small hitting end command for display is set (S12110) in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small hitting game (S12110). This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111). In the processing of S12111, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command is received (S12111: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S12112), and this processing is ended. In addition, in the processing of S12111, when it is determined that the V-entry passing command is not received (S12111: No), it is determined whether the V-passing command is received next (S12113).

In the process of S12113, when it is determined that the V passage command has been received (S12113: Yes), the display V effect command for indicating an effect based on the entry into the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set ( (S12114), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S12113, when it is determined that the V passage command is not received (S12113: No), this processing ends as it is.

Returning to FIG. 226, the explanation is continued. In the processing of S20111, if it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S12011: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S12013). When it is determined that the stop command is received (S12013: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S12014), and then it is determined whether or not the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to off (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. In the process of S12015, when it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not executed and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command is not received in the process of S12013 (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not the time saving effect-related command is received (S12017). When it is determined that the time saving effect related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time saving effect related processing is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main processing. Details of the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S12017 that the time saving effect-related command has not been received (S12017: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

Next, the content of the time saving effect related processing (S12018) will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the content of the time saving effect related processing (S12018). The time saving effect related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the time saving effect-related processing (S12018) is executed, first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe is read (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (S12302). ). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state (S12302: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the command determination process 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the command for receiving the universal figure is received (S12303), When it is determined that the hit command has been received (S12303: Yes), the present figure hit type is analyzed based on the received figure figure hit command (S12304), and the time saving effect corresponding to the figure hit type is executed. A display time saving effect start command for setting is set (S12305), the universal figure hitting flag 223fi is set to ON (S12306), and then the process returns to the command determination processing 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12303, when it is determined that the universal hit command is not received (S12303: No), it is then determined whether or not the second entry command is received (S12307). When it is determined that the second ball entry command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and the display effect command for updating the time saving effect is set (S12309), After that, the process returns to the command determination process 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12307, when it is determined that the second entry command has not been received (S12307: No), it is then determined whether or not the universal figure end command has been received (S12310). When it is determined that the universal figure end command has been received (S12310: Yes), the universal figure end next process is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7. When it is determined in the process of S12310 that the universal figure end command has not been received (S12310: No), the process directly returns to the command determination process 7. The details of the end-of-lifetime process (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Next, the contents of the end-of-lifetime process (S12311) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the per-universal-drawing end process (S12311). The per-universal figure end time process (S12311) is a process executed in the time saving effect-related process (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the per-universal-game end time process (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second ball entry flag 223fh is ON (S12401). When it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second ball entry flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display effect command for ending the time saving effect is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

In the process of S12404, the normal figure hit flag 223fi is set to OFF (S12404), and thereafter, this process ends, and the process returns to the time saving effect related process (S12018 of FIG. 229).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183). This variation display setting process 7 (S4183) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 225) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is produced in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the above, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5101: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore, in S5107. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the display control device 114 is notified. A variation pattern command for display is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is displayed so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started. When the process of S5181 is finished, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process proceeds to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore, in S5111. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation display setting process 7 is performed. Is executed (S5183). The details of the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (S5183) will be described later with reference to FIG. After finishing the process of S5183, the data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5111.

In the processing of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, off) (S5111: No), the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Since there is no such a state, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is set to off. Then, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (S5183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 (S5183) for special figure 2. The variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (S5183) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. is there.

In the special display 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183), first, the game state stored in the game state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is determined whether or not (S12502). When it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: No), the corresponding variation pattern command for display is set (S12510), and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S12502, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S12502: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a big hit (S12503). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the big hit is set (S12504), and then this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S12503, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S12503: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S12505). When it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S12505: No), a variation pattern command indicating the end of the time saving effect is set (S12506), and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S12505, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S12505: Yes), it is then determined whether the variation pattern of the small hit is a long change (S12507). When it is determined that the variation pattern for small hits is long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process proceeds to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, when it is determined that the variation pattern of small hits is not the long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12509.

In the process of S12509, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit is set (S12509), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233, a ball passing monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring processing (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and the variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. In order to be executed, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether or not a delay passage entrance switch (not shown) is on (S12601). When it is determined that the delay passage entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the universal figure hit flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the normal figure hitting flag 223fi is not turned on (S12602: No), the process proceeds to S12611.

In the process of S12602, if it is determined that the general-purpose hit flag 223fi is not on (that is, it is off) (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the delay passage state is set. It is determined whether the value of the flag 223ff is "00" (S12604). When it is determined that the value of the delay path status flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay path status flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12604, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12610.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, if it is determined that the delay passage entry switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then it is determined whether the delay passage discharge switch (not shown) is on. It is determined whether or not (S12606). When it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12606: No), this processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then whether the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is "01" or not. Is determined (S12608). When it is determined that the value of the delay path status flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay path status flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12608, when it is determined that the value of the delay passage state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay path state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific region 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small hitting game, and the ball has the specific region 650V during the small hitting game. A big hit (so-called two kinds) game is executed by passing.

In addition, as a path for letting the ball flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small hitting game, the first passage ta in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area 650V (see FIG. 196). ) And a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) in which a sphere easily passes through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays attention to which flow path the ball flows down during the small hitting game. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball is distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or the second flow path tb by the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, and thus the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. Can also make the player interested. Furthermore, when the sphere flows down the second flow path tb where the sphere easily passes the specific area 650V, the easiness of winning the sphere to the V winning device 650 is configured to be different according to the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbol to be set is configured to be different depending on the gaming state that is set and the type of small hit. With such a configuration, when the small hit corresponding to the big hit to which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit game is won, a gaming state (advantageous time saving) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V and the big hit end It is possible to set a gaming state (disadvantageous time saving) that facilitates passage of a ball to the specific area 650V when a small hit corresponding to a big hit to which a time saving state is given later is won.

Then, in the present embodiment, by using the configuration of the advantageous time saving and the disadvantage time saving as described above, when the jackpot is won once (first win), at least including the first win, a total of three big jackpots are executed. It is configured such that the game state advantageous to the player continues. By thus setting the game state in which the jackpot game is guaranteed to be executed a plurality of times, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured to win the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball to the second entrance 3640 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the player can easily enter the ball. Then, the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a has entered the second ball entrance 3640, and the electric accessory 3640a transitions to the closed state. At that time, the ball is flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a. The ball is distributed to the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb according to the position (downstream side).

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the sphere located on the downstream side of the sphere flow path on the electric accessory 3640a is configured to be distributed to the second flow path tb which is advantageous to the player, and continues. When the sphere is fired, the sphere is configured to easily flow into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, during the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, in order to flow the ball into the second flow path tb, it is necessary to continuously shoot the ball toward the game area of the game board 13. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of obtaining an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

In the seventh embodiment, the sphere flowing down the second flow path tb, that is, the sphere distributed to the flow path that is advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, is directed toward the V winning device 650. Although it is configured to flow down, a ball that has flowed down a flow path that is advantageous to the player may enter the general ball entrance 63. As a result, many prize balls can be provided to the player.

Further, a valve member is provided in the V winning device 650 to change the ball into a first state in which the ball can pass the specific area 650V and a second state in which the ball cannot pass easily. The variation time of winning in the device 650 and the variation time of winning in the V winning device 650 in the second state may be variable according to the set time saving state.

Further, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during a jackpot game is provided, and a certain variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol) is given by the ball passing through a specific area within the V attacker. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. In the above-described first embodiment, a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), as a game state. When the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, it is easy to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. It was configured to frequently generate small hit games.

In this way, when the latent probability state is set as the game state, that is, in order to frequently cause the small hit game in the lottery of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol, similarly, the low probability state of the normal symbol Even in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) that is set, it is necessary to use a configuration that can easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, in the normal state, in order to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being frequently executed, the variation time is long as the variation pattern of the second special symbol set in the normal state (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set the fluctuation pattern.

In this way, if it is configured such that a long variation time is executed in the second special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed, if the player mistakenly executes the lottery in the second special symbol, , Until the variation pattern ends, the next special symbol lottery is not executed and the game is hindered, so in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variation), The lottery (variation) of the two special symbols was configured to be able to be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during the big hit game, or during the small hit game executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, latent probability state), the execution opportunity of the second special symbol The ball is allowed to enter (is easy) to enter the second entrance 640. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. Therefore, as in the above-described first embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is performed. (Variation) and lottery of the second special symbol (fluctuation), and without using a configuration to execute (in parallel) at the same time, only in the latent state based on the lottery of the second special symbol small hit game Can be frequently generated. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Further, according to the type of winning (big hit, small hit), it is possible to set a hit type that makes it easy for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 and a hit type that makes it difficult to enter. , When winning (big hit, small hit), not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the hit game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game The player may be interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a ball enters the second entrance 640 depending on whether the winning is won in the lottery for the first special symbol and the winning is won in the lottery for the second special symbol. It is configured such that the ratio of the hit type that is easy to set is different. Specifically, it is easier to set the hit type in which the ball is easier to enter the second entrance 640 when the hit is won in the second special symbol than in the case where the first special symbol is won. I am configuring.

With such a configuration, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to the executable state, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Even though the advantageous game mode advantageous for the player (the mode capable of executing the lottery of Toku-zu 2) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately ended, and the player is made uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning the winning (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, without winning the small hit, only the big hit (1/400 at low probability) is set, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big prize is won The probability of (low probability 1/400) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set to win (300/400) even for small wins. In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is set to have a higher probability of winning the small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol, so that the lottery for the first special symbol is drawn. Random drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win the winning (big hit, small hit) than.

Thereby, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win the winning (big hit, small hit) with a high probability, The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is more likely to be executed in the second entrance 640 with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the big hit is won. doing. Thereby, when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol again after the winning game is over.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be able to store a plurality (4 pieces) (hold storage), and depending on the winning type that is won. Therefore, the opening operation pattern of the hit game is defined so that the number of pieces that can be held and stored during one hit game is different.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the game motivated to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening/closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in an open state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path in which a part of the balls spilled from the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entrance 640 when the ball is changed to the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). Is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 that is opened during the winning game to enter the second entrance port 640, during the winning game, It is possible to let the player pay attention to the movement of the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

Here, with reference to FIG. 234, the configuration of the game board 13 in the present eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the present eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a point where the second attacker 3650 is provided at a substantially central position of the right side area of the game board 13, and a point where the guide passage 3660 is provided below the second attacker 3650. The point where the second entrance 640 with the electric accessory 640a is provided at a position facing the outlet of the guide passage 3660 and the position below the second entrance 640, and the guide passage 3660 flows down. The first attacker (variable winning device) 650 is provided at a position where the ball and the ball flowing down the game area formed on the right side of the guide passage 3660 among the game areas provided on the game board 13 can win the prize. The point is very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be briefly described. At normal time (except during the game when the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball shot toward the right side area of the game board 13 by the right-handed game is opened and closed by the open/close door 3650f. While passing and passing through the game area on the right side of the guide passage 3660, it flows down so as to enter the general entrance 63.

It should be noted that this general entrance 63 (general entrance 63 arranged on the right side of the second entrance 640) has one prize ball set as a privilege given when the ball enters. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls does not increase.

On the other hand, during the game when the second attacker 3650 is opened, the open/close door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, a state in which a ball can flow down on the open/close door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the case of, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening/closing door 3650f and wins the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (elapse of a predetermined opening period, or the number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit number of winnings) is established, and the opening/closing door 3650f. It is configured such that the ball flowing down on the downstream side of the opening/closing door 3650f flows into the guide passage 3660 when is changed to the closed state (embedded state).

In other words, in the eighth embodiment, the ball passage that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-handed game is performed in a normal time (other than the game when the second attacker 3650 is opened) It is configured so that the ball does not flow down in the guide passage 3660 in which is formed. With this configuration, since the ball that has flowed down in the guide passage 3660 does not enter the second entrance 640 unless the second attacker 3650 is opened by the winning game, the second special symbol lottery Can be limited in duration.

Further, the through gate 67 is disposed between the opening/closing door 3650f and the inflow port of the guide passage 3660, so that a ball flowing into the guide passage 3660 passes through the through gate 67 and then flows into the guide passage 3660. Is configured. The guide passage 3660 is configured such that the period required for the sphere to flow down the guide passage is about 2.5 seconds. In this way, the sphere flowing down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 without fail, and reaches the second ball entrance 640 from the through gate 67. By configuring so that the time until is constant (about 2.5 seconds), the sphere passing through the guide passage 3660 enters the second entrance 640 depending on the variation time of the set normal symbol. Whether or not it can be easily changed.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the changing time of the set normal symbol is made different according to the set game state. Specifically, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, latent state), the variation time of 2 seconds is set, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving state, probability variation state), the variation time of 0.1 seconds Is configured to be set. Thereby, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the ball passes through the guide passage 3660, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is When the ball passes through the guide passage 3660 when set, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the configuration of the opening/closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing door 3650f in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 235(b) shows the opening/closing in the closed state (embedded state). It is a top view which showed the door 3650f typically. As shown in FIG. 235(a), the open/close door 3650f of the present embodiment extends along the inclination of the open/close door 3650f (see FIG. 234) from the right upper surface 3650y1 of the open/close door 3650f through the upper surface 3650f1 of the open/close door 3650f. It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning opening 3650a.

Then, the first delay member 3650fa, the second delay member 3650fb, and the third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the sphere meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f, and the downflow period in which the ball flows down the opening/closing door 3650f is 1 It is configured to be 2 seconds. This flow-down period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) for maintaining the open state when the second attacker 3650 is opened by a hit game (big hit B, big hit C, small hit). Is configured to be. With this configuration, in the hitting game of opening the second attacker 3650, the ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 3650a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the hit game of opening the second attacker 3650 is executed, the scenario of the open operation is set so that the ball can win the second specific winning opening 3650a in all the hit games. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the opening operation scenario set during the winning game, the opening operation scenario in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 3650a, and the ball flows into the guide passage 3660. The easy opening operation scenario may be set.

In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a sphere flowing down the upper surface 3650f of the opening/closing door 3650f flows down to a position facing the guide passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f) (for example, 0. It is preferable to define the opening operation scenario such that 5 seconds) is a period in which the opening state of the opening door 3650f is maintained when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario defined in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a during the winning game, and the ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f of the opening/closing door 3650f flows into the guide passage 3660. Easier to do.

Thereby, for example, when the winning upper limit number of balls to the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening upper limit period of the opening/closing door 3650f are set as the end condition of the winning game, the second specific winning opening 3650a Since the opening operation in which the ball is hard to win is executed, the winning game can be continued for a long time. Therefore, the number of balls flowing into the guide passage 3660 can be increased during one hit game, and more special figure 2 reserved memory can be acquired.

Next, when the closing condition of the opening/closing door 3650f is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235(a) is changed to the closed state (embedded state) shown in FIG. 235(b). In this state, the sphere located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the sphere located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the guide passage 3660 in the right side region.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, the time taken for the upper surface sphere of the opening/closing door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (upstream position ZC is 0.5 seconds, downstream position ZD is 0.7 seconds). As described above, the opening/closing door 3650f is opened for 1.5 seconds in one small hit game. As a result, when the ball that has flowed down first enters the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, the next ball can be positioned at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when the small hit game is executed, the ball can be surely passed through the guide passage 3660.

The following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of the present embodiment. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z that detects a ball that has won the second attacker 3650 is positioned on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modification of FIG. 235) and from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z. The distance ZE may be set so that the sphere takes 0.3 seconds to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance of the opening/closing door 3650f is shortened, the sphere that flows down next can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

Furthermore, although a plurality of opening patterns of the opening/closing door 3650f that are effective in the small hit game are prepared and the second attacker 3650 is not won, the small hit game in which the opening period in which the ball can pass through the through gate 67 is set can be executed. It may be configured to. That is, using the small hit game, it is possible to execute a game for winning the ball in the second attacker 3650 and a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the sphere flow in the right side region of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing a sphere flow when the second attacker 3650 is in an open state (projection state), and FIG. 237 is a sphere when the second attacker 3650 is in a closed state (embedded state). It is the schematic diagram which showed the flow.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), all balls launched by the right-handed game are received by the opening/closing door 3650f (the right side area of the game board 13). An opening/closing door 3650f is provided so as to shield the door. With this configuration, when the second attacker 3650 is operated to open the hit game, it is possible to easily win the ball to the second specific winning opening 3650a simply by performing the right-handed game.

Further, when the opening/closing door 3650f is located in the open state (protruding state), the opening/closing door 3650f blocks the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 so that the ball cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficult). Is configured. That is, in the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing door 3650f that is opened by the winning game has a function of facilitating the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a and the flow down of the ball into the guide passage 3660. And a function for

Next, when the open/close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), the ball fired in the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the area on the right side of the guide passage 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). .. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that has flowed down the right-handed area by the right-handed game executed when the open/close door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state) cannot flow into the guide passage 3660 (difficulty. Is configured).

Specifically, in the right side region of the game board 13, the nail K1 that is planted above the opening/closing door 3650f is below the opening/closing door 3650f and is formed so as to form the inlet of the guide passage 3660. The nail K2 is configured to be positioned on the right side (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 237) by the distance Kz (about 10 mm) from the nail K2. The nail K1 and the nail K2 are arranged such that the distance in the height direction is one sphere (about 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball that has flown down the right side of the nail K1 by the right-handed game from flowing into the inflow port of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

Further, regarding the arrangement position of the second specific winning opening 3650a where the ball flowing down to the lower end of the opening/closing door 3650f can win, the distance in the height direction is shorter than the distance in the width direction with the nail K1. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), the ball is not won in the second specific winning opening 3650a. In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the opening/closing door 3650f makes it possible to change the state in which the ball can win the second specific winning port 3650a and the state in which the ball cannot be won (difficult). Other configurations may be used, for example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position that opens the opening of the second specific winning opening 3650a and a closed position that closes the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening/closing door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the opening/closing door 3650f.

In this case, for example, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (embedded state), that is, when the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is variable so as to be located in the closed position. If the open/close door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), that is, if the ball is allowed to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable portion is located at the open position. It is good to variably control. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent the situation where the ball wins the second specific winning opening 3650a at an unintended timing.

Further, when using the configuration of the above-described example, it is preferable to use one drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) to drive the variable member and the opening/closing door 3650f. Accordingly, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, the variable member may be configured to be delayed with respect to the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 3650f by a grace period in consideration of the flow time of the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball that has flowed down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 3650f cannot be won in the second specific winning port 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the sphere flow when the opening/closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (embedded state) while the sphere is flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235(a)) of the opening/closing door 3650f will be described. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is planted below the opening/closing door 3650f and in the vicinity of the position of the downstream side 1/3 of the opening/closing door 3650f, and the flow on the right side and the left side of the nail K2 is different. The road is formed. Therefore, the sphere flowing down in the range of 2/3 on the upstream side of the opening/closing door 3650f flows down in the area on the right side of the sphere passage 3660 when the opening/closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (embedded state). On the other hand, the sphere flowing down in the range of the downstream side ⅓ of the opening/closing door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 when the opening/closing door 3650f is changed to the closed state (embedded state), and the sphere passage 3660. Flow into.

The guide passage 3660 used in the present eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time until the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (downflow time), and the inflow of the guide passage 3660. The time required for the sphere to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is about 2.5 seconds.

Then, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 and flowing down the flow path ty reaches the second ball entrance 640, if the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the electric ball is driven. If the accessory 640a is closed, the accessory 640a does not enter the second entrance 640, but flows down toward the outlet 66.

In the present embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side region, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided below the ball passage 3660. As a result, the spheres flowing down the plurality of flow paths can enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

Further, a delay member for delaying the downward velocity of the sphere may be provided on the lower surface of the sphere flow of the guide passage 3660 used in the present embodiment.

<Regarding effect contents in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 238 to FIG. 241, a characteristic effect executed in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the right of lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved memory) is easily acquired during the period when the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. The lottery for the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win the small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol. That is, in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed by the left-handed game, the jackpot is won, the right-handed game is executed when the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot game is opened. A game in which the ball is awarded to the operated attacker (the first attacker 650a, the second attacker 3650) and the prize ball (privilege) is obtained, while the right of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved memory) is obtained. Is done.

Then, when the special game 2 holding memory is obtained during the winning game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special game 2) is executed after the winning game is finished, and the lottery result of the special game 2 is a big hit or a small hit. If so, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a high probability in the lottery of the second special symbol, once the lottery of special map 2 is executed, the lottery of special map 2 is repeatedly executed. The game state becomes easy to be played.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the lottery of special map 2 is executed (whether or not the lottery of special map 2 is moved to an executable state). It is configured to be done. As a result, the player can play the game while checking the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the special game 2 reserved storage can be acquired by executing the winning game (the second opening operation of the second attacker 3650), first, FIG. As shown in (a), during the execution of the hit game (the hit operation in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the effect of promoting acquisition of the special figure 2 reserved memory is executed. FIG. 238(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 wins the jackpot C, which is a jackpot that is opened.

As shown in FIG. 238(a), when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C is started, the guide display area Dm3 is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 in order to guide the player to perform a right-handed game during the jackpot game. Right-handed” is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, the effect of the character 811 collecting the key 871 is executed. This key 871 sets the production mode so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is collected, and by the character 811 collecting many keys 871, It is intended to inform (notify) the player that the number of stored memories in FIG. 2 is large.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment “collect treasure keys” for explaining the game nature of the effect is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the key that collects the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the big hit game (collects the key 871) and collects the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed after the end of the big hit game. 871 is used to open the treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239), and an effect of notifying the player of the contents of the treasure box 873 is executed.

In addition, below the main display area Dm, an acquisition display area Dm12a in which a value relating to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is additionally displayed and a round number display area Dm12b indicating the current number of round games are formed. .. Since the example shown in FIG. 238(a) is immediately after the jackpot game is started, "00000" is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, and the state where the prize ball is not won during the jackpot game. Is shown. Then, "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

In the production during the big hit game, acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the effect executed in the present embodiment, one key 871 is collected every time one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, and therefore, the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d have a maximum size. It is configured so that four keys 871 are displayed. The acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for indicating the number of reserved balls in special figure 2.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment “Please hit right” to show the player the game content is displayed, and a second guide display area formed below the guide display area Dm3. A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second entrance 640 is displayed on Dm11. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured that it is easier to continuously obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2 by firing the ball, so that other effects are provided so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. The comment for indicating the game content is displayed in a display mode (display mode in which the size of the character is enlarged) that is more emphasized than the display mode used for. In this way, by using the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds to explain in detail the game contents aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, after the display of FIG. 238(a) is executed, the jackpot game is executed, and when the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, the effect contents shown in FIG. 238(b) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238(b) is a schematic diagram showing a part of the effect contents displayed when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, it is determined that the ball entered the second entrance 640 in the main display area Dm (special feature). An effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed as an effect for notifying the player that the reserved memory in FIG. 2 has been acquired), and a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed.

Further, the key 871 is displayed in the acquired display area Dm10a to display that one key 871 has been acquired. Further, in the second guidance display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position simulating the second ball entrance 640 in order to visually notify the player that the ball has entered. The winning display area Dm12a displays "00085" as the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and the round number display area Dm12b displays "2" indicating that the current round is the second round. There is.

When the jackpot game is over, the screen shown in FIG. 239(a) is displayed. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, the main display is a notification mode (a display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for informing the player of the total number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 obtained during the big hit game this time. While being displayed in the area Dm, a comment of "continue right-handed" to indicate that the right-handed game is to be continued even after the jackpot game is over is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Further, even if the jackpot game is over, in order to allow the player to continue the right-handed game, the guidance display area Dm3 is displayed as the guidance display area Dm3 during the jackpot game (FIG. 238(a)). ) Reference) is set to a more emphasized display mode. Thereby, it is possible to reliably inform the player that the right-handed game should be continued even after the jackpot game is over.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, as shown in FIG. 239(b), the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used. The effect of opening the treasure box 873 is executed. FIG. 239(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed when the special figure 2 variation is executed after the jackpot game is over.

239 (b) is a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed, the fluctuation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being variably displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 The mode is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (special figure 2 hold) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the big hit to one.

In addition, while the production which continues from the big hit game is being executed, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when the small hit is won by the special drawing 2 lottery, it is obtained by winning the ball in the second attacker 3650. Information regarding the number of awarded balls is additionally displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous period) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) can be executed.

Further, the number-of-rounds display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed similarly to the above-described acquisition display area Dm12a, and the character "Round Extra" is displayed while the game based on the variation of special figure 2 is being played. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous state is extended and set even after the jackpot game is over.

In the present embodiment, the character "Round Extra" is displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special figure 2 fluctuation can be displayed. Provided is a means for adding up the number of prize balls obtained during the feasible game period, and the number of prize balls added up by the summing means can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game may be increased by one, or the small hits won during the game period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed. A small hit number measuring means for measuring the number of times is provided, and when the small hit number measured by the small hit number measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the number of rounds displayed during the big hit game May be incremented by 1.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being extended and executed. Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform an effect (see FIG. 239(b)) of opening the treasure box 873 using the key 871 even while the jackpot game is being executed. As a result, it is difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot game is currently in progress based on the effect being executed, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the previous game.

When the small hit is won in the state where the effect shown in FIG. 239(b) is being executed, the effect that the treasure box 873 is opened and the contents of the treasure box 873 are exposed is executed as shown in FIG. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect contents displayed when a small hit is won in a case where the normal state is set as the game state.

In the present embodiment, as a gaming state, a high probability state of a normal symbol (probability change state, time saving state) is set, when a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state, latent probability state) is set Is configured so that it is easier to obtain the special figure 2 reserved memory during the small hit game. And, in the example shown in FIG. 240(a), since the small hit is won in the state where the normal state is set, it is shown that the small hit game capable of acquiring the special figure 2 reserved memory is executed. “V” is displayed as the display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

There are a plurality of display modes showing the contents of the treasure box 873 other than "V". For example, if the lottery result of special map 2 is out, "x" is displayed, and the lottery result of special map 2 is special map 2 reserved. A display mode imitating “?” is set for a small hit for which it is difficult to obtain a memory. In addition, a pre-determination process for pre-determining the winning information of the second special symbol that is stored and stored is performed, and the determination result of the pre-determination process is a jackpot or a player in the suspension information that is stored and stored. In the case of the determination result indicating that there is a small hit that is advantageous to the other, it is executed before the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) corresponding to the suspension information is executed. By using the display mode showing the lottery result of Toku-zu 2, a display mode that suggests that a big hit or a small hit that is advantageous to the player is included in the hold information stored on hold is set. It may be configured.

Here, as a result of the change in the special figure 2, a jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player, that is, when a jackpot in which a high probability state (for example, a time saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game is won, As shown in (b), a display mode imitating "skull" is set as the display mode showing the contents of the treasure box 873.

Further, the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 may be changed based on the lottery result of the special map 2 executed this time or the preliminary determination result of the suspension information stored in suspension. Well, for example, as shown in FIG. 241(a), it may be configured to display a display mode (a rusty key and a tattered treasure box) that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol this time before opening the treasure box 873, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

When the key 871 disappears after the productions shown in FIG. 238(a) to FIG. 241(a) are repeatedly executed (when the reserved memory of special figure 2 disappears), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends. Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241(b) is displayed. In this ending screen, a value (the value displayed in the acquisition display area dm12a) indicating the number of award balls acquired during the current advantageous period (a period in which the big-hit game period and the special figure 2 variation period are combined), and the small hit The number of times you were won and is displayed. Then, while the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the game method to the left-handed play is variably displayed as "left-handed", the sub-display area Ds "Return to left-handed" Display the comment.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 is changed so that the game method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game at the timing when the reserved memory of special figure 2 is lost, not at the game state transition timing. ing. That is, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, when there is a special figure 2 hold, it guides the right-handed game, and when there is no special figure 2 hold, it is configured to show a left-handed game. ing. This allows the player to execute an appropriate game without executing a disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, a flow of transition of each game state in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing a flow of transition of each game state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five types of jackpots (jackets A to E) set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second. There are three types of jackpots (jackets F to H) that are set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

The jackpot type set at the time of jackpot winning and the gaming state set at the time of jackpot winning are configured so that the gaming state set after the jackpot winning game is different. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicatedly shift each game state in the game executed by the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In addition, a semi-advantageous game state is set by providing a game state (semi-advantageous game state) in which it is easy to shift to the advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player and a game state in which it is difficult to shift. If so, the player can continue to play the game, so that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 242, at the time when the game is started on the pachinko machine 10, a game is performed in which the first special symbol (special map 1) is selected in the state where the normal state is set as the game state. And if you win the jackpot in Toku-zu 1, the probability variation state is set with 65% probability (big jackpot A, B winning), the time saving state is set with 25% chance (big jackpot E winning), and there is a 10% chance. Normal state is set (big hit C, D winning).

Among them, when the jackpot C is won (5%), the second attacker 3650 is opened in a part of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. ..

Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot D (5%) is executed again, and the jackpot C (5%) is played. The game of performing the lottery of Toku-zu 2 is executed. And, the special figure 2 wins the small hit with probability of approximately 75%, in the small hit game which is executed in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small hit game Since it is configured to be obtainable, when the lottery of Toku-zu 2 is executed in the normal state, a game period in which the Toku-zu 2 game can be continuously executed unless the reserved memory of Toku-zu 2 is deleted. Become.

When the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 2 that is executed in the normal state as the game state, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 30% (jackpot F win) and with a probability of 35%. The latent state is set (big hit G win), and the time saving state is set with 35% probability (big hit H win).

Next, when the probability variation state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the reserved memory of special figure 2. Also, it is configured such that it is not possible (difficult) to obtain the new reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the probability variation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the time saving state because the jackpot winning probability of the special symbol is high, but in the state with the reserved memory of the special diagram 2, Even if the small win is won in the lottery in FIG. 2, the reserved memory of the new special diagram 2 cannot be acquired, so that the game state is disadvantageous to the player.

If the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 while the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is set again with a probability of 35% (jackpot A win), and the latent probability state is set with a probability of 30% ( The jackpot B wins), the normal state is set with a probability of 10% (jackpot C, D wins), and the time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jackpot E wins). And if you win the jackpot in the lottery of special figure 2, the probability change state is set again with a 30% probability (big win F win), and the latent probability state is set with a 35% probability (big win G win), 35% There is a probability that a time saving state will be set (a big hit H win).

Next, when the latent state is set, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the reserved memory of the special drawing 2 In this case, a new reserved memory of special figure 2 can be acquired during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the latent probability state is a state in which the special symbol big hit winning probability is high, and the special symbol 2 has a reserved memory, and when the special symbol 2 lottery wins the small hit. Since the new reserved memory of special figure 2 can be obtained, the player is in the most advantageous game state.

If you win the jackpot in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 while the latent state is set, the latent state will be set again with a 65% chance (big hit A, B win) and the normal state with a 10% chance. It is set (big hit C, D winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (big hit E winning). And if you win the jackpot in the lottery of special figure 2, probability probability state is set with a probability of 65% (big jackpot F, G win), latent probability state is set with a probability of 35% (big jackpot G win), 35% With the probability of, a time saving state is set (Hack for big hits).

Lastly, when the time saving state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is assumed that the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2 executed based on the reserved memory of special figure 2. Also, it is configured such that it is not possible (difficult) to obtain the new reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small hit game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the short-time state has a low probability of winning the special symbol big hit, and in the state having the reserved memory of special figure 2, even if the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, Since it is not possible to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the player is in the most unfavorable game state.

When the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 while the time saving state is set, the probability variation state is set with a probability of 65% (jackpot A, B winning) and the normal state is set with a probability of 10% ( The jackpot C, D wins), and the 25% chance of setting a shorter working time again (jackpot E win). And if you win the jackpot in the lottery of Special Figure 2, the probability change state is set with a probability of 30% (big win F win), the latent state is set with a probability of 35% (big win G win), the probability of 35% And the time saving state is set again (big hit H win).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the state where there is no reserved memory of special figure 2, it is configured such that a ball cannot be newly inserted into the second ball entrance 640 regardless of the game state. ing. Furthermore, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured so as not to change between the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the state where there is no reserved memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbol is changed, the advantageous state to the player does not change.

In other words, in the state where the variation (lottery) of special figure 1 is being executed, the low probability state of the special symbol (normal state, time saving state) has the same advantage degree, and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change state, latent state). The certainty state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the low probability state of the special symbol because the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high.

In addition, in the state where there is the reserved memory of special figure 2, in the high probability state of the normal design, because the reserved memory of the new special figure 2 cannot be acquired, the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability change state, time saving state) Instead, the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, latent probability state) is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the most favorable gaming state for the player is the latent probability state, and the most unfavorable gaming state is the time saving state.

Further, when the jackpot is won, the ratio of transition to the most probable latent state for the player will be explained. The probability that the latent state is set based on the lottery in Special Figure 1 is most likely the probable state. High (30%). Therefore, the probability change state becomes a semi-advantageous game state in which it is easy to shift to the most advantageous advantageous game state (latent probability state).

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes the first random number 8 table 202ga, the first type selection 8 table 202gb, the second random number 8 table 202gc, and the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , And the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. In addition, a configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name other than “8” added to enable identification of the use in the eighth embodiment)) ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment has the first random number 8 table 202ga, the first type selection 8 table 202gb, the second random number 8 table 202gc, and the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd. , And the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. In addition, a configuration (table having the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-described embodiments (the same name other than “8” added to enable identification of the use in the eighth embodiment)) ) Is the same as each of the above-described embodiments in terms of its use, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol.

Further, the first per random number 8 table 202ga, the number of random numbers to be a big hit is specified in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same, but only the lottery of the second special symbol is a small hit Value is defined (see FIG. 243(b)). In this way, by differentiating the number of random numbers to be a small win (set only for one special symbol), the special lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol, the privilege to the player ( (Big hit or small hit) The degree of expectation for giving can be different.

Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be described with reference to FIG. 243(b). FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. In this first random number 8 table 202ga, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a random number value (determination value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit are defined. The data table is referred to when the lottery result is acquired in the special symbol variation start process 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

The first random number 8 table 202a (see FIG. 243(b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1" is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined as a big hit (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243(b)), and it is determined that the first special symbol is out. “2 to 399” is defined as the range of the determined value (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243(b)).

In addition, "2-99" is defined as the range of the determination value that is determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243(b)), and the determination value that is determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. “100 to 399” is specified as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243(b)). Also, in the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variation state), "0 to 19" is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined as a big hit (see 202ga4 of FIG. 243(b)), and the first special symbol is out. “20 to 399” is defined as the range of the determination value to be determined (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, "20 to 99" is defined as the determination value that is determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)), and "100 as the determination value that is determined to be the small hit of the second special symbol. .About.399" is specified (see 202ga6 in FIG. 243(b)).

When the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is equal to any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot defined in the per first random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)) It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, and if it matches any of the determination values corresponding to the small hits, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the first type selection 8 table 202gb will be described. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is five types (big bonus A to jackpot E), the second special symbol (special symbol 2). There are three types of jackpot types (jackpot F to jackpot H) that are set when the jackpot is won in the lottery, and the opening action scenario (action scenario) set during the jackpot game according to the jackpot type and , The game state set after the jackpot game is finished is different.

Specifically, when the symbol type that is won for the jackpot is the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter CS1 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Is set. The "big hit A" is a 10-round probability-change big hit, and the action A is set as the opening action scenario (action scenario). Note that the specific contents defined in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge described in FIG. 245.

Further, in the present embodiment, the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished is defined to be different according to the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won, and when the "bonus A" is won, the jackpot is won. The game state of the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or time saving state (low probability of special symbols) If the state, high probability state of the normal symbol), the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is a latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) For example, it is specified that the latent state is set after the jackpot game is over.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "big hit B" is set as the big hit type. This "big hit B" is the same big hit game as the above "big hit A" is executed (10 round probability variation big hit, big hit game in which operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario)), Different game states are set after the jackpot game is over.

Specifically, if you win the "big hit B", the gaming state at the time of big hit is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), or time saving state (low probability of special symbol) State, high probability state of the normal symbol), the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game is finished, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or If the latent probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol), it is specified that the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game.

In this way, by providing jackpot types having the same game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game and different game states set after the jackpot game, jackpots are given to the player executing the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent the game state set after the game from being grasped in advance (by the end of the jackpot game). In addition, by making it difficult to predict the game state set after the jackpot game is over depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the game state set after the jackpot game is being played. It is advisable to provide suggestive effect execution means for executing the above. With such a configuration, the player pays attention to the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, a suggestion effect setting for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game based on the game state set after the jackpot game is over and the game content of the jackpot game is provided. It is good to configure. Specifically, the game contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game are ranked in an order that is advantageous to the player, and each rank corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won this time is fused ( It is preferable that one effect mode is set from among a plurality of effect modes based on the value (information) obtained by summing. As a result, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clear), it becomes easier to predict the game state set after the jackpot game based on the effect mode of the suggested effect to be executed, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the suggestive effect for a long time during the big hit game, and it is possible to further enhance the effect.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "big hit C" is set as the big hit type. This "big hit C" is a big hit game of 10 rounds that is executed like the "big hit A" described above, but the contents of the operation scenario to be set are different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker are different. This is a big hit when the scenario of the operation B in which the game content for opening both 3650 is defined is set. Then, the low probability of the special symbol is set as a normal jackpot as the game state after the jackpot game is over.

Specifically, if you win "big hit C", the gaming state at the time of big hit winning is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is specified that the normal state is set after the jackpot game is over.

Next, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter c2 is "70 to 74", "big hit D" is set. In this "big hit D", the operation scenario of the operation A is set so that the game contents of the big hit game are the same as the above "big hit A". And, as with the above-mentioned "big hit C", it is a normal big hit that a low probability of a special symbol is set as a game state after the big hit game ends.

Specifically, when the "big hit D" is won, the gaming state at the time of big hit winning is the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is specified that the normal state is set after the jackpot game is over.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit E" is set. This "big hit E" is the same big hit game as the above "big hit D" is executed (10 round normal big hit, big hit game in which operation A is set as an open operation scenario (operation scenario)), Only the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished is different from "jackpot D".

Specifically, if you win the "big hit E", the gaming state at the time of big hit winning is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, Normal symbol high probability state), time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state), or latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state), that is, jackpot winning Regardless of the game state at the time, it is specified that the short-time state is set after the jackpot game is over.

On the other hand, if the symbol type won for the jackpot is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the determination value of the acquired first hit type counter CS1 is "0 to 29", "bonus F" is set as the jackpot type. It This "big hit F" is a big hit game having the same game content as the above "big hit A", that is, a 10-round certainty variation big hit, and the action A is set as the opening action scenario (action scenario). And the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), short-time state (special symbols , Low probability state, high probability state of normal symbol), or latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), that is, the probability change after the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning It states that the state is set.

When the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "big hit G" is set. This "big hit G" is a 2-round certainty variation big hit in which a 2-round big hit game is executed, and the operation scenario of the operation C in which the game content for opening the second attacker 3650 is defined is set. And, if the "big hit G" is won, the gaming state at the time of big hit winning is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, normal symbol) High probability state), or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), if there is a latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) after the jackpot game, It is specified that if the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is a latent probability state, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Finally, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "big hit H" is set. The "big hit H" is a 10-round normal big hit in which the operation scenario of the operation A is set such that the big hit game having the same game content as the "big hit D" is executed. And, if you win the "big hit H", the gaming state at the time of big hit is normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, normal symbol) High probability state), time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols), or latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols), that is, the game at the time of jackpot winning Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over.

Here, in the present embodiment, in a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (a state in which the reserved storage of special figure 2 is secured), a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state, latent state) It is configured such that the setting of can provide a game advantageous to the player, as compared with the case where the high probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 75%, and when the small hit is won, the second attacker 3650 (opening/closing door 3650f ) Is configured to be opened. Then, by the opening operation of the second attacker 3650 by the small hit game, a state in which the ball easily flows into the guide passage 3660 (see FIG. 243) through the through gate 67 is provided. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the normal symbol suitable for the time until the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 is set. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 640.

On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the variation time of the normal symbol (0.1 times shorter than the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640). Second), in detail, a sphere that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, and the game is executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (electric accessory 640a). The change time is set so short that the opening operation) is completed. Therefore, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to be difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640.

With such a configuration, depending on the game state set when the small hit is won, the number of reserve memories of the second special symbol can be changed during the small hit game. If you win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the jackpot game, regardless of the game state set when you win the jackpot, the second special It is possible to make it easy to obtain a reserved storage of symbols.

The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a big hit or a small hit. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines, for each scenario type, operation contents and whether or not special figure 2 hold acquisition during operation is possible.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. In the operation scenario 8 table 202ge, in the case of a big hit and the scenario type is A, a big hit game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds is defined. Therefore, when the scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not opened, so that it is impossible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the big hit game. Next, in the case of a jackpot and the scenario type is B, a jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for 1 to 2 rounds and the first attacker 650 is opened for 3 to 10 rounds is defined. There is. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is opened, so that the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be newly acquired during the jackpot game.

Next, when the scenario type is a jackpot and the scenario type is C, the jackpot game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened for one to two rounds is defined. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, since the second attacker 3650 is opened, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the big hit game. And in the case of a small hit, the second attacker is opened for one round. Therefore, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small hit game.

Here, the content of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245(b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245(b), when the scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, the first attacker 650 is set for 30 seconds as one round game, or It will be open until the number of prizes reaches 10. When one round game is finished, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is performed to open the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or It is set until the number of winnings reaches 3 balls. When one round game is finished, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the interval period after the second round game has passed, as the third round game, the first attacker 650 is released for 30 seconds or until the number of winnings reaches 10 balls. When the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game is executed to open the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times. Alternatively, it is set until the number of winnings reaches three balls. When one round game is finished, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the second round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

In the scenario set during the small hit game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small hit game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 once for 1.5 seconds. It is set until it is executed or the number of winnings reaches 3 balls. When one round game ends, 4 seconds is set as the ending period (ED period), and the jackpot game ends when the ending period elapses.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, a part of the big hit game (big hit B, big hit C) and a small hit game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened in the small hit game are configured to be executed. There is. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during the winning game, and the ball can be inserted into the second ball entrance 640. Also, as shown in FIG. 245(b), in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the big hit game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is larger than in the case of opening the second attacker 3650 in the small hit game. Since it is set to be large, in one hit game, the big hit game can enter more balls into the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

Further, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the ordinary symbol is set, even if the ball is passed through the through gate 67, the guide passage 3660 is provided. It is configured so that the ball flowing down can not enter the second entrance 640 (becomes difficult), and when the big hit game is executed, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the small hit game is When it is executed, the small hit game is configured to be executed in the game state at the time of winning the small hit. Therefore, the big hit game becomes a hit game in which it is easier to insert a ball into the second entrance 640 than the small hit game.

The second per random number table 202gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the value of the second per random number counter C4. With reference to the second winning random number 8 table 202gc, it is determined whether or not a winning is won.

Here, the contents of the second random number 8 table 202gc will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 8 table 202gc. The second winning random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which the normal symbol winning determination value is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0 to 237" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202gc1 in FIG. 246). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "0 to 238" is defined (see 202gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the second random number 8 table 202gc. However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal design hit.

Further, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "238, 239" is defined as the judgment value that is out of the normal symbol (see 202gc2 in FIG. 246). Further, in a high probability state of a normal symbol, "239" is defined as a judgment value that is out of the normal symbol.

The fluctuation pattern 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed and its type. Fluctuation patterns in which different fluctuation times are set are defined in correspondence with the result of the lottery and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 8 table 202gd will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 8 table 202gd, and FIG. 248(a) is defined by the normal/latent probability 8 table 202gd1 defined by the variation pattern 8 table 202gd. FIG. 248(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents described, and FIG. 248(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving/probability variation 8 table 202gd2 specified by the fluctuation pattern 8 table 202gd. Is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 248(a), the contents of the normal/potential confirmation eight table 202gd1 will be described. This normal/latent probability eight table 202gd1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state/latent probability state is set as a game state, and is a time saving/probability variation eight table 202gd2 (time saving state described later. , Or a variation pattern table referred to when the probability variation state is set), it is easier to set a variation time that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the second entrance 640 or the second attacker 3650. The variable time is defined as follows.

To be more specific, the contents defined in the normal/latent probability 8 table 202gd1 will be described. If the type of the special symbol is the special symbol 1 and the lottery result is out of alignment, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is used. Regardless, “out-of-line variation” (variation time 30 to 120 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern, and when the lottery result is a big hit, variation is obtained when the obtained variation type counter CS1 value is “0 to 99”. As a pattern, "normal variation per hit" (variation time of 30 seconds) is defined. In the case of "100 to 179", "per win variation" (variation time of 60 seconds) is defined. In the case of "180 to 198", "hit special variation" (variation time 120 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out of alignment, the out-of-bounds variation (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired. If the lottery result is a small hit, "small hit variation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the change pattern regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and if the lottery result is a win, it is acquired. Regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 that has been set, “hit fluctuation” (variation time of 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal/latent state, the variation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248(b), the contents defined in the time saving/probability variation eight table 202gd2 will be specifically described. When the type of the special symbol is the special diagram 1 and the lottery result is out of alignment, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, “outside middle variation” (variation time 30 to 60 milliseconds) is a variation pattern. If the lottery result is a jackpot and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 39”, the variation pattern is a “normal variation per hit” (variation time of 30 milliseconds). .. In the case of "40 to 119", "per win variation" (variation time 60 milliseconds) is specified. In the case of "120 to 198", "hit special variation" (variation time 120 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

When the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the lottery result is out, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is “outside short variation” (variation time 1 millisecond). Is defined and the lottery result is a small hit, the small hit short variation (variation time 1 ms) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the lottery result is a win. In this case, the "short hit variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern regardless of the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the probability variation state, the variation time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball. Number counter 203d, second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e, probability variation flag 203g, fluctuation time counter 203gc, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory area It has 203z. The configurations (flags, counters, areas) having the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-described embodiments have the same uses as those in the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

In addition, in the other memory area 203z of the present embodiment, there is a data area capable of storing the currently set game state, a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state, or a high probability of a normal symbol. The state and the low-probability state can be stored, and the condition until each state ends (transition to another state) and the current situation for the condition can be updated. The specific content is the same as the control processing for the probability variation flag, the probability variation counter, and the time saving counter in each of the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203ga differs from the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored. When data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203ga is an execution area. Is shifted (moved) to, and based on the respective values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is a counter that counts the holding balls based on winning in the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation time counter 203gc is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. A counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set in the fluctuation time counter 203gc (see S11011 in FIG. 252). Further, this fluctuation time counter 203q is decremented by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation process 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and whether the fluctuation time has elapsed based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc. Is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(a), the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment has a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223ga, a variation start flag 223fa, It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a variable time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and another memory area 223z. The configurations (flags, counters, areas) having the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-described embodiments have the same uses as those in the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

The second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts the reservation balls based on winning in the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is a flag for indicating that the effect during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238(a)) is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is over, and is continued even after the jackpot game is over. It is set to ON when it is determined to execute (extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 222gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command is the number of reserved balls. When it is determined that the command is 0, the command is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension effect is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239(a)).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation process 8 (S9001) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display. It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 8, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit or small hit is in progress (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether the big hit medium flag 203o or the small hit medium flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit or in the small hit (S10901: Yes), the present process is ended.

In the process of S10901, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit or a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902), When it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (the number N2 of fluctuation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) Is acquired (S10903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is larger than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203gb is decremented by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the performed second special symbol reserved ball counter 203gb is set (S10906). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203gb is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the second special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223ga.

After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S10911, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203ga is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S10913.

On the other hand, in the process of S10904, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (of the first special symbol The variable display pending count N1) based on the lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10909).

In the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), both the first special symbol and the second special symbol start a new fluctuation. Since it is in a state where it cannot be performed, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol holding ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S10910), and the reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process proceeds to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10907, or S10913 executed after the process of S10912, the special symbol variation start process 8 for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10913), and this process ends. The details of the special symbol variation start process 8 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc (S10914), and the updated fluctuation time counter. Based on the value of 203 gc, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become 0. The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stop symbol is preset by the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) described later with reference to FIG. 252. When this special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, the special symbol is selected based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit, if the special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2 And one of the jackpots A to H is determined.

After the processing of S10916 is finished, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is , It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S10918). If the lottery result this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10918: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S10919), the start of the jackpot for the special symbol is set (S10920), and the process proceeds to S10921. To do. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S10919, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit effect is started.

In the process of S10918, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S10918: No), the processes of S10919 and S10920 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S10921.

In the special symbol variation process 8 (see S9001 of FIG. 251) in the tenth embodiment, as in the above-described second embodiment, the technical idea for stopping and displaying the special symbol for a predetermined period, and the control content, It may be configured to be added. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result of the specific symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and the first special symbol holding sphere storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the 203a and the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203ga, a lottery for "a special symbol jackpot" or "a deviation of a special symbol" (whether a winning or failing judgment) is performed, and It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the 1 symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 8, first, the first random symbol counter C1, the first per type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding sphere storage area 203ga Each value of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S11002, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol (S11002: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 and the first for high probability Based on the hit random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11003). When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S11005.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probable state (the low probability state of the special symbol) (S11002: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 and Based on the first random number 8 table for low probability time (see FIG. 243(b)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S11004). When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S11005.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S11003 or S11004 determines whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S11005), and when it is determined that it is the jackpot of the special symbol (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S11001, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S11006).

In the process of S11006, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to H). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A to H) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S11007). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the fluctuation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Time).

On the other hand, in the process of S11005, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (including small hits) (S11005: No), the display mode at the time of off (small hits) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-range (small hit) symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, As the stop type to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81, a front/rear outreach, a reach other than the front/rear outreach, a complete outreach, or a small hit is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S11001 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", the complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", the reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation (small hit) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variable time of the third symbol until it stops at the symbol (small hit) symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S11007, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared. (Variation time) is determined.

When the processing of S11007 or S11009 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S11007 or S11009 is set (S11010). Next, the counter value corresponding to the variation time of this variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S11006 or S11008 is set (S11012). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the process of S11012 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 8.

In the special symbol variation start process 8 (see S10913 of FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S11005: Yes of FIG. 252), it is not a big hit (out, or Small hit) (S11005 of FIG. 252: No), the processing contents to be executed are configured to be different, but as used in any of the embodiments described above, it is determined that it is not a big hit. In this case, the control process is executed for the deviation, and the lottery result of this time is configured to determine whether it is a deviation or a small hit, and in the case of a deviation and a small hit. The processing contents executed by and may be different. The detailed content of the control process executed in this case is the same as that of any of the above-described embodiments, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 253, the starting winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 8 (S9002). This start winning process 8 (S9002) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. However, this is a process for executing the process of holding the values indicated by the various counters when there is a start winning.

When the start winning process 8 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S11101). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display holdings in the special symbol) is acquired ( S11102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S11103).

Then, whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process proceeds to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S11104). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S11105).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S11105, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) described above. The value is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process proceeds to S11107. In the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11107, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) (S11107). In this process as well, similar to the process of S11101, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning slot 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired ( (S11108), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding counter 203gb is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11109).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is When it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S11109: No), the process proceeds to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203gb (S11110). Then, the reserve ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserve ball counter 203gb changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203gb is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the second special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223ga.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S11111, the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated by the processing of S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing, It is stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 (S11112), and the process proceeds to S11113. In the process of S11112, similarly to the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S11113, the pre-reading processing for pre-reading the win/failure from the various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S11113), and the present processing ends. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S11113). In the pre-reading process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 in the present start winning process 8 (see FIG. 252). However, if a new incoming ball has not been detected (S11201) (S11201: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11201, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected (S11201: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S1202), and when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S11220: Yes), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S11202, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1202: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is the probability change state of the special symbol It is determined (S11203). In the processing of S11203, it is determined whether or not the state is the probable variation state, depending on the current game state and the look-ahead result of the hold ball held before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the hold ball, the current game state and the timing to start the variable display based on the detected ball entered this time match, so the current game state is a sudden change state. It is determined that In addition, when the big hit is included in the reservation ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of big hit. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot is suspended, the probability transition state is shifted to after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is suspended, the status is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. In consideration of these, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variable display based on the ball detected this time is in the probable state.

In the process of S11203, when it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the detected incoming ball is the probability change state of the special symbol (S11203: Yes), the type of the incoming ball opening that detected the incoming ball and the high probability Based on the first per-random number 8 table 202ga for use, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11204), and the process proceeds to S11206. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start time is a low probability state of the special symbol (S11203: No), the type of the entrance detecting the entrance and the first random number 8 table 202ga for low probability Based on, the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S11205), and the process proceeds to S11206.

In the process of S11206 executed after the process of S11204 or S11205, the prize information command is set based on the type of the entrance detecting the current entrance and the lottery result acquired in the process of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the prize information command in the prize information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the second ball entry. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the mouth 640.

In this normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S11301). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S11301: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S11305).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the processing of S11306, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the high-probability state based on the information included in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the high probability state (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S11307 and the second random number for high probability 8 Based on the table 202gc (see FIG. 246), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 238”, it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of “239”, it is a deviation of the ordinary symbol. (See FIG. 246).

In the process of S11308, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the high probability state (S11308: No), the process proceeds to S11310. In the process of S11310, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot game, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the second per-random number counter acquired in the process of S11307. Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 237”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “238,239”, the normal symbol is out. Is determined (see FIG. 246).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S11309 or S11310, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S11311), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S11311: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S11312). In the processing of S11312, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol (high probability state) (S11314), and if the time saving state of the normal symbol (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of is set to 0.1 seconds (S11315), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this process is performed. finish.

Further, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S11317). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S11315 or the process of S11316 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S11317, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S11317, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S11312, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the display is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or the process of S11318.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S11319). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11320), and in the time saving state (high probability state). If not (S11320: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to "0.9 seconds x 1" (S11321), and the process is performed at S523. Transition to. On the other hand, in the process of S11320, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving (during high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, and the opening. The number of times is set to "1 second x 1" (S11322), and the process proceeds to S11323.

In the process of S11323, the opening/closing control start of the opening time and the number of times of opening determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 is set (S11323), and this process is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S11321 or S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S11319: No), the processes of S11320 to S11323 are skipped, and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259, a control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment differs from the control process of the seventh embodiment described above in that the contents of the command determination process are changed. Since the other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that, for convenience of explanation, the same processing as that in each of the above-described embodiments may be assigned with different reference numerals, but the processing with the same name is used for the same purpose.

First, with reference to FIG. 256, the command determination processing 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 59) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. This is a process for doing.

In the command determination processing 8, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is read from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S12701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S12703), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S12701, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is not received (S12701: No), it is then determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S12704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706). The process ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12704, if it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S12707). .. If it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has been received (S12707: Yes), the process related to the number of reserved balls is executed (S12708), and this process ends. Details of the number of reserved balls related processing (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start prize) or when the special symbol is drawn. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or each time the special symbol is selected, the first special symbol holding number counter 223c and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the process of S08. The value of the symbol reserve sphere counter 223ga can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserve sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value of the second special symbol reserve sphere counter 203gb. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga are the first special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203d, and even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203gb, at the time of the detection of the starting winning or the lottery of the special symbol, the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second The value of the special symbol holding sphere counter 223ga can be corrected, and can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the second special symbol holding sphere counter 203gb.

In addition, when the process of S12708 is executed, the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, and the display holding ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 223ga Several commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S12707, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S12707: No), it is then determined whether the status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12709). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223fe is updated according to the received command (S12710). Accordingly, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12709, when it is determined that the status command is not received (S12709: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command is received (S12711). In the processing of S12711, when it is determined that the winning information command is received (S12711: Yes), the information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this processing is ended.

In the processing of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then a command (opening command, round number command, ending command for each win) related to a win (big hit, small hit) ) Is received (S12713). When it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S12713: Yes), the hit related process 8 for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S12714), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12713, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), the processing according to other commands is executed (S12715), and the present processing ends. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the reserved ball number related process (S12709) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the number of reserved balls related processing (S12709).

In the reserved sphere number related processing (S12709), first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command regarding the reserved sphere number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is received (S12801). When it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 (S12802). When it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information in the game state storage area 223fe is read (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the information in the read game state storage area 223fe is a big hit or a small hit (S12804). When it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is in progress (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805). When it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on (S12806) in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot. The jackpot extension effect is set (S12807), and the process proceeds to S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, when it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on (S12805: Yes), it is not necessary to set the effect of the jackpot extension, so the processes of S12806 to S12807 are skipped and S12808 of S12808 is skipped. Move to processing.

With such a configuration, if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is obtained during the winning game, the special figure 2 change (lottery) is executed after the jackpot game is finished, The jackpot extension effect can be set. That is, since the effect executed after the winning game is finished is set not based on the gaming state set after the winning game is finished, but based on the presence/absence of the reserved storage in the special figure 2, as in the eighth embodiment, Since it is possible to easily set the effect mode corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special figure 2 that can be executed only under the conditions, it is possible to execute the effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In S12808, a key display mode (display mode of acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process proceeds to S12811. On the other hand, in the processing of S12804, when it is determined that the current game state is not a big hit or a small hit (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809), and the process proceeds to S12810. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S12802, when it is determined that the special figure 2 related command received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12813), the decrease processing is executed (S12813), and the process proceeds to S12811.

Here, with reference to FIG. 258, a reduction time process (S12813) which is one process in the number of reserved balls related process (S12709) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the reduction process (S12813).

In the reduction process (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved number of balls counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223ga is 0 (S12902), it is the timing of the jackpot end, and therefore the extra round. A display effect command indicating the end of is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handed is set (S12904). Next, the right hit command is set to OFF (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12906), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12902, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), the key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907), This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. When any one of S12801, S12810, or S12813 ends, the process proceeds to S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether the special figure 1 related command is received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether the special figure 1 related command is received (S12811). When it is determined that the special figure 1-related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1-related command has not been received (S12811: No), the present process ends.

Next, the contents of the hit related process 8 (S12714) will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the content of the hit related process 8 (S12714). The hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a hit-related command (command for a big hit or a small hit) is received.

When the hit-related process 8 (S12714) is executed, it is first determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a jackpot-related command (S12151), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot-related command (S12151: Yes). , The corresponding display command is set (S12152), and this processing ends. The various display commands set in the processing of S12152 are set by the same processing as the processing executed when the jackpot-related command is received in the command determination processing executed in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S12151, when it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the big hit related command (S12151: No), then it is determined whether the hit related command received this time is the small hit start command. (S12107), if it is determined that the command is a small hit start command (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process 8 is executed (S12158), and the present process ends.

This small hitting start process 8 (S12158) is the same as the small hitting start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that the display command executed when the probability state is set and the display command executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are determined and set, Other than that, it is the same and detailed description is omitted.

In the processing of S12107, if it is determined that the hit related command received this time is not the small hit start command (S12107: No), then it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S12109), and the small hit end is completed. When it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, when it is determined that the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), then the small hit medium flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol holding ball It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154). That is, in the processing of S12154, the presence/absence of the pending storage of special figure 2 is determined at the timing when the small hit game is finished.

In the processing of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), the special figure 2 change is executed after the small hit game is finished, and thus this processing is continued. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S12154, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (0) (S12154: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. If it is determined to be set to ON (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12156), and this processing is ended.

As a result, if the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed after the small hit game, that is, if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be obtained during the small hit game, the big hit extension effect is executed after the small hit game is finished. You can prevent it. Although detailed description is omitted, in the hit related process 8, when the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), the end screen of the big hit extension effect (see FIG. 241(b)) is displayed at the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the jackpot extension effect is completed.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, during the big hit game, or during the small hit game executed in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, latent probability state), the execution of the second special symbol It is configured such that a ball can enter (is easy to enter) the second ball entrance 640 that serves as a trigger. As a result, the lottery for the second special symbol can be prevented from being executed unless the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed. Therefore, as in the above-described first embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is performed. (Variation) and lottery of the second special symbol (fluctuation), and without using a configuration to execute (in parallel) at the same time, only in the latent state based on the lottery of the second special symbol small hit game Can be frequently generated. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Further, according to the type of winning (big hit, small hit), it is possible to set a hit type that makes it easy for a ball to enter the second entrance 640 and a hit type that makes it difficult to enter. , When winning (big hit, small hit), not only the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the hit game, but also the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game The player may be interested in whether or not.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a ball enters the second entrance 640 depending on whether the winning is won in the lottery for the first special symbol and the winning is won in the lottery for the second special symbol. It is configured such that the ratio of the hit type that is easy to set is different. Specifically, it is easier to set the hit type in which the ball is easier to enter the second entrance 640 when the hit is won in the second special symbol than in the case where the first special symbol is won. I am configuring.

With such a configuration, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is shifted to the executable state, the lottery of the special figure 2 can be continued and easily executed. Even though the advantageous game mode advantageous for the player (the mode capable of executing the lottery of Toku-zu 2) is set, the advantageous game mode is immediately ended, and the player is made uncomfortable. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning the winning (big hit, small hit) than the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol, without winning the small hit, only the big hit (1/400 at low probability) is set, whereas in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big prize is won The probability of (low probability 1/400) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set to win (300/400) even for small wins. In this way, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is set to have a higher probability of winning the small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol, so that the lottery for the first special symbol is drawn. Random drawing of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win the winning (big hit, small hit) than.

Thereby, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, it is possible to win the winning (big hit, small hit) with a high probability, The winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is more likely to be executed in the second entrance 640 with a higher probability when the small hit is won than when the big hit is won. doing. Thereby, when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily execute the lottery of the second special symbol again after the winning game is over.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold) is configured to be able to store a plurality (4 pieces) (hold storage), and depending on the winning type that is won. Therefore, the opening operation pattern of the hit game is defined so that the number of pieces that can be held and stored during one hit game is different.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the game motivated to secure more reserved memory by one hit game. Here, in the eighth embodiment, the second opening/closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in an open state (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path in which a part of the balls spilled from the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entrance 640 when the ball is changed to the closed state (the state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). Is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 that is opened during the winning game to enter the second entrance port 640, during the winning game, It is possible to let the player pay attention to the movement of the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, inflow detection means for detecting that a sphere has flown into a flow path (guide passage 3660) in which the sphere can flow down when a specific condition is satisfied as in the above-described seventh embodiment, and a sphere from the flow path. Discharge detection means for detecting that the discharge has been performed, and a production mode setting means for setting a production mode based on the detection result of each detection means may be provided, or based on the detection result of each detection means. An operation restriction means for restricting the game operation may be provided.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. In the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be dynamically displayable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called, simultaneous). Fluctuation type). Further, in order to efficiently execute the determination of the special symbol, it is possible to set a game state (a high probability state of a normal symbol) in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and a high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, a time saving state). Has been configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times of special symbol determination (variation) (time saving number) reaches 100 times after the end of the big hit).

In the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are configured to be able to execute the determination (fluctuation) at the same time (in parallel), so the high probability state of the normal symbol is predetermined as described above. In order to prevent being set longer than the predetermined period, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts, refer to when determining the period to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol The time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) is configured to be updated (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the first embodiment, since it is configured to update the time saving information at the timing of starting the variation of each special symbol, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, the number of times the special symbol is determined (variation) Even if the number of times to save time is set based on this, it is possible to prevent the number of times to save time from being set to exceed the predetermined number of times to save time.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in the simultaneous variation type gaming machine, depending on the determination (variation) timing of each special symbol, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes short and the player feels uncomfortable. There was a problem.

Specifically, for example, as the determination (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final number of time reductions) is executed, the determination (variation) of the second special symbol, that is, When the special figure fluctuation of the 101st rotation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the special figure fluctuation of the 100th rotation is executed (immediately before the special figure fluctuation of the 101st rotation is executed). Although it does not make the player feel uncomfortable, if the special figure fluctuation of the 101st rotation is not executed in the state where the special figure fluctuation of the 100th rotation (the last time of the shortening time) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the special figure fluctuation of the 101st rotation is started after the special figure fluctuation of 100th rotation is finished, the time saving state ends at the timing when the special figure fluctuation of the 100th rotation is executed. There is a problem in that the player is uncomfortable with the state of the ordinary symbol during the change of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation number (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time saving end condition is satisfied. Timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (for example, the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation) that is first executed after the time saving end condition is satisfied. Is configured to be discriminable, and the time saving state is ended based on the timing which is executed first among the timings.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set the high-probability state of the normal symbol to be longer, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure variation at the 101st rotation is executed, it is possible to determine the timing at which the condition capable of executing the special figure variation at the 101st rotation is satisfied, and the 101st rotation is performed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is determined. As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the time saving state from being set within a range exceeding the predetermined number of times saving and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ending timing of the special figure variation that satisfies the time saving end condition and the timing when the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation where the time saving ending condition is established are satisfied first. Although it is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving is performed only based on the timing when the special figure change is executed after the special figure change that satisfies the time saving end condition. It may be configured to end the state.

With such a configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period until the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed after the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation, that is, the special figure at the 100th rotation. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, it is possible to continue the time saving state even during the idle period, so that the game state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbols) is more It can be set long.

In this case, when the game for passing the ball through the through gate 67 for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the ball fired by the game enters the ball for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is advisable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the mouth. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from starting only the variation of the normal symbol being performed without starting the variation of the special symbol.

Further, when the winning is won in the determination of the ordinary symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in which only the normal symbol determination (lottery) is executed from continuing for a long time.

In the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, when the winning symbol is won in the ordinary symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball enters the lower first ball inlet 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see FIG. 2), it is not an entrance for starting the variation of the special symbol as an entrance for making it easier for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls may be provided based on the fact that the balls have entered.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 260. The ninth embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a time saving end standby flag 203ha is added.

The time saving end standby flag 203ha is a flag for indicating a standby state for ending the time saving state, and is set to ON in the standby state for ending the time saving state. In the present ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time saving end timings) for ending the time saving state are set based on the number of changes in the special symbol (number of changes in special drawing), and which of the plurality of time saving end timings is set. When either one of the timings comes, the time saving state ends.

Then, when a plurality of time saving end timings are satisfied (standby state), the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) in the main controller 110, the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0. If it is determined (S604: Yes), it is set to ON (see S691).

Then, if the special symbol fluctuation stop process (the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or a new When performing the determination of special symbols (first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 of FIG. 261)), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 of FIG. 265)) is referred to, the time saving end standby When the flag 203ha is set to ON, the time saving end processing for ending the time saving state (see S492 of FIG. 262) is executed, and the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

With such a configuration, when the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time saving end timing arrives, it is possible to reliably respond to each timing. Can be made to perform the time saving termination processing. Further, when the time saving end processing (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving end processing from being repeatedly executed at a plurality of timings. can do.

<Regarding control processing of main controller in ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266. The control process of the main controller 110 in the present ninth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process with respect to the control process of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. Symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), game state update process (see FIG. 36) instead of the game state update process 9 (see FIG. 263), first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) instead of the first 1 special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 186), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process ( It differs in that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 192) is executed in place of (see FIG. 45), and the time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S495 and S496 are added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S401), whether the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on, that is, the current fluctuation start It is determined whether is the timing for ending the time saving (S495). When it is determined that it is the timing for ending the time saving (S495: Yes), the time ending processing is executed (S496), and the present processing is ended. Details of the time saving end process (S496) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S495, when it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is not on, that is, the fluctuation start this time is not the timing of the time saving end (S495: No), the process proceeds to S402.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether it is the timing of the time saving end before acquiring the special symbol lottery result. By thus configuring before obtaining the lottery result, it is possible to set the time saving as the gaming state until the end of the fluctuation which is the timing of the time saving end.

Next, the time saving end process (S496) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing details of the time saving end processing (S496). In the time saving end process (S496), a process for setting the game state after the time saving end is executed.

In the time saving end process (S496), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on (S11401). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating the latent probability state is set (S11402), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (S11403), and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the game state update processing 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing details of the game state update processing 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203f from the game state update processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment (( S604: Yes), and is different in that a process (S691) for setting the time saving end standby flag 203ha to ON is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S891 to S892 is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (S297), after stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device (S809), whether the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on, that is, the fluctuation of this time It is determined whether or not the stop timing is the time saving end timing (S891).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation count (for example, 100 times) is set as the time saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving end condition is set. Of the special figure variation (for example, the special figure variation at the 100th rotation) and the special figure variation (for example, the special figure variation at the 101st rotation) that is first executed after the time saving condition is satisfied. The start timing can be discriminated from each other, and the time saving state is ended based on the timing which is executed first among the timings.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set the high-probability state of the normal symbol to be longer, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is uncomfortable.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the timing at which the special figure variation at the 101st rotation is executed, it is possible to determine the timing at which the condition capable of executing the special figure variation at the 101st rotation is satisfied, and the 101st rotation is performed. It is configured so that the time saving state ends before the special symbol is determined. As a result, it is possible to surely prevent the time saving state from being set within a range exceeding the predetermined number of times saving and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ending timing of the special figure variation that satisfies the time saving end condition and the timing when the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation where the time saving ending condition is established are satisfied first. Although it is configured to end the time saving state based on the timing, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time saving is performed only based on the timing when the special figure change is executed after the special figure change that satisfies the time saving end condition. It may be configured to end the state.

With such a configuration, for example, when there is a vacant period until the special figure fluctuation at the 101st rotation is executed after the special figure fluctuation at the 100th rotation, that is, the special figure at the 100th rotation. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, it is possible to continue the time saving state even during the idle period, so that the game state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbols) is more It can be set long.

In this case, when the game for passing the ball through the through gate 67 for starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol is performed, the ball fired by the game enters the ball for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is advisable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the mouth. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from starting only the variation of the normal symbol being performed without starting the variation of the special symbol.

Further, when the winning is won in the determination of the ordinary symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in which only the normal symbol determination (lottery) is executed from continuing for a long time.

In the present embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, when the winning symbol is won in the ordinary symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened, and the ball enters the lower first ball inlet 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy (see FIG. 2), it is not an entrance for starting the variation of the special symbol as an entrance for making it easier for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a. Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls may be provided based on the fact that the balls have entered.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. Each of the above-described embodiments has two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and when the lottery for each special symbol results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small hit). , The variable winning device (eg, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is configured to execute a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game).

In this way, when the privilege game is executed according to the lottery of the special symbol, the privilege game is executed when the result of the lottery is the specific lottery result, so the result of the lottery is the specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, even if the lottery for the special symbol is executed multiple times, the lottery result may not be the specific lottery result, and the lottery for the special symbol No privilege can be given to the player who executes the above.

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is activated. Ball means (specific ball entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable winning device to operate only by the ball entering the specific ball entering means, the privilege is directly given to the game content (ball launch result) of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 267. The structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, except that the second ball entrance 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are provided. , The electric accessory 64a, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are deleted, and instead of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, a ball entrance 464 is provided, and a new specific ball entrance 4640 and its specific ball entrance The difference is that a specific accessory 4640a attached to the 4640 and a small attacker 4650 are provided. Other configurations are the same, and detailed description of the same configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the left side area (the area on the left side in front view of the variable display device unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 and the left side area thereof. The devices relating to the game are concentratedly arranged in the lower region (the region on the lower side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front) in which the balls fired at are flown down, and cause the player to shoot the balls to the left region. It is configured to play a left-handed game.

Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left side area, and a ball entrance 640, a specific ball entrance 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in this order from the top in the lower area. Has been. Here, the flow of the game when a left-handed game is played on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

Most of the balls shot by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the determination of the normal symbol (lottery) is executed based on the detection of the passage (detected by a detection switch (not shown)). In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol is won, a hit game is executed in which a specific character object 4640a described later is released.

Of the balls that have reached the lower region, the ball entrance 464 is arranged so that one out of every 20 balls enters the ball entrance 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the ball entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch (not shown)), a special symbol (first special symbol) is drawn based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for each incoming ball. Then, the balls that have not entered the ball entrance 464 flow down toward the specific ball entrance 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the ball entrance 464.

Here, the specific entrance port 4640 is a specific accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. 4640a is additionally provided, and the ease with which a ball can enter changes depending on the variable state of the specific accessory 4640a. This specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by the variable control means (normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) executed by the main controller 110) so that the state varies according to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, when the winning is won in the lottery of the normal symbol executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67, the ball is easily opened in the specific entrance 4640. It is variably controlled.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, a state in which the specific accessory 4640a is easily opened as a game state (normal probability high probability state) and the normal symbol high probability state becomes open. Difficult state (low probability state of the normal symbol) is configured to be settable, but even if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball enters the specific entrance 4640. Is configured to get.

Returning to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. When the specific accessory 4640a is in the open state at the timing when the ball that has not entered the entrance port 464 reaches the specified entrance port 4640, the ball enters the specified entrance port 4640 and is specified. When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, the accessory 4640a passes over the closed specific accessory 4640a and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

When a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, a lottery for a special symbol (first special symbol) is executed and one prize ball is awarded for one prize. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 can be reserved.

In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13, and a ball flowing down the game area is guided by the plurality of nails to a position where various devices in the lower area are arranged. Run down to. In addition, in the lower region, a device (eg, the second variable winning device 650) provided below the number of balls guided toward the device (eg, the ball entrance 464) provided on the upper side. ) Is configured to be more of the number of spheres that are guided towards.

Specifically, of the balls shot by the left-handed game, one out of about four balls is guided to a position where it can enter the ball entrance 464 (a position above the ball entrance 464), and five of them are guided. In addition, about 1 ball (that is, about 1 ball out of 20 balls shot by the left-handed game) is configured to enter the ball entrance 464.

Then, to the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650, one ball is guided to about two balls out of the balls shot by the left-handed game. Despite being guided to a position where the ball can enter the specific entrance 4640 (a position above the entrance 464), the specific entrance 4640 flowed down without entering the entrance 464. Spheres and spheres that could not be guided to the entrance port 464 when flowing down the left side region are included. Finally, to the second variable winning device 650, almost all of the spheres fired by the left-handed game are guided.

Also, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is also possible to perform a right-handed game, and a ball fired by a right-handed game is more than a ball fired by a left-handed game. , It is difficult to be guided to the ball entrance 464, the specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 is guided at an equal rate.

In this way, by varying the ease of entering the ball into each entrance depending on the position at which the player shoots the ball, the player can play the game while competing for skill. It is possible to prevent the user from getting tired early.

It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment, for example, it is easier to guide the ball to the small attacker 4650 in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game. It may be configured to. This allows the player to perform a game in which the game method (left-handed or right-handed) can be changed according to the game result (whether or not a ball has entered the specific ball inlet 4640). Can be made to play games.

Returning to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. The small attacker 4650 is provided with a small opening/closing door 4650a that is a variable unit that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. Therefore, the ease with which a ball can enter is configured to differ depending on the variable state of the small opening/closing door 4650a. The small opening/closing door 4650a has a specific variable control means (a specific ball entry process executed by the main controller 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278) so that the state changes when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. )). Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, the value of the counter (first hit type counter C2) that is randomly updated and the set game. The opening pattern of the small opening/closing door 4650a is made different based on the state.

Specifically, the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is configured to be different. Thereby, for example, in a gaming state (for example, normal state) in which a period (opening standby time) from the ball entering the specific ball inlet 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a is opened is set to a unit time. The number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per hit can be suppressed, and the period from when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 to when the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is easy to be set in a gaming state (for example, In the latent state, the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

In the tenth embodiment, when a ball wins the small attacker 4650, 10 prize balls are provided for each winning ball, and the above-described ball entrance 464 and the specific winning ball are provided. More prize balls than the ball opening 4640 are provided. Therefore, by changing the winning number of balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time according to the game state, for example, the number of balls shot to the player by winning the balls to the small attacker 4650 is larger than the number of shot balls. It is possible to give the number of balls as a prize ball.

With such a configuration, in addition to the game based on the lottery of the special symbol, the player can perform the game based on the ball entering the specific ball entering means (specific ball entrance 4640). The interest of the game can be improved.

Finally, the balls that have not won in the small attacker 4650 flow down toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. This second variable winning device 650 is a variable means that operates when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol (it operates during the jackpot game), as in the first embodiment described above. Since the detailed contents are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 flow into the outlet 66 formed at the lowermost position of the game area of the game board 13 and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball can be fired to the right side area of the game area (right hitting game is possible), but is not limited to this, for example, a game in which the ball is fired to the right handle area of the game area. The right-side area may be completely eliminated so that the (right-handed game) cannot be executed. Further, in the tenth embodiment, all the games (from the game in the normal state) can be executed only by the left-handed game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the through gate 67 or the specific entrance 4640 may be provided in the right side region, and the game content may be changed according to the game state.

<Regarding effect contents in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, a characteristic effect executed in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the period (fixed period) from when the special symbol for indicating that the jackpot is won is stopped until the jackpot game is executed is the jackpot type. It is prescribed to be different according to.

Then, in the tenth embodiment, a game state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to be opened is set during the fixed period. In other words, a game (so-called small hit RUSH) for continuously opening the small attacker 4650 is configured to be executable by using the fixed period of the special symbol for indicating that the big hit has been won.

With such a configuration, the small hit RUSH can be executed before the big hit game is executed. The technical idea of executing the small hit RUSH before the big hit game is executed is the same as that of the second embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof and possible derivations based on the present technical idea The plan and another plan are the same as those in the above-described second embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment, the fixed period of the same special symbol as the second embodiment described above is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small determination is performed in each of the above embodiments. The period used to frequently execute the winning game may be used. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, a period (opening period) from when the big hit game is started to when the round game is started may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. It may be configured such that a latent probability state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a game state, and a small hit RUSH may be configured to be executed during the latent state.

Returning to FIG. 268, the description will be continued. 268 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268 (b) is executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol. It is the figure which showed an example of the produced screen.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), when the special symbol jackpot is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special map 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and "left hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, the left-handed game is executed in all the game states, so that "left-handed" is always displayed in the guide display area Dm3. In the case where the same game method (left hitting) is always executed as in the present embodiment, the player does not need to change the game method, and thus the guide display area Dm3 is displayed. It may be configured not to.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed and a comment “Aim for RUSH” is displayed, which indicates to the player that the game period in which the small attacker 4650 is frequently opened starts. Then, in the sub display area Ds, a comment of "chance zone entry" indicating that a game state advantageous to the player is set is displayed.

In the tenth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when a special symbol big hit is won in a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a high probability state of an ordinary symbol), the special jackpot that is won The latent state (high-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set during the symbol determination period. Then, when the gaming state is set to the latent probability state, an operation pattern is set in which the period from the ball entering the specific ball entrance 4640 to the opening of the first attacker 4650 (opening waiting time) is short. Since it is configured to be easy, a game (RUSH game) in which the player can increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time (RUSH game) ends the special symbol fixing period. To be executed.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the final period of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the type of jackpot that is won. Therefore, since it is possible to lengthen the period in which the RUSH game can be executed, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot type that the special symbol determination period is long, which is a jackpot advantageous to the player.

Here, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is whether the game content during the big hit game is advantageous to the player ( It is configured to set according to whether the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the jackpot game or the game state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player. However, for example, when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set with the same odd number (for example, “777”), which is not advantageous to the player (disadvantage). When winning the jackpot, the stop display mode of the third symbol is configured to be set with the same even number (for example, "222").

On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, as the stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the above-mentioned game content during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (can be given to the player during the jackpot game) In addition to whether or not the privilege (number of prize balls) or the gaming state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, whether or not the length of the symbol fixing period is advantageous to the player It is configured to be set accordingly.

With such a configuration, by grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol, the RUSH game executed before the jackpot game, the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game, and the three game contents You can play while predicting. In this case, for example, a period in which the RUSH game is executed (symbol fixing period), a game content of the jackpot game, and a game state set after the jackpot game are all advantageous to the player. It is advisable to provide a stop display mode (for example, "VVV") of the third symbol which is set only in the. This allows the player to play the game while giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be variable at every predetermined timing. For example, when the special symbol is stopped changing, it indicates that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Of the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, "222") indicating that the jackpot is disadvantageous to the player is set, and thereafter, "777", during the jackpot game during the symbol fixing period (during RUSH game) "VVV", may be configured to change the stop display mode of the third symbol so as to gradually indicate that the jackpot that is advantageous to the player has been won.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting the stop display mode of the third symbol to be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set by compounding the sizes of a plurality of benefits given to the player based on the jackpot win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop display mode of each benefit is set. The sizes may be displayed in different modes.

For example, the type of the stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, and the size of the third symbol is changed and set according to the game content during the jackpot game. However, the color of the third symbol may be variably set according to the length of the symbol fixing period. This allows the player to be informed in detail of the contents of the game to be executed in the future.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, if the latent state is set as the game state during the symbol fixing period, an efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol fixing period. In the case, that is, when the gaming state is the normal state or when the jackpot is won in the time saving state, the inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode based on the length of the symbol settlement period as the stop display mode of the third symbol, the stop display mode of the third symbol that is set based on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is variable. It is better to configure so as to allow. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents to be executed in the future in a more understandable manner.

After the display in FIG. 268(a) is displayed, when the symbol determination period is entered, the display screen shown in FIG. 268(b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268(b), while the RUSH game is being executed, "Maintenance zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the symbol fixing period is displayed. "Remaining time 30 seconds" is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured such that the number of seconds displayed is updated according to the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (symbol fixing period). Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Aim at a small attacker" for displaying the game contents in the chance zone (during the symbol determination period) is displayed.

The number of seconds displayed in this remaining period display mode may be set so as to indicate all of the remaining remaining periods when entering the chance zone, or a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol settlement period. May be set so that the new number of seconds is added to the number of seconds in the remaining period display mode displayed in accordance with the passage of time. Further, it is set to indicate a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol determination period, and after the set period elapses, the remaining period display mode is set to "? sec", and the remaining period is the player. You may not want to know.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set so as to show the remaining period of the symbol fixed period in seconds, but it is possible to make the player understand that the remaining period is decreasing. As long as it is possible, it may be configured to suggest the remaining period by using animation until the character 811 is caught by the enemy, or by using the period until the container containing the liquid becomes empty. It may be configured to indicate the remaining period. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period by using the animation showing the process of the story instead of the number of seconds.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. The tenth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different. Other electrical configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the out-of-range type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the above-described second embodiment. , The second hit random number 10 table 202ia is provided instead of the second hit random number table 202c, and the big hit type selection 10 table 202ib is provided instead of the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, and a specific incoming ball movement pattern table 202ic is newly added. Are different.

The second hit random number 10 table 202ia is a second hit determined to be a hit in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, with respect to the above-mentioned second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C). The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and other than that is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia will be described with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in this second random number 10 table 202ia, in the low probability state of the normal symbol as the game state (during the normal state, during the latent state), there are 231 random number values for the regular symbol. The range is "0 to 230". Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number values to be won is 231. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “231/233”.

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (probably changed state, during the time saving state), there are 232 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number values to be won is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “232/233”. In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the random number that hits the normal symbol has a high probability (231/233) with respect to the low probability state of the normal symbol.

With this configuration, even in the gaming state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state, latent probability state), the gaming state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (probability change state, time saving) Even in the (state), it is possible to easily win the prize in the lottery for the ordinary symbols. Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to have a slightly higher probability of winning per hit than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the high probability of the ordinary symbol is higher than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. It is configured so that the state is more advantageous. Further, the opening pattern of the specific character object 4640a executed in the winning game executed when the winning is won, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol The winning pattern is set so that the ball can easily enter the specific entrance 4640, so the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. There is. Incidentally, the opening pattern of the specific entrance 4640 executed in the normal symbol hit game, not the state of the normal symbol (high-probability state, low-probability state) when winning by a lottery of the normal symbol, not the winning game It may be configured to set according to the state of the normal symbol at the time of executing (high probability state, low probability state).

The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and like the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above, A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of one hit type counter C2.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. The same elements as those defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the above-described second embodiment (for example, the time saving counter 203f and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad) are assigned the same reference numerals. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the time saving counter 203f is set for each jackpot type. Value, the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value set in the definite time counter 203ad are defined.

Specifically, in the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) of the jackpot A in which a round game of 15 rounds is executed, regardless of the game state at the time of being selected (when winning the jackpot), the time saving counter 203f The value "10000" is set to be set, and the probability variation flag 203g is set to be turned on. That is, when the big hit A (big hit A1 to A3) is selected as the big hit type, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set until the next big hit is won. Stipulates. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, it is configured to set "10000" as the value of the time saving counter 203f, but it is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a flag that is turned on until the next jackpot is won may be used.

Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the jackpot A1 is set to "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) "0 to 19," the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23," and the jackpot A3 is defined in "24." That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackets A1 to A3) is executed at 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20/ 25) is a big hit A1, 16% (4/25) is a big hit A2, and 4% (1/25) is a big hit A3.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the jackpot game (15 round jackpot game) that is most advantageous for the player is won, the period for stopping and displaying the lottery result (the symbol) If a short symbol decision period is selected as the (decision period), the period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed becomes short. Therefore, for the special symbol lottery, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to whether or not the jackpot is won, but also to the length of the symbol fixing period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, a configuration in which the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol fixed period may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol determination periods with respect to a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a game property which is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned big hits A1 to A3, big hits B1 to B3, big hits C1 to C3, and big hits D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

Specifically, when the jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the game content of the jackpot game (five round game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A is set (when the jackpot is won) When the game state of the (time) is a normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol), the value of "10000" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "10" is set in the case of the time saving state, the probability variation state. The probability change flag 203g is set to be turned on.

In other words, when the big hit B is won, the big hit game, which is more disadvantageous than the big hit A, is executed, but when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the game state, the player is given after the big hit game ends. It is stipulated to provide a state in which an advantageous game state can be set (a high-probability state of a special symbol until the next jackpot, a game state in which the high-probability state of a normal symbol ends in 10 special figure fluctuations) There is. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are jackpots in which the jackpot A is more advantageous as the jackpot game contents, but the jackpot B can be more advantageous as the game state set after the jackpot.

Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the big hit B1 is set to "30 seconds", the big hit B2 is set to "90 seconds", and the big hit B3 is set to "120 seconds". When the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "25 to 29", the jackpot B1 is defined, "30 to 44", the jackpot B2 is defined, and "45 to 49" is the jackpot B3. There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot B (bonus B1 to B3) is executed at 25% of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 20% (5/ 25) is a big hit B1, 60% (15/25) is a big hit B2, and 20% (5/25) is a big hit B3. Here, the symbol settlement period that can be set in the case of the jackpot A and the symbol settlement period that can be set in the case of the jackpot B will be explained. The maximum value of the symbol settlement period in the jackpot A is larger than that in the jackpot B. It is stipulated to be long, but it is stipulated that the big hit B is longer than the big hit A in terms of the average value of the symbol fixing period set.

In this way, the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is large, but the average value is a small jackpot type (high risk high return), and the maximum value of the symbol determination period that can be set is small, but the average value is a large jackpot type. (Low risk low return), and by configuring to set the symbol fixing period based on the selected jackpot type, rather than setting the symbol fixing period completely randomly, the symbol fixing period set On the other hand, it is possible to make the player think that there is some kind of law. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of predicting a game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the tendency of the symbol determination period that can be set according to the big classification of the big hit type (big hit A to big hit C) is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit of each big hit type ( The jackpot A to jackpot C) may be provided with a high risk high return symbol fixed period selection group and a low risk low return symbol fixed period selection group. Further, although the average value (expected value) of the symbol fixing period that can be set is the same, from the plurality of symbol fixing period selection groups in which the maximum value and the minimum value of the symbol fixing period that can be set are different, The player may be configured to select a desired symbol finalization period selection group, and the symbol finalization period may be set using the symbol finalization period selection group selected by the player.

Returning to FIG. 271, the description will be continued. As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot B3) in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game is finished, the so-called probability variation jackpot is 50% (50/100) of the whole. The remaining 50% is selected as a jackpot type in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to off after the jackpot game is over, so-called normal jackpot.

Specifically, in the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the game content of the jackpot game (15 round game) that is the same as the jackpot A described above is set, when the jackpot is selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless of the game state, it is specified that the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "50", and the probability variation flag 203g is set to off.

In other words, when the big hit C is won, the big hit game which is advantageous to the player is executed similarly to the big hit A, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the big hit game, and the time saving state is 50 times. Is specified to be set. Therefore, the jackpot C is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B described above, but a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and jackpot B described above as the game state set after the jackpot is finished. It is a type.

Further, as a symbol determination period of the special symbol, the jackpot C1 is set to be "5 seconds", the jackpot C2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot C3 is set to "150 seconds". When the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "50 to 54", the jackpot C1 is defined, "55 to 64" is defined as the jackpot C2, and "65 to 74" is defined as the jackpot C3. There is.

That is, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot C (jackets C1 to C3) is executed at 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 20% (5/ 25) is a jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is a jackpot C3. Here, the jackpot C is the same as the jackpot A described above, the type of the symbol determination period that can be set (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds) is the same, it is defined so that the selection ratio is different, as described above. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol settlement period that can be set is higher than the jackpot A. As a result, the jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A in the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, but the jackpot regarding the symbol determination time when the RUSH game is executed It is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

Finally, in the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) in which the game content of the jackpot game (5 round game) same as the above jackpot B is set, the gaming state when selected (when the jackpot is won) Regardless of this, the time saving counter 203f is set to be set to a value of "50", and the probability variation flag 203g is set to be turned off.

That is, when the jackpot D is won, a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed as in the jackpot B, and after the jackpot game is finished, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is set as in the jackpot C. Has been done. Therefore, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the jackpot types described above.

Further, as a symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the big hit D1 is set to "30 seconds", the big hit D2 is set to "90 seconds", and the big hit D3 is set to "120 seconds". When the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is "75 to 84", the jackpot D1 is defined, "85 to 94", the jackpot D2 is defined, and "95 to 99" is the jackpot D3. There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot D (jackets D1 to D3) is executed at 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and 40% (10/ 25) is a jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) is a jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) is a jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is the same as the jackpot B described above, the type of the symbol determination period that can be set (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds) is the same, but is defined so that the selection ratio is different, as described above. The average value (expected value) of the symbol settlement period that can be set is specified to be lower than the jackpot B.

In this way, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in any of the jackpot game contents, the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, and the symbol determination time when the RUSH game is executed.

The specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic is a data table that defines the contents of the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 that is executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650 is opened. Time until opening (opening standby time), the opening operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the game state at the time when the ball enters.

Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents defined in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic will be described. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the specific ball entering movement pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined as the same operation content regardless of the game state, and the game state and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are set. It is stipulated that the open waiting time differs depending on the situation.

Specifically, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is set to an opening operation in which the opening/closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once, and whether the opening time reaches 1.5 seconds. It continues until the number of winning balls reaches 10. Then, the ending period in which the opening operation is completed and the opening/closing door 4650a is closed is defined to be set for 0.5 seconds.

Next, the gaming state is the normal state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", the "standby 1" with the opening waiting time of 20 seconds is defined, and is in the range of "90 to 98". , "Normal 2" with an opening standby time of 2 seconds is defined, and "normal 3" with an opening standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a value of "99". Further, if the gaming state is a time saving state or a probability changing state, and the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", "hour saving 1" with an opening waiting time of 10 seconds is defined, and "40 to 89". In the range of “”, “hour saving 2” with opening waiting time of 5 seconds is defined, and in the values of “90 to 99”, “hour saving 3” with opening waiting time of 2 seconds is specified. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the latent probability state, the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", and the "latent probability 1" with the release waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined, and "90 to 97". "Latent probability 2" with a release waiting time of 0.2 seconds is defined in the range "."

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the open standby time is greatly different depending on the game state, and when the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is in the small attacker 4650. Even if a player enters a ball, the player's possession ball does not increase. On the other hand, when the latent state is set as the game state, the small attacker 4650 is frequently opened, so the player's possession You can increase the sphere.

Next, with reference to FIG. 273, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 95) in the second special symbol execution area 203b, the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i, and the small hit. Flag 203k, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, general figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac, special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae Is deleted, and the probability variation flag 203g, the specific incoming ball flag 203ia, and the specific incoming ball invalid flag 203ib are added. Since the other elements are the same as those of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the probability variation flag 203g has the same content as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific ball entry flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that a ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640. It is a thing. The specific ball entry flag 203ia is set in the specific ball entry port 4640 in the specific ball entry process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110. When it is determined that it has been performed (S11501: Yes in FIG. 278), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 of FIG. 276), it is determined whether it is set to ON (see S496 of FIG. 276), and when it is determined to be ON (of FIG. 276). (S496: Yes), a process for forcibly removing the lottery result of the first special symbol executed this time is executed (see S412 in FIG. 276). Next, it is set to OFF when the specific ball entry motion is completed.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the small attacker 4650 is configured to be opened by the ball entering the specific entrance port 4640, and the specific entrance for opening the small attacker 4650. When the operation scenario is set, a process for forcibly dismissing is executed so that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit. As a result, since it is not possible to win the big hit of the first special symbol during the period when the small attacker 4650 is opened, it is possible to prevent the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 from being duplicated. .. Further, in order to make the variable ball entering means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning a prize device 650), which is normally in a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter (closed state), to easily enter the ball (open state) It is possible to prevent the above control from being executed simultaneously (overlapping).

The specific entry invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific entry invalidation period) in which the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when the ball enters the specific entry port 4640, It is set to ON when the specific entry invalid period is set.

This specific entry invalid flag 203ib is, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (see S296 of FIG. 277), when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801 of FIG. 277: Yes). ) Is set to ON (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entry process (S196 of FIG. 278), the setting status is determined (S11502 of FIG. 278), and when it is determined that the specific ball invalid flag 203ib is set to ON (S11502 of FIG. 278: Yes), and the process of setting the specific ball-in-motion operation scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 based on the fact that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640 during the period when the jackpot game is being executed.

<Regarding control processing in the tenth embodiment>
Here, the control processing in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific entrance 4640 is added to the above-described second embodiment. The difference is that the control process relating to the lottery (determination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and the control process executed when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 is added. In addition, the control processing is different due to the difference in the control processing described above.

Specifically, in place of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) for the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) is a special symbol variation process. 2 (S154 of FIG. 97) instead of the special symbol variation process 10 (see S195 of FIG. 275), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (Refer to S395 of FIG. 276), in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99), the point to execute the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (see S296 of FIG. 277), specific input The difference is that sphere processing (S196 in FIG. 278) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the contents described above, the specific contents of the control processing (for example, the processing contents relating to the second special symbol variation) may be changed corresponding to the configuration of the tenth embodiment, Other than the points described above, the difference is that the corresponding processing is simply deleted and can be easily conceived by those skilled in the art, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of the timer interrupt processing 10 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing details of the timer interrupt processing 10. In the tenth embodiment, with respect to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment, a point of executing a subroutine of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) instead of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). The difference is that the subroutine of the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, similarly to the above-described timer interrupt process, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. This special symbol variation process 10 (S195), with respect to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) described above, the point that the variation process regarding the second special symbol is deleted, and a new special symbol variation can be executed. The difference is that the processing content for determining whether or not it is possible is changed. The detailed content of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG. 275.

Returning to FIG. 274, the description will be continued. When the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is finished in the timer interruption process 10, next, the same processes of S105 to S108 as the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) described above are executed, and then the specific entrance After the processing (S196) is executed, the other processing (S109) is executed and the present processing is terminated.

Here, the specific ball entrance process (S196) is a process executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 (see FIG. 267), and is a process for entering a ball into the specific ball entrance 4640. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not the small attacker 4650 is opened, or whether or not the current incoming ball is effectively handled, and a process for performing setting based on the determination result is performed. Specifically, the details of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG. 278.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the control content of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When this special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a big hit or a specific entry (S295). In the processing of S295, when it is determined that the big hit medium flag 203o is set to ON, it is determined that the big hit is currently being made, and when it is determined that the specific incoming flag 203ia is set to ON. It is determined that the current is a specific entry.

In the processing of S295, when it is determined that the current game state is the jackpot or the specific incoming ball (S295: Yes), the special figure variation processing 2 of the above-described second embodiment (see S154 of FIG. 97). The same processing of S202 and S203 is executed, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S295, when it is determined that the current game state is not the big hit or the specific ball is entering (S295: No), the special figure variation processing 2 of the above-described second embodiment (S154 of FIG. 97). The same processing of S204, S205, S206, and S251 is executed.

Then, in the processing of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is not set to ON (is set to OFF), the first special symbol variation start processing 10 (S297) is executed. , This process ends. This first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol variation start process (S208 of FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. However, instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 of FIG. 34), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 of FIG. 276) is different. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is otherwise the same, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S206, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the process of S251, the special figure 1 symbol in-fixing flag 203ab is set to ON. When it is determined that it is (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, and this process is ended.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be described with reference to FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 10 (S395). In this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 of the above-described second embodiment (see S356 of FIG. 98), the current high probability state of the special symbol When determining whether or not the probability variation counter 203aa is referred to instead of the probability variation counter 203aa, and whether or not to execute the lottery (big hit determination) of the first special symbol this time, the special figure 2 This is different from the jackpot flag 203i in that a specific incoming ball flag 203ia is referred to. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be given later.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same S401 process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above is performed. After that, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S495). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in the process of S495, the current high probability state of the special symbol, so the current lottery result based on the first random number table 202a for high probability time Is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON in the process of S495, the current time is the low probability state of the special symbol, so the current time is based on the first random number table 202a for low probability time. The lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the above-described processing of S403 or S404 is finished, it is determined whether or not the specific incoming flag 203ia is set to ON (S496), and when it is determined to be set to ON (S496: Yes), That is, when the ball enters the specific entrance 4640 and it is determined that the specific entrance operation is being executed, the processing (S407 to S410) based on the determination of the special symbol being executed (big hit determination) is skipped. Then, after performing the same processing of S412 as the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) of the above-described second embodiment, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S496, when it is determined that the specific incoming flag 203ia is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above. The same processing of S406 to S410 as the jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296) will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296). This first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 of the second embodiment described above (see S257 in FIG. 99), delete the update process for the probability variation counter 203aa, A point that a control for setting a state command according to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation flag 203g is added, and a part of the processing executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is turned on is changed. The difference is that

Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 10 (S296) is executed, first, the same S851 as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above. ~ The process of S854 is executed. Further, in the process of S853, even when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation stop of the above-described second embodiment The same fixed-time processing (S860) as the processing 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) is executed.

When the processing of S854 is finished, next, a status command is set according to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g (S891), and then it is shown that the fixed period of the first special symbol has ended. The special figure 1 fixed period end command for setting is set (S858). After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801), and when it is determined to be set to ON (S801: Yes), the specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S892), a specific incoming ball invalid command for indicating that the specific incoming ball invalid flag 203ib is set to ON is set (S893). The command set here is the same as the command set in other control processing of the main control apparatus 110, and is output by the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing of the main control apparatus 110 (see FIG. 52). It is output to 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the specific entrance invalid command to determine a period during which the specific entrance operation is not executed even if the specific entrance opening 4640 has a ball, and the third result is determined based on the determination result. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

When the process of S893 is finished, then the same processes of S805 and S807 as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the above-described second embodiment are executed and this process is finished. In the present embodiment, a process (S894) for setting the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g to OFF is provided between the process of S805 and the process of S807. Since the target of the process executed for the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 of FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is only changed to the probability variation flag 203g, the details thereof Description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the content of the specific ball entry process (S196) will be described. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific ball entry process (S196). The specific ball entrance process (S196) is executed by the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) that is repeatedly executed by the main controller 110 every 2 milliseconds, and the specific ball entrance 4640 is executed. Various processes are executed when it is determined that the ball has entered.

Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a ball winning (ball entry) to the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, the determination is performed by referring to the detection result of the detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the ball has entered the specific ball entrance 4640. In the processing of S11501, when it is determined that there is no winning (ball entry) of a ball into the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11501, if it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the specific entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific entrance invalid flag 203ib is set to ON. (S11502), when it is determined that the ball is set to ON (S11502: No), that is, in a period in which the specific entry operation based on the winning (entering) of the ball to the specific entry port 4640 is not executed at present. If there is, this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S11502, if it is determined that the specific-ball-incoming flag 203ib is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S11502: No), then based on the specific-ball-in action pattern table 202ic. Then, the specific ball entry pattern of this time is determined (S11503).

Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific ball entry operation pattern table 202ic has a plurality of specific ball entry patterns (specific ball entry patterns) corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 and the current game state. The operation scenario pattern) is defined, and in the processing of S11503, the current game state is read from the game state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set. By acquiring it, the specific ball entry pattern for this time is determined.

When the process of S11503 is finished, then, a specific ball entering operation scenario corresponding to the determined specific ball entering pattern is set (S11504), and the specific ball in-progress flag 203ia is set to ON (S11505). Then, the specific entry command for indicating that the specific entry operation scenario is set is set (S11506), and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the specific ball entrance 4640 for performing the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 when the ball enters the ball is provided to the player. It is possible to make it easier for the user to pay attention to the flow situation of the.

In addition, the period (waiting period) from the ball entering the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is opened becomes the game state set at the time when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640. Since it is configured to be different according to the game state, it is possible to set a state in which the small attacker 4650 is easily opened and a state in which it is difficult to open the small attacker 4650. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, similarly to the above-described second embodiment, during the period when the third symbol showing that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed (the symbol fixing period), the game is played. It is configured so that an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to a person is set, and when a ball enters the specific entrance 4640 in the state where this advantageous game state is set, another It is configured such that the opening operation is set to have a shorter period (waiting period) from the ball entering the specific ball entrance 4640 to the opening of the small attacker 4650 than the state in which the game state is set. There is.

Thereby, the jackpot of the special symbol, the period from the symbol (special symbol, the third symbol) for displaying the result of the lottery is displayed until the jackpot game is started, that is, the jackpot to the player It is possible to frequently execute a special game in which the small attacker 4650 can be opened in the period from the notification of the winning to the time when the big hit game is actually started.

In the tenth embodiment, the game state in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to open during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped (symbol confirmation period) (latent probability) Although the state) is set, a game state (latent state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easily opened may be set at timings other than this, for example, the above-mentioned first Like the first embodiment, it may be set during the variable display of the special symbol for indicating that the big hit has been won, and like the sixth embodiment described above, the round game is started after the big hit game is started. You may set it to the period until it is performed (opening period of the jackpot game). Furthermore, it may be set only in any of the above-mentioned periods, or may be set in combination with a plurality of periods.

Further, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, it may be configured to frequently execute the special game capable of opening the small attacker 4650 before notifying the player that the lottery result of this time is a big hit. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player predict that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of this special game by the execution of the special game, so that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

When the special game and the big hit game are continuously executed as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is advisable to configure a series of productions that cross over special games and jackpot games. In this case, for example, a period during which the special game can be executed, that is, information regarding the length of the symbol fixing period set this time, information regarding the game content (round number) of the jackpot game, and a game set after the jackpot game is over. It is advisable to set the presentation mode of the above-described series of presentations based on the information regarding the state. Thereby, based on the game content (game content of the special game, game content of the jackpot game) executed while the series of effects is displayed, and the content of the effect of the series of effects being displayed, the game is executed in the future. It becomes possible for the player to predict the content of the game.

In addition, when the big hit game is continuously executed after the end of the special game as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the big hit game are notified to the player as one big hit game. You may set the effect mode to perform. With this configuration, the contents of the big hit game on the production can be a combination of the setting contents of the special game and the setting contents of the big hit game, so that the contents of the game of one big hit game Can be set over a wide variety.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when the fixed display period of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is ended (elapsed), the jackpot game is executed, but not limited to this, for example, the special symbol When the ball passes the specific area in the state where the fixed display period has passed, the jackpot game is configured to be executed, and after the fixed display period of the special symbol passes, the ball passes the specific region The small attacker 4650 may be configured to set a gaming state (latent probability state) in which it is easy to open during the period.

<Regarding Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Here, a modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 279. In the present modification, in comparison with the tenth embodiment described above, a starting gate 670 is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 (left side area of the variable display device unit 80 in front view) can pass. And that the arrangement positions of the specific entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are variable. The other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when the special symbol jackpot is won, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period set as the variable display period, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special symbol is set as the symbol fixing period. The jackpot game was configured to be executed after the period was stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in this modified example, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as the symbol fixing period, the jackpot game is executed based on that the ball has passed the starting gate 670. Is configured.

Then, a period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed, that is, a period in which the symbol fixing period and the starting period until the ball passes through the starting gate 670 after the symbol fixing period have been added , An advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

According to this modification example configured in this manner, it is possible to set an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player for a period that is not a predetermined period that is set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the advantageous game state to continue for a longer period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 279, in the present modification, a ball that is fired to execute a special game in which a ball is won in the small hit attacker 4650, that is, a position where a ball fired by a left-handed game can pass. The starting gate 670 is provided in the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special game from being performed without passing the ball through the starting gate 670 during the starting period described above.

Further, in the present modification, the time from when the ball passes through the starting gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 is opened due to the jackpot game, the ball passing through the starting gate 670 is the second variable winning device 650. It is configured to be shorter than the time required to reach. As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 can be opened, so that the jackpot game can be efficiently performed. it can.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the plurality of nails implanted in the game board 13 are configured so that the downward direction of the ball can be changed, and the downward direction allows the starting gate 670 to pass. Since the ball passes through the starting gate 670 when it is changed in the direction, it is difficult for the player to know how long the starting period lasts and the game area of the game board 13 is set. It was possible to make the player interested in the flow of the individual balls that flow down, but since the direction in which the balls flow down is irregularly changed by multiple nails, the starting period continues for a long time. In some cases, it ended immediately.

Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, the area where the ball can flow down toward the starting gate 670 can be regularly distributed to the first direction and the second direction. A sphere that is provided with a dividing means and flows down the other flow path (flow path in the second direction) is distributed toward the starting gate 670 rather than one flow path (flow path in the first direction) distributed by the distribution means. You may make it easy to flow down.

With this configuration, the flow of the ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to have a predetermined regularity, so that the ball immediately passes through the starting gate 670 during the starting period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation of being lost.

<Regarding Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment described above, by a single winning game of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the ball enters the second ball inlet 3640 and the V winning device 650 is opened during the small hit game. It is configured to be able to set whether or not the sphere has passed to the specific area 650V inside.

On the other hand, in the present modified example, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, even by hitting a plurality of second symbols (ordinary symbols), a ball enters the second ball inlet 3640 and a small ball. The difference is that the presence/absence of a ball passing through to a specific area 650V in the V winning apparatus 650 that is opened during a winning game can be set. Further, a maximum of four values of the second random number counter C4, which can be acquired by passing through the through gate 67, can be reserved and stored. The detailed configuration and control content for storing the second random number counter C4 in suspension are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, description will be given of effect contents specific to the present modification executed by using the configuration of the present modification. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of the revival effect executed when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is continuously won and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 280, when the revival effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the in-race effect described above with reference to FIG. 202(a), and the winning effect is executed. During this revival effect, an effect in which the rival character 860 or the goal of the in-race effect is skipped in the main display area Dm and the character 811 runs rapidly is executed. Here, the conditions under which the revival effect is executed will be briefly described. In this modified example, a predetermined hit game is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, and immediately after that, in a state where the normal state is set (in the next universal figure lottery executed without a gap) When a specific hit game is executed, a ball enters the second entrance 3640 by the hit game executed earlier, and the small figure won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the entered ball. During the small hitting game of hitting, the ball that flows into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) by the hitting game executed next is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 650V, and such a state occurs. The possible state, that is, the result of the universal figure lottery that is continuously executed (the result of previously determining the universal figure prize information included in the universal figure reservation) is a specific winning result, and each winning result is In the case where the game state at the time of executing the hit game based on the predetermined condition is satisfied, and further, when the ball flows into the second passage 660b in at least the next (second) hit game among the continuous hit games, The revived production is performed.

In this way, by providing a game result advantageous to the player (a state in which the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game) based on a plurality of public drawing lottery, the player is surprised. It is possible to provide a certain game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, the effect can be enhanced by making it possible to execute an unexpected effect (revival effect) in correspondence with the above-mentioned unexpected game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, an electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the present modification will be described. This modification is a modification of the seventh embodiment described above, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from that of the above-described seventh embodiment will be described, and the other description will be omitted. 281(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the high probability second random number 11 table 202ja, and FIG. 282(b) is a low probability second random number 11 table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to 202jb.

As shown in FIG. 281(a), the high-probability second per-random number 11 table 202ja is referred to when executing the success/failure determination of the second symbol in the high-probability state of the normal symbol, and is described above. In the normal symbol variation process 7 of the seventh embodiment (see S192 of FIG. 219), in the process of obtaining the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219), the currently set game state is a high probability state of a normal symbol. Referenced in some cases.

The high-probability second per-random number 11 table 202ja is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that the second per-type (per-universal figure type) is increased. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 defines C per universal figure in the range of "80 to 98". It should be noted that, regarding the per-universal figure per-universal figure A and per-universal figure per-second B of the second winning type, the corresponding range of the value of the second per random number counter C4 is only different, and other than that, it is the same as the above-described seventh embodiment. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the selected second hit type (general figure hit type) is set such that the operation content of the hit operation executed in accordance with the game state set at the timing when the hit operation is executed is different. ..

Ordinary figure per hit A, ordinary figure per B hit operation, which is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, is omitted because it is the same as in the above-described seventh embodiment, but per ordinary figure C The hitting motion is such that the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, and the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second entrance 3640 during the opening period. A hit operation is executed when the opening period ends.

That is, in the above-described seventh embodiment, by setting the ending period that is the time (3 seconds) or more required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the variation in Toku-zu 2 due to one common figure. While the small hit game is executed, the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b is configured so as not to pass through the specific area 650V based on another common figure hit, whereas the common figure hit of this modified example In the hit game (hit action) corresponding to C, the ending period is set to be shorter than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (0.1 seconds), and is executed immediately afterward. The ball that has flown into the second passage 660b based on the result of the drawing is configured to be able to pass the specific area 650V during the small hitting game.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning action based on the winning of the special figure C, the next general figure lottery can be executed 0.1 seconds after the start of the special figure 2 lottery, and then If you win "A" per public drawing by the public drawing lottery, and if a ball enters the second entrance 3640 in the shortest (1.3 seconds) in "A" per common drawing, the per-universal drawing executed C The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the start of the special figure 2 lottery based on FIG.

In such a case, the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed by the hit operation based on the C winning per ordinary figure is the small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the common figure is drawn during the small hit game. Based on the winning A win, it is possible to construct a state in which the sphere that has flowed into the second passage 660b can pass through the specific area 650V.

As described above, in this modified example, by winning a predetermined hit type (A, B per public figure) immediately after winning a specific hit type (C per public figure) It is possible to provide the player with an advantageous gaming state (ball passing to the specific area 650V during the small hitting game) by the special drawing 2 lottery executed across the line and the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b. ..

The low-probability second random number 11 table 202jb is referred to when executing the winning/deciding determination of the second symbol in the low-probability state of the ordinary symbol, and is the normal symbol variation process 7 of the seventh embodiment described above. (Refer to S192 of FIG. 219), in the process of obtaining the lottery result (see S805 of FIG. 219), it is referred to when the currently set gaming state is a low probability state of a normal symbol.

This low-probability second per-random number 11 table 202jb is different from the above-described seventh embodiment in that different universal electric operation patterns are defined according to the second per-kind type (universal figure per type). There is. Specifically, A is specified per universal figure in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 19". If the gaming state when the winning figure A is won and the winning action is executed is a low probability state, the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 1 second, and the ending period is 0.1 seconds. Is specified to be performed.

In addition, B per ordinary figure is defined as the value of the second random number counter C4 being "20". If the game state when winning this general figure hit B and executing the hit action is a low probability state, the opening game is 2 seconds, the opening period is 0.2 seconds, and the ending game is 3 seconds. And the value of the second per random number counter C4 is "21", the per-universal figure C is specified. If the gaming state when winning the winning figure C and executing the winning action is a low probability state, the winning game with the opening period of 2 seconds, the opening period of 0.2 seconds, and the ending period of 3 seconds is executed. It is prescribed to be done. Then, “out” is defined in the range where the value of the second random number counter C4 is “22 to 99”.

Here, when the normal symbol is won in the state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, by the winning game, only the period in which the ball cannot enter the second entrance 3640 Although it is configured such that the accessory 3640a is not opened, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only in the hit game based on A per common figure. When the opening period of 1 second is set, the ball flows down on the electric accessory 3640a to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

Then, when the opening period passes 1 second, the electric accessory 3640a is closed, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b and flows down toward the outlet 66 as it is. In the normal state, since the ball does not enter the second entrance 3640, the V winning device 650 is not opened.

In this way, in the normal game executed in the low probability state of the symbol, to change the operation pattern (universal operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a according to the second hit type (universal figure hit type) that is set. By changing the path through which the balls flow down, for example, it is possible to win the balls that have passed through the plurality of flow paths to the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big hit game. , It is possible to win multiple balls at once.

Further, in this modified example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game based on the normal symbol per C is executed, and immediately thereafter, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set to the regular symbol per A. When the corresponding hit game is executed, the ball flowing down the second passage 660b by the hit game corresponding to the normal figure hit A in the low probability state is based on the normal figure hit C executed in the high probability state. It is configured such that it can pass through the specific area 650V during the small hitting game executed by.

As a result, it is possible to execute the big hit game based on the small hit game, despite the fact that the low probability state of the normal symbol has once changed, so that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to cause the player to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the content of the control process executed by main controller 110 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing 11. This through-gate passage process 11 is acquired when the sphere passes through the through-gate 67 when the sphere passes through the through-gate passage process (see S107 of FIG. 49) executed by the above-described seventh embodiment (stored). The difference is that a process of discriminating (predicting) the game result in advance is executed based on the values of various counters.

When the through-gate passage process 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through-gate passage process (see S107 of FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above are executed, and thereafter, On the basis of the counter value stored by the processing of S1905, the winning/non-winning of the ordinary symbol and the type per ordinary symbol are predicted (S1951). Then, a general figure winning a prize information command including information indicating the predicted winning/non-profiting and general figure per type is set (S1958), and the present processing is ended.

The detailed contents of the processing executed in S1951 and S1952 are those in which the target of the processing of S1707 and S1708 of the starting winning process (S105 of FIG. 47) executed for the special symbol is replaced with the ordinary symbol. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the content of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 11. This command determination process 11 is a command indicating the winning information of the normal symbol in addition to the winning information of the special symbol as the winning information with respect to the command determining process 7 (see S4182 of FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above ( The difference is that the process for determining that the general figure prize information command) has been received (see S12051) and the process executed when the universal figure prize information command has been received (see S12052) have been added. Are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283, when it is determined that the winning information related command (winning information command, ordinary figure winning information command) is received (S12051: Yes), based on the received winning information command (universal figure winning information command). The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (S12010). Here, in the winning information storage area used in the present modified example, in addition to the reserved sphere storing area of the special symbol, the received winning information can be stored also in the holding sphere storing area of the normal symbol. Then, when the process of S12010 is completed, the universal figure effect setting process (S12052) is executed, and the present process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the content of the universal figure effect setting process (S12052) will be described. The universal figure effect setting process (S12052) determines each information stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received universal figure award information command, and the specific condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, a process for determining that the special effect can be executed is executed.

When the general figure effect setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the prize-related information received this time is a general figure prize information command (S13001). It is determined whether or not the information indicating C per highly accurate general map is included (S13002). In the process of S13002, when it is determined that the information indicating the high probability universal figure C is included (S13002: Yes), the universal figure C winning flag is set to ON (S13003), and the present process ends.

The universal figure C winning flag is set to ON when the information (command) indicating C per highly accurate universal figure is received, and is set to OFF when the next universal figure winning information command is received. It is something. As a result, the universal figure winning information command received after the universal figure winning a prize indicating the highly accurate universal figure C can be discriminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13002, when it is determined that the information indicating the high-accuracy general image per C is not included (S13002; No), it is determined whether the information indicating the low-accuracy general image per A is included (( (S13004), if it is determined that it is not included (S13004: No), the universal figure C winning flag is set to OFF (S13007), and this processing is ended.

When it is determined in the processing of S13004 that the information indicating the low probability universal figure per A is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether or not the universal figure C winning flag is set to on (S13005) and turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), the special effect permission information is set in the corresponding universal figure winning information (S13006), the universal figure C winning flag is set to OFF, and this processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in the process of S13005 that it is not set to ON (S13005: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that the low-accuracy public figure hit A will be performed next to the high-accuracy normal figure C, and the special effect corresponding to the prediction result can be set.

In addition, as in this modification, when a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided across the high-probability state and the low-probability state of the ordinary symbol, for example, the number of times the small hit is won (small win It may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol based on the number of times the game is executed). As a result, the first universal figure lottery is executed in a high probability state, and the special figure 2 lottery is executed by the winning game to win the small hit. Then, at the timing when the small hit game is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state.

Since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next ordinary figure lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the change time when the small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2, after the start timing of the small hit game to be executed, the hit game based on the next general drawing lottery is executed, Set the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation in the stochastic state. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily execute the following winning game based on the universal figure lottery in the operation pattern of the low probability state.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290. In each of the embodiments described above, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, in the state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) is set, If you win the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol (special symbol 1), the gaming state during the jackpot change is set to be the latent probability state, and if the latent probability state is set, the second special symbol ( By facilitating the execution of the lottery of special figure 2), the small hitting game is configured to be easily executed.

In the embodiment configured in this way, a game in which a small hit game is frequently generated (so-called RUSH game) can be provided to the player by using the period during which the big hit is fluctuating as in FIG. It is possible to continuously provide a plurality of different privilege games (RUSH game, jackpot game) to the player, so that the player can be more motivated to win the jackpot. The interest of can be improved.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the jackpot winning of the special symbol is duplicated, and in order to prevent excessive bonuses from being given to the player, it is based on the jackpot winning in the lottery of the special drawing 1. In the lottery of Toku-zu 2 which is executed during the big hit change, the big hit is not won. Thereby, even if the special figure 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times during the big hit variation of the special figure 1, the big hit of the special figure 2 is not won. Therefore, the jackpot variation of special figure 1 ends, the period until the big hit game is started (big hit variation period of special figure 1) can be made into the RUSH game period.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the variation time length (60 seconds at the shortest and 600 seconds at the longest) that can be set when the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 is won is specified to have a width ( FIG. 19(b)), in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won, that is, when the RUSH game is executed, FIG. 7(a) is displayed. As described above with reference, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop and display the effect symbol 813 for suggesting the big hit variation period of this time. And, the variation time of the special figure 1 which is set this time and the display of the effect design 813 which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the big hit variation of the special figure 1 is started according to the type of the jackpot that is won. The mode is variable.

In this way, by causing the production symbol 813 to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and not being determined whether the special figure lottery is successful or not, the player is configured to suggest the length of the set special figure change time. On the other hand, the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be more interesting, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

However, in the above-described production of the first embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the special map 1 is started (at the time when the RUSH game is started), the length of the current RUSH game period or after the RUSH game is finished is executed. Since the contents of the jackpot game to be played are suggested to the player, there is a possibility that the willingness to play during the RUSH game may be lowered depending on the suggestion contents. Specifically, for example, a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special period 1 fluctuation period), and the jackpot that the winning jackpot type is more disadvantageous to the player than other jackpot types. In the case of the type (for example, jackpot D), by grasping the display mode of the effect design 813 that is stopped and displayed, the jackpot win of this special diagram 1 is a lottery result that is not so advantageous to the player. There is a problem that the interest of the game during the RUSH period is reduced because it is predicted.

If the display pattern of the effect design 813, the length of the RUSH game period, and the contents of the jackpot game executed after the end of the RUSH game are not related to each other, the above-mentioned problem occurs. However, it is not an effective measure because the pleasure of predicting future game development (RUSH game period and jackpot game contents) based on the display mode of the effect design 813 is lost.

On the other hand, in the 11th embodiment, based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the changing period of the special drawing 1, the drawing result of the changing special drawing 1 (change time, jackpot game content, jackpot game) It is configured to execute a suggestion effect in which a game state set after the completion is suggested. Then, the effect mode of the suggested effect is made variable depending on the result (whether or not there is a hit) of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the changing period of the special figure 1, and the number of times.

With this configuration, the more the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the changing period of the special figure 1, the easier it is to predict the lottery result of the changing special figure 1. The special figure 2 lottery can be motivated by the player during the period.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the RUSH game is executed by the special map 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special map 1 in which the latent probability state is set. Therefore, the special figure 2 lottery can be more motivated during the changing period of the special figure 1.

The eleventh embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment described above in that a part of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, and an effect to be executed. The difference is that the mode is changed, and the other elements are configured to be the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding effect contents in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, a characteristic effect executed in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the variation period of the special map 1 jackpot in which the latent state is set), based on the lottery of the special map 2, the result of the lottery for the special map 1 jackpot of this time is suggested. It is configured differently from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a suggestive effect for performing is performed.

In the eleventh embodiment, as a suggestion effect, an effect that suggests to the player the jackpot game content corresponding to the selected jackpot type and the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to be executed. Then, the display mode of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol 2 display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the lottery result of the special symbol 2, the combination of numbers can be changed, and the RUSH period can be changed. The suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the RUSH effect (effect in which the effect pattern 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812) showing the result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

Next, an example of the actual effect contents will be described. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot variation time of Toku-zu 1, a round game for 15 rounds is executed as the jackpot game, and after the jackpot ends, the probability variation state that is advantageous to the player is set. 15R probability variation)) will be described as an example. FIG. 285(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small hit is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285(b) is displayed when a win is missed during the RUSH period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 285(a), in the eleventh embodiment, the remaining time for displaying the remaining time of the current RUSH game period on the display screen (FIG. 7(b)) of the first embodiment described above. The display 851 and the small hit number display 825 indicating the number of small wins during the current RUSH game period are different in that they are configured to be displayed, and are otherwise the same. The same elements (display contents) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285(a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 10 seconds after the change of the special figure 1 starts, and "100 seconds", that is, as the remaining time display 851. A value obtained by subtracting 10 seconds that have already passed from the fluctuation time of 110 seconds is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of small hits won during the RUSH game period is one is displayed in the small hit number display 825. There is. Since the value of the small hit number display 825 is configured to be updated (added by 1) at the timing when the small hit game is started, the state shown in FIG. 285(a) is already 1 This shows a state where the second small hit is won (stopped) while the small hit game is being executed.

Next, the effect contents regarding the suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286(b). FIG. 286(b) shows a display screen when the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is out of alignment. In this symbol 286(b), "95 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display 851. Note that, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, during the period when the small hit game is being executed, it is configured so that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is not subtracted. The state shown in b) is a state in which the small hitting game is finished from the state shown in FIG. 286(a) described above, and 5 seconds have passed thereafter. Therefore, the value of the small hit count display 825 is incremented by 1 as compared with FIG. 286(a), and “2” is displayed.

As described above, in the 11th embodiment, the display mode (the display mode of the third symbol or the effect symbol 813) for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is currently used. The result of the special drawing 1 lottery that is being variably displayed is configured to be suggested to the player.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285(b), as a suggestion display mode, the stop display mode of the third symbol (kanji) for showing the lottery result of the special map 2 stopped and displayed in the special map 2 display area Dm2 Display mode using) is different from the normal stop display mode (the display mode shown in FIG. 285(b)), or as the effect design 813 displayed from the treasure box 812, if it is different from the normal display mode. A gorgeous display mode is displayed.

In this way, by using the display mode for indicating the lottery result of the special map 2 so as to suggest the lottery result of the special map 1, the lottery result of the special map 2 and the lottery result of the special map 1 can be obtained. , Can be discriminated in the display mode of one symbol, so that the player can be more interested in the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed.

Further, as will be described later in detail, as the remaining period of the RUSH game period decreases, the effect mode in which the lottery result of the special diagram 1 can be easily determined is configured to be easily set as the suggestion mode. Therefore, in any period of the RUSH game period, by executing the special figure 2 lottery, it is possible to motivate the game to grasp the lottery result of the special figure 1 in advance.

Next, the effect contents of the jackpot content suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. 286. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the symbol (third symbol or effect symbol 813) for showing the result of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period The suggestion display mode, which is changed according to the lottery result of the special drawing 1 that is being variably displayed, is displayed. In addition to this, in the eleventh embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established based on the lottery result of the special figure 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, when the number of small wins reaches 10). The jackpot content suggesting effect for suggesting the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

As a result, the player will be willing to execute the special figure 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed during the RUSH game period, so that the operation of the game can be improved.

Here, specific contents of the effect will be described. FIG. 286(a) is a diagram showing an example of display content displayed during the jackpot content suggesting effect, and FIG. 286(b) is an example of display content displaying an effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect. It is the figure which showed. In FIG. 286(a), "10" is displayed as the small hit number display 825. Then, in order to notify the player that the number of small hits has reached 10 is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the big hit content suggestion effect, the display form of the small hit number display 825 is a normal display form ( The highlighted display mode different from that of FIG. 285(b) is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed as a notification mode for informing the game of the outline of the effect currently being executed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, and the main display area Dm is displayed. , Three treasure chests (treasure chest 812, treasure chest 860, treasure chest 870) are displayed. Of the three treasure boxes, the treasure box 812 is used to display the effect design 813 for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 as described above with reference to FIG. 285.

Then, the treasure box 860 indicates to the player whether or not the game state after the next big hit (after the big hit based on Toku-zu 1 that is currently variably displayed) is in a game state advantageous to the player ( It is used for notification, and is displayed in a display mode with a character of "certain" added to indicate that fact. Further, the treasure box 870 is used for suggesting (notifying) the contents (number of rounds, etc.) of the jackpot game to be executed next time to the player, and is attached with the letter "R" to indicate that fact. It is displayed in the displayed manner. As a result, even if a plurality of treasure boxes are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily understand which treasure box indicates (notifies) what, thus providing an easy-to-understand effect. can do.

In the sub-display area Ds, the display of "RUSH in progress" to indicate that the current RUSH game period is in progress, and the comment of "Open the box with the power of V" to guide the jackpot content suggestion effect are displayed. To be done. As shown in FIG. 286(a), this jackpot content suggesting effect is executed independently of the effect (effect using the treasure box 812) for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2. During the period in which the jackpot content suggesting effect is being executed, the jackpot content suggesting effect is configured to be displayed (emphasized) with priority over the effect for showing the lottery result of the special figure 2. There is. Specifically, the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect is displayed in a larger display mode than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2. Is configured. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the jackpot content suggestion effect.

Then, when it comes to the timing of showing the effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect, the treasure box 860 and the treasure box 870 are opened as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure box 860 is opened and the character "lucky" is displayed as the game state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 is opened and the character "odd" is displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. It

Further, the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect executed during one RUSH game period is displayed on the suggestion history display 880 as a history. In the present embodiment, the execution condition of the jackpot content suggestion effect can be established a plurality of times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion effect increases. It is configured to be higher (so that the player can easily understand the actual lottery result).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, the suggestion history display 880 is used to display the production result of the jackpot content suggestion production as a history, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand production. In addition, the suggestion history display 880 has a plurality of display modes (“cross mark”, “triangle mark”, “circle mark”) based on the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect and the actual special drawing 1 lottery result. Since it is configured to display, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the effect early on, even if the display mode showing the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect is diversified, it is easy to understand as a history The result can be reported.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is changed in correspondence with the effect result of one big hit content suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to have a specific display mode only when the jackpot content suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times during the RUSH game period and each effect result is a specific combination. With such a configuration, even if the first big hit content suggestion effect is a result result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a result result that suggests that the number of round games is a big hit), It is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that the jackpot content suggestion production is executed.

Although details will be described later, the display content (display mode) showing the effect result of this jackpot content suggestion effect is a strong suggestion display that is easy for the player to predict, and a weak suggestion display that is harder to predict than the strong suggestion display, Is configured to be set based on the lottery result of the special figure 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the result of the already executed jackpot content suggesting effect), and the number of times of executing the jackpot content suggesting effect. Therefore, the selection ratio of the strong suggestion display and the weak suggestion display is configured to be different. Further, only when the specific condition is satisfied, an effect for finalizing and notifying the next big hit content and a bonus effect different from the suggestion of the big hit content are executed.

By configuring in this way, even for a player who has almost determined the next big hit content by the already executed big hit content suggestion effect, he is enthusiastic to continue to establish the conditions for the big hit content suggestion effect. A game can be played.

In the present embodiment, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the effect to show the lottery result of the special drawing 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the jackpot content suggestion effect are configured to be separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one treasure box may be used to execute the effect for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 and the jackpot content suggestion effect. In this case, it is advisable to change the effect mode of the jackpot content suggesting effect such that the timing of displaying the effect pattern 813 and the timing of displaying the effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect are different. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect even if one treasure box is used, and it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the special figure 2 is being executed more than actually.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for indicating the big hit contents are individually displayed as the result of the big hit contents suggesting effect, but this is configured. The present invention is not limited to this, and only one of them may be displayed as the effect result of one big hit content suggestion effect. In this case, the player may be allowed to select which element to execute the jackpot content suggestion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the effect result of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the effect results for a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the game state after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are configured to be displayed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be configured to be shifted in timing. In this case, it may be configured such that an element that is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player and an element that is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player are discriminated and the element to be displayed first is determined based on the discrimination result. good. Specifically, it is preferable that the elements that are advantageous to the player as a result of the lottery are displayed later. As a result, the player can be motivated to play a lot of jackpot content suggesting effects.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, as a result of the special figure 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, based on the number of times the small hit is won and the number of times the special figure 2 lottery is executed, a big hit content suggestion production However, in addition to this, for example, when the number of times the player is missed by the special drawing 2 lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the jackpot content suggestion production is executed. It may be set as a condition. As a result, even if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a lottery result (missing) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. In addition, not only the result of the special drawing 2 lottery during one RUSH game period but also the execution condition of the jackpot content suggesting effect may be set so as to span a plurality of RUSH game periods. With such a configuration, even after the content of the next big hit game is found to be disadvantageous to the player, the willingness to facilitate the big hit content suggestion production during the next RUSH game period is motivated. The game can be played.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it is configured to suggest a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for indicating the jackpot content as the rendering result of the jackpot content suggesting rendering. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect result obtained by combining the above-described plurality of elements may be suggested. Further, the player is configured so that the remaining period of the RUSH game period cannot be grasped, and the remaining period of the RUSH game period, that is, the remaining change time of special figure 1 is suggested as the effect result of the jackpot content suggesting effect. It may be configured.

<Regarding electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289. The eleventh embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as in the fourth embodiment, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the main controller 110 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(a), the point that a suggestion mode selection table 222ja is provided and the point that a suggestion effect selection table 222jb is provided are different from the fourth embodiment described above.

Suggestion mode selection table 222ja, during the RUSH game executed when the latent probability state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second special symbol (special figure 2) By using the production mode for showing the lottery result, it is referred to when setting the suggestion mode that suggests the lottery content of the special map 1 (the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game) during the jackpot change. Data table.

Here, the contents defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the acquired value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion production counter 223jc. Therefore, it is defined that a plurality of suggestive aspects are selected.

In the eleventh embodiment, the type of suggestion mode defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is “normal” in which the suggestion mode is not set, and the suggestion content is weak, that is, the player draws the special figure 1 lottery result. It is defined that there is "implication weakness" that is difficult to determine (big hit content) and "implication strength" that is easier for the player to distinguish the lottery result (big hit content) of special drawing 1 lottery than "implication weakness". When "Normal" is selected as the mode, a normal mode (see FIG. 285(a)) is displayed as a mode for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, when "weak suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the player cannot specifically determine the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery, but is the lottery result advantageous to the player? An effect mode (see FIG. 285(b)) that indicates whether or not it is displayed is displayed. Further, when "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode is such that the player can specifically determine the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery (for example, the lottery result of special figure 2 is shown. The production mode for this is configured to display the number of rounds to be executed in the winning jackpot game, and a suggestion mode with identification information indicating the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished). .. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, since the suggestion mode selection table 222ja is configured to select one type from a plurality of suggestion mode types having different suggestion degrees, the suggestion is made during the RUSH game period. The game can be motivated so that the mode is displayed multiple times.

To be more specific, the above-mentioned prescribed contents for a plurality of suggestion mode types will be described. If the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is "1 to 5" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is In the case of "within 10 seconds", "normal" is defined regardless of the value range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc, and when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", it is acquired. "Normal" is defined in the range where the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0 to 89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the obtained suggestive effect counter 223jc value.

Further, when the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is "6 to 39" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the obtained suggestion effect counter "Normal" is defined in the range of the value of 223jc "0 to 59", "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing. In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "normal" is in the range of the obtained suggestion effect counter 223jc value "0 to 89", and "implication weak" in the range of "90 to 99". Is prescribed. When the remaining time information is “91 seconds or more”, the acquired suggestive effect counter 223jc value is “0 to 59” or “90 to 99” in the range of “normal” and “60”. "Indication weakness" is defined in the range of "~89".

In addition, when the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the obtained suggestive effect counter "Normal" is defined in the range of the value of 223jc of "0 to 59", and "strong suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". Further, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "implication weak" is in the range of "0 to 89" and "implication weak" is in the range of "90 to 99" when the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value is "0 to 89". "Strong" is stipulated. If the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "strong suggestion" is defined regardless of the value of the obtained suggestive effect counter 223jc value.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is, the larger the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number counter 223jb is according to the prescribed content of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. Since it is possible for the player to easily understand, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed as many times as possible by the player.

Further, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "1 to 5" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p indicates that the remaining time is within 10 seconds, a suggestion mode Is configured not to be selected. In other words, in the state where the RUSH game is being executed, if the special drawing 2 lottery number is small and the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not being actively played, so it is a jackpot to be executed later. In order to prevent the player from easily suggesting the content of the game, the suggestion mode is difficult to select. With such a configuration, the special figure 2 lottery can be motivated to quickly grasp the currently-varying lottery result of the special figure 1.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the larger the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb during the RUSH game period, the easier it is for the player to select the suggestion mode. With such a configuration, the player can be more enthusiastic about playing the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ratio in which the suggestion mode is selected may be varied according to the lottery result of the changing special diagram 1, and for example, the jackpot type (eg, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player is won. In this case, the suggestion mode may be selected more easily than when the jackpot type (eg, jackpot D), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot A, is won. Further, in this case, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is equal to or smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 39), the proportions in which the suggestion mode is selected are the same (including the same concept including some errors), It is preferable that the suggestion mode is selected differently when the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 39). With such a configuration, the player can be more enthusiastic about playing the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the suggestion mode, the content of the next big hit game is suggested to the player based on the display content, but the present invention is not limited to this. The frequency at which the mode is displayed is varied according to the jackpot type (the jackpot game to be executed) that has been won, and the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player depending on how many times the suggested mode is displayed. It may be configured.

This suggestion manner selection table 222ja is a suggestion manner setting process (FIG. 293) executed when it is determined that the latent state is set in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294). When the suggestion mode is selected, the display mode corresponding to the set variation pattern of Toku-zu 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see FIG. 293). See S14204). Thereby, when the variation pattern of the corresponding special drawing 2 is out, the display mode of the design (third design, effect design 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special drawing 2 is out is selected. Since it can be variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the mode, it is possible to provide the player with the notification of the lottery result of special figure 2 and the suggestion of the lottery result of special figure 1 at a time. it can.

Returning to FIG. 287(a), the description is continued. Suggestion production selection table 222jb, during the RUSH game executed when the latent probability state is set as the game state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the second special symbol (special diagram 2) When the result of lottery satisfies a predetermined condition, it is referred to when setting a suggestive effect that suggests the lottery content (big hit game content, game state set after the big hit game) of special figure 1 during big jackpot change. It is a data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents defined in the suggested effect selection table 222jb will be described. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb, the value of the obtained small hit number counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the special drawing 1 lottery are won. It is defined that a plurality of suggestive effects are selected in association with the information indicating the jackpot type and the value of the suggestive effect counter 223jc.

In the eleventh embodiment, as a type of suggestive effect defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb, "failure" in which the suggestive effect is not executed and the suggestive content is weak, that is, the player draws the special figure 1 lottery result. It is difficult to discriminate (big hit contents), and "impossible strong", which makes it easier for the player to distinguish the lottery result (big hit contents) of special drawing 1 lottery than "implicit weakness". Figure 1 Includes "confirmation" that informs the lottery result (big hit content) of the lottery, "privilege effect" that is executed when the lottery result of special figure 1 lottery has already been notified to the player, and suggestion It is defined as "exciting production", which is a stinging production that is not performed.

In the suggestion effect selection table 222jb, in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 of FIG. 292), when it is determined that the execution condition of the suggestion effect (the small hit winning number is a multiple of 10) is satisfied (in FIG. 292). S4753: Yes) In the suggested effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) to be executed, if it is determined that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more (S14102: Yes in FIG. 293), the suggested effect is executed. For reference (S14106 in FIG. 293).

If "failure" is selected as the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286(a) is displayed), but the effect ends without the treasure boxes 860 and 870 opening. Is executed. That is, an effect that does not suggest the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 to the player is executed. When "weak suggestion" or "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. 286(b), as a result of the suggestive effect, the treasure boxes 860 and 870 are opened and the lottery result of the special map 1 is selected from the inside. A comment (game state suggestion display 861 and round number suggestion display 871) suggesting (big hit contents) appears. The content of this comment is variably set corresponding to the suggestion effect type selected as the suggestion effect.

Further, when "confirm" is selected as the suggestive effect, the effect in which the comment notifying the lottery result of the special figure 1 appears from the treasure boxes 860 and 870 as the effect result of the suggestive effect is executed. In the present embodiment, “confirmed” is selected as the suggested effect only when the result of the lottery is the most advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when "privilege effect" is set as the suggestion effect, an effect that is difficult to see otherwise (for example, an effect in which the character wears a special costume to celebrate the player) is executed. As a result, even a player who has already grasped the next big hit contents during the RUSH game period can be motivated to continuously execute the suggestion effect.

In addition, when "excitement effect" is set as the suggestion effect, the effect result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed as in the above-described failure effect, but treasure boxes 860, 870 (see FIG. 286(b)). ) Is executed until the production is opened. In this way, a process in which the same effect mode as the effect in which the effect result that suggests the jackpot content to the player is displayed is displayed as the effect (gase effect) in which the effect result that suggests the jackpot content to the player is displayed. By making it possible to set different gaze effects, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the suggested effects until the end.

In the eleventh embodiment, there is a storage unit that stores a plurality of effect modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) corresponding to the type of the instructive effect mode selected using the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. (Not shown), one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of suggestive effects than the number of suggestive effect types defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb. Further, the suggestion effect history displayed in the suggestion history display 880 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the display mode corresponding to the type of the suggestion effect mode selected using the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. It is configured to be done. As a result, even if various suggestive effects are executed, it is possible to inform the player of the suggestive effect history in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestive effect is executed.

Concretely explaining the above-mentioned prescribed contents for a plurality of suggestive effect types, when the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10", that is, when the execution condition of the suggestive effect is satisfied for the first time during the RUSH game period , The suggested information storage area 223ja does not store the suggested information (“−”), and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of “0 to 59” regardless of the jackpot type of Toku-zu 1. "Failure" is defined, and "implication weakness" is defined in the range of "60 to 99".

When the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "20", when the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10". When "failure" is selected in the suggested effect executed when the value is "", the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 59", regardless of the jackpot type of Toku-zu 1. Is defined, “strong suggestion” is defined in the range of “60 to 89”, and “failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“Yes”), that is, when the value of the small hit counter 223cc is “10”, the suggested effect executed is “implied”. When "weak" is selected, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "A", and "failure" is defined in the range of the value of the suggestive effect counter 223jc "0 to 59", and "60 to 89". In the range of "," "strong suggestion" is defined, and in the range of "90 to 99," "failure" is defined. In addition, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B-D", "failure" is defined in the range of the value of the suggestion production counter 223jc "0-89", and "implication" in the range of "90-99". "Strong" is stipulated.

When the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "30", when the suggested information is not stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10". , And "Failure" is selected in the suggested effect executed in the case of "20", the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "A", and the value of the suggested effect counter 223jc is "0". "Strength of suggestion" is defined in the range of "59", and "weakness of suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99". In addition, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B-D", "failure" is defined in the range of the value of the suggestion production counter 223jc "0-89", and "implication" in the range of "90-99". "Weak" is prescribed.

On the other hand, when “implication weak” (yes, weak) is stored as the suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the value of the suggestion production counter 223jc is “0” regardless of the jackpot type of Toku-zu 1. "59" is defined as "strong suggestion", and "60-99" is defined as "failure". Further, when "implied strong" (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "A, B", and the suggested effect counter 223jc "Failure" is defined in the range of "0 to 59", "Fixed" is defined in the range of "60 to 89", and "Failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". Moreover, when the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "C, D", "failure" is prescribed|regulated in the range of suggestive production "0-99" regardless of the jackpot type of special figure 1.

If the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is equal to or larger than “40” and is a multiple of 10, if “determined” is stored as the suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, When the jackpot type of FIG. 1 is "A, B", "privilege effect" is defined in the range of suggestive effect "0 to 99", and "exciting effect" is specified in all other cases.

In the eleventh embodiment, the value of the small hit number counter 223jb is set to a predetermined value (a multiple of 10) as the execution condition of the suggestive effect, but a condition other than this is set as the execution condition of the suggestive effect. Is also good. Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times during one RUSH game period, and the suggestion effect having a lower suggestion degree than the suggestion effects executed in the past is not executed. Therefore, the suggestive effect can be enjoyed to the end to the player.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 287(b). FIG. 287(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the 11th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(b), this is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a suggested information storage area 223ja, a special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb, and a suggestion effect counter 223jc are provided.

The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the content of the suggested effect (see FIG. 286) that has been executed, and is a data area of the suggested effect executed during one RUSH game period. The history can be stored. Information indicating the suggestive effect mode selected in the suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is stored in the suggested effect information storage area 223ja (S14108 in FIG. 293), and when the next suggestive effect mode is selected. The information stored in is read (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (at the timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Further, a suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

The special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations (the number of lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period, and the fluctuation display setting for special figure 2 In process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), when it is determined that the latent probability state is set (FIG. 5303: Yes), the counter value is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode showing the changing lottery result of the special figure 1 using the effect mode for showing the lottery result of special figure 2 (FIG. 295). S14201). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (at the timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter referred to when selecting the above-described suggestion mode or suggestion effect, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the value is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The detailed configuration is similar to that of the effect counter 223h described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The suggestive effect flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestive effect is being executed, and is set to ON while the suggestive effect is being executed. This suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, when it is determined that the suggestive effect is being performed (S5391: YES in FIG. 294), a special display variation pattern command for effecting the effect of the special figure 2 is set in parallel with the suggestive effect (FIG. ). 294, S5391). When this display variation pattern command is set, the variation effect (an effect having a lower effect effect than the suggestive effect) shown in FIG. 286 is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is time to end the suggestive effect (S14302: Yes), it is set to OFF.

<Regarding control processing in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the control processing in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the eleventh embodiment, the timer interrupt processing 11 (see S14182 of FIG. 290) is used instead of the command determination processing 4 (see S4182 of FIG. 152) of the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described fourth embodiment. ) Instead of the big hit related process (see S4502 of FIG. 64), the big hit related process 11 (see S4592 of FIG. 291), instead of the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 of FIG. 156), the small hit related process 11 (see FIG. 292 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) is replaced with the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160), and special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) is performed. Instead of (see S4110 in FIG. 59), the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed, suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293), and suggestion mode setting process (S5392 in FIG. 295). (Refer to) added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, the command determination processing 11 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 11 (S14182). When the command determination process 11 (S14182) determines that the hit related command is received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4215 in contrast to the command determination process (see S4182 of FIG. 152) in the above-described fourth embodiment. (S4215: No) is different in that the hit related process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the hit related process (S4216). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the hit related process 11 executed in S14574 is a big hit instead of the big hit related process (see S4502 of FIG. 64) executed when the big hit related command is received, in contrast to the hit related process (S4216) described above. The difference is that the small hit related process 11 (S14574 of FIG. 292) is executed in place of the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 of FIG. 156) of the related process 11 (S4592 of FIG. 291), and other elements are different. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 291, the hit related process 11 (S14574) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 11 (see S14182 of FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the eleventh embodiment. The jackpot-related process 11 (see S4592 of FIG. 291) executed in (see) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process 11 (S4592). The jackpot-related processing 11 (S4592) differs from the jackpot-related processing (S4502 of FIG. 64) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that the content of the processing executed when the jackpot start command is received is changed. , Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Detailed description of elements having the same processing content will be omitted.

When the jackpot-related processing 11 (S4592) is executed, it is first determined whether a jackpot start command is received (S4601), and when it is determined that a jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), a jackpot start for display is started. A command is set (S4602), then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area (history of suggestive effect executed during the RUSH game period) Information) is cleared (S4692), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), the same processing of S4603 to S4613 as the jackpot-related processing (S4502 of FIG. 64) described above is executed and The process ends.

That is, in the jackpot-related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process of initializing each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the jackpot start is executed. As a result, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably prevent the presentation mode during the RUSH game from being set based on the information regarding the past RUSH game.

In the eleventh embodiment, since the RUSH game is configured to be executed during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the big hit game are at the same timing, so that the RUSH game is being executed. The initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored in is used as the start timing of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a determination means for determining that the RUSH game is finished is provided, and the determination means causes the RUSH game. The configuration may be such that the initialization process of each parameter is executed when it is determined that the process has been completed. Further, since the condition in which the RUSH game can be executed is that the latent state is set as the game state, it is determined that the determination result of the game state determination means for determining the current game state is not the latent state. In this case, the initialization process of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game may be executed.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the initialization processing of each parameter is executed every time one RUSH game ends, but the RUSH game is executed again within a predetermined period after the jackpot game. In this case, the information (value) of each parameter may be continuously updated. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the RUSH game a plurality of times. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, an elapsed period determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined period (for example, a period until the special figure lottery is executed 30 times) is provided, and the elapsed period determination means is provided. The parameter initialization process may be executed when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the hit related process 11 (S14574) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 11 (see S14182 of FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment. The small hit related process 11 (see S14574 of FIG. 292) executed in (see) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process 11 (S14574). The small hit related process 11 (S14574) is different from the small hit related process 4 (S4574 of FIG. 156) in the above-described fourth embodiment in the content of the process executed when the small hit start command is received. The same processing is executed except for the above points. Detailed description of elements having the same processing content will be omitted.

When the small hit related process 11 (S14574) is executed, it is first determined whether a small hit start command is received (S4701), and when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S4701: Yes), the above The same processing of S4741 to S4753 as the small hit related processing 4 of the fourth embodiment (see S4574 of FIG. 156) is executed, and in the processing of S4753, it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If yes (S4753: Yes), the suggested effect setting process is executed (S14001). After that, a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4701, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S4701: No), the same small hit related process 4 (see S4574 of FIG. 156) of the above-described fourth embodiment as S4703. The process of S4710 is executed and this process is finished.

The suggestive effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestive effect. That is, the above-described process of S4753 serves as a determination unit that determines whether or not the execution condition for executing the suggested effect is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is set to a predetermined value (a value that is a multiple of 10) as the execution condition for executing the suggestive effect, but other elements are used as the execution conditions. It may be set, for example, the execution condition may be set such that the number of special figure 2 lottery executed while the latent probability state is set becomes a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 20). good. In this case, the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb may be read and determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is set based on the number of small hits won during the latent probability state (during the RUSH game period), the small hit related process 11 (S14574) sets the suggestion effect. Although it is configured to include the process (S14001), when the execution conditions of the suggestive effect are changed, the corresponding process may include the suggestive effect setting process. Further, when a plurality of suggestion effect execution conditions are set, when one suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied, another suggestion effect execution condition is within a predetermined period (for example, the number of lottery numbers in special figure 2 is 5 times). It is advisable to provide restriction means for restricting the fact that the condition is satisfied within a period until reaching the time point or for 30 seconds. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a plurality of different suggestive effect execution conditions from being satisfied in a short period of time and frequent occurrence of the suggestive effect. In addition, when the above-mentioned restriction means is provided, it is advisable to change the effect mode of the suggested effect based on the order in which the plurality of suggested effect execution conditions are established. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the execution of the suggestive effect, but also in which suggestive effect execution condition is satisfied, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. ..

In addition, as the execution condition of the suggestive effect executed during the RUSH game period, the cumulative value of the number of lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2), the number of small wins, and the number of missed wins is set to a predetermined value set in advance. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be satisfied when the number of times reaches, a continuous winning condition that can be satisfied when the number of times of consecutively winning out of the numbers reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Furthermore, an operation condition that is satisfied when the player performs a specific operation on the operable means (frame button 22) may be provided. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to positively operate the operation means during the RUSH game period, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased. In addition, the execution condition of the suggestive effect may be established based on the game result other than the special figure 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period, for example, the number of balls entered into the entrance is predetermined. When the number reaches the maximum number, or when the number of stored memories reaches the upper limit, the number of balls (so-called over-winning balls) entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 reaches a predetermined number. In this case, the execution condition of the suggestive effect may be established.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggested effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestive effect setting process, a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestive effect executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

When the suggestion effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH game period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether the time is longer than that (S14102). Here, in the 11th embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the processing of S14102, when it is determined that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the timing of ending the suggestion effect, and a new suggestion effect is not executed. Is configured as follows.

In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect time is fixed at 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive effect may be executed for a plurality of effect times. In this case, the effect time of the suggested effect to be executed first is determined, then it is determined whether or not the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined effect time, and execution of the suggested effect based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of. Further, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggestive effect may be set from the effect times that can be executed within the remaining period.

In the process of S14102, when it is determined that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), there is no period during which the suggested effect can be executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is read (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ( Information indicating the type of suggestive effect that has already been executed during the current RUSH game period) is read (S14104), and then the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery that is currently being stored and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b is shown. Information (information indicating the type of jackpot) is acquired (S14105).

Next, based on each information acquired (read out) in the processing of S14103 to S14105, the suggestion production selection table 222jb is used to select the production mode of the suggestion production to be executed this time (S14106), and the selected suggestion production mode is set. A corresponding display suggestive effect command is set (S14107). Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes are set for the suggestion effect mode selected in the process of S14106, and in the process of S14107, the effect mode corresponding to the selected suggestion effect mode. A display suggestive effect command corresponding to one effect mode is set from among a plurality of effect modes.

Then, when the process of S14107 is completed, information indicating the suggestive effect mode selected this time is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this process ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) will be described. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195). This special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of special figure 2, and is the variable figure setting for special figure 2 of the above-described fourth embodiment. In addition to the processing of processing 4 (S5175 of FIG. 160), the processing of setting the variation pattern command for display when the suggestion effect is being executed and the processing of setting the suggestion mode during the RUSH game period are added. Are different, and otherwise the same. The same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is executed, first, the same steps S5301 to S5351 as the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175 of FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above are executed. Execute the process. Then, when the process of S5351 is finished, it is determined whether or not the in-proposed suggestion flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391). In the processing of S5391, when it is determined that the suggestive effect flag 223jd is not set to on (set to off), that is, when it is determined that the suggestive effect is not being executed (S5391: No), The process of S5352 which is the same as the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175 of FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above is executed, and the process proceeds to S5392.

On the other hand, in the process of S5391, if it is determined that the suggesting effect flag 223jd is set to ON (S5391: Yes), based on the extracted variation pattern and latent mode, the second special symbol (special figure The latent probability variation pattern command in the display suggestive effect of 2) is set (S5394), and the process proceeds to S5393. That is, in the latent state, the variation effect of the special figure 2 is set to be different depending on whether the suggestive effect is executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestive effect is not executed, the variable effect of the special figure 2 is executed by using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 285(a)). On the other hand, when the suggestive effect is being executed, in order to emphasize the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is executed by using most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the special part using the remaining part is used. The variation effect of FIG. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286(a)).

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the most noticeable effect in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the display command set in the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be different based on the presence/absence of execution of the suggestive effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The same display command is set, and the display command received by the display control device 114 and the area for displaying the variable effect of the special figure 2 are changed based on the presence/absence of execution of the suggested effect. Is also good. As a result, when only the display position (the size of the display mode) is changed without changing the content of the change effect of the special figure 2 according to the presence or absence of the suggested effect, the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased. It can be reduced easily.

When the process of S5352 is completed, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, and then the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is incremented by 1, and this process is terminated. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery being executed (changing) using the special figure 2 changing effect this time is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is not executed when the suggesting effect flag 223jd is set to ON. That is, during the period in which the effect that suggests the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 by the suggestion effect is being executed, the lottery result (big hit content) of the special figure 1 is suggested by using the variable effect of the special figure 2. The effect is configured not to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from occurring at the same time, and to provide an incomprehensible effect to the player.

Next, the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be described with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 (Indicated information) is read (S14202), and the present effect mode is selected using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja based on the counter value read in the process of S14201 and the stored information read in the process of S14202 (S14203). ). Then, the display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected effect mode is set (S14204), and the present process ends.

With this configuration, when setting the variation effect of the special figure 2, it is possible to set the suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 by using the variation effect of the special figure 2. It is possible to inform (suggest) a plurality of information (lottery result of special figure 2, lottery result of special figure 1) to the player with one fluctuating effect, and the player can watch the fluctuating effect. it can. In the eleventh embodiment, as a suggestion mode using the variation effect of the special figure 2, a suggestion mode in which the display mode of the effect design 813 is varied (see FIG. 285(b)) and a display mode of the third symbol are used. Although the stop display mode for indicating the result of the special drawing 2 lottery such as the variable mode (see FIG. 285(b)) is used, the invention is not limited to this, and the variable mode is used to set the suggest mode. You may do it. For example, when the third symbol is variably displayed, it is possible to suggest the lottery result of the special drawing 1 by changing the background color, or to change the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the effect symbol 813 is stored. By doing so, the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 may be suggested. Further, not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 provided on the pachinko machine 10 can be used to suggest the lottery result of the special map 1. You may do it. Specifically, the sound output during the variable display of Toku-zu 2 is changed, or the light emission mode of the lamp is changed during the variable display of Toku-zu 2 is changed. By doing so, the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 may be suggested.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160), a suggestion effect is given to the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that a process for determining whether or not is being executed is added, and the other is the same.

The above-mentioned liquid crystal effect execution management processing (see S4110 in FIG. 59) will be briefly described. In order to constantly determine the effect period of each effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the update period of the effect being executed. The process is executed. Specifically, the timekeeping means (timer) included in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the set production scenario (production scenario being executed) are constantly managed, and the production being executed is terminated. Processing for managing the timing and the timing of switching the presentation mode is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect flag 223jd is set to ON (S14301), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S14301: (Yes), it is determined whether or not the present time is the end timing of the suggested effect (S14302). If it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is the suggestion production end timing (S14302: Yes), the suggestion production in progress flag 223jd is set to OFF (S14303), other liquid crystal production execution management is executed (S14304), and this process is executed. finish.

The process of S14302 will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed for 5 seconds, and the elapsed time from the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed is determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Is measured by using the clocking means included in, and the determination is performed based on the measurement result. It should be noted that other than the above-described processing, any processing can be used as long as it is possible to determine the end timing of the suggestive effect, and for example, a value corresponding to 5 seconds for the counting means capable of counting the effect time when the suggestive effect is executed. May be set, and the end timing of the suggestive effect may be determined when the value of the counting means becomes a value indicating the lapse of 5 seconds.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is executed during the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special figure that is changing 1 Since the suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the lottery result to the player can be executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 in advance. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In addition, since the above-mentioned suggestive effect is executed by using the variable effect for showing the lottery result of special figure 2, the lottery result of special figure 2 and the lottery result of special figure 1 are produced as one effect. Since it is possible to make a suggestion (notification) to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

In addition, since the suggestion effect is executed when the lottery result of the special drawing 2 satisfies the predetermined condition, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the special drawing 2 lottery. In the eleventh embodiment, since the suggestion effect is more likely to be executed as the lottery of the special figure 2 is executed, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to play the game.

That is, in the eleventh embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) executed during the change of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a suggestion for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol 1. It is configured to have both the role of establishing the execution condition of the effect and the role of executing the suggestion effect. As a result, the player can be interested in whether the suggestive effect using the variable display of special figure 2 is executed or whether the suggestive effect different from the variable display of special figure 2 is executed.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as the effect mode of the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect (strong suggestion) in which the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the special figure 1 are predicted rather than the suggestive effect. Since at least the suggestive effect (weak suggestion) that is difficult to perform is settable, it is possible to focus on the effect mode of the suggestive effect. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the suggestive effect can be executed a plurality of times during one special figure fluctuation period, and the lottery result of the special figure 1 is predicted as the number of executions of the suggestive effect increases. The suggestion effect (strong suggestion) that is easy to perform is configured to be easily set. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so that more suggestive effects are executed.

In the eleventh embodiment, the suggestive effect described above is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery during the change of special figure 1, but it is sufficient to use a plurality of lotteries that can be simultaneously executed. , For example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed based on the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the change of the special symbol 1, or the special symbol (first symbol) during the change of the normal symbol (second symbol). The suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol may be executed based on the lottery. Further, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 may be configured to execute the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 based on the ordinary symbol lottery during the change at the same time.

In the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is configured to suggest the contents of the jackpot won based on the Toku-zu 2 lottery during the jackpot variation in which the jackpot is won. You may comprise so that the residual fluctuation time of special figure 1 may also be suggested. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, when one of the special symbols has been won as a jackpot (including during a change in jackpot winning), the jackpot is won by lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured not to. Therefore, since the special figure 1 lottery executed during the change of special figure 1 jackpot does not win the jackpot, even if the lottery result (big hit content) of special figure 1 is suggested, the jackpot game different from the suggested content It is possible to suppress a situation in which (a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special figure 2 lottery) is executed.

In the eleventh embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the change of the special drawing 1 that is won in the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit is not limited to this. The suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the change of special figure 1 which has not been won. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the changing special map 1 is a big hit by executing the suggestion effect.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, like the above-described fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the variation of the jackpot, and the lottery of special figure 2 is performed. Is configured to be easily executed. Thereby, since the special figure 2 lottery can be executed more during the special figure 1 jackpot change, it is possible to easily provide the suggestive effect to the player. Further, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is easy to win the small hit different from the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, and thus it is possible to more easily execute the special figure 2 lottery.

In the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot game of special figure 1 is started with a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the big hit variation of special figure 1. Although it is configured to be executed until, the suggestive effect may be executed in a period other than this, for example, by applying the technique of the present embodiment to the above-described sixth embodiment, the jackpot game of special figure 1 It may be configured to suggest the lottery result of the special map 1 (the contents of the big hit game and the game state set after the end of the big hit game) based on the special map 2 lottery executed in the inside.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery only during the big hit variation of the special figure 1, but the invention is not limited to this, and the deviation variation of the special figure 1 can be performed. The suggestion effect may be executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the drawing. Thereby, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to entertain the player as to whether or not the changing special figure 1 lottery is a big hit.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, an example is shown in which a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the change of the special figure 1 is added to the fourth embodiment. However, the suggestive effect used in the eleventh embodiment may be added to the other embodiments described above, for example, may be added to the third embodiment. ..

In the third embodiment, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is set after the jackpot is finished, and a predetermined transition condition (jackpot winning, If the small win, the fourth lottery of special symbols) is established, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) is a predetermined end condition (fourth lottery result of special symbols) Is displayed) is set).

In the case of executing the above-mentioned suggestive effect in the third embodiment configured as described above, the special figure 1 of the special figure 1 is selected based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the change of the special figure 1 in which the latent state is set. It may be configured to execute not only the lottery result, but also a suggestive effect that suggests a trigger (transition condition) in which the latent state is set.

That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions for setting the latent probability state are defined, and the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the established transition condition. The specific contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 112, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. Further, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment described above, until the special figure 1 variation in which the condition for shifting to the latent probability state is satisfied is stopped and displayed, the player shifts to the latent state state this time. It was impossible to tell what was the trigger.

Therefore, by adding the suggestive effect described with reference to the eleventh embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, it is executed during the change in Toku-zu 1 where the condition for transition to the latent probability state is satisfied. It is possible to suggest the changing lottery result of special map 1 based on the special map 2 lottery. With such a configuration, the player can predict the timing of transition to the latent probability state this time by looking at the suggested effect to be executed.

That is, it is possible to set, as the game state, a first game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, latent probability state) and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state (for example, probability variation state) When the transition condition of is satisfied, it is configured to be able to transition from the second game state to the first game state, and the special figure 2 variation executed during the special figure 1 variation when the first gaming state is set Based on (lottery), it is preferable to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player what the transition condition was that the first game state this time was to be set.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, by executing the lottery of the special figure 2 during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 (during the RUSH game period), the small hit game (RUSH game) is frequently executed, and the big hit game is executed. In a configuration in which a prize ball can be given to a player without executing, the lottery result of the special map 1 based on the lottery of the special map 2 (the big hit game content, the game state after the big hit game, the change of the special map 1) Since the suggestion effect suggesting the remaining fluctuation time) is configured to be executable, the special figure 2 lottery during the RUSH game period can have a plurality of meanings. Specifically, the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is expected to win a small hit to obtain a prize ball, while the lottery result of the changing special drawing 1 is advantageous to the player. It is possible to expect that the suggestive effect that suggests that is executed.

When configured in this way, for example, if one of the plurality of meanings of the special drawing 2 lottery has a meaning that is disadvantageous to the player, the other is controlled to have a meaning that is advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery, it is possible to set a small hit (long hit A) and a small hit (short hit B) whose change time is shorter than the small hit A. To do. In this case, in order to execute a lot of small hit games within a limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select a lottery result having a short variation time as the lottery result of the special map 2. That is, when the small hit A is won, the lottery result is more disadvantageous to the player than when the small hit B is won.

In such a case, it is preferable that the small hit A is more likely to be executed than the small hit B is won. As a result, in the case of the special drawing 2 lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to easily provide another added value (indication effect), so that the player's willingness to play is significantly reduced. Can be suppressed.

In addition to the above examples, for example, a first small hit game that is advantageous to the player as a game mode of a small hit game executed when a small hit is won, and a player rather than the first small hit game. To make it possible to set a second small hitting game in which a disadvantageous small hitting game is executed, and to easily provide another added value (indicative effect) when a small hitting game that is disadvantageous to the player is won It may be configured to be able to.

In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased), the reserved ball number command is issued. Has been described above from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load on the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball inlet 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the vertical direction or L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in various motions or changed in addition to the symbols. It also includes an effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, one display means (third symbol display device 81) executes the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player, but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the main symbol displayed on the player and the display means for displaying the sub symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game is executed aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 is executed. Although the left-handed game aiming at is executed, the target area of the game board 13 may be changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, while in the normal state. The right-handed game may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that games in different game states can be executed while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used as the operating means that the player can operate, but other than that. May be used, a lever-shaped operation means capable of discriminating that the player has operated by tilting left and right or front and back, and that the player has operated by touching or approaching It is also possible to use touch-sensitive operation means that can be discriminated, or wireless operation means that can discriminate that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the voice lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute the process, the process is not limited to this and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. The processing may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, one control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to a pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, two kinds of special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed in accordance with a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (variation) is independently performed are described. However, the game characteristics described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and by operating the stop button, the symbol is stopped and confirmed. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information is provided, which is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. As an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying a symbol after variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits are possible during a specific special map change)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Is dynamically displayed, a dynamic display period setting unit that sets a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display unit, and the second determination can be executed. Second determining means, second displaying means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determining means, and the first displaying means for indicating the specific first determining result on the first displaying means. When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing the above, a first game state in which the second judgment is more easily executed than the first judgment, and the first judgment is executed more than the second judgment. A second game state for facilitating, and a game state setting means capable of setting the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set in a dynamic display period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the gaming machine is executed during the advantageous gaming state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there has been a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a game property of granting the privilege to the player during the period when the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine A1, since it is possible to set the first game state in which the second determination is easily executed during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, the length of the period in which the first game state is set. Can be preset. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination unit is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination unit determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be easily played, the first gaming state can be made a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the desire to set the first game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering. A third ball entering means different from the means, a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the second ball entering means, and a ball entering the second ball entering means is more difficult than the first state There is a variable means that can be changed to two states, and the first determination means is based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second determination means is configured to be executable, and the second determination means is configured to be able to perform the second determination based on a game ball entering the third ball entering means. In the second game state, The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be easily changed to the first state rather than the first game state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first game state than in the second game state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game in which the ball is inserted into the third ball entering means, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

In the gaming machine A3, it is possible to set a high probability that the probability of being determined to be the specific first determination result by the first determination after the first privilege game is executed is set to a high probability that is higher than a normal probability. The game state setting means has a setting means, and when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the game state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A4, wherein the first gaming state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the first identification information is displayed dynamically as the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination. Since the first game state is set based on the start, the process until the first game state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the player to continue playing the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is set to have less privilege that can be given to the player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the second privilege game, since the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that in the first privilege game, the privilege is excessively given to the player during the period when the first game state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving.

<Characteristic B group> (Game contents and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination And a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means, and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the second display means. Second dynamic display means to be displayed, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. When is displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game, it is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. Period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. A game machine B1 characterized by having a performance determining means for determining a performance corresponding to, and a performance executing means for executing the performance determined by the performance determining means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the gaming machine is executed during the advantageous gaming state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there has been a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a game property of granting the privilege to the player during the period when the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means is determined by the effect determining means, the first identifying information Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment for predicting future games based on the effect performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determination means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characteristic game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first privilege game are executed. It is possible to predict the content and Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination There is a game state setting means that can be set, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine B3, which executes the first gaming state during a dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is to be executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. A game aiming at the second privilege game can be performed using the game. Further, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that it is possible to enthusiastically play the game during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a normal first privilege game as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and a small first privilege game with less privilege to be given to the player than the normal first privilege game. And a first privilege game setting means capable of setting, and the first dynamic display period determination means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. The effect determination means, when the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means and the second period is determined by the period determination means, and when the bonus game execution means performs the normal first A gaming machine B4, which determines an effect in the same manner as when one privilege game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determination means is a combination in which the advantageous states of the two elements for determining the effect content are different, the effect determination means provides the same aspect. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of future game situations. Then, depending on the progress of the first gaming state, it is possible to gradually improve the accuracy of prediction. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of prediction to the player and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determination means determines a specific effect when the privilege game execution means executes the normal first privilege game and the period determination means determines the second period. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are produced. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (Inrush notification)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination And a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the second determination means, and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the second display means. Second dynamic display means to be displayed, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when is displayed, a first game state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first game state. A second game state that allows the first determination to be executed more easily than the second determination, and a game state setting means that can set the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Notification timing determining means for determining notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of identification information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, according to the result of the lottery, the advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is finished, and the player is informed that the game state has changed. There has been proposed a game machine that executes the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute the effect to inform the player based on the setting of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the advantageous game state is set. However, even if the new lottery cannot be executed, the fact that the gaming state is set is notified and the player feels uncomfortable. was there. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first game state in which the second determination is easily executed is set can be determined based on the dynamic display situation of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the notification timing at which the first game state is set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine C2, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on a result of the first determination by the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first game state set based on the determination result of the first determination unit that is executed separately from the second determination unit is set, notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time can be combined to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The gaming machine C2 has a dynamic display discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is the dynamic When it is determined by the dynamic display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first game state is set. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, when the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, the fact that the first gaming state has been set is immediately notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first gaming state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determination means ends the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determination means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, even if the first game state is set, during the period when the second determination cannot be executed, the fact that the first game state has been set is not notified, and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed despite being notified that the first game state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that you can.

The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determination means for determining a period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends until the first gaming state ends, and based on the determination result by the remaining period determination means. A gaming machine C5 having a notification determination means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not the notification timing is determined based on the period during which the second determination can be executed in the first gaming state, so that, for example, the second determination is made in the first gaming state. When the executable period has become extremely short, it is possible not to notify the player that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first game state from ending in a short period of time and giving the player uncomfortable feeling even though the player is notified that the first game state has been set. There is an effect that you can.

<Characteristic D group> (Simultaneous fluctuation destroys big hits, interrupts small hits)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the information for a predetermined period, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. Two display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means to be executed and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the contents of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is the first (1) The second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, based on the privilege contents set by the second privilege game type setting device, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display device is performed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having stop control means for executing stop control.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming property (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are simultaneously executed. In the gaming machine having such a gaming property, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games that are being executed are forcibly missed. There has been proposed a method of terminating automatically (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machines forcibly stop and display other lottery regardless of the type of privilege game, the lottery result for executing the privilege game is stopped and displayed. There was a problem of giving a person an unpleasant feeling. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set the stop control content for the first dynamic display according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means performs a forced stop control to stop and display the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The gaming machine D2 is capable of executing a temporary stop control for stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, it is possible to set whether the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the excessive privilege from being given to the player, and the privilege game to which the large privilege is given is canceled by executing the privilege game to which the small privilege is given. This has the effect of suppressing this.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and the stop is performed. The game machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display unit, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. This has the effect of suppressing this.

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination Until the first identification information indicating the result is displayed on the first display means, the second privilege game type setting means has an invalidating means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination unit is the specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation unit during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and it is possible to provide an excessive privilege to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determining means. A gaming machine D5, which makes it easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type, it is possible to suppress an excessive privilege from being given to the player even if a large number of second privilege games are executed. There is.

<Other thoughts 1> (You can set the latent state before and after the big hit game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. And a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second determination means, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second judgment is more easily executed than the first judgment. There is a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to be performed than the second determination, and the game state setting means has a predetermined first When the condition is satisfied, the first game state is set in the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game ends. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the gaming machine is executed during the advantageous gaming state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there has been a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a game property of granting the privilege to the player during the period when the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing when the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privilege game, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Small winning RUSH during symbol confirmation period)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Stop display means for stopping and displaying, stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for stopping and displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and second determination capable of executing the second determination. Means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than in the first determination, and a first game state is more likely to be executed than in the second determination. 2 game states, and has a game state setting means capable of setting, the game state setting means, in the stop display period in which the first identification information is stop-displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, A gaming machine G1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery executed after the advantageous gaming state is set, that is, the gaming machine is executed during the advantageous gaming state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which was set was long. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state is set differs depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there has been a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a game property of granting the privilege to the player during the period when the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. .. Also, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game contents after the first game state is finished are given to the player in advance. Can be grasped. With such a configuration, for example, when the first game state is set in the state where the specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first game state ends, It is possible to know in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period having a different length based on the determination result of the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determining means, so the first privilege game is determined based on the determination result of the first determining means. Is executed and the length of the stop display period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, the stop display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, a longer stop display than in cases other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized by facilitating setting of a period.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than in the case other than the specific first determination result. Since it becomes easier to set, it is possible to execute the first gaming state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means makes it possible to set stop display periods having different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be varied even when the specific first determination result is obtained. Therefore, even in the case of the specific first determination result, since the period in which the first game state is set is different, the player is motivated to play the game so that the longer first game state is set. The effect is that it can be done.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that

The gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be easily played, the first gaming state can be made a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the desire to set the first game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (Small hit RUSH when big hit wins when time saving ends change)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The privilege to execute the first privilege game when displayed, and the privilege to execute the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In a gaming machine having a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to be performed than in the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. There is a game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and the game state setting means can execute the second determination when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during a first period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next jackpot is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, whether or not the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set is set by only one lottery result, so the process until the advantageous game state is set is set for the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to play games while entertaining. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the first gaming state can be set for the first period when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be surely executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the first gaming state ends without the second determination being executed even though the first gaming state has been set, which gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. No games can be offered.

The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of the first determination executed by the first determining means, and the first determination number measured by the first determination number measuring means. The gaming machine H2, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, and therefore the first determination by the first determination means is executed. By doing so, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the state where the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when a game is played for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result, and the gaming machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the game state setting means sets the first game state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means is When the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during the second period when the second determination is difficult to execute. A gaming machine H4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only for the second period when the second determination is difficult to execute. As a result, the first game state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, the game state setting means is shorter than the first period when the first game state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, and the first period is shorter than the first period. A gaming machine H5, wherein the first gaming state is set for a third period longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, if only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set for the third period, so that the first predetermined condition is set. There is an effect that a game can be motivated first to establish the second predetermined condition.

<Characteristic I group> (Small hit RUSH rush expectancy can be changed by shortening the time)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The privilege to execute the first privilege game when displayed, and the privilege to execute the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. In a gaming machine having a different gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means can set a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easier to set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period. There is a third game state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third game state is set, and the third game state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that setting the first period by the period setting means makes it easier to set the first gaming state than setting the second period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game in which a plurality of game states are gradually shifted according to a lottery result is set, and an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player can be set (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine aims to set the advantageous game state because the advantageous game state is easily set in the game state in which the advantageous game state is easily set (semi-advantageous game state). There was a problem that the contents of the game performed as a result became monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine I1, by varying the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is easily set, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state is set in the state in which the third gaming state is set. Can be different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the setting contents of the third game state, and the player is motivated to play the game process until the first game state is set. The effect is that it can be done.

The gaming machine I1 has progress determination means for determining the progress of the predetermined period set by the third game state period setting means, and the game state setting means uses the progress determination means to pass the predetermined period. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of the first setting condition that is satisfied when the determination is made.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period for which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the game state setting means is in a state where the third game state is set, and when the first determination result by the first determination means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine I3, which sets the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of a second setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when the third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be established, that is, the third gaming state for a long time is set, During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, different transition conditions can be aimed at in order to set the first game state according to the set third game state period, and thus the game motivation depends on the length of the set third game state period. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determining means determines whether the third period has elapsed. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized by having condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the elapse of the third period is determined, the condition setting means does not satisfy the first setting condition, and thus the first gaming state is set. Can be surely restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

Any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4 has a first game state period setting means for setting a period during which the first game state is set, and the first game state period setting means, by the progress determination means, A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined that the first period has elapsed and the period in which the first gaming state is set is longer than that determined when the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that it is determined that the second period has elapsed, a period that is longer than the determination that the second period has elapsed, the first period. The game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination capable of executing the second determination Means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than in the first determination, and a first game state is more likely to be executed than in the second determination. 2 game states, a game state setting means capable of setting, an advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means, and an advantageous period setting means A first ending condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has elapsed, or ending means that ends the first gaming state when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, A gaming machine J1 having an end restricting means for restricting the establishment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is established.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game in which a plurality of game states are gradually shifted according to a lottery result is set, and an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player can be set (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the advantageous game state is provided to the player for a predetermined period because the period during which the advantageous game state is set is variable based on the result of the lottery executed during the advantageous game state. However, there is a problem that the advantageous game state ends in a short period of time even though the advantageous game state is set with difficulty, and the motivation for the game is lowered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the end restriction means can restrict the establishment of the second end condition. Therefore, during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, the first game state can be continuously set, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the game state setting means can set an advantageous first game state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first game state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, it is possible to set the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state by the gaming state setting means, which is advantageous by the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that a game can be motivated so that the first game state is set.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is met when the result of the first determination by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so the first determination means There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the determination result of 1 becomes the specific first determination result.

In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a gaming machine J4 having a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means informs that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, there is a determination means for determining that the satisfaction condition of the second end condition is satisfied during the period when the advantageous first game state is set, and the determination means of the determination means A gaming machine J5, characterized in that it has a second notifying means for notifying that the satisfaction condition of the second ending condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the fact that the satisfaction condition of the second ending condition is satisfied during the period when the advantageous first gaming state is set is the second notification means. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first game state set this time is not the advantageous first game state but the disadvantageous first game state, whether or not the first game state has ended It can be discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first game state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (In the time saving state, a period is provided in which the number of times saving is not subtracted)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Is displayed dynamically for a predetermined first period, and the first determination information is displayed on the first display unit, the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed. , A game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state for a predetermined period, a period measuring means for measuring a period of the advantageous game state set by the game state setting means, and the predetermined period by the period measuring means Termination means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when a period is measured, and measurement limiting means for limiting measurement of the advantageous gaming state period by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied, A gaming machine K1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the end of the bonus game according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set the period until the number of times of lottery reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set. There was a problem that it was possible to easily predict the period of time. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine K1, since it is possible to limit the measurement of the predetermined period in which the advantageous game state is set by the measurement limiting means, it is possible to extend the period in which the advantageous game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means are provided. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the first privilege game is executed and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, And a configuration in which the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the predetermined limiting condition is satisfied when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, the second determination information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result of is the specific second determination result, the predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state in which the measurement of the period of the advantageous game state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting unit displays the advantageous game state of the period measuring unit while the second dynamic display unit is executing the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine K3 characterized by limiting measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means. Is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous game state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, it is provided with an informing means for informing that the measurement limiting means limits the measurement of the period of the advantageous game state by the period measuring means. Gaming machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means informs that the measurement of the period is limited by the measurement limiting means, so that the player can easily understand the game. There is an effect that can be provided.

<Feature L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The privilege to execute the first privilege game when displayed, and the privilege to execute the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In a gaming machine having a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to be performed than in the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. A game state and a game state setting means capable of setting the game state, the game state setting means, when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first game state is set to, and the first condition is set based on that the second condition is satisfied, as compared to the case where the first game state is set based on the first condition being satisfied. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that setting the gaming state makes it easier to continue the first gaming state.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game in which a plurality of game states are gradually shifted according to a lottery result is set, and an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to the player can be set (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the end condition of the advantageous game state is single, it is not possible to make different the ease of continuation of the set advantageous game state, and to the player in the advantageous game state. There is a problem that the game provided by the user becomes monotonous and the motivation for the game decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine L1, the first game state can be set by the game state setting means, because it is possible to set the first game state that is easily set continuously and the first game state that is difficult to set continuously. Even after being played, there is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the first game state continues for a long period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the first game state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set, The predetermined end is set when the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than when the first game state is set based on the first condition being satisfied. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be met.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied, rather than the case where the first game state is set based on the first condition being satisfied. When the gaming state is set, it is possible to make it more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, the player can set the first game state that is easy to end and the first game state that is hard to end, and thus the first game state that is hard to end even after the first game state is set. There is an effect that the game can be played while the player desires that the game state is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. Based on that, when the first gaming state is set, the first ending condition is not satisfied, the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second condition is met, the first ending condition is not met, and thus it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game to establish the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the judgment result of the first judging means is the specific first judgment result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the second ending condition is set when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. Thereby, when the first gaming state is finished based on the satisfaction of the second ending condition, the bonus game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first game state ends, the player can be provided with a privilege, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, a gaming machine L5 having a notifying means for notifying that the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first ending condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristics M group> (Set a fall invalid period with high accuracy of special maps)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and first determination specific to the first display means When the first identification information for displaying the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game, and when the predetermined setting condition is satisfied, the first judging means executes the privilege game. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting the advantageous game state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal game state, the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means. In the state where is set, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, and the establishment of the predetermined transition condition are restricted. A game machine M1 having a transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, according to the result of the lottery, it is configured to set an advantageous game state (probability variation state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the end of the bonus game, and in addition, a predetermined lottery ( There has been proposed a gaming machine that ends the advantageous gaming state when winning the falling lottery). (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-152). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the fact that the winning/non-winning lottery of the game is executed, the player always has a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state ends. There was a problem that it was not possible to play games with confidence. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the player can play the game with peace of mind and the interest of the gaming is improved.

According to the gaming machine M1, it is possible to limit the transition of the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state by the transition condition limiting means, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. You can set a non-playing period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means 1 has a special judgment means capable of executing a special judgment different from the one judgment, and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the judgment result by the special judgment means is a specific special judgment result. Characteristic gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, a special determination is executed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and when the determination result is a specific special determination result, a predetermined transition condition is set. Is established. Therefore, the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, so that there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second privilege game different from the first privilege game is executed. A second privilege game executing means, and a variable ball entering means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter inside when the second privilege game executing means executes the second privilege game. , A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entering means, and a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entering means. The game machine M3, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the game machine M3 passes.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots a game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area, and a first variable control which is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A game machine M4 characterized by being capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, the variable control means causes the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area, and the second variable control in which it hardly passes through. Since it is possible to set and, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots a game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M4, the gaming machine M5 has an informing means for informing that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M4, the notification means informs that the second variable control is set, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player. is there.

<Characteristic N group> (Game selection of small hit game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and first determination specific to the first display means When the first identification information for displaying the result is displayed, a bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game, and a determination result of the first determination means different from the specific first determination result When it is the second determination result of No. 2, the second privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, and the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means. In this case, the game ball has a variable ball entering means that is variably operated to an open state in which the ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entering means, Provided with a specific area through which the game ball can pass inside the variable ball means, and having a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine N1 characterized in that.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There has been proposed a gaming machine that can set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player when a privilege game that is advantageous is executed and a game ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game (for example, 2013-152). Since the advantageous game state is set by the game ball passing through the specific area, the above-described gaming machine has been paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine N1, since a disadvantageous gaming state is set when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gaming property.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area, and a first variable control which is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A game machine N2, which is capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the variable control means makes it easier for the ball entering the variable ball entering means to pass through the specific region, and the first variable control. Since either the second variable control that is difficult to pass through the specific area is set, when the game ball is shot according to the variable control content to be executed, the launched game ball can pass through the specific area. You can have different sex. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment in which the player decides whether or not to shoot the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has an informing means capable of informing that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the notification means informs that the second variable control is set. Therefore, when the player decides whether to shoot a game ball or not. You can provide helpful information to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment in which the player decides whether or not to shoot the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machine N1 to the gaming machine N3, it has a detecting means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and an invalidating means for invalidating the detection result by the detecting means, and the invalidating means. The game machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result of the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result of the detection means can be invalidated by the invalidation means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, a measuring unit for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detecting unit and a measuring result of the measuring unit during the period in which the detecting result by the detecting unit is invalidated by the invalidating unit. A gaming machine N5, comprising: a measurement result informing means for informing information based on the information.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N4, the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means is notified by the measurement result notifying means during the period in which the detection result of the detecting means is invalid, and thus is invalid The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Characteristic O group> (End of time saving based on the condition that is satisfied first among the multiple conditions)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. And a privilege to execute the first privilege game when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, a second game state in which the first determination is less likely to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the gaming machine, the game machine has an end means for ending the first game state when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied. The game machine is characterized in that the ending means ends the first game state based on the one of the first ending condition and the second ending condition that is satisfied first. O1.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, the game machine which can change a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol simultaneously was proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the change start timing of the special symbol, so the advantageous game state is set to the maximum. However, there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and the first gaming state is finished when any of the ending conditions is finished. , There is an effect that the first gaming state can be surely ended.

In the gaming machine O1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means are provided. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means is for displaying a specific second determination result on the second display means. A second privilege game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and the second motion is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Is configured to be able to dynamically display the second identification information by the dynamic display means, and the first termination condition is satisfied by the execution of the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed. As a result, the game machine O2 is characterized in that the second ending condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is based on the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, the gaming machine is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Even so, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately ended.

In the gaming machine O2, a first execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the first determining means, a second execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the second determining means, and the first execution count measuring means. And the number of executions of the first determining means as a first period in which the first game state is continuously set, and a summing means for adding the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means A first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times by adding the number of times of execution of the second determination means, and execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means is the predetermined number of times. And an execution determination unit that determines that the second determination is performed by the second determination unit in a state where the state determination unit determines that the dynamic display is being performed. In this case, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied. Therefore, the first game state is appropriately performed. There is an effect that can be ended.

In the gaming machine O3, the first end condition is that the number of executions of the first determining means is the number of executions of the first determining means after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determining means reaches the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine O4, which is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to a case where the number of times is greater than a predetermined number is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times is finished. Since the condition is satisfied until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means exceeds the predetermined number of times is executed, the predetermined first period can be set to be long. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for indicating the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means are provided. When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information and the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result are stopped and displayed on the third display means, a third benefit is given. A third privilege game executing means for executing a game, and the third determining means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is executed more easily than if it is.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O4, when the first gaming state is set, the gaming machine O5 has a third determination means that is easily executed, so that the first gaming state is set. By increasing the period of time during which the third determination unit is executed, the period of time during which the third determining unit can be easily executed can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic P group> (Special figure changes during the opening period of jackpot game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The first privilege game is executed based on the display, and the second privilege game is displayed based on the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result being displayed on the second display means. A game machine having a privilege game executing means for executing the above, wherein the second determining means is configured to perform the second determination during a specific first period of the period in which the first privilege game is being executed. And a second period different from the first period is not executed in the second determination, the gaming machine P1.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine, by fluctuating a plurality of special symbols at the same time, was intended to allow the player to efficiently perform a lottery, but if one of the special symbols is won, the other special symbol Since it is configured such that the fluctuation of No. is not executed, there is a problem that the willingness to play decreases when the lottery efficiency decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine, which suppresses a decrease in willingness to play, and improves the interest of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be executed while the first privilege game is being executed, it is possible to make the player execute more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the game efficiency can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first state, and the first privilege. When the game is executed, it has a variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball entrance means to the first state and the second state, and the variable ball entrance means is in the second state by the variable control means. A gaming machine P2, characterized in that the period that is changed to is the first period.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second determination is executed by using the period during which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entering means in the period during which the first privilege game is executed, so that the game result of the first privilege game can be understood. The second determination can be executed without making it difficult. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game machine to the player.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means gives the player more advantage as the second determination result than the advantageous second determination result and the advantageous second privilege game executed based on the advantageous second determination result. It is possible to determine a disadvantageous second determination result in which a disadvantageous second privilege game is executed, and the determination result of the second determination means executed during the first privilege game is the advantageous second determination. A gaming machine P3, characterized by having a discrimination limiting means for limiting the result.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second determination executed during the first privilege game is limited by the determination limiting means so that the determination result does not become the advantageous second determination result, and thus the bonus is excessively given to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine P3, the gaming machine P3 has variable limiting means for limiting the variable means from changing the second state to the first state during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Gaming machine P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to restrict the variable limit device from changing the first privilege game to the first condition while the disadvantageous second privilege game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination device. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game that is difficult to understand from being provided by a plurality of bonus games being executed in duplicate.

In the gaming machine P4, the first privilege game is changed to the first state when the variable restriction unit restricts changing the first privilege game to the first state. Characteristic game machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine P4, even if the first privilege game is restricted from being changed to the first state by the variable restricting means, the first condition of the first privilege game is changed. Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, while the second period of the first privilege game is set, there is an effect that the game can be enthusiastically performed until the end of the second determination.

In any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entering means to be in the second state when the first privilege game is executed, and at least The gaming machine P6, wherein the first period is a period from the execution of the first privilege game until the variable ball entering means enters the first state.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effect is achieved. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first privilege game is executed, the second judgment can be continuously executed from the period before the first privilege game is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed during the first privilege game without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the gaming machine P6, the second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first period as the first privilege game are different. A first privilege game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first privilege games, and the privilege game granting means grants the first privilege game set by the first privilege game setting means. The first privilege game setting means is at least longer than the period for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A normal first privilege game in which a first period is set, and a shortened first privilege game in which the first period is set shorter than a period in which identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine P7, which can be set.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the normal first bonus game is set by the first bonus game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the shortened first When the bonus game is set, it can be configured such that it is difficult to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period. Therefore, the player can be interested in the first period during which the player is unlikely to be interested in the bonus game, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early. effective.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7 has a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means for a predetermined period, and the first privilege game is executed. In this case, the gaming machine P8 has a forced stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means that is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the first privilege game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is provided during the first period. Can be started easily. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the privilege game granting means indicates that the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. In the state where the identification information for stop is displayed, the first privilege game is given when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the second determination means determines the determination of the first determination means. The period from when the identification information for indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific region is also within the first period, and the second period A gaming machine P9, which is for performing a determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special electric starting port)
The determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the predetermined identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. On the basis of the fact, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, and the first state from the first state where the game ball is hard to enter based on the privilege game being executed by the privilege game execution means, to the first state thereof. The variable ball entering means for changing the game ball into a second state in which it is easier to enter, and the variable game entering means to the second state by the privilege game executing means after the predetermined identification information is displayed. A gaming machine Pa1 having special game executing means capable of executing a special game for changing the variable ball entering means to the second state before being changed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is intended to allow the player to efficiently perform a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but in any game, unless the player wins the lottery, the player There is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced because the privilege game cannot be given. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable game entering means can be changed to the second state by the special game executing means before the variable game entering means is changed to the second state by the privilege game executing means. It is possible to provide a player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Pa1, a ball entering means capable of entering a ball, and a first state in which the ball is difficult to enter due to the ball entering the ball entering means, a game ball more than the first state. Has a second variable ball entering means for changing to a second state in which it is easy to enter, and the special game executing means is based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second variable ball entering means. A gaming machine Pa2, which is for executing a special game.

According to the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa1. That is, since the special game is executed by inserting the game ball into the second variable ball entering means, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The gaming machine Pa2 has a special game setting means for setting the contents of the special game executed by the special game executing means, and the special game setting means allows the game ball to enter the second variable ball entering means. After that, one special game is set from a plurality of special games in which the preparation period until the variable ball entering means is changed to the second state is set. Pa3.

According to the gaming machine Pa3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are achieved. That is, depending on the special game to be executed, the preparation period from the game ball entering the second variable ball entering means to the variable ball entering means changing to the second state can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that a special game with a short preparation period will be executed.

The gaming machine Pa3 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the special game setting means is set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine Pa4, which makes it easier to set a privilege game having a shorter preparation period when the first game state is set than when the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa3. That is, when the first game state is set, a short preparation period is easily set, so that a concentrated special game can be executed during the period when the first game state is set, and The effect is that the interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being the specific determination result. ..

According to the game machine Pa5, in addition to the effect of the game machine Pa4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the presence or absence of the privilege game and the setting of the game state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, so that there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. ..

In the gaming machine Pa5, a standby period setting means for setting a standby period from the display of the predetermined determination result on the display means until the privilege game is executed, and the special game setting means, The gaming machine Pa6 is characterized in that, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game having the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Pa5. That is, when the first game state is set by the game state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period shorter than the standby period is set is set, so that the special game can be surely executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature Q group> (P group derivative)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The first privilege game is executed based on the display, and the second privilege game is displayed based on the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result being displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing the above, the second determination means makes the second determination during a specific first period of the period in which the first privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine Q1 that is executed, and the second determination that is different from the first period is not executed.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and a plurality of special symbols can be changed at the same time (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is intended to allow the player to efficiently perform a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but in any game, unless the player wins the lottery, the player There is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced because the privilege game cannot be given. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

<Characteristic R group> (V winning rate is changed according to the variation time of the special figure.)
A discriminating means for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. A dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a bonus game is awarded based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means. Based on the bonus game granting means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball enters. It has a variable ball entering means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state where it is easy to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball that entered the variable ball entering means can pass, and the award game is given. The means provides the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and a first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a longer second period, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set rather than when the first period is set. A gaming machine R1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a special game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is executed even when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, , JP 2012-192067 A). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privilege game to be executed with a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the passing rate of the ball is variable, the lottery result has a great influence on the subsequent game contents, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine R1, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area can be made different depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, and therefore the determination result of the determination means alone is used. Instead, it is possible to let the player gaze until the timing at which the identification information for indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, a period group storage unit having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting unit are defined, and a plurality of period group storage units stored in the period group storage unit. Period group selecting means for selecting one period group from the period group, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selecting means. One dynamic display period is set from a plurality of dynamic display periods present, and the period group storage means corresponds to the first period group and the second period rather than the first period group. A gaming machine R2, characterized in that it has at least a second period group including a large number of the dynamic display periods.

The gaming machine R2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1. That is, when the second period group in which the second period is easily set is set, the second period can be set more easily than in the case where the first period group is set. While the group is set, there is an effect that the player can play an advantageous game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine R2 has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state as a game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the period group selecting means sets the game state setting. A gaming machine R3, characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by means.

The gaming machine R3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2. That is, since the period group is set according to the game state, once the second period group which is advantageous to the player is set, the second state group is set until the different game state is set by the game state setting means. The two-period group will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting means, in a state where the second period group is set, the first determination result and the second determination result as the determination result by the determining means. A gaming machine R4, characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on that the identification information indicating a different third determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine R4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R3. That is, the dynamic display period set when the determination result of the determination means is the third determination result allows the player to know that the currently set period group is the second period group which is advantageous to the player. Can be made. Therefore, even if the determination result of the determination means is a determination result that the privilege game cannot be executed, it is possible to make the player interested and improve the interest of the game.

<Feature S group> (R derived)
A discriminating means for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. A dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a bonus game is awarded based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means. Based on the bonus game granting means and the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result as a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means being stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball enters. It has a variable ball entering means that can be changed from a difficult first state to a second state where it is easy to enter, and a specific area through which the game ball that entered the variable ball entering means can pass, and the award game is given. The means provides the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and a first period as the dynamic display period. It is possible to set a longer second period, and it is easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the second period is set rather than when the first period is set. A gaming machine S1 characterized by.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a special game is executed when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and a privilege game is executed even when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, , JP 2012-192067 A). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine enables the privilege game to be executed with a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Since the passing rate of the ball is variable, the lottery result has a great influence on the subsequent game contents, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

<Characteristic T group> (1 type 2 types 3 times loop)
Discriminating means for discriminating when the discriminating condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the discrimination for indicating the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a first game state, after the privilege game granted by the privilege game granting means is finished, A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is more likely to be given than in the first game state, and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than in the first game state; As a result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, the identification information indicating the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is set. A possible period setting means, and the privilege game granting means grants the privilege game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine is in the second game state. When the privilege game is given in the state where is set, either the first game state or the second game state is set by the game state setting means after the bonus game is finished, rather than the third game state. A gaming machine T1 characterized by being easily set.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a specific game is executed, and if the ball passes through the specific region during the specific game, the privilege game is also executed, and the ball passes through the specific region. There has been proposed a gaming machine in which an easy gaming state can be set (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is capable of executing the privilege game with a plurality of triggers, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, but the gaming state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area is There is a problem that the game may be ended immediately and the interest in the game may decrease. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having an improved interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine T1, when the second game state is set, the third game state is not set when the next privilege game is given, so that the privilege game can be easily given one after another. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in a state where the bonus game is easily awarded.

In the gaming machine T1, the game state setting means performs the privilege game in the state in which the first game state is set more than in the case where the privilege game is awarded in the state in which the second game state is set. The gaming machine T2, in which the award is given, which makes it easier to set the third gaming state after the bonus game is finished.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first game state is set, the third game state is likely to be set based on the bonus game being given, so that the game state advantageous to the player is set for a long time. Can be suppressed. Therefore, a proper game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the game state setting means sets the first privilege game given based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result among the privilege games, and the specific area. The second bonus game given based on the passage of the game ball and the game state set according to the type of the bonus game given by the bonus game granting means, among the second bonus games. Gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the game state to be set can be made different depending on whether the first privilege game is awarded or the second privilege game is awarded, which type of privilege game is executed for the player. You can get interested in what was done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3, in the state where the second game state is set, the game state setting means is more advantageous to the player when the second privilege game is given than when the first privilege game is given. A gaming machine T4 characterized by facilitating setting of various gaming states.

According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the second privilege game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, in the state where the first game state is set, the game state setting means is a player who is given the first privilege game rather than the second privilege game. A gaming machine T5 characterized by facilitating setting of a gaming state advantageous to.

The gaming machine T5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T3 or T4. That is, when the first gaming state is set, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the first privilege game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature U group> (T group derivative)
Discrimination means for discriminating when the discrimination condition is satisfied, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, a privilege game granting unit that grants a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and a first game state and a first game state more than the first game state after the privilege game given by the privilege game granting unit are finished. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the privilege game is easily given and a third game state in which the privilege game is less likely to be given than in the first game state, and a result of discrimination by the discriminating means. As the identification information indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, from the first state where the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state where the game ball is easy to enter. And a variable ball entrance means that can be changed, and a specific area through which the game ball that entered the variable ball entrance means can pass, and the privilege game granting means, when the game ball passes through the specific area Also, the privilege game is also given, and the game state setting means, when the privilege game is given in a state where the second game state is set, the first game after the bonus game is finished. A gaming machine U1 characterized by facilitating setting of either the state or the second gaming state.

<Characteristic V group> (small hit RUSH without simultaneous fluctuation)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first judging means capable of executing a first judgment based on a ball entering the first ball entering means, and a judgment result by the first judging means are shown. The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for displaying on the display means, the second ball entering means into which the game ball can enter, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Acquiring means for acquiring information based on the second determining means, second determining means capable of performing the second determining based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and a second determining means for indicating a determination result by the second determining means. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second determination means is executed; To a second bonus game giving means for giving execution of a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; And restriction means for restricting entry of the game ball, and at least cancellation of the restriction means can be executed when the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A game machine V1 comprising: a first privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a ball easily enters a specific entrance after a bonus game is finished according to a lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). Gazette). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the player can get tired of the game early because he can always easily enter the ball into the specific entrance when it is in the advantageous gaming state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to enter a ball into the ball entering means only while the special game or the special special game is given, so that the special game or special special game is given. There is an effect that it is possible to limit the storage in the storage means in the state where it is not in use.

In the gaming machine V1, a second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and the entry of the game ball from the first position. A variable member that can be changed to a second position that regulates the ball, and the variable member is variably controlled when the privilege game or the special privilege game is executed, The gaming machine V2, wherein the restricting means positions the variable member at the first position, and the restriction releasing means positions the variable member at the second position.

The gaming machine V2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1. That is, since it is possible to change the easiness of entering a ball into the ball entering means in accordance with the variable situation of the variable member executed in the privilege game or the special privilege game, the privilege game, or It is possible to enter the ball into the ball entering means in synchronization with the game of the special privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement during the bonus game or the special bonus game.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, it is easier to release the restriction by the restriction means by the restriction releasing means when the special privilege game is executed than when the privilege game is executed. Gaming machine V3.

The gaming machine V3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2. That is, it is possible to change the easiness of entering a ball into the ball entering means in accordance with the type of game in which the variable member is changed, so that the amusement during the bonus game or the special bonus game is improved. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine V3, the bonus game is less likely to be executed than the special bonus game, and the gaming machine V4.

The gaming machine V4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3. That is, the bonus game is less likely to be executed than the special bonus game, but it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball entering means during the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can motivate the player to execute the privilege game, and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

<Characteristic W group> (Variable ease of establishment of a plurality of game conditions depending on the role product operation pattern)
A determination unit that can perform the determination, a variable unit that is changed from the first state to the second state when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, and a variable operation content of the variable unit are set. Variable operation setting means, and variable control means for controlling the variable means based on the variable operation contents set by the variable operation setting means, wherein the variable control means is configured by the variable operation setting means. When one variable action content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the first privilege is more easily granted than the second privilege different from the first privilege. When the second variable motion content different from the first variable motion content is set by, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second privilege is more easily given than the first privilege. A gaming machine W1 characterized by the above.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) in which a specific electric auditors product can be variably operated after the bonus game is finished according to a lottery result (for example, JP 2012-217766 A). .. By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, the privilege that can be given to the player by variably operating the electric accessory is always the same, and further, by changing the variable operation content of the electric accessory, one privilege is given. Since it is only possible to set a state that is easily played and a state that is difficult to be played, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine W1, the privilege to be granted can be changed based on the content of the movable operation set by the movable operation setting means, so that the player can watch the variable state of the variable means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine W1, end condition setting means for setting a plurality of end conditions, condition determining means for determining whether the plurality of end conditions set by the end condition setting means are satisfied, and the end condition by the condition determining means. And a variable control end means for ending the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that the specific end condition is satisfied among the plurality of end conditions. A gaming machine W2, wherein when the variable control ending means ends the variable control, a special state in which the first benefit and the second benefit are easily given is set.

According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine W1. That is, when the specific end condition is satisfied, the special state is set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the specific end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the entering means, the second determining means capable of executing the second determination based on the entering of the game ball into the entering means, and the determination result by the second determining means are specific. A game machine W3, comprising: a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the second determination is made, and wherein the first privilege is one for which the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination that allows the privilege game to be executed is given as the first privilege, the player is expected to set the first variable operation content in which the first privilege is easily given. You can play while playing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W3, when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, the game ball is changed from a first state in which it is difficult to enter a ball to a second state in which it is easier to enter than in the first state. A gaming machine W4, characterized in that it has an operable variable ball entrance means, and the second benefit is for a game ball to enter the variable ball entrance means.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the privilege game is being executed, the game can be played while expecting that the second variable operation content in which the second privilege is easily given is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W5 according to any one of the gaming machines W2 to W4, wherein the ending condition setting means sets that the first privilege is granted as the specific ending condition.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is possible to allow the player to play the game eagerly while expecting the first privilege to be given so that the special state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature X group> (Through can be passed during the game)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a discriminating condition satisfying means for establishing a discriminating condition based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the discriminating condition satisfying means to make the discrimination. When the condition is satisfied, the determining means can perform the determination, the privilege game granting means for granting the privilege game based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result, and the privilege game granting means A passing means that allows the game ball to pass while the privilege game is being given, a judging means that can make a judgment based on the fact that the game ball has passed the passing means, and the judgment result is a specific judgment result. Based on the fact that the variable means is variably controlled from the first position to the second position, and when the variable means is in the second position, the game ball is inserted more than in the first position. A second ball entering means for facilitating a ball, and the discriminating condition satisfying means establishes the discriminating condition even when a game ball enters the second ball entering means. Gaming machine X1.

In the gaming machine X1, the second ball entering means is provided at a position where a ball passing through the passing means can enter.

In the gaming machine X2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Setting means, wherein the dynamic display period setting means is configured such that the sphere that has passed through the passing means can enter the second entering means, and the first period is longer than the first period. A gaming machine X3, wherein at least a difficult second period can be set.

In the gaming machine X3, the first period is longer than the second period, the gaming machine X4.

<Characteristic Y group> (Advantageous ending of public figure)
Having a determination means for performing the determination and a period determination means for determining a period for reporting the determination result by the determination means, the notification result for indicating the specific determination result is notified. Based on the gaming machine that is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, it has setting means for setting a set period until the next determination can be executed by the determination means after the advantageous state ends, and the setting is performed. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that at least a first set period and a second set period that is more advantageous to the player than the first set period are set as the period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the game gets tired early because the period until the winning game or the like which is advantageous to the player is executed becomes long. It has been demanded that the player can enjoy the game even before the winning game is executed, and suppress the problem of getting tired of the game early. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from getting tired of playing at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the advantageous state is set, it is possible to expect the player to set the second set period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early. effective.

In the gaming machine Y1, it has a first flow path through which a game ball can pass when in the advantageous state, and when the second set period is set, the first flow path is changed to the first flow path. A gaming machine Y2, characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to flow more easily than when one set period is set.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y1, when the second setting period is set, the gaming ball can easily flow down to the first flow path, and the second setting period is set. There is an effect that it can be expected to be set more.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second set period, the determination result by the next determination means that has become the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result and the advantageous state is obtained, and thus the first flow path is entered. And a gaming machine Y3, wherein the gaming ball is set during a period in which the award is likely to be granted when the gaming ball passes.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, by setting the second set period, it is possible to increase the value of the next advantageous state being set, and the advantageous state is set. This has the effect of increasing the expectation of being set.

In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, a specific ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path is possible, and at least a part of the privilege is given when the game ball enters. And a state setting means for setting a first state in which the game ball can enter the specific ball entering means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, The second set period is a period during which the game ball can reach the specific ball entering means during the period when the first state is set, and the gaming machine Y4.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the second setting period is set, so that the gaming ball can easily reach the specific ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation that the second set period will be set.

In the gaming machine Y4, a ball entering means that allows the game ball to enter the game when it is in the advantageous state, and a specific determining means that performs a specific determination based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Period determining means for determining a variable period for varying the period until the specific ball entering means is set to the first state, based on the execution of the specific determination by the specific determining means. The gaming machine Y5, wherein the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second set period is not set.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Y4, a period that is advantageous to the player is determined even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, which is advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the number of situations in which the above condition is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

<Derivation of characteristic β-group> (advantageous per regular figure at regular intervals)
The determination means for performing the determination, the period determination means for determining the period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and the notification result for notifying the specific determination result to the player based on the notification result Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state to be advantageous until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a first flow path through which a game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means, In the first flow path, the probability that the passage will be possible when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval is set to be high. Gaming machine β1.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine β1, the probability that it is possible to pass through the first flow path when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval is set to be high. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine β1, there are a ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first position for guiding the game ball to the ball entering means, and a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball entering means. A gaming machine β2 having variable means for varying, wherein the advantageous state setting means varies the varying means to the first position as the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine β2, since the advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, there is an effect that the advantageous state can be easily understood. ..

In the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball entering means when the advantageous state is set. And, when the setting of the advantageous state is canceled, the game ball rolling on a predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine β2, it is possible to make the gaming ball on the variable means interested even when the advantageous state is released, and expect to release the advantageous state. The effect is that you can have it.

In any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific area in which the game ball guided to the first flow path can enter is arranged, and the game ball can enter the specific area in the first state. Then, the state changing means is set to a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the entered state, and before the flow-down period in which the game ball flows down the first flow path is elapsed, After changing the state changing means to the first state, the first changing control is made to change to the second state, and the state changing means is changed to the first state during the period when the downflow period elapses. And a variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control and the gaming machine β4.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it can be expected that the second variable control is executed by the variable control means, and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

<Characteristic Z group> (Attacker at the bottom of Fuden)
A means for entering a game ball, a determining means for executing a determination based on the entering of the game means, and a display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determining means. And a dynamic game display means for dynamically displaying, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , A variable state that can be changed between a first state for facilitating entry of a game ball into the entry means and a second state for making entry of the game ball more difficult than the first state, and specific conditions And a variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of A specific flow path that allows the game ball that has flowed down by being guided to the variable means by being present and being changed to the second state before entering the first ball entering means, and the specific flow A special area in which a game ball flowing down the road can enter, and the privilege game execution means sets a ball entering state in which the game ball can enter the specific area until an end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Z1 for executing the privilege game.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with an improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine Z1, it is possible to make a game be expected to enter a specific flow path even for a game ball that cannot be made to enter the ball entering means by the variable means, and the game can be enjoyed. There is an effect that can improve.

The gaming machine Z1 has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period when starting the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determination means. The period is such that at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which a game ball easily enters the specific region and a disadvantageous display period in which it is difficult to enter the specific region are set. Characteristic gaming machine Z2.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Z1, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the privilege game execution means starts executing the setting of the entry state in a certain rule in the specific area based on the start of execution of the privilege game. Gaming machine Z3.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the specific area is set in the entering state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the privilege game, so that it is fair to the player. The effect is that the sex can be kept constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (production based on special figure 2 fluctuation)
A means for entering a game ball, a determining means for executing a determination based on the entering of the game means, and a display means for displaying identification information indicating the determination result of the determining means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a determination result specific to the display means. When the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, in a gaming machine having a specific ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter until an end condition is satisfied, a ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. It has a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a possible flow path, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect in the dynamic display period, wherein the effect execution means is the detection means. A game machine AA1 for performing at least a part of the effect based on a detection result by the game machine AA1.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, when notifying the lottery result, the player can have a high expectation for the lottery result by performing the effect suggesting the lottery result for a predetermined period and then notifying the player of the lottery result. A gaming machine has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the effect is executed based on the predetermined lottery result, there is a problem that the effect is likely to be constant and the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired of the game early. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the detecting means detects the game ball flowing down the flow path that allows the ball to enter the specific entering means, and at least a part of the effect executed based on the detection result is executed. As a result, not only the dynamic display of the identification information but also the effect that is being executed can be executed so as to be changed depending on the flow of the game ball, which improves the interest of the game and the player gets tired of the game early. The effect is that defects can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AA1, in the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, at least a first dynamic display period in which a game ball is set to easily enter the specific ball entering means is set. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the performance executing means executes a specific performance on the condition that the first dynamic display period is determined as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is executed under the condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined as at least one condition. Is executed, there is an effect that it can be expected that the first dynamic display period is determined.

In the gaming machine AA2, the effect producing means, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, when the game ball is not detected by the detecting means in the specific detecting period, Is a game machine AA3 characterized by executing different effects.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the gaming ball is not detected by the detection means in the specific detection period, the specific effect is produced. Is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the execution of the specific effect is wastefully performed and the degree of expectation for the specific effect is lowered.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific ball entering means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and based on the passing through the specific area, the privilege game is executed. A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that a setting for execution is executed.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the gaming ball passes through the specific area by the game ball entering the specific ball entering means, and the special game is executed. There is an effect that it can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA4, a variable means that can be varied between a first state that facilitates entry of a game ball into the entry means and a second state that makes entry of the game ball more difficult than the first state. And variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and the flow path includes the variable means. Is guided to the variable means by being in the first state, and is configured to be able to flow in the flowing down game ball by being changed to the second state before entering the first ball entering means. A gaming machine AA5 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine AA5, in addition to the effect of the game machine AA4, it is expected that the game balls that have not entered the ball entering means will flow into the flow path because the variable means is changed. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA5, the specific ball entering means is configured so that a gaming ball that flows down the flow path and enters a ball can easily pass through the specific area. ..

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA5, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for passing through a specific area by flowing down the flow path, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics AB group> (The non-prize ball from Poden can be awarded to Toden)
A first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a first judging means capable of executing a first judgment based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the first judging means. First identification information for indicating the determination result, first dynamic display means capable of being dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, first state in which a game ball can enter, and the first state When the first variable ball entering means that can be changed to a second state where it is difficult to enter the ball and the result of the determination by the first determining means is a specific determination result, the first variable ball entering means is set to the second variable ball entering means. First variable control means for changing the state to the first state, a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the first variable ball entering means, and a second ball for allowing a game ball to enter Ball inputting means, second discriminating means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and second discrimination for showing the discrimination result by the second discriminating means. Second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying information on the display means for a predetermined period, and a first state in which the game ball can enter, which is provided in the first guide path, and more than the first state The second variable ball entering means which is variable to the second state where it is difficult to enter the ball, and the second variable ball entering means when the result of the judgment by the second judging means is a specific judgment result. A game having a second variable control means for changing from a state to the first state, wherein the first variable ball entering means does not enter the second variable ball entering means, and the first guidance A game machine AB1 characterized in that a game ball flowing down a road can enter the ball.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variation display is executed for a predetermined period based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening and the first symbol and the winning of the playing ball into the second starting winning opening There is a second symbol whose variable display is executed on the basis of a predetermined period, and each symbol can be varied at the same time. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit) is obtained as the lottery result for the second symbol, a small privilege game (for example, a small hit game) that can give a small privilege to the player. Some are configured to be executed, and a game state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a game state in which the lottery is difficult to be executed can be set. (For example, JP2015-39398A).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by varying the length of the variation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easily executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute, and as a result. Since the game state in which the small privilege game is easily executed and the game state in which the small privilege game is difficult to be set are set, for example, in a state where the lottery for the second symbol is easy to be performed, the small privilege game is given to the player. There is a problem that it is not possible to make detailed settings such as changing the amount of privilege to be played, which reduces the interest of the game. The object is to solve the problems and the like illustrated above.

According to the gaming machine AB, the number of game balls reaching the first variable ball entering means can be varied according to the situation of the second variable means, so that the number of balls reaching the first variable ball entering means can be changed to the first number. It becomes possible to make adjustments according to the control contents of the two variable means. Therefore, the amount of privilege given to the player in the game of opening the first variable ball entering means can be adjusted, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. A dynamic display period setting means capable of setting the dynamic display period from different periods, wherein the dynamic display period setting means sets the first game state by the game state setting means. In the gaming machine AB2, it is easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second game state is set.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be changed according to the set game state. Furthermore, when the first gaming state is set, it becomes easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, the period during which the ball cannot enter the second variable ball entering means can be lengthened, so that the ball can easily reach the first variable ball entering means and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable ball entering means has at least an opening into which a game ball can enter and an opening/closing lid member that opens and closes the opening, and the opening/closing lid member opens the opening. In a state where the part is closed, the upper surface of the opening/closing lid member is configured to form a part of the first guide path, and the dynamic display period setting means is the first state by the game state setting means. A gaming machine AB3, which facilitates setting a dynamic display period longer than a passage time for a game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening/closing lid member when the gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set, it is possible to reliably reach the first variable ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB2 or AB3, there is a variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern which is variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is in the game state. When the first game state is set by the setting means, a variable pattern is set in which the second variable ball entering means is in the second state for a longer period than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine AB4 characterized by being a thing.

The gaming machine AB4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB2 or AB3. That is, when the first game state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period during which the second variable ball entering means is in the second state is set longer than when the second game state is set, It is possible to make one gaming state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Special map 1 lottery results are suggested based on special map 2 lottery during fluctuation of special map 1)
A first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the first discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the first identification information. A second dynamic display for dynamically displaying a first display means to be displayed, a second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination, and second identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the second discrimination means for a predetermined period. Means, second display means on which the second identification information is displayed, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means. A privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game and executing the second privilege game on the basis that the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means. , Suggesting the discrimination result of the first discriminating means based on the discrimination of the second discriminating means being performed while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A game machine AC1 characterized by having a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect for.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, the game machine which can change a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol simultaneously was proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-12907). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine executes a variable effect dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol only in order to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute the variable effect, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery will be independent, and both special symbol lottery will be motivated There was a problem that the willingness to try fell. Further, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem that the player is intelligibly notified of the lottery result of each special symbol. In addition, since an independent variable effect is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem that an effect without a sense of unity is executed. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide a gaming machine in which the enjoyment of the game is further improved by providing the player with a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is suggested based on the discrimination of the second discrimination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect for this is executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to grasp the determination result of the first determination means in advance and to let the player perform the determination of the second determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AC1, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine AC2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AC1. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result, there is an effect that the effect effect of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC2, from the time when the first determination means determines that the result is the specific first determination result until the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine AC3, characterized in that the gaming machine AC3 has limiting means for limiting the determination result of the second determining means to be the specific second determining result.

The gaming machine AC3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the restriction means restricts the determination by the second determination means to be the specific second determination result. It is possible to suppress the execution of a privilege game different from the content of the suggestive effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the reliability of the suggestive effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect using a display mode of the second identification information.

The gaming machine AC4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed by using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the determination result of the second determination means by only looking at the display mode of the second identification information, and It is possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, the player pays attention to the second identification information, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, a totalizing means for totaling the determination results of the second determining means, and a condition satisfaction determining means for determining whether the execution condition is satisfied based on the determination results totaled by the totalizing means. The gaming machine AC5, wherein the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the condition satisfaction determining means determines that the execution condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine AC5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4. That is, the discrimination results of the second discriminating means are totaled, and the suggestion effect is executed when the totalized results satisfy the execution condition, so that the player is eager to play the game in order to satisfy the execution condition. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, there is a production mode setting means for setting the production mode of the suggestive production executed by the suggestive production execution means, and the production mode setting means includes the first suggestive mode and the first suggestive mode. A gaming machine AC6, which is capable of setting a second suggestion mode that suggests the determination result of the first determination means in a way that is difficult to understand, rather than the one suggestion mode.

The gaming machine AC6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5. That is, an easy-to-understand suggestive effect and a difficult-to-understand suggestive effect are executed according to the effect modes set by the effect mode setting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the determination result of the first determination unit from being easily grasped by one suggestive effect. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be motivated to execute the suggestive effect a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine AC6, the number-of-times measuring means for measuring the number of times of execution of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means is provided, and the effect mode setting means executes the suggestive effect measured by the number of times measuring means. The gaming machine AC7 is characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times larger than the predetermined number of times than when the number of times is a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC6, the following effects are produced. That is, as the number of times the suggestive effect is executed is increased, the suggestive effect that is easy for the player to understand is executed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to motivate the player to perform the suggestive effect a plurality of times.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine γ1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (eg, an operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine γ2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There is one in which an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a determination means for performing determination, and a period determination means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determination means, and specifies The setting is made until the next determination by the determination means becomes executable after the advantageous state becomes advantageous to the player based on the notification of the notification result for indicating the determination result. A setting means for setting a period is provided, and the setting period is such that at least a first setting period and a second setting period that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting period are set.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, which has a first flow path through which a game ball can pass in the advantageous state, and the second setting period is set. In such a case, the game ball is more likely to flow down to the first flow path than when the first set period is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the determination result by the next determination means that is in the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result during the second setting period. The advantageous state allows the game ball to pass through the first flow path so that the privilege is easily given to the game ball.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in which the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is arranged at a position where the gaming ball can enter. The specific entry means to which at least a part of the privilege is given, the first state in which the game ball can enter the particular entry means, and the second state in which the entry is more difficult than the first state And a state setting means for setting, and the second setting period is a period during which the game ball can reach the specific ball entering means during the period in which the first state is set. It is something that
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the specific determination result is provided, which has determination means for performing determination and period determination means for determining a period for notifying the determination result by the determination means. Based on the notification of the notification result for indicating the advantageous state for the player, after the advantageous state is finished, the setting period until the next determination can be performed by the determination means is set A setting means is provided, and at least the first setting period and the second setting period that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting period are set in the setting period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, when in the advantageous state, the game ball has a first passage through which the game ball can pass, and when the second setting period is set, the first setting period is changed to the first passage. The game ball is configured to flow more easily than the case where is set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, during the second setting period, the game ball passes through the first flow path because the determination result by the determination unit next to the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result and the advantageous state is obtained. By doing so, it is set during the period in which the privilege is easily granted.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific ball entering means which is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path is provided, and at least a part of the privilege is given by the game ball entering the ball, and the specific ball entering means. The game ball has a first state in which the ball can enter, and a state setting means for setting a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, and the second setting period includes the second state. In the period in which one state is set, the game ball can reach the specific ball entering means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
S306 First determination means
S308 game state setting means
S504 First dynamic display period setting means
S508 First dynamic display means
S905 Second determination means
S1205 Second dynamic display period setting means
S1209 Second dynamic display means
S5203 notification timing determination means

Claims (1)

First determining means capable of executing the first determination,
First display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means,
First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means,
First dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means,
Second determining means capable of executing the second determination,
Second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means;
Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means,
Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means,
When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A game machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for displaying is displayed.
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. When,
When the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a notification for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. A gaming machine , comprising: a notification timing determining means for determining a notification timing for notifying an aspect .